35^  tn 


Charles  Josselyn 


V 


\: 


SUGGESTION 

Its  Law  and  Application 


OR 


THE   PRINCIPLE  AND    PRACTICE 
OF  PSYCHO-THERAPEUTICS 


CHARLES  F.  WINBIGLER.  Ph.M. 


SECOND  EOmON 


Greaves  Publishing  Company 
New  York 


.eiULOGY 
UBRARY 


.>ClAi-<0  •»<J?St.--'*XM.r/->*v  , 


Copyright,  1909, 

by 

Charles  F.  Winbigler. 


International  Copyright,  1909, 

by 

Charles  F.  Winbigler. 


The  Carnahan   Press 
Washington,  D.  C. 


Dedicated  . 

TO 

All  Who  Love  the  Truth  and  Desire 

TO  Know  the  Truth  So  That 

They  May  be  Made  Free 

BY  the  Truth. 


615841 


TABLE  OF  CONTENTS  AND  ANALYSIS. 


PART  I. 
Suggestion:  Its  Law. 

CHAPTER  I. 
What  it  is— 

Section  i.     Definition 13 

Section  2,     Classification  14 

1.  Ordinary   14 

2.  Hypnotic    14 

3.  Direct  14 

4.  Indirect  15 

5.  Auto-hypnotic  15 

6.  Post-hypnotic   15 

7.  Larvated  16 

8.  Auto-  16 

9.  Hetero-  16 

10.  Sensory 17 

1 1.  Psychical  17 

12.  Imaginary   17 

13.  Narcotic    18 

14.  Mental   18 

15.  Verbal   19 

CHAPTER  II. 
The  relations  of  suggestion — 

1.  To  the  conscious  mind 20 

(a)  In  child  culture 24 

(b)  In  education  27 

(c)  In  ordinary  life 33 

(d)  In  morals 36 

(e)  In  spiritual  life 45 

CHAPTER  III. 
The  relations  of  suggestion — 

2.  To  the  subconscious  mind 53 

CHAPTER  IV. 

The  relations  of  suggestion — 

3.  To  hypnotism 64 

Section  I.    Objections  64 

Section  2.    Dangers 78 

3 


CHAPTER  V. 
The  relations  of  suggestion — 

4.    To  extraordinary  phenomena 82 

Section  i.     Dreams    86 

Section  2.     Telepathy   loi 

Section  3.     Clairvoyance   114 

Section  4.     Marvelous  cures  120 

Section  5.     Genius 131 

Section  6.     Special   and   remarkable  religious 

movements    I37 

Section  7.     Spiritism 147 

Section  8.     Hallucinations  and  delusions 150 

CHAPTER  VI. 

The  law  of  suggestion 156 

CHAPTER  VH. 
Conditions — 

1.  Of  the  operator 164 

A,  Positive 165 

B,  Good  168 

C,  Tactful  169 

D,  Sympathetic  and  patient 171 

E,  Definite  176 

2.  Of  the  subject 178 

A,  Passive 179 

B,  Receptive  181 

C,  Willing 182 

D,  Desirous  185 

E,  Helpful   186 

CHAPTER  VHI. 

The  physiology  of  suggestion 189 

CHAPTER  IX. 

The  psychology  of  suggestion 206 

1.  Characteristics  of  the  hypnotic  and  allied  states  218 

2.  Suggestion  without  hypnotism   221 

CHAPTER  X. 

The  philosophy  and  sphere  of  suggestion 233 

CHAPTER  XI. 

The  subconscious  mind , 246 

(a)  What  it  is 247 

(b)  What  it  does 258 

(c)  How  controlled  259 

(d)  To  what  related 261 

(e)  Immortality   263 

4 


CHAPTER  XII. 

How  to  use  suggestion  265 

1.  In  hypnotism 270 

2.  In  the  waking  state 270 

3.  In  natural  sleep  271 

4.  By  method  272 

CHAPTER  XIII. 

How  to  use  suggestion  278 

1.  On  children  and  young  people 278 

(a)  In  sickness 282 

(b)  In  moral  perverseness  283 

(c)  In  moral  regeneration 290 

(d)  In  exceptional  cases  298 

CHAPTER  XIV. 

How  to  use  suggestion  298 

2.  On  adults  300 

(a)  In  sickness 300 

(b)  In  health   304 

(c)  In  conquering  and  controlling  one's  self...  306 

(d)  In  controlling  others   312 

(e)  In  counteracting  the  influence  of  others 316 

(/)  For  physical  results 324 

(g)  In  extraordinary  conditions 328 

I.  Maternal  impressions  in  utero  331 

(h)  In  ordinary  conditions 336 

(0  In  abnormal  conditions 339 

1.  Of  self   339 

2.  Of  others  340 

CHAPTER  XV. 

How  to  use  suggestion  343 

3.  Hypnotically    343 

(a)  Several    questions   considered    and    an- 

swered    344 

(b)  Some  tests  349 

(c)  Some  tests  for  subjects 354 

(d)  How  to  remove  the  influence  of  the  tests. .  359 

(e)  Who  can  be  hypnotized ?  360 

(/)   Some  methods  of  hypnotizing 362 

1.  Twelve  methods  363 

2.  Donato's  method 371 

(g)   How  to  awaken  a  subject 378 

5 


(h)  How  to  awaken  a  subject  hypnotized  by 

another 382 

(0  Hysterical  persons 382 

(/)  Number  of  treatments 383 

CHAPTER  XVI. 

1.  Auto-suggestion   385 

2.  Treatment  of  one  who  is  conscious 392 

CHAPTER  XVH. 

The  value  of  suggestion 393 

How  measured — 

1.  By  results 393 

2.  By  power  developed  and  used 394 

3.  By  far-reaching  consequences 395 

PART  II. 

The  Application  of  Suggestion ;  or,  Psycho-Therapeutics 

Section  1 401 

I.  Drug  medication  somewhat  supplanted 405 

(a)  Dr.  Bayley's  testimony 404 

(b)  All  cures  are  self-cures 409 

(c)  The  solar  plexus  and  other  nerves 416 

(d)  Blood  circulation  417 

Section  H. 

1.  Psychical  diseases  419 

2.  The  causes  of  disease 422 

3.  The  emotions  424 

Section  HI. 

I.  The  basis  of  all  cures 426 

(a)  Do  medicines  cure  ? 429 

Section  IV. 

I.  Music  as  a  therapeutic  agent 434 

Section  V. 

1.  The  cure  of  habits 441 

2.  The  relief  of  pain  444 

3.  To  slow  down  the  heart  beats 445 

4.  Obstinate  and  doubtful  cases 445 

5.  Various  and  special  troubles  and  ailments 446 

6.  Conclusion. 


FOREWORD 


There  seems  to  be  a  large  field  for  a  practical, 
suggestive  and  specific  work  on  the  principles  an- 
nounced by  and  presented  in  the  newer  phases  of 
psychology.  The  study  of  psychology  has  been  a 
part  of  the  author's  life  work  and  each  year  has 
increased  his  interest  in  and  application  of  the  prin- 
ciples which  have  been,  and  are  more  and  more 
being  advocated  and  utilized  by  men  engaged  in  the 
art  of  healing  disease,  instructing  youth  and  aiding 
in  the  development  of  mankind. 

It  has  been  the  purpose  of  the  author  to  be  con- 
servative rather  than  radical  and  to  present  in  a 
definite  way  the  principles  which  have  been  and  are 
being  utilized  for  healing  and  helping  mankind. 
These  principles  have  been  thoroughly  tested  and 
proven  by  the  author  and  others  so  that  the  reader 
and  student  may  be  assured  of  results  when  trying 
them. 

The  theory  of  psycho-therapeutics  has  been  dis- 
cussed at  some  length  and  the  practice  of  this  new 
science  has  been  somewhat  illustrated.  In  another 
book  there  will  be  discussed  the  spiritual  phases  of 

7 


the  utilization  of  these  principles  commanding  so 
much  attention  to-day. 

The  author  has  used  the  words  "conscious"  and 
"subconscious"  as  applying  to  mind,  as  the  best 
terms  in  the  present  state  of  the  nomenclature. 

The  reading  on  these  subjects  has  been  extensive 
on  the  part  of  the  author  and  his  investigations  have 
been  as  thorough  as  possible  and  he  has  incorporated 
the  results  of  these  things  in  this  work.  He  has 
repeated  many  things  in  different  ways  so  that  the 
suggestions  shall  anchor  and  may  be  reproduced 
by  the  reader  and  student. 

The  sources  of  some  statements  have  been  va- 
rious and  almost  innumerable  so  that  it  would  be 
impossible  to  cite  the  authority,  but  we  have  tried 
to  do  so  wherever  we  knew  it. 

I  want  to  record  my  indebtedness  to  the  following 
books  for  some  suggestions  used  in  this  work.  C. 
Lloyd  Tuckey's  "Treatment  by  Hypnotism  and  Sug- 
gestion;" Dr.  A.  T.  Schofield's  books;  Dr.  Joseph 
Grasset's  "Semi-Insane  and  Semi-Responsible ;"  Dr. 
J.  Milne  Bramwell's  "History,  Theory  and  Practice 
of  Hypnotism;"  Dr.  Sheldon  Leavitt's  books;  Dr. 
Thomson  J.  Hudson's  works,  and  the  works  of  Dr. 
John  D.  Quackenbos  and  W.  W.  Atkinson.  Many 
magazines,  papers  and  other  sources  have  furnished 
illustrations  and  useful  information  of  which  I  have 
availed  myself  and  quoted. 

The  subject  "Suggestion"  has  been  chosen,  as  it 
has  been  my  purpose,  to  include  various  phases   of 

8 


it,  so  that  no  limiting  or  modifying  word  could  be 
found  to  just  express  the  complete  subject  discussed. 
The  psycho-therapeutic  feature  was  the  predominat- 
ing one ;  hence  the  reason  for  the  second  part  of  the 
subject. 

The  bearing  of  this  subject  on  many  different 
branches  of  scientific  and  practical  matters,  and  be- 
cause there  seems  to  be  a  lack  of  books  which  pre- 
sent the  practical  phases  of  this  great  subject,  the 
author  feels  that  it  is  sufficient  justification  for  the 
issuance  of  this  work.  The  educational  features 
referred  to  and  the  great  variety  of  topics  discussed 
seemed  to  be  necessary  to  make  the  work  in  a  meas- 
ure complete. 

The  desire  of  the  author  is  to  be  of  service  to  his 
day  and  generation  and  in  his  attempt  to  help 
through  this  work,  toward  that  end,  he  knows  prob- 
ably better  than  any  one  else  the  imperfections  and 
failures  in  this  volume.  He  claims  no  literary  merit 
for  the  book,  but  in  a  very  definite  and  direct  man- 
ner presents  what  he  has  to  say  with  the  hope  that 
it  will  be  as  honestly  read  as  written,  and  be  as 
helpful  to  the  reader  as  the  principles  have  been  to 
the  author. 

Charles  F.  Winbigler. 


PART  1 


SUGGESTION 


CHAPTER  I. 
I.  Definition. 

The  word  suggestion  is  derived  from  the  Latin 
word  ''Suggero,"  suh-nnd^r,  and  "gero"  to  bring — 
and  therefore  means  to  bring  under.  This  is  the 
leading  idea  of  the  modern,  remedial  use  of  the 
word.  In  a  wider  sense  it  is  a  thought  or  idea 
conveyed  from  one  mind  to  another ;  a  hint ;  intima- 
tion ;  insinuation.  It  may  be  communicated  by  word, 
gesture,  look,  or  association. 

There  are  various  meanings  to  the  word  "sugges- 
tion." The  legal,  literary,  religious,  and  extraordi- 
nary vary  according  to  the  special  thought  desired 
to  be  imparted.  This  will  be  made  clearer  when  we 
discuss  the  classification.  The  word  in  recent  times 
has  taken  on  a  specific  signification.  By  some  writ- 
ers it  is  used  in  the  sense  of  hypnotism,  thus  limit- 
ing it  to  the  doctrine  that  the  control  of  hypnotized 
persons  by  the  operator  can  be  wholly  accounted  for 
as  the  result  of  suggestion.  There  is  one  thought 
running  through  the  meanings  or  definitions  of  the 


14  SUGGESTION 

word  that  we  can  legitimately  use,  which  may  be 
stated  as  follows:  Suggestion  is  a  definite  impres- 
sion made  upon  the  mind,  consciously  or  uncon- 
sciously, through  the  senses.  This  is  the  ordinary 
rule.  It  may  be  applied  in  as  many  ways  as  there 
are  means  of  reaching  the  human  intellect,  as  by 
words,  signs,  touch,  look,  thoughts,  expressed  or 
unexpressed,  etc. 

In  order  to  change  the  character  of  physical,  men- 
tal, or  spiritual  conditions  we  must  control  the 
fundamental  or  producing  cause  of  those  conditions. 
This  is  done  by  suggestion. 

2.  Classification. 

1.  Ordinary  suggestion  is  that  which  is  made 
and  used  intentionally,  consciously  or  unconsciously, 
in  life's  general  relations,  e.  g.,  in  the  home,  society, 
business,  school,  church,  etc. 

2.  Hypnotic  suggestion  is  that  which  is  made  to  a 
naturally  or  an  induced,  quiescent  mind  by  word 
written  or  oral,  by  gesture,  look  or  touch,  or  by  any 
feasible  way  of  communication.  The  subject  is  in 
an  hypnotic  state. 

Hypnosis  is  a  result  of  suggestion  and  is  a  condi- 
tion in  which  it  is  most  effectively  used.  (Further 
on  we  shall  discuss  hypnotism  more  at  length  and 
show  what  it  is,  how  it  is  induced,  and  how  it  may 
be  effectively  used.) 

3.  Direct  suggestion  is  conditioned  on  the  possi- 
bility of  two  minds   in   a   subjective    state    com- 


CLASSIFICATION  15 

municating  directly  with  each  other.  This  is  the 
secret  of  telepathic  messages,  or,  at  least,  that  which 
is  genuine  in  them  as  to  method.  Many  of  the  occult 
and  supernatural  phenomena  can  be  explained  by 
direct  suggestion ;  e.  g.,  the  inspiration  of  the 
Scriptures,  prophesy,  revelations  of  hidden  things, 
and  all  that  is  genuine  in  the  marvelous. 

4.  Indirect  suggestion  is  that  which  is  communi- 
cated by  the  conscious  mind  of  one  person,  through 
the  senses,  to  the  subconscious  mind  of  another ;  e.g., 
the  orator  carrying  his  audience  in  the  face  of  op- 
position; the  hypnotist  giving  effective  suggestions 
to  the  hypnotized  or  passive  subject. 

5.  Ante-hypnotic  suggestion  is  that  which  pre- 
pares the  way  for  hypnosis. 

6.  Post-hypnotic  suggestion  takes  effect  after  the 
subject,  who  has  been  hypnotized,  has  been  awak- 
ened or  comes  out  of  hypnotic  sleep.  It  may  take 
effect  immediately  or  sometime  after  awakening 
from  the  sleep,  depending  upon  the  suggestion ;  e.g., 
if  the  operator  says  to  one  in  hypnosis  that  he  will 
stretch  himself  when  he  awakens  and  feel  well  and 
strong  and  that  at  four  o'clock  in  the  afternoon  he 
will  feel  very  sleepy,  these  suggestions  will  be  car- 
ried out  to  the  letter.  Post-hypnotic  suggestion  is 
used  by  many  healers  and  by  some  who  practice 
suggestive  therapeutics.  Moll  says  the  longest  time 
of  the  continuance  of  post-hypnotic  suggestion,  as 
recorded  by  Liebault,  is  one  year.  It  may  continue 
longer  or  permanently.    When   the  suggestion   is 


i6  SUGGESTION 

not  carried  out  the  idea  remains  and  torments  the 
victim. 

7.  Larvated  suggestion  is  concealed  or  masked. 
The  suggestion  is  covered  or  hidden  by  using  an 
external  or  intermediary  substance  or  object.  A 
doctor  had  a  patient,  who  had  been  accustomed  to 
take  drugs  to  produce  sleep.  The  patient  had  never 
taken  morphine.  The  doctor  informed  him  that  it 
was  what  he  needed.  Going  into  a  room  back  of 
his  office  the  doctor  took  some  pop-corn  from  a  sack 
and  triturated  it  into  a  fine  powder  and  put  it  into 
some  small  powder  papers  and  told  the  patient  to 
take  one  each  evening  before  retiring  and  that  it 
would  produce  sleep.  A  few  days  elapsed  and  the 
patient  returned  and  reported  that  he  had  slept  well 
and  felt  much  better.  The  suggestion  did  the  work 
although  it  was  covered  by  a  mask  of  pop-corn. 

8.  An  auto-suggestion  is  one  which  is  given  by 
one's  conscious  mind  to  his  subconscious  mind.  It 
can  prevent  one  from  being  hypnotized  or  influ- 
enced by  others.  When  persons  who  have  been 
good  hypnotic  subjects  exercise  auto-suggestion  the 
hypnotic  spell  is  broken  and  the  power  of  the  opera- 
tor is  at  an  end.  Many  persons  have  been  and  may 
be  cured  of  sickness  and  disease  by  making  sugges- 
tions to  themselves  or  by  deepening  the  suggestion 
of  the  healer  by  this  method.  It  is  very  valuable 
as  a  protector  and  as  an  aid  to  the  development  of 
one's  character. 

9.  Hetero-suggestion  is  that  which  is  given  by 


CLASSIFICATION  17 

one  person  to  another;  it  may  be  given  verbally  or 
mentally. 

10.  Sensory  suggestion  is  that  which  may  be  given 
or  received  through  the  senses.  Subsidiary  divi- 
sions of  this  general  class  are  optical,  auditory,  tac- 
tile, olfactory,  and  gustatory.  Sensory  suggestion 
covers  the  dream-life  as  well  as  the  waking  state. 
The  ordinary  laws  of  memory  may  be  called  into  play 
under  the  influence  of  this  class  of  suggestions.  It 
is,  therefore,  a  strong  and  leading  factor  in  establish- 
ing good  or  bad  habits.  There  are  many  illustrations 
of  the  influence  of  sensory  suggestion  in  the  life. 
Works  which  discuss  the  subject  of  habits  give  mul- 
tiplied instances  both  in  the  animal  and  in  the  human 
world.  Peripheral  stimulus,  music,  odors,  tastes, 
sights  and  scenery,  by  the  law  of  association,  in  the 
waking  or  dreaming  state,  make  up  a  large  sphere  of 
mental  activity,  influence,  and  power  in  the  life. 

11.  Ideational  or  Psychial  suggestion  is  largely 
auto-suggestion  and  finds  its  manifestations  in  ex- 
traordinary phenomena,  e.  g.,  in  spiritism,  the 
mental  phases  of  hysteria,  abnormal  sexual  states, 
etc.  The  extraordinary  cases  of  devotion,  reverie, 
mysticism,  etc.,  come  under  this  head. 

12.  Imaginary  suggestion  is  one  in  which  the 
imagination  plays  a  very  large  part  and  includes 
memory  pictures;  its  abnormal  manifestations  have 
an  element  of  the  neurotic  in  it.  Some  of  the  great 
geniuses  of  the  world  have  been  controlled  very 
largely  by  this  form  of  suggestion.    Blake,  Sweden- 

2 


i8  SUGGESTION 

borg,  Goethe,  Poe,  and  many  others  are  illustrations 
of  its  power.  Robert  Louis  Stevenson  secured  much 
material  for  his  remarkable  romances  through  imag- 
inary suggestion  and  dream  representation.  Kip- 
ling saw  the  realistic  pictures  of  his  stories  first  in 
his  imagination.  Wagner  heard  in  imagination  the 
wonderful  messages  that  he  worked  out  so  remark- 
ably in  his  musical  compositions.  Connected  with 
this,  and  often  produced  by  it,  is  psycho-sexual 
hyperaesthesia.  Religious  beliefs  and  practices 
among  savages  and  semi-civilized  peoples  belong  to 
this  class,  e.  g.,  night-men,  night-women  of  western 
Asia,  and  ghosts  of  those  people. 

13.  Narcotic  suggestion  is  really  sensory,  but,  in 
order  to  classify  the  drug  features,  we  include  this, 
also,  as  a  class.  Narcotics  like  alcohol,  opium,  In- 
dian hemp,  etc.,  have  the  power  of  inducing  a  con- 
dition that  is  favorable  for  the  acceptance  of  hetero- 
and  auto-suggestion,  and  in  certain  stages  of  the 
narcotized  subject  some  of  the  finest  work  is  often 
done.  When  we  discuss  the  philosophy  of  sugges- 
tion the  reason  for  this  will  be  given.  De  Quincey, 
Coleridge,  Poe,  and  others  are  illustrations  of  what 
we  mean.  Orientals  use  Indian  hemp  to  induce  a 
condition  of  mental  reverie  and  libidinous  thoughts. 

14.  Mental  suggestion  is  that  which  is  given  with- 
out speaking.  It  may  be  called  telepathic  sugges- 
tion. The  operator  or  healer  formulates  the  sugges- 
tion in  his  mind,  and  then  repeats  it  mentally  with 
the  determination  that  the  subject  shall  be  impressed 


CLASSIFICATION  19 

and  influenced  by  it.  This  is  the  method  of  Chris- 
tian Scientists,  some  mental  healers,  metaphysi- 
cians, and  others.  Frequently  a  denial  of  the  ail- 
ment or  sickness  is  also  mentally  carried  in  the  mind 
of  the  operator,  and  the  expectant  mental  condition 
of  the  subect  and  his  receptive  attitude  brings  to  pass 
a  cure.  The  influence  of  the  mind  over  the  body  is 
admitted  by  all  psychologists  and  the  ability  of  the 
healer  to  affect  the  mental  condition  of  the  subject 
is  conceded,  so  that  mental  suggestion  is  a  possi- 
bility, and  from  unquestioned  results  has  been 
proven  a  great  practical  power.  (This  phase  of  sug- 
gestion will  be  discussed  in  another  work,  which  will 
be  issued  later  on  "Spiritual  Therapeutics"). 

15.  Verbal  suggestion  is  that  which  is  given  by 
means  of  spoken  words  and  is  the  most  common. 
It  is  also  indirect  suggestion. 


20  SUGGESTION 


CHAPTER  11. 

The  Relations  of  Suggestion. 

I.  To  the  Conscious  Mind. 

There  is  one  thing  assumed  all  the  way  through 
this  work,  namely,  that  there  is  a  conscious  and  a 
subconscious  mind,  or  a  manifestation  of  mind  in 
a  twofold  form.  Doctor  A.  T.  Schofield  uses  the 
word  unconscious  for  subconscious,  but  this  evi- 
dently means  the  same  thing.  Some  use  the  word 
subliminal  self  when  referring  to  the  extraordinary 
manifestation  of  mind.  Different  terms  are  used  by 
different  writers,  but  as  to  the  existence  of  two 
minds  or  the  manifestation  of  mind  in  a  twofold 
form  they  all  agree. 

Philosophers,  psychologists,  biologists,  and  emi- 
nent scientists,  all  accept  the  existence  of  two  things, 
namely,  force  and  consciousness  in  mind.  Con- 
sciousness, probably  by  a  process  of  evolution,  has 
moved  upward  and  outward  in  its  recognition  of 
and  adaptation  to  the  physical  universe  and 
it  has  been  the  means  of  developing  certain 
primary  organs  of  special  sense  such  as  hear- 
ing, seeing,  smelling,  tasting,  feeling,  through 
which    the    conscious    mind    receives    impressions 


THE  CONSCIOUS  MIND  21 

and  in  a  large  degree  manifests  itself.  The 
conscious  mind  is  logical  in  its  processes  of 
thought,  and  has  the  ability  to  reason  inductively 
and  deductively,  analytically  and  synthetically.  The 
conscious  mind  deliberates  on  suggestions  or  impres- 
sions, coordinates,  and  communicates  them  through 
the  cerebro-spinal  system  to  the  ganglia  of  the  sym- 
pathetic system,  and  therein  and  therefrom  im- 
presses the  subconscious  mind.  We,  therefore,  con- 
clude that  the  conscious  mind  has  the  power  of  bene- 
ficially or  adversely  affecting  the  various  organs  of 
the  body  through  the  subconscious  mind.  The  con- 
scious mind  is  the  outgrowth  of  the  subconscious  in 
order  that  man  may  adapt  himself  to  his  present 
environment  and  struggle.  The  subconscious  mind 
governs  the  vital  functions  and  organs  of  the  body 
automatically,  controls  nutrition,  receives  impres- 
sions from  the  conscious  mind,  reasons  only  deduct- 
ively and  manifests  its  power  through  emotion,  de- 
sire and  impulse.  It  possesses  perfect  memory  and 
does  its  highest  and  best  work  when  the  conscious 
mind  is  quiescent  or  passive.  It  perceives  by  intui- 
tion, exercises  at  times  kinetic  energy,  sees  without 
the  physical  eyes,  hears  without  the  physical  ears, 
possesses  absolute  characteristics  under  certain  con- 
ditions, and  has  power  to  communicate  and  receive 
messages,  thoughts,  and  impressions  telepathically, 
and  it  has  the  ability  of  existing  independently  of  the 
body.  In  the  proper  place  we  shall  discuss  these 
characteristics  of  the  subconscious  mind  and  elabo- 


22  SUGGESTION 

rate  them  so  that  these  suggestions  shall  be  made 
plain.  This  mind  is  the  real  self,  and  in  it  is  found 
the  true  measure  of  viability  and  the  possibility  of 
immortality. 

The  relation  of  suggestion  to  the  conscious  mind 
opens  up  a  large  field  of  discussion.  Using  the  word 
suggestion  in  its  widest  sense,  we  find  that  the  whole 
sphere  of  education  is  included  in  it,  and  the  possi- 
bility of  communicating  to  and  giving  impressions 
of  the  conscious  life. 

Many  things  could  be  said  in  support  of  the  theory 
of  two  minds,  and  anyone  accepting  the  monistic 
hypothesis  could  say  much  also  in  favor  of  a  two- 
fold manifestation  of  one  mind.  Under  the  subject 
of  the  philosophy  of  suggestion  our  view  will  be 
definitely  presented. 

The  phrases  "conscious  mind"  and  "subconscious 
mind"  will  be  used  to  express  the  idea  of  distinct 
spheres  of  mental  operation,  the  former  being  more 
directly  under  the  control  of  the  will  and  the  latter 
being  more  automatic  and  dependent  upon  specific 
suggestion  as  a  key  to  open  and  reveal  its  marvelous 
riches. 

The  conscious  mind  recognizes  the  external  world 
and  uses  the  five  senses  as  channels  through  which 
to  gather  knowledge  and  by  means  of  which  to 
adapt  the  person's  life  to  the  present  environment. 
It  is  dependent  upon  the  normal  functions  of  the 
nervous  system.    Its  chief  and  highest  characteris- 


THE  CONSCIOUS  MIND  23 

tics  are  accumulation  and  utilization  of  knowledge, 
reasoning  and  volition. 

The  subconscious  mind  governs  the  vital  functions 
of  the  body  automatically,  and  its  highest  powers  are 
intuition,  spiritual  perception,  emotional  life,  and 
perfect  memory.  (See  description  under  classifica- 
tion.) Its  most  remarkable  activity  and  manifesta- 
tions occur  when  the  conscious  mind  is  held  in  check 
or  is  passive.  Suggestion  is  the  power  by  which  we 
are  permitted  to  get  a  glimpse  into  the  wealth,  dyna- 
mic energy,  and  great  possibilities  of  the  subcon- 
scious mind.  This  mind  governs  and  controls  the 
vital  functions  and  makes  possible  extraordinary 
phenomena. 

The  effectiveness  of  suggestion  depends  on  its 
nature,  the  manner  in  which  it  is  given,  and  the 
mental  condition  of  the  recipient.  Therefore,  from 
an  educational  standpoint,  the  learner  ought  to  be 
in  good  physical  condition  and  the  senses  should  be 
carefully  guarded  and  the  health  maintained.  The 
blood  supply  should  be  normal  and  the  nerve  force 
should  be  unhindered.  There  should  be  a  knowledge 
of  anatomy,  physiology,  and  psychology  on  the  part 
of  the  instructor,  so  that  the  suggestions  may  be 
made  effectively  and  received. 

This  is  also  true  of  the  doctor  and  of  every  pro- 
fession in  life.  Ignorance  of  these  things  will  mili- 
tate against  the  effective  results  and  the  impressions 
to  be  produced. 

The  effect  and  benefit  of  a  suggestion  is  dependent 


24  SUGGESTION 

upon  and  limited  largely  by  the  education  of  the 
subject.  If,  for  instance,  a  speaker  before 
an  audience  should  mention  the  word  love 
or  hate  and  ask  those  present  to  state  what 
the  word  means,  there  would  be  various 
statements  made  according  to  the  previous  edu- 
cation and  experience  of  those  answering.  It  is 
probable  that  no  two  would  give  the  same  unvaried 
ideas,  if  the  descriptions  were  of  any  length,  since 
the  brain  of  each  person  is  differently  constituted. 
The  brain  centers  are  dormant  at  birth,  and  with 
the  growth  of  the  physical  structure  impressions 
are  conveyed  by  the  senses  to  the  brain  and 
these  centers  are  developed  and  awakened.  Light 
awakens  the  color  center,  sound  awakens  the  hearing 
center,  and  varying  impressions  arouse  the  conscious 
power,  which  asserts  itself,  reasons,  chooses,  elimi- 
nates, and  grows  apace  with  the  requirements  of  the 
physical  environment  and  necessities. 

Certain  tendencies  may  be  inherited  owing  to  the 
brain  formation  of  the  parents.  Suggestion  shows 
its  value  in  awakening  brain  centers  now  dormant 
and  making  it  possible  to  realize  the  best  in  life  and 
character.  It  is  possible  to  paralyze,  stimulate,  or 
inhibit  certain  brain  centers  which  lie  dormant  in  the 
child.  Hence,  a  teacher  ought  to  know  not  only 
how  to  teach,  but  what  to  teach,  and  when  to  teach 
certain  things  to  the  child. 

(a)  In  Child  Culture. 

Great  care  should  not  only  be  exercised  as  to  par- 


IN  CHILD  CULTURE  25 

entage  but  also  as  to  teachers  and  associates,  so  that 
children  should  have  a  fair  chance  for  developing 
the  best  possible  life  and  the  greatest  power  of  a 
rounded  character.  The  will  is  to  be  trained  so  that 
it  can  perform  its  highest  functions.  Knowledge 
must  be  imparted  so  that  the  basis  for  reasoning  may 
be  laid  broad  and  deep.  The  training  for  permanent 
culture  and  power  must  be  biological  and  scientific. 

The  brain  is  the  central  part  of  the  nervous  sys- 
tem and  it  is  connected  with  the  external  world  by 
thousands  of  sensory  nerves  and  manifests  its  power 
by  means  of  motor  nerves  acting  on  the  muscular 
system  or  organism. 

Dr.  R.  P.  Halleck's  "Education  of  the  Central 
Nervous  System"  is  an  excellent  work  on  the  brain 
and  the  nervous  system  and  the  methods  of  training 
them  for  the  highest  and  best  service.  Every  teacher 
and  parent  ought  to  possess  a  copy  and  study  it  for 
the  personal  benefit  that  would  result  to  themselves 
and  others. 

The  conscious  mind  has  a  definite  relation  to  and 
connection  with  the  psycho-physical  make-up  of  the 
individual.  Hence,  child-training  ought  to  follow 
natural  methods  in  which  the  minds  of  children  are 
led  out  by  example,  instruction,  personal  observa- 
tion, and  examination,  so  that  they  can  find  out  all 
about  objects,  persons,  and  things  about  them,  so 
that  the  training  of  the  senses  of  the  child  will  help 
him  to  observe  carefully  and  correctly.  These  are 
the  first  and  important  steps  in  education.    The  sen- 


2^  SUGGESTION 

sibilities  are  to  be  disciplined  and  the  will  is  to  be 
directed — not  broken. 

The  parent  and  teacher  ought  to  be  thoroughly 
equipped  to  counteract  wrong  tendencies  of  the  child 
in  his  environment,  heredity,  and  self-life,  and  to 
control  by  reasonable  instruction  and  influence  his 
conscious  mind.  The  old  methods  of  teaching  and 
training  in  school  and  home  are  very  faulty  and  anti- 
quated, and  ought  to  be  completely  supplanted  by  the 
newer,  more  natural  and  reasonable  methods.  This 
is  being  done  in  many  places,  the  results  of  which 
will  prove  the  wisdom  of  the  change. 

Suggestions  are  at  the  foundation  of  all  correct 
child  training,  and  the  analytical  study  of  the  child's 
perceptions,  associations,  emotions,  memory,  atten- 
tion, instincts,  and  volitions  will  prepare  the  teacher 
and  the  parent  to  do  the  most  effective  work  for  the 
intellectual  and  moral  development  of  the  child. 

To  have  the  child  tell  all  it  sees,  and  all  about 
what  it  sees,  will  develop  attention,  memory,  per- 
ception, and  volition.  He  is  the  best  and  most  profi- 
cient teacher  who  leads  the  little  one  and  the  student 
to  find  out  things  for  themselves. 

The  supreme  purpose  of  child  training  and  culture 
is  to  develop  a  good  character,  establish  a  potent 
and  effective  personality,  and  an  individuality  that 
will  be  adapted  to  his  surroundings,  thus  making  the 
most  of  life  and  forming  a  center  of  influence  for 
good  towards  others.  This  will  ensure  the  largest 
field  of  vision  and  the  best  life  in  the  world.    All  in- 


IN  EDUCATION  27 

struction,  knowledge,  and  training  ought  to  have 
this  in  view.  All  knowledge  in  relation  to  the  mind 
will  do  this  if  properly  directed  and  utilized. 

The  conscious  mind  enlarges  its  own  sphere  and 
power  by  use  and  development.  It  becomes  by  use 
stronger  in  its  grasp,  more  comprehensive  in  its  un- 
derstanding of  great  problems  and  questions,  and 
very  frequently  automatic  in  its  action.  Take,  for  in- 
stance, a  child  learning  to  walk.  Hesitancy  gradu- 
ally gives  way  to  steps,  steps  to  rapid  strides,  and 
strides  to  running.  By  and  by  he  walks  and  runs 
without  thinking  about  it. 

This  is  also  true  of  bicycle  riding.  It  is  through 
this  mind  that  habits  are  established  and  automatic 
activities  in  the  conscious  realm  are  inaugurated  and 
carried  on.  Consciousness  is  manifested  involun- 
tarily and  is  a  product  of  life. 

The  teacher  wields  a  great  influence  over  the  mind 
of  the  child.  This  influence  is  hypnotic  in  those 
who  are  born  teachers.  The  more  beautiful  and 
gentle  the  disposition,  the  stronger  is  the  teacher's 
power  over  the  young  mind  and  the  more  permanent 
are  the  impressions  made  upon  the  young  life.  Too 
frequently  giddy,  half-trained,  superficial  and  con- 
ceited young  people  are  installed  as  teachers  over 
children  whose  minds,  instead  of  being  impressed 
with  sterling  worth  and  nobility  of  character,  be- 
come like  their  teachers, 
(b)  In  Education  in  General, 

Education  has  to  do  primarily  with  the  conscious 


28  SUGGESTION 

mind,  and  therefore  suggestion  plays  a  leading  part 
in  imparting  information  and  in  the  development  of 
one's  mental  life.  All  studies — literature,  science, 
mathematics,  philosophy,  grammar,  ethics,  in  fact 
all  lines  of  education — are  based  on  suggestion. 

Suggestions  that  command  attention  and  produce 
the  best  results  in  the  mind  of  the  student  ought  to 
be  carefully  chosen  from  the  experience  and  consen- 
sus of  educational  works  by  the  teacher.  Many  of 
them  are  not  effective  in  developing  the  mental 
power,  and  hence  they  should  be  made  secondary. 
The  suggestions  which  arrest  psychic  aberration  and 
mental  deterioration  should  be  carefully  and  con- 
tinuously used,  and  those  which  prepare  the  way  for 
the  development  of  brain-power  and  strong  charac- 
ter should  be  utilized  for  far-reaching  consequences. 
The  physiological  effect  of  such  impressions,  which 
command  the  attention  and  hold  it,  is  that  a  greater 
flow  of  blood  is  called  to  the  nerve  centers  in  opera- 
tion and  to  the  end  organs  or  muscles  to  be  used. 

For  instance,  I  voluntarily  stop  by  the  side  of  a 
river  and  admire  the  scene  presented.  Whilst  quietly 
standing  there  a  boy  playing  on  the  bank  falls  in. 
Immediately  my  attention  is  called  to  his  danger. 
This  calls  the  blood  to  the  sensory  and  motor  centers. 
The  muscles  by  extra  nervation  and  a  new  strong 
blood  supply  prepare  me  to  leap  in  and  save  him,  or, 
if  I  cannot  swim,  I  will  call  for  help  with  all  my 
might. 

Any  educational  system  that  neglects  to  utilize  the 


IN  EDUCATION  29 

best  suggestions  will  fail  to  accomplish  the  highest 
purpose  of  education.  The  object  of  education  is 
three-fold.  First,  to  develop  mental  power  to  think, 
reason,  and  find  out  the  relations  of  things,  so  that 
one  may  be  equipped  to  do  original  work.  Second, 
to  help  produce  a  well-rounded  character.  Third,  to 
enable  one  to  impart  what  he  knows  to  others  and 
thus  become  a  helpful  factor  in  lifting  mankind  to 
a  higher  plane  of  life.  No  educational  system  is 
complete  that  omits  one  of  these  objects.  To  re- 
state this,  I  would  say  that  education  to  be  effective 
must  have  for  its  purpose  the  development  of  the 
physical  and  mental  powers,  the  formation  of  a  well- 
rounded  character,  the  adaptation  to  one's  environ- 
ment, and  the  whole  personality  realizing  its  noblest 
purposes,  highest  relationships,  and  mightiest  possi- 
bilities. 

We  see  from  this  statement  that  the  teacher's  po- 
sition and  work  are  very  responsible  and  therefore 
very  noble. 

The  accumulation  of  knowledge  depends  upon 
growth  and  activity.  Suggestion  is  a  method  and 
process  almost  illimitable  in  application  and  is  inti- 
mately related  to  the  development  of  the  mind. 

He  who  can  make  and  master  suggestions  of  vital 
importance  and  bring  others  to  do  the  same  is  edu- 
cated. Schools,  colleges,  and  universities  often 
make  parrots  of  students,  not  men  who  may  feel  the 
power  they  possess  and  wield  it  for  the  highest  and 


30  SUGGESTION 

noblest  purposes  of  life.  Originality  is  secondary, 
and  imitation  and  routine  work  are  primary. 

Much  teaching  in  the  seminaries  is  helpful, 
but  the  peculiar  methods,  some  of  them  tread- 
mill in  fashion,  lead  many  young  men  to 
feel  that  there  is  no  growth  beyond  and  no 
■knowledge  outside  worth  the  effort  to  get.  There 
are  coming  to  our  theological  schools  new  meth- 
ods and  a  spirit  of  original  inquiry  which  prophesies 
good  for  the  future.  Education  is  suggestion  in  its 
possibility  and  not  in  its  realization.  It  is  a  process, 
not  a  consummation;  and  suggestion  is  the  method 
by  which  the  process  is  carried  on  until  the  result 
shall  be  a  completed  and  perfected  being. 

Different  nations  have  been  awakened  by  forceful 
impressions,  and  many  reforms  have  been  inaugu- 
rated, by  a  supreme  thought  which  has  stirred  hearts 
and  minds  to  fresh  activity  and  growth.  Much  evo- 
lution in  the  world  has  been  preceded  by  revolution. 
Asia's  awakening  came  from  religious  suggestion  in 
the  teaching  of  Buddha.  Europe  was  stirred  into 
new  life  and  growth  by  the  acceptance  of  the  most 
suggestive  teaching  in  the  world — Christianity.  The 
renaissance  resulted  from  the  acceptance  of  literary 
knowledge  and  thought.  The  French  revolution 
largely  resulted  from  fiery  oratory  and  dire  need. 
Our  own  revolution  resulted  from  the  agitation 
concerning  liberty  and  possible  growth  toward 
political  idealism.  Some  supreme  thought  lies  be- 
hind every  educational  advance  and  moral  reform  in 


IN  EDUCATION  31 

this  world.  Hence,  the  educational  suggestion  and 
work  ought  to  be  creative  and  constructive. 

Preyer,  in  "Mental  Development  of  Childhood," 
says :  "For  a  long  time  the  error  prevailed  that  for 
the  child's  first  learning  there  was  absolute  neces- 
sity of  a  teacher,  as  if  only  complete  thought  could 
be  imprinted  on  the  child's  brain,  and  that  only  by 
this  means  the  mind  would  finally  be  developed  in 
the  right  manner.    Herein  lies  a  gross  fallacy." 

There  are  many  theories  concerning  the  purposes 
and  methods  of  education,  but  each  one  lacks  some 
essential  element  of  utility,  and  hence  they  cannot 
be  accepted  as  final.  I  am  indebted  to  Dr.  G.  Stan- 
ley Hall  for  some  suggestions  which  follow.  For 
instance,  one  theory  holds  that  the  source  of  knowl- 
edge is  in  the  soul  itself  and  that  a  mystic,  intuitive 
contemplation  is  the  chief  end  to  be  ob- 
tained in  education.  This  is  briefly  Plato's 
theory  and  has  come  down  to  us  through  the 
idealistic  philosophy  from  the  Greeks  and  even 
through  the  Middle  Ages  and  heading  up  in  some  of 
the  greatest  German  philosophers  like  Kant,  Fichte, 
Hegel,  and  many  others ;  and  to  them  the  sum  of  all 
knowledge  is  to  know  self  and  to  rise  to  a  higher 
knowledge  of  God  by  the  methods  of  introspection. 

Another  theory  is  the  one  advocated  in  the  Roman 
Catholic  schools.  It  is  not  intuition  or  contemplation 
but  logical  reasoning  in  debate  that  is  the  sum  of  all 
knowledge  or  its  equivalent,  and  Thomas  Aquinas 
is  the  typical  representative  of  this  theory. 


32  SUGGESTION 

Another  theory  is  that  the  best  culture  is  to  a 
great  extent  literary.  It  is  an  outgrowth  from  the 
discovery  of  the  great  treasures  of  classic  antiquity 
carried  westward  and  manifesting  itself  in  the  hu- 
manistic teachings  of  Italy  and  other  countries,  and 
it  finds  its  most  perfect  representation  in  the  renais- 
sance. It  makes  bookworms,  but  not  practically  edu- 
cated men. 

Another  theory  is  that  which  has  grown  out  of  the 
philosophy  of  Francis  Bacon  and  finds  one  of  its 
chief  advocates  in  John  Locke,  who  held  that  there 
was  nothing  in  the  intellect  that  did  not  come 
through  the  senses.  A  great  deal  of  modern  science, 
especially  the  experimental  form,  is  founded  upon 
this  conception. 

Another  theory  that  has  been  advanced  by  many 
modern  scholars  is  practical  education.  They  say 
that  the  student  ought  to  do  something,  and  there- 
fore manual  training  is  taught  so  that  the  student 
may  not  only  get  knowledge  but  also  that  he  may  be 
able  to  be  master  of  himself.  They  contend  that  the 
goal  of  scholarship  is  not  only  to  gather  knowledge, 
but  to  educate  every  part  of  the  brain,  and  every 
sense,  and  thus  learn  by  doing  something. 

The  theory  which  has  been  presented  previously 
is  based  upon  the  process  and  conception  of  evolu- 
tion. Every  individual  is  an  expression  of  the  whole, 
and  all  the  organs  that  we  possess  physically  are  in- 
herited. We  have  about  120  so-called  rudimentary 
organs  in  our  body  of  no  particular  use  in  our  pres- 


IN  ORDINARY  LIFE  33 

ent  condition,  but  they  have  played  a  very  necessary 
part  in  the  animal  world.  We  conclude  that  man  as 
to  his  body  is  a  highly  evolved  animal,  but  we  lean 
to  the  view  that  man,  as  to  his  psychical  constitu- 
tion, is  God-given;  and  therefore  in  relationship  to 
the  physical  and  the  mental,  education  must  include 
both,  and  develop  both,  thus  making  him  really  an 
epitome  or  microcosm  of  the  universe.  Any  theory 
that  neglects  either  the  physical  or  the  psychical  is 
a  failure. 

(c)  In  Ordinary  Life. 

Suggestion  plays  a  large  part  in  its  relations  to 
the  conscious  mind  in  ordinary  life.  The  most  of 
our  waking  hours  are  given  to  making  or  receiving 
impressions.  The  work  we  do  is  following  them  out. 
The  reception  of  commands  from  superiors,  and  the 
commands  we  give,  are  suggestions.  He  is  a  good 
foreman,  superior,  master,  leader,  or  parent,  who 
knows  how  to  adapt  his  suggestions  to  the  minds  of 
those  under  him,  so  that  they  will  be  willingly  and 
readily  received  and  obeyed.  Too  many  give  them 
in  a  way  to  stir  up  the  worst  in  those  under  them.* 

Some  parents  make  requests  of  and  give  com- 
mands to  children  in  an  authoritative  and  harsh,  in- 
stead of  in  a  loving  tone  of  voice.  The  spirit  of  re- 
sistance, instead  of  obedience,  is  developed,  and 
eventually  there  is  a  positive  refusal  on  the  part  of 
the  children  to  grant  the  requests  and  to  obey  the 
commands.     Every  normal  child  can  be  won  and 

*See  Conditions  of  Operator  and  Subject. 
3 


34  SUGGESTION 

held  by  the  authority  of  parents,  if  the  suggestions 
are  tempered  by  love  and  good  judgment.  This 
principle  applies  also  to  the  teacher  and  scholar;  to 
the  master  and  servant.  He  is  the  best  parent,  who 
can  exercise  authority  and,  in  a  simple  way,  secure 
obedience. 

The  best  agent  is  one  who  has  a  large  and  strong 
nature,  and  can  insinuate  into  the  minds  of  his 
patrons  the  belief  that  they  need  what  he  has.  The 
best  teacher  is  the  one  who  has  love  for  the  pupil, 
and  by  simple  and  directmethods  imparts  his  instruc- 
tions and  knows  the  most  effective  way  to  give  them. 
The  most  powerful  orator  or  minister  is  the  one 
who,  loving  the  people  and  desiring  to  do  them  good, 
can  make  his  teachings  of  truth  forcible  and  can 
exemplify  such  teachings  in  thought  and  life. 

Suggestions  are  the  controlling  power  in  ordinary 
life,  and  he  who  knows  how  to  use  them  aright  is  a 
wise  man.  Suggestibility  is  the  normal  and  the  best 
condition  of  every  inquiring  mind.  It  is  the  condi- 
tion by  which  truth  is  imparted  and  received.  This 
condition,  joined  with  good  judgment,  will  make  life 
harmonious,  happy,  and  beautiful. 

The  open  mind  to  receive  beautiful  thoughts,  the 
loving  heart  which  desires  to  transfix  them  in  the 
life  and  face,  and  the  active  forceful  will  that  trans- 
mutes the  good  impulses  into  blessings  to  others  and 
to  one's  self  will  beget  a  beauty,  harmony,  and  hap- 
piness which  will  abide  in  time  and  in  eternity. 
Such  a  life  is  Godlike  and  therefore   eternal.    The 


IN  ORDINARY  LIFE  35 

operation  of  the  pure  mind  upon  the  body,  the  intel- 
lectual power  marked  upon  the  features,  removes 
from  the  face  the  signs  of  sensuality,  sloth,  and 
animalism. 

People  who  desire  to  grow  beautiful  as  they  grow 
old  must  take  into  consideration  not  only  the  control 
of  the  conscious  mind  but  must  also  develop  the 
noblest  characteristics  of  the  subconscious  mind  and 
manifest  them  under  every  circumstance  of  life.  It 
has  been  known  that  the  most  attractive  men  and 
women  of  history  have  not  been  young.  Their 
power  has  usually  been  mental.  The  moral  nature 
has  been  developed  to  a  great  degree  and  shown 
through  active  helpfulness  and  good  feelings 
towards  others.  The  young  woman  who  said,  "If  I 
had  the  health  of  my  brother,  the  features  of  my 
younger  sister,  and  the  fair  complexion  of  the  child 
in  the  cradle,  then  would  I  be  beautiful,  and  all 
would  love  me.  and  I  would  be  so  happy,"  did  not 
understand  that  these  things  were  only  secondary 
and  in  themselves  could  not  secure  permanent  beauty 
and  happiness.  The  truest  beauty  that  this  world 
knows  is  that  which  results  from  the  discharge  of 
the  highest  duty,  self-forgetfulness,  and  self-control, 
a  beauty  that  is  born  of  the  subconscious  mind. 

There  is  not  a  relation  in  the  ordinary  life  in  which 
suggestion  cannot  be  helpfully  employed.  It  is  use- 
ful in  business,  in  the  social  sphere,  in  professional 
and  religious  life.  It  is  not  claiming  too  much  to 
say  that  suggestion  plays  the  largest  part  in  the  dis- 


36  SUGGESTION 

charge  of  our  every-day  duty  and  functions.  Take, 
for  instance,  the  matter  of  breathing.  We  involun- 
tarily and  instinctively  fill  the  lungs  with  air,  if  we 
are  about  to  lift  something  heavy  or  perform  some 
feat  of  strength.  If  we  dread  drafts  of  air,  and  sus- 
pect that  we  shall  take  cold  from  them,  we  usually 
do.  On  the  other  hand,  if  we  positively  determine 
that  we  will  not  take  cold,  we  probably  shall  not,  for 
we  have  fortified  the  physical  system  by  renewed 
breathing  and  brain  vitality  so  that  we  may  avoid 
the  anticipated  sickness. 

There  is  but  one  power  which  can  cure  disease, 
that  is  the  vital  energy  of  the  body,  properly  regu- 
lated and  directed  through  the  mind.  Suggestion 
is  the  power  that  controls  the  subconscious  mind 
and  every  relation  of  the  ordinary  life  is  under  the 
control  of  that  power  or  influence. 

(d)     In  Morals. 

A  moral  life  is  largely  the  result  of  education. 
There  are  elements  like  those  of  heredity,  habit,  en- 
vironment, that  enter  into  the  formation  of  charac- 
ter, but  when  these  things  are  considered  in  their 
primary  conditions  they  are  a  species  of  suggestion 
exercising  their  power  on  the  nerves  through  the 
senses,  and  directly  as  in  heredity.  The  essen- 
tial moulding  and  correcting  power  of  a  moral  life 
is  accepted  instruction.  This  can  be  seen  in  national 
and  individual  life.  Take,  for  instance,  the  develop- 
ment of  a  national  spirit  in  America,  which  is  almost 
purely  the  result  of  education.    The  children  of  im- 


IN  MORALS  37 

migrants  quickly  catch  up  this  spirit  in  our  pubHc 
schools.  The  old  conditions  of  jealousy  and  revenge 
are  being  replaced  by  nobler  and  higher  instructions, 
the  subconscious  life  is  gradually  giving  out  the  best 
that  is  in  it,  and  the  conscious  life  is  feeling  some- 
thing akin  to  brotherhood  and  nobler  impulses.  The 
old  savage  chief,  carrying  back  to  his  camp  skulls  of 
victims  which  he  had  slain,  thought  it  was  the  high- 
est life  that  he  could  exhibit.  But  the  missionary 
came  with  new  suggestions  and  higher  motives  of 
life,  and  the  character  of  the  chief  and  of  those  asso- 
ciated with  him  have  been  changed. 

The  feeling  and  desire  for  war  are  gradually  be- 
ing replaced  by  nobler  feelings  of  brotherhood,  out 
of  which  have  evolved  a  desire  and  an  effort  for  ar- 
bitration. 

It  would  be  impossible  to  have  another  civil  war 
in  this  nation,  because  the  development  of  the  life 
of  the  people  is  such  that  it  would  make  it  morally  a 
crime  for  the  North  and  South  to  meet  again  in 
bloody  conflict.  I  do  not  say  that  the  work  and  the 
development  of  the  best  in  our  national  life  has  been 
realized;  but  that  which  has  been  reached  is  an 
augury  of  that  which  may  be  realized  in  the  future, 
by  accepting  and  utilizing  the  highest  and  noblest 
suggestions  coming  from  the  Bible  and  the  best 
ethics. 

The  laws  of  nature  and  morality  are  analogous 
so  that  there  is  a  beautiful  harmony  existing  between 
them  and  the  results  of  obeying  them.    That  which 


38  SUGGESTION 

is  opposed  to  the  one  is  also  opposed  to  the  other; 
that  which  contravenes  the  one  also  contravenes  the 
other,  so  that  he  is  a  wise  statesman,  parent,  and 
teacher  who  knows  how  to  suggest  effectively  that 
which  is  in  harmony  with  both. 

A  pure  sexual  life  lies  at  the  foundation  of  a  good 
moral  life,  and  is  so  recognized  by  the  leading  edu- 
cators of  the  world.  Physical  impurity  leads  to  acts 
of  immorality.  The  imaginations  of  some  people  are 
reflexly  "set  on  fire  of  hell,"  because  of  the  impurity 
of  the  sexual  life.  Strong  sexuality  is  a  great  power 
in  human  life,  and  if  controlled  and  purified  there  is 
scarcely  a  limit  to  its  possessor's  varied  ability  to 
accomplish  much  good  in  this  world.  The  great 
men  of  the  world,  as  a  rule,  have  been  strongly 
sexed.  But  when  this  power  is  perverted  there  is 
scarcely  a  limit  to  its  destructive  and  demoralizing 
influence.  Aaron  Burr  is  a  typical  illustration  of 
this  statement.  Erotic  inclinations  are  born  of  a 
perverted  instinct  and  idealized  suggestion.  Physi- 
cal uncleanness  is  one  of  the  worst  things  that  can 
be  overlooked  in  a  child  or  in  an  adult.  There  are 
physical  conditions,  such  as  phimosis,  etc.,  which 
produce  erotic  reflexes  which  will  not  subside  until 
they  are  corrected.  It  is  therefore  important  that 
parents  and  physicians  see  to  it  that  the  sexual  or- 
gans of  the  child  are  normal  and  healthy.  Many 
young  people  are  burning  up,  figuratively  speaking, 
on  account  of  nerve  reflexes,  which  are  striking 
against  and   received   from   the   sexual   centers   in 


IN  MORALS  39 

brain  and  spinal  cord.  The  reflexes  produce  erotic 
imaginations  and  emotions  which  lead  to  immoral 
acts. 

Parents  and  teachers  ought  to  instil  high  and 
noble  teachings  of  personal  goodness  and  morality, 
so  that  the  mind  of  the  growing  child  will  feel  their 
force  and  give  consent  to  them.  It  is  only  thus  that 
the  subconscious  mind  will  receive  them  suggestive- 
ly and  carry  them  out.  When  the  child  thus  as- 
sents, this  mind  is  called  into  activity  voluntarily, 
and  the  teachings  of  morality  take  deep  root  and  can 
never  be  obliterated. 

All  the  teachings  in  the  world,  all  the  threats  of 
torture,  all  the  encomiums  of  praise,  and  all  the 
prospects  of  reward,  can  not  redeem  a  person  who  is 
a  sexual  pervert  or  one  given  over  to  unbridled 
licentiousness  and  debauchery,  unless  the  subcon- 
scious mind  can  be  reached,  the  internal  thought  and 
desire  changed  so  that  a  new  impulse  may  be  im- 
parted to  the  will  and  any  physical  abnormality 
removed. 

Such  a  person  will  reason  about  the  serious  conse- 
quences of  impurity  and  promise  himself  to  reform, 
and  at  times  will  resort  to  great  sacrifices  and  suffer- 
ings to  change  his  life ;  but  the  impulse  and  power 
must  come  by  lodging  high  and  noble  suggestions 
in  the  subconscious  mind. 

The  perverted  life  of  the  degenerate  consents  to 
the  course  of  conduct  which  he  carries  on  and  he  is 
held  in  an  iron  grasp  of  habit,  so  that  he  utterly  re- 


40  SUGGESTION 

jects  otherwise  good,  moral,  and  helpful  instruc- 
tions. There  is  but  one  way  in  which  a  change  can 
be  wrought,  that  is,  through  the  complete  control 
of  the  inner  life  by  hypnotism,  quiescence,  or  actual 
consent  of  the  person ;  holding  that  life  long  enough 
to  reverse  the  deep-seated  auto-suggestion,  counter- 
act the  thought  of  pleasure  in  the  wrong  act,  and 
produce  an  abhorrence  of  the  conduct  and  pleasure 
therein.  Under  the  subject  of  "Moral  Perversity" 
and  "Moral  and  Physical  Regeneration"  I  shall  cite 
some  cases  which  prove  the  power  of  suggestion  in 
controlling  these  conditions. 

Morality  is  primarily  the  recognition  of  right  and 
wrong  in  a  threefold  relationship,  namely,  to  God, 
to  man,  and  to  one's  self.  Such  a  recognition  is  the 
foundation  of  all  moral  philosophy  or  ethics.  The 
education  that  leaves  out  this  essential  foundation 
principle  is  imperfect  and  misleading. 

Much  of  the  so-called  morality  of  the  world  today 
is  nothing  but  a  thoughtless  conformity  to  the  easy 
methods  of  conduct  of  certain  people  who  claim  to 
be  leaders.  This  is  true  in  the  religious,  political, 
and  social  spheres  of  life.  Hence  what  the  Joneses, 
Smiths,  and  Browns  are  and  say  will  be  the  moral 
standard  for  the  life  of  the  people  in  their  communi- 
ties. Such  a  life  is  not  only  monotonous  but  de- 
structive of  the  noblest  independence  and  highest 
realization.  If  an  independent  spirit  should  voice  a 
strong  counter-suggestion  which  would  command 
the  attention  of  the  people,  those  leaders  would  in 


IN  MORALS  41 

words  and  acts  bless  or  curse  that  man.  The  only 
way  to  break  down  that  monotonous,  indifferent, 
and  degenerate  morality  is  to  change  the  method  of 
thinking  and  the  tendency  to  truckling.  This  change 
will  have  mental  and  moral  dynamite  in  it. 

It  is  not  now  my  purpose  to  discuss  morals  in 
their  relation  to  what  is  called  conversion  in  the- 
ology, but  to  continue  the  possibilities  of  changing  an 
immoral  life  in  its  trend  to  a  moral  tendency,  by  the 
power  of  suggestion.  If  there  was  not  this  possi- 
bility then  education  in  reform  schools  and  other 
similar  institutions  would  be  of  no  effect  and  use- 
less. 

But  that  the  work  done  in  these  schools  and  else- 
where has  been  productive  of  great  good  none  will 
dispute.  The  scientific  reason  has  not  been  under- 
stood. The  reason  is  simply  this:  The  subcon- 
scious mind  of  the  child  or  adult  grips  the  sugges- 
tions that  are  good  and  carries  them  out  in  life,  so 
that  the  moral  nature  becomes  changed.  This  is 
true  also  of  children  who  have  been  morally  good; 
if  bad  suggestions  are  made  to  them  continually  by 
word,  act,  or  association,  the  mind  accepts  the  sug- 
gestions and  the  child  becomes  bad.  Hence,  it  is 
necessary  to  guard  children  very  carefully  in  their 
associations,  habits,  and  early  education. 

A  young  child  does  not  have  character,  but  a  dis- 
position that  is  plastic.  Character  develops  as  the 
result  of  thought,  impulse,  exercise  of  the  will,  edu- 
cation.    There  is,  therefore,  but  little  moral  mani- 


42  SUGGESTION 

festation  until  the  child  is  four  or  five  years  of  age. 
Some  earlier,  and  more  later.  The  child  imitates 
and  tries  to  do  what  it  sees  others  do,  tries  to  say 
what  others  say.  It's  power  of  picture  making  and 
loving  is  usually  very  apparent,  and  it's  whole  early 
life  is  graphic.  Such  suggestions  appeal  with  great 
power  to  the  young  child.  Old  Testament  stories 
have  a  fascinating  interest  to  the  child's  imagination, 
and  those  stories  are  never  forgotten.  Fairy  stories 
are  also  believed.  This  is  the  period  in  life  in  which 
to  commence  the  work  of  developing  and  establish- 
ing a  moral  character. 

Anyone  who  has  made  a  careful  study  of  the 
child's  mental  growth  and  the  power  of  its  imagina- 
tion will  soon  conclude  that  its  happiness  is  largely 
derived  from  psychical  sources,  rather  than  entirely 
from  physical  sensations  or  surroundings.  The  neg- 
lect of  the  mental  and  moral  nature  will  necessarily 
cause  the  child,  as  well  as  the  adult,  to  find  most,  if 
not  all,  his  happiness  in  a  life  of  sense  and  sensa- 
tion. This  happiness  is  less  satisfying  than  that 
which  comes  from  the  mental  and  moral  life. 

There  are  two  principles  of  human  life  that  are 
seen  early  in  childhood,  namely,  affection  and  the 
sense  of  justice.  These  have  their  roots  of  exist- 
ence in  the  deep  nature.  In  normal  childhood  we 
find  exemplification  of  our  description  of  the  sub- 
conscious mind.     (Which  see.) 

All  the  mind  the  child  has  at  first  is  subconscious 
with  the  senses  and  brain  ready  to  receive  impres- 


IN  MORALS      .  43 

sions  and  thus  afford  the  basis  for  the  development 
of  the  conscious  mind.  This  is  one  great  reason 
why  special  emphasis  should  be  put  on  child  study. 
The  child  nature  manifests  disposition,  love,  emo- 
tional life,  memory,  sense  of  justice,  awakening  con- 
sciousness, personality,  moral  sense,  the  intentional 
use  of  special  senses  and  habits,  largely  in  this  order 
of  development. 

If  all  these  characteristics  are  cared  for  and  de- 
veloped, the  child  will  grow  into  a  splendid  being. 
Education  is  the  process  by  which  these  things  are 
regularly  and  gradually  developed  with  the  growth 
of  the  child.  There  are  thousands  of  children  whose 
education  has  been  immoral.  Is  it  any  wonder  that 
they  are  handicapped  in  life?  The  one  supreme 
question  with  us  is  as  to  the  method  of  changing 
such  lives  so  that  they  shall  become  moral.  There 
are  several  methods  of  effecting  this  change : 

1.  Preaching  to  them  the  gospel  which  has  in  it 
the  strongest  inducements  to  help  one  to  lead  a 
moral  and  spiritual  life. 

2.  Reading  attentively  good  books  in  which  are  pre- 
sented noble  characters  who  have  been  made  so 
by  choosing  the  highest  motives  and  acting  out 
the  best  that  was  in  them. 

3.  Personal  experiences  from  a  good  man. 

4.  Thoughts  that  are  pure,  elevating,  and  trans- 
forming to  the  receptive  mind  of  the  young  per- 
son, as  in  sleep  or  when  hypnotized. 


44  .     SUGGESTION 

5.  Any  method  by  which  the  subconscious  mind  may 

be   reached  by  good   suggestions,   especially  by 

such  as  will  be  naturally  received  and  acted  on. 

The  education  of  the  subconscious  mind  is  going 

on  all  the  time,  and  suggestions  are  being  received 

more  or  less  effectively  and  continuously,  so  that  we 

frequently  find  children  who  have  been  very  bad 

changing  into  thoughtful  and  good  persons.     The 

converse  is  also  seen.     That  mind  had  caught  up 

and  acted  on  impressions,  so  that  we  have  either 

good  or  bad  results,  conditioned  on  the  teachings 

received. 

The  physical  conditions  such  as  environment, 
heredity,  association,  are  all  at  work  in  human  life 
and  produce  through  the  mind  unforseen  and  seem- 
ingly uncaused  transformations  and  results.  But  let 
us  remember  that  there  is  no  effect  without  an  ade- 
quate cause.  This  is  true  in  the  natural  and  in  the 
human  world,  as  it  is  true  in  the  universe.  This  is 
true  when  the  human  life  is  the  subject,  and  human 
conduct  is  the  manifestation.  Character  is  the  pro- 
duct of  all  that  nature  and  art,  books  and  associa- 
tions, have  made  it.  That  is  the  reason  why  "the 
least  valuable  part  of  education  is  that  which  we 
owe  to  the  schoolmaster  (conscious),  the  most  prec- 
ious lessons  are  those  which  we  learn  out  of  school 
(unconscious.)"  It  might  be  profitable  to  follow 
this  line  of  discussion,  but  it  is  needless  for  our  pur- 
pose to  do  so  now.  What  we  want  to  make  plain 
is  that  suggestion  controlling  the  subconscious  mind 


IN  SPIRITUAL  LIFE  45 

is  the  power  by  which  morals  may  be  corrected  and 
changed.  Take  the  case  of  the  Rubin  boy,  taken  in 
hand  by  Dr.  Quackenbos.  The  boy  was  cruel,  a 
sexual  pervert,  and  nearly  insane,  but  by  the  utiliza- 
tion of  suggestion  he  was  entirely  changed. 

The  educational  work  in  the  schools  ought  to  go 
deeper  than  the  conscious  mind,  and  the  home  train- 
ing in  this  nation  should  begin  very  early  in  the  de- 
velopment of  the  child's  deeper  mind.  This  lies 
at  the  foundation  of  all  essential  moral  and  spiritual 
life. 

Much  of  the  crime  in  our  land  is  due  to  the  neg- 
lect of  the  exercise  of  parental,  civil,  and  religious 
authority.  If  the  children  were  trained  and  instruct- 
ed in  the  principles  of  morality,  religion,  and  sub- 
mission to  authority,  there  would  be  a  great  decrease 
in  crime.  Many  criminals  have  no  higher  knowledge 
than  their  actions,  because  they  have  been  cradled  in 
wickedness  and  nursed  in  crime,  and  early  in  life 
were  pushed  out  to  seek  a  living  for  themselves,  by 
hook  or  crook,  and  frequently  also  for  others.  If 
parents  were  informed  as  to  tendencies  imparted  to 
their  children  in  utero,  and  would  guardedly  avoid 
books  that  are  off-color,  scenes  that  are  questionable 
and  sometimes  revolting,  and  habits  of  life  that  are 
low  and  disgusting,  there  would  be  a  rapid  decrease 
of  crime  and  criminals. 

(e)     In  Spiritual  Life. 

The  noblest  characteristic  of  man  is  his  power  to 
realize  his  relation  to  his  Creator  and  the  desire  to 


46  SUGGESTION 

discharge  his  duty  without  fear  or  favor  of  man.  Tt 
is  not  my  purpose  to  enter  into  a  discussion  of  the 
spiritual  life  from  a  theological  standpoint  or  ex- 
haustively, but  from  a  practical  point  of  view  of  the 
utilization  of  suggestion  in  developing  and  cultivat- 
ing this  life.  It  is  my  purpose  at  some  future  time 
to  write  on  its  relation  to  new  theological  stand- 
points and  trace  philosophically  the  relation  of  man's 
spirit  to  God  and  the  communication  of  God's  spirit 
to  man.  It  is  now  only  needful  to  follow  the  ordi- 
nary spiritual  manifestation  of  man's  life  and  learn 
what  part  suggestion  plays  or  can  play  in  it. 

It  will  be  well  for  the  reader  to  look  again  at  the 
description  of  the  subconscious  mind.  Spiritual 
perception,  faith,  and  intuition  are  powers  of  that 
mind,  and  they  lie  at  the  very  basis  of  all  religious 
life.  Inasmuch  as  suggestion  is  the  power  by  which 
the  subconscious  mind  is  controlled,  we  see  that  this 
part  of  the  subject  is  a  large,  interesting,  and  vital 
one. 

All  organic  beings  possess  instinct,  but  in  man  it 
becomes,  in  its  last  analysis,  intuition.  In  man,  the 
animal,  there  is  instinct,  in  his  early  life,  in  common 
with  other  animals.  For  instance,  animals  have  the 
instinct  of  self-preservation,  of  reproduction,  of  pro- 
tection. These  instincts  are  natural  and  common  to 
the  whole  animal  world.  In  human  beings  we  find 
this  power  magnified,  with  a  very  wide  application, 
and  we  call  it  intuition.  Intuition  is  associated  with 
emotion.      Hence,   we  find  not  only  that  spiritual 


IN  SPIRITUAL  LIFE  47 

perception,  faith,  and  intuition  are  powers  of  the 
subconscious  mind  but  that  the  emotional  life  also 
resides  therein. 

Suggestion  as  related  to  the  spiritual  life  has  to 
do  with  intelligent  manifestation,  development,  and 
perfection.  All  men  worship  something  in  accord- 
ance with  the  instinctive  or  intuitional  desire  that 
is  in  them.  But  to  worship  intelligently  it  is  neces- 
sary to  have  some  controlling  thought  in  the  mind, 
of  God,  His  requirements,  and  one's  relation  and 
duty  to  Him. 

One  thing  must  be  recognized  in  reference  to  our 
spiritual  life,  namely,  that  the  religious  instinct  or 
intuition  in  man  has  its  roots  and  law  of  sequence 
and  consummation  from  childhood  to  manhood  in 
the  deepest  nature  and  is  manifested  in  the  con- 
scious life.  The  problem  is  the  same  in  the  child, 
in  the  man,  and  in  the  whole  human  race.  Whilst 
there  may  be  incidental  differences  in  men  and  races, 
differences  also  in  methods  of  interpretation,  yet 
the  same  law  governs.  It  is  a  recognized  fact  that 
every  thought,  emotion,  and  volition  of  the  mind  is 
controlled  by  some  law  of  life.  These  laws  are  es- 
tablished by  Infinite  Intelligence.  The  recognition 
and  worship  of  that  Intelligence  constitutes  the  basis 
of  all  true  religion. 

It  is  man's  subliminal  self  or  nature  that  impels  to 
worship,  and  it  is  fortified  by  the  noblest  suggestions 
from  the  Bible  and  nature;  hence,  there  will  be  no 
lack  of  worshippers  as  long  as  the  human  mind  con- 


48  SUGGESTION 

tinues  as  it  is  and  the  Bible  and  nature  are  open  to 
man's  intellectual  and  heart  life. 

The  sphere  of  suggestion  in  relation  to  the  spir- 
itual life  is  a  very  large  one,  and  it  not  only  has 
extensive  application,  but  is  capable  of  infinite  ex- 
pansion. The  one  supreme  condition  upon  which  it 
will  become  available  is  faith. 

The  highest  attainment  of  life  is  presented  in 
Proverbs  3 :  13-26,  especially  verses  13-19.  This 
practically  says  that  wisdom  and  understanding  are 
the  two  great  necessities  for  the  spiritual  life  and 
in  their  hands  are  honor,  length  of  days,  riches, 
health  and  happiness.  The  Infinite  enfolds  the  fin- 
ite; and  the  method  of  appropriating  love,  power, 
goodness,  health,  wealth,  and  all  that  God  is  and  has, 
comes  to  us  through  faith  by  wisdom  and  under- 
standing. 

There  is  a  spirit  of  unrest  in  the  religious  world 
that  expresses  itself  in  the  desire  for  something  not 
realized  in  the  church  or  in  social  relations.  The 
great  problems  that  are  presenting  themselves  for 
consideration  and  solution  indicate  that  the  elements 
that  should  enter  into  their  solving  are  either  at 
hand  or  will  be  when  the  people  are  prepared  or  re- 
quired to  meet  them.  The  extensive  Biblical  criti- 
cism and  the  wide  psychological  investigation  and 
study  are  producing  momentous  results.  Among 
these  results  is  an  understanding  of  the  Bible  as  to 
its  revelation  and  purpose,  thus  making  it  a  practical 
guide  and  help,  and  destroying  the  Bibliotary  that 


IN  SPIRITUAL  LIFE  49 

has  been  so  prevalent  in  the  past.  Psychological 
investigation  has  resulted  in  the  discovery  of  the 
psychical  life  and  its  power  over  the  body  in  recov- 
ering it  from  sickness  and  infirmity  and  in  keeping 
one's  self  in  good  physical  and  mental  condition. 
The  day  of  belief  in  the  healing  power  of  drugs  is 
passed,  since  it  is  a  well-established  fact  that  all 
cures  are  effected  by  the  use  of  the  vital  energies  of 
the  body,  and  by  directing  them  intelligently,  the 
beneficial  result  is  obtained.  The  best  physician  of 
the  future  will  be  the  one  who  will  use  his  personal 
influence  and  his  psychological  and  Biblical  knowl- 
edge in  changing  the  thought  of  the  patient  and  in- 
stilling the  highest  and  the  noblest  suggestions  into 
his  mind  in  order  to  recover  him  from  sickness 
and  keep  him  in  health  physically,  mentally,  and 
spiritually.  The  church  has  neglected  her  duty 
in  this  respect,  so  that  an  opportunity  has 
been  afforded  for  such  a  cult  as  Christian 
Science  to  receive  recognition.  This  receives 
honor  from  many  people,  despite  the  fact  that  its 
teachings  are  unscientific  and  unchristian.  The 
church  will  have  to  get  back  to  the  primitive  work 
of  not  only  saving  the  soul,  but  also  healing  the 
body.  This  is  the  method  adopted  by  the  Emmanuel 
Church  of  Boston.  The  Gospel  is  preached,  the  peo- 
ple are  comforted,  and  the  sick  are  cured. 

There  are  several  things  in  that  special  work 
which  may  be  changed  in  time,  but  in  the  prelimi- 
nary stage,  it  has  probably  been  a  wise  move  to 

4 


50  SUGGESTION 

adopt  the  methods  which  Drs.  Worcester  and  Mc- 
Comb  use.  They  have  a  form  of  confessional,  so 
that  the  patients  may  tell  their  symptoms,  conditions, 
and  the  manifestations  of  the  sicknesses;  but  the 
danger  is  that  the  stories  of  the  patients  may  aug- 
ment by  their  repetition,  and  deepen  the  adverse 
mental  conditions,  and  produce  eventually  a  back- 
ward tendency,  adverse  rather  than  favorable  to  per- 
manent cures.  The  less  frequently  the  story  is  told 
by  a  patient,  I  have  found  by  practice,  the  more  hope- 
ful the  case.  The  diagnosis  of  the  medical  man  may 
be  a  good  thing,  if  he  knows  considerable  about  psy- 
chology, but  if  he  is  only  a  drug  practitioner  his 
diagnosis  may  be  such  as  to  produce  an  adverse  sug- 
gestion on  the  mind  of  the  patient.  The  one  great 
difficulty  in  taking  some  doctors  into  partnership  in 
the  church  work  will  be,  that  some  patients  will  be 
passed  upon  as  having  organic  diseases,  when  they 
may  be  only  functional,  and  conversely,  and  that  the 
materialistic  thought  of  some  doctors  may  make 
null  and  void  the  treatment  of  the  suggestionist,  and 
thus  leave  the  patient  worse  than  when  he  began 
treatment.  Many  doctors  know  nothing  of  sugges- 
tive therapeutics,  and  their  work  has  been  purely 
physical;  such  persons  can  be  of  little  aid  in  the 
higher  work  which  the  church  ought  to  and  should 
do.  Many  preachers  are  also  ignorant  of  the  applica- 
tion of  the  principles  to  be  utilized  in  curing  the  sick, 
and  are  therefore  not  prepared  to  do  this  work. 
They  know  something  of  the  power  of  preaching 


IN  SPIRITUAL  LIFE  51 

the  Word  to  change  the  lives  of  men;  and  having 
in  their  visits  cheered  and  comforted  the  afflicted, 
they  know  something  practically  about  the  power  of 
suggestion  on  the  mind.  The  intelligent  physician 
and  the  wise  minister  can  work  together  eilectively 
in  many  cases. 

The  teachings  of  Jesus  are  adapted  to  sick- 
ness as  well  as  to  health.  The  principles  of  unself- 
ishness, fearlessness,  trust,  and  faith  in  God,  laid 
down  in  Christ's  teaching,  help  the  human  soul  to 
resist  disease,  insanity,  and  abnormality.  We  cannot 
say  that  all  diseases  are  mental,  but  many  are,  and 
the  mental  power  must  be  utilized  in  order  to  per- 
manently cure  these  cases.  The  instances  of  cure 
in  the  New  Testament  were  always  effected  first  on 
the  mental  or  psychical  side,  with  the  attending 
physical  results.  Christ  was  unique  in  His  knowl- 
edge of  the  human  soul  and  the  application  of  spir- 
itual laws  to  its  recovery  from  abnormal  tendencies 
and  resultant  diseases.  There  was  one  condition  re- 
quired on  the  part  of  the  afflicted  or  those  associated 
with  or  related  to  them,  namely,  faith.  Where  there 
was  no  faith  there  was  no  cure.  This  was  doubtless 
also  true  in  relation  to  disciples,  to  whom  He  gave 
authority  to  cure  diseases,  etc.,  so  that  we  can  safely 
lay  down  the  principle  that  in  ordinary  practice 
according  to  one's  faith  so  shall  be  the  results  in 
one's  life.  The  physical  changes  followed  as  a  re- 
sult of  the  psychical  transformation.  Christ  under- 
stood the  law  of  the  influence  of  mind  over  matter, 


52  SUGGESTION 

and  in  all  of  His  teachings  and  works  He  emphasiz- 
ed and  exemplified  that  law.  It  has  taken  the  world 
centuries  to  reach  the  practical  application  of  this 
law  and  thus  secure  even  a  part  of  the  wonderful 
results  which  were  promised  by  the  Master.  Occa- 
sionally, there  have  been  sporadic  cases  of  men  who 
seemed  to  be  possessed  of  great  healing  power,  such 
as  Greatrakes,  Gassner,  Newton,  and  others,  but 
such  power  has  been  very  exceptional.  Their  person- 
ality, methods  and  manipulations  produced  imme- 
diate results  in  many  persons.  We  favor  the  relig- 
ious use  of  scientific  methods  of  healing  and  the 
scientific  use  of  religious  methods.  When  our  phy- 
sicians and  preachers  are  thus  thoroughly  equipped, 
it  will  not  be  long  until  all  the  great  problems  of 
disease  and  its  cure  will  be  solved  and  the  world  will 
be  a  paradise  regained,  as  it  is  now  a  paradise  lost. 


THE  SUBCONSCIOUS  MIND  53 


CHAPTER  III. 

The  Relation  of  Suggestion. 
2.  To  the  Subconscious  Mind. 

The  relation  of  suggestion  to  the  subconscious 
mind  may  be  rudely  stated  as  that  of  key  and  lock. 
The  power  by  which  this  mind  will  open  and  reveal 
its  treasures  is  suggestion.  We  give  again  the  de- 
scription of  the  subconscious  mind,  as  it  is  very  im- 
portant that  these  characteristics  shall  be  recognized 
in  this  stage  of  the  discussion. 

The  subconscious  mind  governs  and  controls  all 
of  the  vital  functions  of  the  body  automatically  and 
its  highest  powers  are  instinct  or  intuition,  faith, 
spiritual  perception,  telepathic  power,  clairvoyant 
ability,  and  at  times  absolution  from  physical  or 
bodily  limitation,  and  it  is  also  the  seat  of  the  emo- 
tional life  and  perfect  memory. 

The  most  remarkable  manifestations  of  knowledge 
and  power  occur  when  the  conscious  mind  is  held  in 
check.  Suggestion  is  the  key  that  unlocks  the  door 
into  the  real  individual  life  and  lets  us  get  a  glimpse 
into  the  wealth,  power,  and  possibilities  of  the  sub- 
conscious mind. 

The  influence  of  the  subconscious  mind  over  the 


54  SUGGESTION 

nutrition  and  health  of  the  physical  system  has  been 
recognized  by  thinking  men  generally,  but  has  never 
been  so  widely  discussed  as  at  the  present  time.  For 
instance,  in  victory  and  defeat  of  armies  nutrition 
is  aifected  favorably  or  unfavorably.  Dr.  Austin 
Flint  said  to  a  medical  class  some  years  ago :  "Gen- 
tlemen, there  is  something  in  the  practice  of  medi- 
cine far  beyond  the  mere  administration  of  drugs." 
He  told  a  great  truth.  Every  successful  physician 
knows  the  necessity  of  controlling  the  patient's  mind. 
He  knows  the  value  of  faith,  hope,  expectancy,  and 
belief,  and  that  they  are  among  the  most  powerful 
therapeutic  agents  that  can  be  used.  The  scriptural 
statement,  "Thy  faith  hath  made  thee  whole,"  is 
thoroughly  scientific,  and  if  we  carefully  observe,  we 
shall  find  many  verifications  of  this  truth.  Hope, 
one  of  the  greatest  powers  in  the  human  mind,  is 
at  once  elevating,  uplifting  and  inspiring.  Physi- 
cally hope  can  accelerate  the  heart  action,  relieve  the 
nerve  tension,  and  bring  into  one's  life  great  bene- 
fits. Fear,  on  the  other  hand,  depresses  the  nerve 
action,  contracts  the  blood  vessels  of  the  body,  and 
interferes  with  the  circulation.  It  also  produces 
mental  depression,  and,  very  speedily,  physical  ail- 
ment. 

When  man  has  learned  thoroughly  the  difference 
between  hope  and  fear,  he  has  discovered  one  of  the 
greatest  principles  of  healing.  When  he  has  learned 
how  to  encourage  and  inspire  hope,  how  to  dispel 
despondency  and  drive  away  fear,  he  has  discovered 


THE  SUBCONSCIOUS  MIND  55 

an  effective  method  of  relieving  the  afflicted  of  many 
ailments. 

Take  for  instance  a  man  who  is  in  an  excellent 
physical  and  mental  condition  and  let  him  receive  a 
report  that  his  house  has  burned  down,  that  some 
of  his  dear  ones  have  lost  their  lives,  and  see  how 
quickly  it  will  produce  a  depressing  effect  and  ill- 
ness. If  he  were  to  receive  news  five  or  six  hours 
after,  that  it  was  a  mistake,  that  the  property  was 
intact  and  the  loved  ones  safe,  his  illness  would  leave 
him  almost  instantly. 

If  he  had  consulted  the  doctors  after  receiving  the 
news  of  disaster,  and  had  not  informed  them  of 
it,  they  would  have  attributed  his  collapse  and  ill- 
ness to  different  causes.  Some  would  probably 
have  said  that  this  condition  was  caused  by  ptomaine 
poisoning;  some  would  have  attributed  the  cause  to 
overwork ;  others  would  have  blamed  it  on  a  severe 
cold,  and  probably  others  on  different  physical  con- 
ditions. Various  remedies  would  have  been  recom- 
mended. The  real  cause  was  a  thought  or  thoughts 
which  produced  a  shock,  and  as  long  as  these  were 
entertained  the  physical  results  would  continue. 
Adverse  suggestions  had  entered  the  subconscious 
mind  and  were  depressing  the  vital  functions ;  and, 
as  long  as  they  controlled,  depression  of  the  circula- 
tory and  nervous  systems  would  result. 

When  the  safety  of  home  and  loved  ones  became 
assured,  the  normal  condition  was  re-established, 
the  arteries  relaxed,  the  pallor  was  replaced  by  a 


56  SUGGESTION 

glow  of  red  in  the  face,  the  nerve  action  became  nor- 
mal, and  the  usual  health  was  realized,  with  the  hap- 
piness that  followed  therefrom.  He  was  made  ill 
by  a  thought  of  fear,  he  was  cured  by  a  thought  and 
an  assurance  of  safety.  The  thoughts  we  think,  the 
exercise  of  faith  in  God  and  man,  the  inspiration  of 
hope,  all  have  a  definite  effect  on  every  cell  in  the 
human  body. 

The  helpless  and  sick  infant  is  soothed  by  the 
mother's  loving  fondling,  her  tenderness  of  touch 
and  voice  are  lodged  in  the  child's  mind,  rest  and 
sleep  follow  and  recovery  from  sickness. 

The  sick  man  who  goes  to  see  the  doctor  is  ex- 
amined and  wisely  informed  that  he  has  a  serious 
illness,  but  that  he  can  be  readily  cured  by  taking 
the  medicine  prescribed.  He  swallows  the  drastic 
drug  and  soon  begins  to  feel  much  better.  He  be- 
lieves the  medicine  (larvated  suggestion)  has  done 
the  work,  whereas  the  examination  and  the  assur- 
ance of  the  doctor  were  the  secret  of  cure  through 
the  vital  functions  of  the  organic  life.  Bread  pills 
or  other  things  in  the  Materia  Medica  could  have 
been  just  as  efficiently  used  as  the  medicine  which 
was  prescribed  and  taken.  We  are  coming  to  a 
time  when  this  wonderful  law  of  suggestion  will  be 
as  generally  used  as  medicines  have  been,  and  per- 
haps more  effectively  and  less  deleteriously. 

It  is  conceded  by  the  best  psychologists  that  cog- 
nition, reasoning,  and  volition  are  the  fruitage  of  the 
conscious  mind,  also  that  feeling,  perfect  memory, 


THE  SUBCONSCIOUS  MIND  57 

and  extraordinary  mental  phenomena,  have  their 
initiative  in  the  subconscious  mind.  These  manifes- 
tations arise  into  the  plane  of  consciousness,  so  that 
in  memory  we  have  recollection  and  the  action  of 
the  law  of  association  on  that  plane. 

Suggestion  is  related  to  the  law  of  similarity  and 
association.  The  best  way  to  train  our  memories 
and  deeply  impress  them  is  by  the  relations  of  inclu- 
sion, exclusion,  and  concurrence.  This  work  is 
effectually  done  in  the  conscious  sphere,  and  perma- 
nently received  and  retained  in  the  subconscious 
mind.  This  mind,  especially  the  emotional  features 
of  it,  is  marvellously  affected  by  suggestion. 

The  power  of  choice,  which  may  be  called  the  law 
of  preference,  is  the  characteristic  of  the  conscious 
mind,  but  when  desire  and  feeling  enter  into  the 
matter,  then  the  power  of  the  deeper  mind  is  brought 
into  play.  Here  is  the  explanation  of  many  cures 
and  peculiar  things  in  man's  life. 

"Lulled  in  the  secret  chambers  of  the  brain, 
Our  thoughts  are  linked  by  many  a  hidden  chain, 
Awake  but  one,  and  lo !  what  myriads  arise, 
Each  stamps  its  image  as  the  other  flies." 

There  is  a  very  essential,  if  not  vital,  relation  be- 
tween the  subconscious  mind  and  the  suggestion 
which  it  receives. 

The  leaders  of  the  Nancy  School  of  Hypnotists 
have  observed  and  stated  that  it  is  by  suggestion 
that  hypnotic  phenomena  are  produced  and  subjects 
are  controlled.     This  is  confirmed  by  thousands  of 


58  SUGGESTION 

cases  and  has  been  established  inductively  as  a  law. 
It  has  brought  into  view  a  large  field  of  observation, 
and  a  wide  series  of  phenomena,  ordinary  and  extra- 
ordinary, so  that  it  has  become  a  new  method  of  ex- 
plaining unusual  mental  phenomena,  which  have 
puzzled  physicians,  jurists,  learned  and  thoughtful 
men. 

Suggestion  is  a  special  kind  of  psycho-physical 
reaction  in  which  an  idea  or  thought  becomes  so  in- 
tense and  limited  that  the  mind  becomes  possessed 
with  one  idea.  This  idea  loses  for  the  time  its 
ordinary  associations  and  influence  and  breaks 
through  ordinary  restrictions  and  liberates  cerebral 
activities  which  seem  to  belong  to  a  deeper  mind. 
Suggestion  produces  a  dissociation  of  feelings,  de- 
sires, and  volitions  which  are  ordinarily  associated. 
Where  the  mental  power  of  dissociation  is  easy,  the 
person  is  readily  suggestible.  For  instance,  a  person 
is  wide  awake,  yet  I  suggest  that  he  is  sleepy  and 
that  he  feels  like  yawning  and  he  becomes  drowsy 
and  then  yawns.  I  hold  out  his  arm  and  tell  him  that 
he  cannot  move  it  up  or  down  and  he  is  unable  to 
do  so.    He  is  in  an  hypnotic  or  suggestible  condition. 

Suggestion  and  hypnotism,  in  a  special  sense,  are 
identical,  but  in  a  large  sense  are  not  so.  Hypnosis 
is  a  graduated  sleep,  induced  by  suggestion.  The 
sleep  also  increases  the  power  of  suggestion.  The 
mental  mechanism  and  results  are  of  the  same  sort, 
but  differing  in  degree  according  as  one  is  awake  or 
asleep.     In  sleep,  the  dissociation  is  more  general 


THE  SUBCONSCIOUS  MIND  59 

than  in  the  waking  condition,  in  which  it  is  partial 
and  limited.  Suggestion,  as  to  its  present  effective 
influence,  comes  principally  from  other  people,  but 
may  also  come  from  environment,  books,  things, 
emotions,  extraordinary  manifestations,  etc.,  or 
from  one's  own  conscious  mind. 

Suggestion  in  this  special  sense  has  opened  up  a 
new  world  of  mystery.  This  world  has  been  called 
"the  involuntary  mind,"  "unconscious  cerebration," 
"the  subliminal  self,"  "the  subjective  mind,"  "the 
unconscious  mind,"  "the  subconscious  mind."  We 
are  only  on  the  shore  of  this  soul-sea.  Pebbles  have 
been  gathered  and  classified,  and  the  partial  nature 
and  fragmentary  contents  of  this  sea  have  been  seen, 
tabulated,  and  analyzed. 

Suggestion  is  the  power  by  which  we  may  open 
and  explore  this  vast  and  hitherto  unseen  and  not 
understood  world,  and  it  is  also  the  power  by  which 
we  may  bring  forth  order,  usefulness,  and  help  for 
humanity.  The  power  which  modifies  suggestions 
from  an  operator,  and  sometimes  makes  them  utterly 
ineffective,  is  the  auto-suggestion  of  one's  own  mind. 
This  is  an  element  that  must  always  be  reckoned 
with  by  the  operator  or  healer.  There  are  times 
when  such  persons  are  nonplused  because  of  the  in- 
effectiveness of  their  suggestions,  even  though  they 
had  been  previously  able  to  get  excellent  results  in 
the  hypnotized  or  passive  subject.  The  conscious 
mind  of  the  subject  has  been  giving  the  subconscious 
mind    auto-suggestions    which    have    nullified    the 


6o  SUGGESTION 

power  of  the  operator  or  healer.  The  reason  for  the 
subject  doing  this  may  be  found  in  the  fact  that  he 
was  told  that  he  did  certain  unbecoming  things  when 
hypnotized.  He  then  says  to  himself,  "I  will  not 
do  those  things  again,"  and  as  a  result  the  experi- 
ments are  failures  while  the  person  is  in  the  hypnotic 
condition.    Auto-suggestion  did  it. 

There  have  been  numerous  efforts  to  prove  the 
existence  of  two  minds,  with  varying  success,  from 
Plato  to  Hudson.  This  does  not  interest  us  now, 
but  we  use  the  phrase  "conscious  mind"  as  applied  to 
that  mental  power  which  deals  with  external  condi- 
tions of  life  and  the  phrase  "subconscious  mind"  as 
applying  to  the  essential,  enduring  and  mysterious 
self. 

The  subconscious  mind  has,  under  certain  condi- 
tions, the  power  of  clairvoyance,  clairaudience, 
kinetic  and  telepathic  energy.  The  conscious  mind 
uses  the  cerebro-spinal  nervous  system  and  is  de- 
pendent largely  upon  that  as  an  instrument  of  mani- 
festation, but  the  subconscious  mind  seems  to  mani- 
fest its  phenomena  and  power  independently  of,  and 
at  times  contrary  to,  the  working  of  the  brain  and 
spinal  nerves.  It  probably  uses  directly  the  sympa- 
thetic nervous  system  and  has  an  independent  func- 
tioning entity  or  force. 

Ordinarily  and  normally,  man  is  controlled  by 
reason,  knowledge,  and  the  evidence  of  the  senses. 
When  suggestions  from  others  appeal  to  him  he 
usually  gives  assent.     But  when  he  is  in  a  passive 


THE  SUBCONSCIOUS  MIND  61 

or  hypnotic  condition  he  is  controlled  by  the  influ- 
ence of  another,  and  often  contrary  to  reason  and 
knowledge.  The  stronger  suggestion  will  prevail. 
This  is  philosophical,  because  we  find  that  man  under 
the  influence  of  hypnosis  is  more  than  an  unreasona- 
ble, irresponsible  manikin,  as  some  persons  would 
have  us  believe.  He  has  inherent  power  by  which 
he  can  break  the  spell  which  may  lead  him  to  do 
unvirtuous  acts  which  are  contrary  to  his  moral 
education. 

This  confirms  our  view  that  suggestion  is  the 
power  by  which  the  subconscious  mind  is  controlled 
by  another,  and  auto-suggestion  is  the  inherent 
power  by  which  the  influence  of  another  is  counter- 
acted and  nullified. 

Suggestions  lodged  in  that  mind  can  effect  a  com- 
plete change,  morally  and  physically.  If  mankind 
could  become  in  spirit  "as  a  little  child,"  trusting  in 
God  implicitly,  the  greatest  power  would  be  utilized 
in  the  establishment  of  health  and  equilibrium,  and 
the  results  would  be  untold  in  comfort,  sanity,  and 
blessing.  For  instance,  here  is  one  who  is  suffering 
from  worry,  fear,  and  the  vexations  of  life.  How 
can  he  get  rid  of  these  things  and  relieve  this  suffer- 
ing? Let  him  go  to  a  quiet  room  or  place,  twice  a 
day,  lie  down  and  relax  every  muscle,  assume  com- 
plete indifference  to  those  things  which  worry  him 
and  the  functions  of  the  body,  and  quietly  accept 
what  God,  through  this  law  of  demand  and  supply, 
can  give,  and  in  a  few  days   he   will   find   a   great 


62  SUGGESTION 

change  in  his  feelings,  and  the  sufferings  will  pass 
away  and  life  will  look  bright  and  promising.  Infi- 
nite wisdom  has  established  that  law ;  and  its  utiliza- 
tion by  those  who  are  worried  and  fearful  will  secure 
amazing  results  in  a  short  time. 

The  reader  may  ask  how  this  is  secured.  The  ex- 
planation is  not  far  to  seek.  The  physical  system 
has  been  on  a  severe  strain,  owing  to  depressing 
effects  of  worry  and  fear,  and  has  come  almost  to 
the  point  of  breaking.  Its  nervous  equilibrium  has 
been  greatly  disturbed  and  the  depressed  condition 
has  affected  the  heart  action,  the  digestion,  and  the 
vital  functions.  When  the  person  becomes  quies- 
cent, and  relaxes  the  muscles  by  an  act  of  the  will 
and  persistent  passivity,  the  nerves  have  a  chance  to 
regain  their  normal,  healthful  action,  all  the  func- 
tions of  the  body  commence  to  work  naturally,  the 
health  is  restored,  and  the  unreasonableness  of  fret- 
ting, fearing,  and  worrying  becomes  so  apparent 
that  the  afflicted  one  sees  the  foolishness  of  that 
course  of  life  and  gives  it  up.  The  real  reason  for 
the  change  is  found  in  the  possibility  of  recovery 
by  using  the  laws  that  God  has  placed  within  our 
reach,  and  thus  securing  the  coveted  health  and 
power  for  all  that  we  want  and  ought  to  do.  The 
subliminal  life  is  the  connecting  link  between  man 
and  God,  and  by  obeying  His  laws  one's  life  is  put 
in  contact  with  Infinite  resources  and  all  that  God  is 
able  and  willing  to  give.  Here  is  the  secret  of  all 
the  cures  of  disease  and  the  foundation   for  the 


THE  SUBCONSCIOUS  MIND  63 

possibility  of  a  joyful  existence,  happiness,  and  eter- 
nal life.  Suggestion  is  the  method  of  securing 
what  God  gives,  and  the  mind  is  the  agent  through 
which  these  gifts  are  received.  This  is  not  a  matter 
of  theory,  but  a  fact.  If  any  one  who  is  sick  or 
who  desires  to  be  kept  well  will  have  stated  periods 
of  relaxation,  open-mindedness,  and  faith,  he  can 
prove  the  beneficial  and  unvarying  result  of  this 
method. 


64  SUGGESTION 


CHAPTER  IV. 

3.   The  Relations  of  Suggestion  to  Hypnotism. 

Hypnotism  is  induced  sleep,  and  in  that  condition 
the  subconscious  mind  is  free  and  unhindered  in 
manifesting  its  powers  and  phenomena.  A  good 
definition  of  hypnotism  would  be  a  condition  of  the 
mind  in  which  it  is  easily  and  successfully  impressed 
and  controlled.  ^'Hypnos,  the  god  of  slumber,  loved 
Endymion,  and  sent  him  to  sleep  with  open  eyes, 
that  he  might  always  gaze  upon  his  beauty." 
(Athenaeus  XIII,  564.) 

Suggestion  may  be  imparted  not  only  by  audible 
speech  but  also  by  look,  sign,  symbol,  word,  or 
touch.     {See  classification.) 

Those  suggestions  will  be  the  most  powerful 
where  the  most  senses  are  in  a  receptive  condition. 
A  word  for  the  ear,  a  sign  for  the  eye,  a  touch  for 
the  feeling,  will  more  deeply  affect  the  subconscious 
life  than  if  only  a  word,  or  sign,  or  touch,  is  used. 
This  ought  to  be  considered  by  persons  who  try  to 
cure  disease.  The  ear,  the  eye,  and  the  touch,  are 
the  three  doors  of  general  entrance  into  the  deepest 
nature  or  mind,  and  he  who  knows  how  to  use 
them  effectively  can  control  the  vital  functions  of 
the  body  and  cure  the  diseases  of  mankind. 


HYPNOTISM  65 

Hypnotism  brings  the  conscious  mind  into  a 
quiescent  condition  and  permits  the  subconscious 
mind  to  be  free  to  receive  and  act  upon  suggestions. 
The  greatest  power  of  suggestion  will  be  effective 
on  the  mind  of  a  person  in  a  quiescent  state.  Many 
when  not  hypnotized  will  accept  and  act  on  sugges- 
tions made,  but  the  most  powerful  results  will  occur 
when  a  person  is  utterly  lost  to  his  normal,  conscious 
environment.  The  real  self,  character,  education, 
and  accomplishments  will  be  revealed  in  an  hypno- 
tized subject.  Hence,  you  can  get  out  of  any  human 
being  the  best  that  is  in  him  in  such  a  condition. 

A  person's  dignity,  sobriety,  and  virtue  are  main- 
tained in  hypnosis  by  means  of  auto-suggestion  and 
previous  education.  Hence,  an  operator  must  count 
on  this  subtle  but  essential,  and,  in  some  cases,  great 
power,  in  his  experiments  and  treatments.  Con- 
sciously, the  subject  will  not  act  contrary  to  his 
reason,  knowledge,  and  the  evidence  of  the  senses. 
But,  when  hypnotized,  he  will  act  out  what  he  is 
suggested  to  do,  and  many  things  contrary  to  reason. 

For  instance,  if  an  hypnotized  person  is  told  that 
he  is  Napoleon  he  will  act  out  all  the  knowledge 
which  he  has  gathered  of  that  character.  He  will 
automatically  carry  out  his  conception  of  what  Na- 
poleon would  do.  If  he  is  told  that  he  is  a  school 
teacher,  or  a  preacher,  or  an  orator,  or  a  king,  or  any 
special  character,  not  utterly  abhorrent  to  his  nature, 
he  will  act  out  the  highest  conceptions  that  he  has 
of  those  characters. 


(^  SUGGESTION 

He  can  be  led  to  think  that  devils  are  about  him, 
and  even  in  him ;  he  can,  be  put  into  a  state  of  intox- 
ication by  drinking  a  glass  of  water  or  milk,  by  the 
suggestion  that  it  is  whisky  or  wine,  providing  that 
these  things  are  not  abhorrent.  He  can  be  thrown 
into  a  fever  with  increase  of  pulse  beat,  flushed  face, 
and  actual  rise  of  temperature.  He  can  be  raised 
to  an  exalted  state  of  joy  or  depressed  to  an  infernal 
state  of  despair,  he  may  be  led  to  see  a  vision  of 
angels  or  he  may  be  horrified  by  a  scene  of  demons, 
he  may  be  put  into  a  lethargic  condition  simulating 
death.  The  reason  for  all  this  is  found  in  the  sub- 
conscious mind  controlling  automatically  through 
the  sympathetic  nervous  system  the  vital  functions 
of  the  body  and  by  accepting  and  acting  out  the 
suggestions  given  by  the  operator. 

The  subconscious  mind  does  not  reason  induc- 
tively but  deductively  and,  therefore,  accepts  what 
is  suggested  and  gives  out  what  it  has  received  and 
contains.  The  memory  is  perfect — never  forgets 
anything — and  it  can  reproduce  what  it  knows  when 
the  subconscious  mind  is  untrammelled  by  the  con- 
scious mind.  An  illustration  will  aid  in  understand- 
ing this  statement.  Dr.  Bjormstrom  relates  the  fol- 
lowing experiment  performed  by  Drs.  Liegeois  and 
Liebault : 

"Liegeois  has  succeeded  with  a  suggestion  of  one 
year's  duration.  On  October  12,  1885,  he  hypno- 
tized in  Nancy  a  young  man,  Paul  M.,  already  be- 
fore subjected  to  hypnotic  experiments.     At  10:10 


HYPNOTISM  ej 

a.  m.  he  told  him  during  the  hypnosis  that  the  fol- 
lowing would  happen  to  him  on  the  same  day  one 
year  later.  You  will  go  to  M.  Liebault  in  the  morn- 
ing. You  will  say  that  your  eyes  have  been  well  for 
a  whole  year,  and  for  that  you  are  indebted  to  him 
and  M.  Liegeois.  You  will  express  your  gratitude  to 
both,  and  you  will  ask  permission  to  embrace  both  of 
them,  which  they  will  gladly  allow  you  to  do.  After 
that  you  will  see  a  dog  and  a  trained  monkey  enter 
the  doctor's  room,  one  carrying  the  other.  They 
will  play  various  pranks  and  grimaces,  and  will 
greatly  amuse  you.  Five  minutes  later,  you  will  be- 
hold the  trainer  with  a  trained  bear.  This  man  will 
be  rejoiced  to  find  his  dog  and  his  monkey,  which  he 
thought  he  had  lost ;  in  order  to  please  the  company, 
he  will  let  this  bear  dance  and  you  will  not  be  afraid 
of  him.  Just  as  the  man  is  about  to  leave,  you  will 
ask  M.  Liegeois  to  let  you  have  ten  centimes  to 
give  to  the  dog,  who  will  beg  and  you  will  give  them 
yourself.  These  professors,  at  whose  clinic  the  ex- 
periment was  made,  kept  the  suggestion  a  secret  so 
that  the  subject  might  not  get  any  knowledge  of  it. 

*'One  year  later,  on  October  12,  Liegeois  was 
at  Liebault's  before  9  a.  m.  At  9:39  a.  m.,  as  no- 
body had  arrived,  the  former  considered  the  experi- 
ment a  failure  and  returned  to  his  room.  But  at 
10:10  a.  m.,  Paul  M.  came  to  Liebault  and  thanked 
him,  but  also  asked  for  Liegeois;  the  latter  arrived 
immediately,  having  been  called  by  a  messenger. 
Paul    rose,    rushed  to  meet  him,  and  thanked  him 


68  SUGGESTION 

also.  In  the  presence  of  fifteen  or  twenty  reliable 
witnesses,  the  hallucinations  now  clearly  developed 
themselves  in  Paul,  as  they  had  been  predicted  one 
year  before.  Paul  saw  a  monkey  and  a  dog  enter; 
he  was  amused  by  their  antics  and  grimaces.  Then 
he  saw  the  dog  approach  him  holding  a  box  in  his 
mouth.  Paul  borrowed  ten  centimes  from  Liegeois 
and  made  a  gesture  as  if  to  give  them  to  the  dog. 
Then  the  trainer  came,  took  away  the  monkey  and 
the  dog,  but  no  bear  appeared.  Nor  did  Paul  think 
of  embracing  anyone;  with  the  exception  of  these 
two  details,  the  suggestion  had  been  fulfilled.  The 
experiment  was  ended.  Paul  complained  of  slight 
nervous  weakness.  In  order  to  restore  him,  Lie- 
bault  hypnotized  him,  but  took  the  opportunity  to 
ask  for  information  about  what  had  taken  place. 
'Why  did  you  just  now  see  that  monkey  and  that 
dog?'  'Because  you  gave  me  a  suggestion  of  it  on 
October  12,  1885.'  'Have  you  not  mistaken  the 
hour  ?  I  thought  I  said  at  9  :oo  a.  m.'  'No,  it  is  you 
who  remembers  wrong.  You  did  not  hypnotize  me 
on  the  sofa  I  now  occupy,  but  on  the  one  opposite. 
Then  you  let  me  follow  you  out  into  the  garden, 
and  asked  me  to  return  in  one  year;  just  then,  it 
was  ten  minutes  past  ten,  and  it  was  at  that  hour 
that  I  returned.'  'But  why  did  you  not  see  the  bear, 
and  why  did  you  not  embrace  Liebault  and  me?' 
'Because  you  told  me  that  only  once,  whereas  you 
repeated  the  rest  twice.' 

"All  those  present  were  struck  with  the  precision 


OBJECTIONS  TO  HYPNOTISM  69 

of  his  answers,  and  Liegeois  had  to  acknowledge 
that  Paul's  memory  was  better  than  his  own.  Awak- 
ened after  ten  or  fifteen  minutes,  Paul  was  entirely- 
calm  and  had  no  remembrance  of  what  he  had  just 
said  during  the  hypnosis,  nor  did  he  remember  what 
had  happened  before  it  in  consequence  of  the  sug- 
gestion of  October  12,  1885."  This  is  a  very  re- 
markable incident  and  proves  the  power  of  memory 
of  the  subconscious  mind. 

Section  i.    Objections.. 

There  are  certain  objections  which  some  people 
have  raised  against  hypnotism  that  we  ought  to 
consider  briefly. 

It  has  been  said  that  hypnotism  will: 

1.  Increase  crime. 

2.  Control  people  against  their  wills. 

3.  Slowly  weaken  the  subject's  volition. 

I.  Roger  Sherman  says:  "The  hypnotic  subject 
will  never  commit  a  crime  in  that  state  he  would  not 
commit  in  his  normal  condition."  Dr.  J.  Milne 
Bramwell,  whose  experience  and  investigations  have 
been  very  extensive,  tells  us  that  "improper  sugges- 
tions are  invariably  rejected.  In  no  case  has  it  been 
proved  that  hypnotic  suggestion  has  induced  the 
commission  of  crime  is  not  one  already  criminally 
inclined.  The  hypnotic  subject  is  responsible,  be- 
cause his  moral  nature  does  not  change  in  the  sug- 
gestible state."  Hence,  he  will  not  accept  a  sug- 
gestion in  hypnosis  which  is  in  conflict  with  his 


70  SUGGESTION 

moral  convictions.  It  is  necessary  to  secure  the  con- 
sent of  the  subject  to  carry  out  the  suggestion.  A 
pure  woman  in  hypnosis,  in  the  hands  of  an  evil 
man,  who  attempts  to  do  wrong,  would  either 
awaken,  or  she  would  become  ungovernably  hysteri- 
cal until  the  danger  was  passed.  Hypnotism  is  not 
an  aid  to  crime. 

The  truth  is,  that  it  is  easier  to  make  a  good  man 
out  of  a  bad  one  than  to  make  a  bad  man  out  of  a 
good  one  by  suggestion  and  hypnotism.  These 
things  help  to  correct  crime,  but  they  do  not  assist 
in  committing  wrongdoing  in  morally  educated  and 
normal  persons. 

The  suggestion  is  limited  by  the  resistance  of  the 
subject's  personal  opinion.  The  normal  individuality 
developed  by  education,  the  influence  of  association 
and  good  morals,  make  an  impossible  barrier  to 
criminal  suggestions.  If  such  were  made,  a  con- 
flict would  develop.  The  successful  defense  against 
immoral  suggestions  would  depend  on  the  force  of 
resisting  elements  in  the  subject  and  the  psychical 
shock  caused  by  the  immoral  attempt,  in  which  the 
subject  would  be  aroused  or  thrown  into  such  a  con- 
dition of  excitement  as  to  compel  the  operator  to 
withdraw  the  evil  suggestion.  There  are  several 
very  important  points  to  be  considered : 
I.  The  education,  suggestibility,  morality,  and 
moral  resistance  of  the  subject.  These  things 
must  be  known  before  we  can  determine  the  influ- 
ence of  hypnotism  on  the  subject. 


OBJECTIONS  TO  HYPNOTISM         ^i 

2.  The  delusional  and  ordinary  condition  of  the 
subject,  his  previous  experience  with  hypnotism, 
the  enfeeblement  of  certain  psychical  centers  by 
yielding  ordinarily  to  immoral  thoughts  and  doing 
unvirtuous  acts,  all  of  which  would  determine 
moral  culpability  in  the  ordinary  life  of  the  indi- 
vidual, and  would  not  be  produced  primarily  in  a 
state  of  hypnosis. 

3.  The  profoundness  of  the  sleep,  and  the  state  of 
hypnosis  in  which  the  subject  is  placed,  are  im- 
portant elements  in  determining  the  degree  of  ac- 
countability for  his  actions  or  lack  of  resistance 
to  the  operator's  intrusions. 

"The  author  of  hypnotic  suggestion  can  be  so 
easily  detected  that  malefactors  would  do  better  to 
renounce  the  employment  of  so  doubtful  a  means/' 
Criminal  suggestion  in  a  waking  state  is  attended 
with  certain  dangers,  which  must  be  taken  into  con- 
sideration, and  it  is  very  risky  to  make  it. 

If  an  individual  is  completely  subject  to  the  influ- 
ence of  suggestion,  then  he  should  be  held  irrespon- 
sible. There  may  be  cases  of  this  complete  control, 
but  we  do  not  know  of  them.  It  may  be  possible, 
and  if  it  could  be  indisputably  proven,  then  the  oper- 
ator ought  to  be  held  entirely  responsible  for  the 
subject's  acts.  It  is  a  remarkable  fact  that  sugges- 
tive criminals  are  rarely,  if  ever,  persons  who  are 
normal  and  sane. 

There  are  certain  conditions  in  which  suggestion 
is  curatively  potent,  as  in  hysteria,  neurasthenia, 


72  SUGGESTION 

troubles  in  puberty,  conditions  in  the  climacteric 
period,  and  certain  mental  diseases.  These  condi- 
tions may  be  modified  and  changed,  so  that  it  is 
not  an  objection  against  the  hypnotic  treatment,  but 
a  strong  argument  in  favor  of  it. 

My  contention  is  that  hypnotism  and  suggestion 
are  useful,  helpful,  and  profitable  when  legitimately 
employed.  That  they  may  be  wrongly  and  hurtfuUy 
used,  as  everything  in  nature  can  be,  we  do  not 
doubt.  This  new  science  utilized  in  the  treatment 
of  disease  and  abnormal  conditions  is  in  its  infancy, 
so  that  we  do  not  yet  know  positively  the  extent  of 
the  good  it  can  do.  There  ought  to  be  guards  about 
it,  and  certain  qualifications  ought  to  be  required 
in  practitioners,  thus  provisionally  protecting  the 
public  from  fakirs  and  quacks,  and  hence  aiding  in 
the  legitimate  use  of  this  predominant  and  primary 
power  in  the  cure  of  disease. 

Dr.  Braid  used  the  word  "hypnotism"  as  meaning 
nervous  or  induced  sleep.  Prof.  Liebault,  of  Nancy, 
used  the  same  word,  and  by  means  of  experiments 
he  was  led  to  discover  the  law  of  suggestion.  Prof. 
Bernheim  found  that  Dr.  Braid's  definition  and 
thought  were  too  limited.  His  own  investigations 
proved  that  the  wonderful  results  secured  by  Braid 
in  sleep  could  also  be  obtained  in  a  waking  condi- 
tion of  the  subject.  Hence,  Bernheim  has  defined 
hypnotism  as  "the  induction  of  a  peculiar  psychical 
condition,  which  increases  the  susceptibility  to  sug- 
gestion."    All  persons,  according  to  his  view,  are 


OBJECTIONS  TO  HYPNOTISM  73 

normally  susceptible  to  suggestion.  This  is  true, 
but  the  increased  impressibility  occurs  in  a  state 
of  hypnotism,  and  in  this  condition  the  mind  can  be 
controlled  by  suggestion  to  a  remarkable  degree. 

Because  stage  performers  and  experiments  in  cur- 
ative results  have  been  so  convincing,  it  has  been  in- 
ferred that  hypnotism  could  be  easily  used  as  an  aid 
to  crime.  Paper  daggers  have  been  used  by  a  sub- 
ject, in  an  induced  sleep,  so  that  some  authors  have 
inferred  that  a  steel  dagger  would  be  used  under 
similar  circumstances  to  commit  murder  or  in  self- 
defense.  The  latter  test  has  been  made,  and  it  has 
failed  to  warrant  the  conclusion  theoretically  held 
and  announced.  The  reason  that  a  failure  occurred, 
and  would  occur  in  other  cases  where  crime  could 
be  committed,  is  found  in  the  great  power  of  auto- 
suggestion of  the  subject. 

Auto-suggestion  can  be  classified  as  purposeful, 
moral,  educational,  instinctive,  or  intuitive  and  those 
of  surrounding  conditions.  Any  one  who  has  had  a 
practical  experience  with  such  phenomena  under- 
stands very  well  that  if  contrary  suggestions  are 
made  at  the  same  time  the  subject  will  either 
awaken  or  will  be  puzzled  and  worried  and  may  be- 
come hysterical. 

The  purposeful  auto-suggestion  is  one  which  the 
subject  makes  to  himself  before  hypnotism,  in  order 
that  he  may  not  do  unseemly  or  ridiculous  things. 
Suggestions  by  the  operator  which  antagonize  or 
contradict  the  subject's  intention,  will  awaken  him 


74  SUGGESTION 

or  cause  him  to  do  nothing  or  to  simulate  a  few 
things  for  the  fun  which  may  be  gotten  out  of  it  for 
himself  or  friends. 

Moral  and  educational  training  becomes  an  essen- 
tial and  vital  part  of  one's  individuality.  If  the  sub- 
ject in  an  hypnotic  condition  is  told  to  do  a  crimi- 
nal act,  or  if  an  unvirtuous  suggestion  is  made  to 
him,  he  will  suddenly  awaken  or  by  shock  become 
rebellious  or  extremely  nervous.  If  the  person  in  a 
natural  condition  would  do  wrong  or  commit  crim- 
inal acts,  he  would  do  so  when  hypnotized,  but  that 
is  no  argument  against  hypnotism.  By  virtue  of  a 
moral  life  and  educational  training  the  hypnotist 
cannot  absolutely  control  the  subject's  will. 

Instinctive  or  intuitional  protection  is  one  of  the 
first,  strongest,  and  most  remarkable  characteristics 
of  man's  nature.  These  instincts  are  especially 
strong  in  women.  Th«y  are  in  many  respects  the 
basis  of  self-preservation,  self-defense,  and  repro- 
duction. Women  seem  to  scent  danger  and  things 
that  are  palpably  and  criminally  wrong,  and  they 
intuitively  raise  a  protest  that  cannot  be  broken 
down  by  outside  suggestion. 

Auto-suggestion  of  surrounding  circumstances 
has  also  inherent  protection  for  the  subject.  The 
experiments  to  be  performed,  their  object,  and  the 
character  of  the  person  experimenting,  all  have  a 
favorable  or  adverse  influence  on  the  subject,  thus 
helping  to  put  him  on  his  guard. 

We  can  easily  see  how  futile  many  of  the  labora- 


OBJECTIONS  TO  HYPNOTISM  75 

tory  tests  have  been  in  reaching  any  satisfactory 
conclusions  of  value,  in  settling  the  question  whether 
a  hypnotized  person  can  be  employed  or  will  partici- 
pate in  committing  crime. 

If  the  subject  is  among  friends,  he  will  not  act 
violently  against  his  or  their  highest  interests.  If 
he  is  among  strangers,  his  subconscious  mind  would 
urge  caution.  Dr.  James  R.  Cocke,  in  his  book, 
"Hypnotism ;  How  It  is  Done ;  Its  Uses  and  Dang- 
ers," has  given  an  account  of  some  experiments 
which  confirm  our  conclusion.  He  had  the  courage 
to  make  a  practical  experiment  in  this  line.  Stand- 
ing before  a  deeply-hypnotized  subject  he  placed  a 
piece  of  cardboard  in  her  hands,  telling  her  that  it 
was  a  dagger  and  commanded  her  to  stab  him. 
The  command  was  immediately  obeyed.  He  then 
handed  her  an  open  pocket-knife  and  commanded 
her  to  stab  him.  She  raised  her  hand  as  if  to  obey 
the  command  but  hesitated  and  immediately  had  an 
hysterical  attack  which  ended  the  experiment.  The 
doctor  says :  "I  have  tried  similar  experiments  upon 
thirty  or  forty  people  with  similar  results." 

2.  The  foundation  for  the  statement  that 
hypnotism  is  an  aid  to  crime  is  the  deduc- 
tion from  certain  experiments.  These  experi- 
ments are  largely  valueless  because  of  the 
power  of  auto-suggestion  which  have  nulli- 
fied their  real  merit.  These  experiments  neither 
prove  that  hypnotism  aids  crime  nor  that  it 
does  not,  so  that  either  new  experiments  or  other 


76  SUGGESTION 

grounds  than  those  which  are  presented,  are  neces- 
sary to  settle  this  question.  If  a  criminal  would 
commit  a  crime  when  hypnotized,  that  does  not  in- 
validate our  statements,  because  he  would  do  that 
when  not  in  that  condition.  He  who  tries  to  justify 
on  his  part,  a  criminal  act  as  the  result  of  hypno- 
tism, is  very  probably  a  criminal. 

As  an  intoxicated  person  is  not  held  irresponsible 
for  a  criminal  act,  so  no  one  in  a  hypnotized  condi- 
tion committing  a  crime  could  be  held  guiltless,  as 
both  could  exercise  their  wills  at  first  against  intoxi- 
cation and  hypnotism.  However,  in  the  latter  case, 
as  we  have  said,  auto-suggestion  will  keep  back  a 
moral  person  who  is  hypnotized  from  committing  a 
criminal  act.  The  many  problems  and  intricacies 
connected  with  this  subject  would  take  a  medium- 
sized  volume  to  discuss.  The  conclusion  of  the 
whole  matter  is,  that  as  far  as  can  be  ascertained, 
and  in  the  light  of  all  that  we  know,  hypnotism  can- 
not be  used  as  an  aid  in  committing  criminal  acts 
by  one  who  is  moral. 

Criminal  suggestions  do  not  offer  any  dangers 
to  individuals  who  are  normally  constituted,  and  who 
have  the  faculty  of  moral  resistance  well  developed. 
There  may  be  danger  on  the  part  of  psycopathics, 
moral  defectives,  hysterical  persons,  or  the  feeble- 
minded, all  of  whom  might  be  induced  in  a  wakeful 
state  to  do  wrong. 

Hypnotism  could  not  justifiably  be  blamed  for  the 
things  that  would  be  done  in  the  wakeful  state,  be- 


OBJECTIONS  TO  HYPNOTISM  y-j 

cause  of  lack  of  moral  resistance.  Hence,  the  ob- 
jection that  hypnotism  could  be  used  as  an  ally  of 
crime  or  abettor  of  vice,  is  not  valid. 

3.  Another  objection  has  been  raised  against 
hypnotism,  in  that  it  is  said  to  enfeeble  the  will. 
It  may  be  possible  to  abuse  this  power  by  over- 
use, but  the  cases  in  which  this  has  been  done  are 
not  numerous,  if  there  are  any  of  them.  That  it 
may  be  used  so  that  one's  will  may  be  enfeebled, 
I  am  not  willing  to  deny.  But  when  it  is  legiti- 
mately and  helpfully  used,  it  is  one  of  the 
greatest  and  noblest  agencies  that  God  has 
placed  within  the  reach  of  man  by  which 
to  help  the  weak  will  of  the  morally  infirm  and  of 
the  enslaved.  There  is  not  a  blessing  or  a  natural 
gift  which  cannot  be  made  a  curse.  That  is  a  poor 
argument  that  hypnotism  should  not  be  used  since 
it  may  be  abused,  as  it  would  be  illogical  to  say  that 
an  appetite  which  may  be  abused  should  not  be  ex- 
ercised. I  am  opposed  to  public  and  stage  perform- 
ances. They  do  nothing  except  to  administer  to 
curiosity  and  enrich  the  man  in  charge.  That  the 
phenomena  manifested  are  generally  genuine  is  not 
questioned,  but  the  spectacular  demonstrations  are 
needless,  and  do  not  secure  any  permanent  benefit 
to  the  subjects.  The  constant  hypnotization  of  a 
subject  may  have  a  weakening  effect  on  the  brain, 
so  that  he  may  become  stupid  or  an  imbecile.  That 
is  an  abuse.  Many  of  the  objections  to  the  use  of 
hypnotism  may  be  also  urged  as  dangers. 


78  SUGGESTION 

Section  2.    Dangers. 

1.  One  danger  which  has  been  urged  by  some 
mental  ahenists  is  that  hypnotism  establishes  a  .pa-, 
thological^  condition  which  will  have  to  be  cor- 
rected. This  is  purely  hypothetical,  as  it  does  not 
accord  with  the  facts.  Since  hypnotism  is  used  to 
correct  pathological  conditions,  to  produce  nor- 
mality, to  change  mental  aberrations,  to  establish 
a  condition  of  chastity  in  place  of  impurity,  to  de- 
stroy bad  habits,  to  bring  about  health  instead  of 
sickness ;  and  if  in  the  face  of  these  results  it  is  char- 
acterized as  a  pathological  condition,  there  must  be 
something  seriously  wrong  with  the  mind  that  can 
thus  argue.  Is  the  ordinary  sleep  pathological?  It 
may  be  called  so,  if  hypnotic  sleep  can  be,  as  there 
is  a  great  similarity  between  them.  Those  who 
urge  this  danger  either  have  not  had  the  experience 
in  the  utilization  of  suggestion,  or  they  do  not  un- 
derstand anything  about  the  workings  of  the  sub- 
conscious mind,  and  the  results  of  such  activities. 
There  is  a  definite  limit  to  suggestion  causing  evil- 
doing  or  abnormal  conditions ;  but  no  one  knows  the 
extent  to  which  it  may  be  used  as  an  influence  for 
good.  This  assumed  danger  has  not  perplexed  and 
never  will  worry  anyone  who  practises  suggestive 
therapeutics  for  the  purpose  of  helping  mankind 
and  developing  the  best  that  is  in  the  human  soul. 

2.  Another  danger  urged  is  one  that  pertains  to 
the  hypnotized  subject.  It  is  said  that  one  who  has 
been  hypnotized  can  thus  be  controlled  against  his 


DANGERS  OF  HYPNOTISM  79 

will  and  that  he  is  unable  to  look  anyone  in  the  face 
without  feeling  an  irresistible  impulse  to  sleep. 
This  is  some  more  guess  work  by  persons  who  are 
quick  in  filing  objections,  but  who  are  inexperienced 
in  the  knowledge  of  psychological  and  hypnotic 
phenomena.  One  who  has  been  hypnotized  can  ex- 
ercise his  auto-suggestion  to  such  a  degree  that  the 
operator  can  do  nothing.  I  have  found  that  those 
who  have  been  put  into  a  deep  hypnosis  can  look 
any  one  in  the  eye  in  conversation  and  not  feel  the 
impulse  to  sleep. 

There  may  be  hysterical  persons  who  cannot  stand 
the  gaze  of  another,  but  that  is  not  due  to  their 
having  been  hypnotized,  but  to  a  nervous  condition. 
There  are  many  people  who  cannot  look  others  in 
the  eyes  for  various  reasons.  We  have  said  that 
constant  hypnotizing  a  weak-minded  person,  or  one 
of  a  comparatively  strong  mind,  may  produce  a  mor- 
bid condition  of  the  brain,  but  that  is  an  abuse  of  a 
good  thing,  which  is  not  to  be  encouraged.  The 
fact  that  certain  adverse  conditions  may  be  produced 
by  the  abuse  of  hypnotism  is  no  argument  against 
its  legitimate  use. 

3.  Some  have  urged  as  a  danger  the  possibility 
of  an  evil  operator  taking  advantage  of  the  subject. 
We  have  rather  at  length  answered  this  argument 
or  objection,  and  shall  only  say  here  that  this  danger 
is  very  limited.  There  is  far  less  risk  in  this,  than 
in  the  use  of  chloroform,  ether,  or  any  hypnotic 
drugs,  because  in  hypnosis  the  subconscious  mind, 


8o  SUGGESTION 

through  intuition,  raises  a  barrier  against  evil  en- 
croachments, and  the  subject  will  awaken,  or  a  con- 
dition which  will  give  warning  to  the  operator  will 
be  produced. 

4.  The  danger  urged  by  others  that  it  would  be 
possible  to  make  a  hypnotized  person  sign  checks, 
forge  papers,  make  promises,  and  thus  produce  com- 
plications which  would  be  detrimental  to  himself,  is 
also  hypothetical.  Legally  this  danger  is  one  whica 
could  be  applied  to  stupefying  drugs,  intoxication, 
or  over-persuasion,  and  is  not  confined  to  hypnotism. 
The  law  can  and  does  deal  with  these  things. 

5.  Other  persons  contend  that  hypnotism  injures 
the  health.  We  call  for  the  proof.  That  it  greatly 
assists  in  the  recovery  of  health,  changing  abnormal 
conditions,  aberrations,  and  the  like,  no  one  will 
deny,  but  we  positively  protest  against  the  statement 
that  it  will  injure  the  health  when  used  scientifically 
and  legitimately.  Hypnotism  may  be  used  carelessly 
and  ignorantly  and  harm  may  result.  So  may  a 
knife  and  other  powerful  agencies  be  used  care- 
lessly, but  this  is  no  objection  against  the  proper  use 
of  these  things. 

6.  There  is  one  danger  to  the  operator  which  it 
might  be  well  to  consider.  There  is  a  possibility  that 
some  evil-minded  subject  might  bring  accusations 
against  him  for  a  blackmailing  purpose.  Such  a 
subject  after  hypnosis,  may  for  the  purpose  of  ob- 
taining money,  make  false  statements  and  charges. 
This  has  also  been  done  when  persons  have  come  out 


DANGERS  OF  HYPNOTISM  8i 

from  under  the  influence  of  chloroform  or  other 
anaesthetics.  The  operator  ought  to  protect  him- 
self by  the  presence  of  another  person,  either  in  the 
room  where  he  and  the  subject  are,  or  in  an  adjoin- 
ing room. 

7.  Dangers  may  arise  from  want  o£,Jknowledge, 
through  carelessness,  by  intentional  abuse,  in  igno- 
rance or  frequency  of  inducing  hypnosis.  The 
legitimate,  scientific,  and  therapeutic  use  of  this 
method  is  to  be  commended,  not  condemned.  Cer- 
tain restraints  legally  ought  to  be  thrown  around 
hypnotic  therapeutics  so  as  tofput  a  stop  to  public  ex- 
hibitions, and  to  prevent  imposters,  charlatans,  fak- 
irs, and  some  classes  of  psychics  and  healers  from 
using  and  abusing  this  most  beneficial  agency. 


SUGGESTION 


CHAPTER  V. 

4.  The  Relations  of  Suggestion  to  Extraordinary 
Phenomena. 

There  are  many  extraordinary  phenomena  which 
have  not  had  a  scientific  explanation.  Many  people 
have  attributed  them  to  supernatural,  rather  than 
to  supernormal,  causes.  It  is  not  necessary  or  logi- 
cal to  assume  a  supernatural  cause  if  a  scientific  ex- 
planation can  be  found  in  the  sphere  of  the  natural. 
The  infinite  God  has  created  all  things  and  endowed 
them  with  certain  laws.  We,  therefore,  conclude 
that  He  has  established  laws  by  which  everything 
is  governed.  The  flash  of  lightning,  the  roar  of 
thunder,  the  attraction  of  gravitation,  the  falling 
rain,  the  chilling  winds,  the  movements  of  man,  the 
activities  of  animals,  the  destructive  cyclone,  the 
tides  of  the  sea,  the  thoughts  of  the  mind,  the  affec- 
tions of  the  heart,  the  conditions  and  manifestations 
of  life,  are  all  governed  by  law.  We  also  conclude 
that  the  extraordinary  phenomena,  which  at  times 
seem  so  mysterious,  are  governed  by  certain  laws, 
some  of  which  we  know,  concerning  others,  of  which 
we  have  only  a  faint  knowledge. 

There  are  many  of  these  phenomena  and  they 
seem  to  be  increasing  rather  than  diminishing  in 


EXTRAORDINARY  PHENOMENA       Ss 

number.  It  would  take  a  large  volume  to  discuss 
and  elaborate  all  of  them,  but  some  of  the  best 
known  ought  to  be  briefly  presented  and  their  re- 
lation to  suggestion  indicated. 

There  are  some  things  that  have  been  claimed  as 
extraordinary  and  supernatural  in  origin  which  have 
fallen  into  the  ordinary  and  natural  sphere  of  life 
and  operation.  Other  remarkable  things  can  only  be 
rightfully  called  untrue  and  fraudulent.  There  is 
much  of  these  elements  in  spiritism,  theosophy,  and 
the  occult.  We  should  guardedly  watch  against 
the  advocacy  of  anything  that  has  not  good  evi- 
dence, and  quite  an  amount  of  it,  to  establish  its 
claim  for  adoption  by  any  reasonable  person.  There 
are  a  number  of  mystical  things  (not  mysterious,  as 
the  actors  know  the  secrets  or  methods  by  which 
they  are  done),  which  have  been  investigated  by 
others  and  found  to  be  untrue.  We  have  no  reason 
to  reject  their  conclusions.  They  have  carried  on 
their  investigations  without  mental  bias  for  or 
against  these  things,  and  their  conclusions  are  at 
least  worthy  of  consideration  and  generally  of 
adoption.  The  English  Society  of  Psychical  Re- 
search has  been  a  pioneer  in  these  investigations  and 
certain  deductions  have  been  made  and  announced 
that  are  worthy  of  the  acceptance  of  all  thoughtful 
students.    Some  of  those  conclusions  are: 

I.  That  "Indian  Magic"  is  a  gigantic  and  ancient 
system  of  trickery,  which  has  no  supernormal  basis. 


84  SUGGESTION 

2.  That  the  heavenly  bodies  do  not  indicate  or 
influence  in  an  occult  way  the  destinies  of  men. 

3.  That  Mahatmas  do  not  exist  in  Thibet,  and 
that  Mme.  Blavatsky's  occult  performances  and 
those  of  her  friends  and  followers  were  tricks  and 
therefore  not  worthy  of  consideration  and  accept- 
ance as  genuine. 

4.  That  the  lines  in  a  man's  hand  do  not  indicate 
his  history,  character,  and  destiny. 

5.  That  the  water  of  Lourdes  and  other  so-called 
sacred  springs  have  no  supernatural  virtue  in  them. 

6.  That  public  showmen,  or  mediums,  whether 
public  or  private,  have  no  right  to  claim  super- 
natural or  supernormal  powers  for  their  perform- 
ances. 

The  investigations  of  others,  and  my  own  personal 
investigation,  lead  me  to  concur  in  these  conclusions 
and  accept  them  as  logically  and  scientifically  cor- 
rect. The  clever  and  the  unscrupulous  have  from 
time  immemorial  gulled  the  simple  and  the  credu- 
lous by  intrigue,  machinations,  trickery,  and  the 
manifestations  of  a  semblance  of  psychic  pheno- 
mena. All  that  is  supernormal  in  those  phenomena 
are  a  number  of  rudimentary  psychical  features 
which  can  be  easily  produced  and  understood,  and 
which  can  explain  all  that  is  valuable  in  such  mysti- 
fying manifestations.  This  is  a  day  of  frauds,  im- 
posters,  and  fakirs,  and  it  is  time  to  put  a  lot  of  this 
tomfoolery  out  of  the  way  of  innocent  gullibles. 
The  fortune-teller,  the  spiritistic  medium,  the  palm- 


EXTRAORDINARY  PHENOMENA       85 

ist,  the  occultist,  and  some  other  nondescripts,  ought 
to  be  arrested  and  put  out  of  business  by  the  law 
that  convicts  and  imprisons  people  for  getting 
money  under  false  pretenses. 

Here  is  an  item  that  illustrates  the  way  some  per- 
sons are  violating  the  law  of  the  land,  conscience, 
and  common  sense.  "A  woman  in  Florida  with 
some  of  her  relatives  was  held  for  trial  by  the 
United  States  Commissioners  on  a  charge  of  using 
the  mails  for  fraudulent  purposes.  Mental  healing 
was  being  dispensed  by  absent  treatment,  for  so 
much  per  treatment,  and  they  had  gathered  in  about 
$2,000  a  month.  The  postal  authorities  made  inves- 
tigation and  found  that  she  had  specified  certain 
hours  during  which  she  promised  to  devote  her 
mental  thought  to  protecting  the  health  of  her 
patients  all  over  the  country.  They  also  found  that 
in  those  hours  the  woman,  instead  of  retiring  into 
solitude  and  sending  out  thought  vibrations  to  the 
sick,  would  go  fishing  or  indulge  in  social  diver- 
sions of  various  kinds.  They  also  discovered  that 
she  did  not  answer  her  confiding  patients  personally, 
but  turned  the  letters  over  to  clerks,  marking  on 
them  the  amount  to  be  acknowledged  or  charged." 

The  essential  element  which  was  utilized  by  the 
patients  was  auto-suggestion,  from  which  they  got 
an  effect  that  was  valuable.  The  thought  sent  to 
them  was  found  in  the  written  or  printed  instruc- 
tions which  they  had  received,  and  not  in  the  vibrat- 
ing thought  of  the  operator  at  a  certain  hour,  as  an 


86  SUGGESTION 

effort  on  her  part.  I  do  not  say  that  thought  cannot 
be  transmitted,  for  it  can  be  communicated  to  a 
receptive  mind,  and  has  been  over  long  distances. 
But  there  is  a  vast  difference  between  telepathic  com- 
munication and  a  fraudulent  playing  for  money,  as 
in  the  above  case  and  in  other  cases. 

There  are  extraordinary  phenomena  that  have  in 
them  certain  elements  of  reality  which  can  only  be 
explained  by  the  utilization  of  the  laws  that  have 
been  discovered  in  the  latter  part  of  the  last  century. 
We  shall  now  consider  some  of  these  phenomena. 

Section  i.    Dreams. 

What  is  a  dream?  If  we  can  get  a  clear,  philoso- 
phical definition,  it  will  simplify  matters  very  much. 
Webster  defines  a  dream  as  "A  thought  or  series  of 
thoughts  of  a  person  in  sleep;  the  states  or  the  acts 
of  the  soul  during  sleep;  a  series  of  connected  acts 
or  states  of  this  kind,  the  objects  of  which  are  imag- 
ined to  be  real ;  a  sleeping  vision."  That  is  a  reas- 
onably good  definition.  However,  it  is  more  of  a 
description  than  a  definition.  The  Standard  Dic- 
tionary defines  a  dream  as  "A  train  of  thoughts, 
images,  or  fantasies  passing  through  the  mind  in 
sleep,  ordinarily  without  the  control  of  the  will  and 
the  higher  rational  powers;  one  of  the  forms  of 
fantasy  in  sleep;  also,  the  state  of  mind  in  which 
such  an  experience  occurs."  This  definition  is  better 
than  the  other,  as  some  elements  are  introduced 
which  Webster  omits.    A  dream  occurs  during  sleep. 


DREAMS  87 

and  it  is,  therefore,  different  from  a  vision,  which 
usually  occurs  in  the  waking  state. 

Recalling  what  has  been  said  about  the  conscious 
and  the  subconscious  mind,  it  will  be  necessary  to 
give  another  definition  of  a  dream  more  comprehen- 
sive than  the  elements  presented  in  these  definitions. 
A  dream  is  that  state  of  the  mind  which  is  charac- 
terized by  an  absence  of  consciousness  concerning 
one's  environment,  and  a  cessation  of  voluntary 
control  of  the  thoughts,  so  that  the  principle  of  sug- 
gestion, one  thought  calling  up  another  by  the  law 
of  association,  has  free  course  and  uncontrolled 
operation. 

The  elements,  therefore,  that  are  presented  in  a 
dream  depend  on  the  suggestion  that  comes  into  the 
mind.  The  characteristics  of  the  dream  are  the  ab- 
sence of  consciousness  as  to  environment,  lack  of 
voluntary  control,  the  activity  of  the  principle  of 
suggestion,  and  its  unhindered  operation. 

Physiology  teaches  that  our  perceptions  take  place 
in  the  hemispheres  of  the  cortex  of  the  brain,  and 
not  in  our  sense  organs.  These  perceptions  are  the 
combined  results  of  consciousness  or  conscious  sen- 
sations, and  of  past  memories  with  which  they  are 
and  can  be  associated.  This  explains  why  dreams 
appear  no  less  real  than  the  sensations  in  the  nor- 
mal state  of  waking  consciousness,  and  also  ex- 
plains the  regnant  facts  of  nervous  activity.  For 
instance,  if  a  sensory  fibre  is  irritated  in  sleep  by 
external  or  internal  causes,  that  irritation  is  carried 


88  SUGGESTION 

by  the  sensory  nerves  to  its  cortical  center,  and  it 
will  often  produce  a  condition  in  which  there  will 
be  a  reviving  of  former  memories,  in  the  same  man- 
ner as  by  normal  sensation.  If  the  mind  is  impressed 
by  something  seen  or  felt  or  by  a  line  of  thought, 
it  may  be  reproduced  in  a  dream.  Problems  have 
been  solved  and  intricate  things  performed  under 
these  circumstances.  We  know  of  several  interest- 
ing cases  which  illustrate  these  statements.  A  man 
arose  one  night  in  his  sleep  and  solved  a  problem 
over  which  he  had  been  puzzled  several  days  and  put 
his  solution  on  a  piece  of  paper  and  that  into  a  table 
drawer.  The  next  day  he  had  occasion  to  open  the 
drawer  and  found  the  complete  solution  of  the 
knotty  problem.  He  was  perplexed  at  first,  but 
recalled  that  he  had  dreamed  that  he  had  worked 
out  the  problem.  His  room-mate  also  informed  him 
that  he  had  arisen  in  his  sleep,  worked  out  the 
problem,  and  went  back  to  bed  unconscious  of  what 
he  had  done. 

We  give  here  a  brief  statement  taken  from  a  Phil- 
adelphia paper — The  Press — which  is  in  line  with 
the  discussion.  Prof.  Herman  V.  Hilprecht,  profes- 
sor of  Assyrian  and  Comparative  Semitic  Philology, 
in  the  University  of  Pennsylvania,  gives  the  report 
of  a  remarkable  revelation  made  in  a  dream : 

"Prof.  W.  R.  Brown,  assistant  professor  of 
philosophy  in  that  University,  who  first  made  Prof. 
H.'s  mysterious  experiences  public,  undertakes,  in 
a  way,  to  account  for  them  on  the  basis  of  natural 


DREAMS  89 

causes.  It  is  pointed  out  that  whereas  the  revela- 
tions of  Prof.  Hyslop,  of  Columbia,  from  across  the 
boundaries  of  the  unseen  world,  were  limited  to 
matters  of  such  dubious  value  as  data  regarding 
lost  jack-knives  and  the  former  locality  of  extinct 
rail-fences  out  in  Indiana,  those  of  Prof.  Hilprecht 
were  of  distinct  value.  The  remarkable  event  was 
reported  to  the  Society  for  Psychic  Research  and  is 
recorded  in  its  reports. 

"Prof.  Newbold,  of  the  University  of  Pennsyl- 
vania, who  has  undertaken  to  give  an  explanation 
of  Prof.  Hilprecht's  vision,  advanced  the  theory, 
that  Prof.  H.  unconsciously  reasoned  out  his  facts. 
Prof.  H.  had  heard  from  Prof.  Peters,  who  went 
with  the  expedition,  that  a  room  had  been  discovered 
with  fragments  of  a  wooden  box  and  chips  of  agate 
and  lapis  lazuli  scattered  about  it.  The  sleeping 
mind  combined  its  information,  reasoned  correctly 
from  it,  and  threw  its  own  conclusions  into  a  dra- 
matic form,  involving  the  vision  of  a  priest  of  Nip- 
pur and  the  interesting  tale  he  told. 

"But  this  is  not  the  only  curious  experience  of  the 
same  sort  Prof.  H.  has  had.  On  another  occasion 
he  was  working  on  an  inscription  wherein  came  the 
words  'Nebu-Kudurru-Usur.'  These  words  had  been 
translated  by  Prof.  Delitszch  as  meaning,  'Nebu 
protect  my  mortar  board.'  Prof.  H.  had  accepted 
this  version,  but  went  to  bed  one  night  and  dreamed 
that  he  saw  the  words  before  him  with  their  trans- 
lation, which  was  *Nebu  protect  my  boundaries.' 


90  SUGGESTION 

This  seemed  to  him  a  more  plausible  rendition,  and 
it  is  now  accepted  as  the  proper  translation." 

"Probably  we  do  a  great  deal  of  reasoning  in  our 
sleep,"  says  Prof.  Andrew  Lang,  referring  to  these 
strange  experiences  of  Prof.  Hilprecht,  "I  myself, 
when  working  at  the  manuscripts  of  the  exiled 
Stuarts  was  puzzled  by  the  scorched  appearance  of 
those  on  which  Prince  Charlie's  and  the  King's  let- 
ters were  written,  and  by  the  peculiarities  of  the  ink. 
I  woke  one  morning  with  a  sudden  flash  of  common- 
sense.  Sympathetic  ink  had  been  used,  and  the 
paper  had  been  toasted  with  acid.  This  I  had  reas- 
oned out  in  my  sleep,  and  if  my  dream  had  hap- 
pened to  have  taken  on  a  dramatic  form  it  is  not  un- 
likely that  a  vision  of  old  Edgar,  the  King's  secre- 
tary, might  have  appeared  to  me  and  given  me  the 
explanations." 

The  explanations  given  by  Professors  Newbold 
and  Lang,  we  believe,  are  the  correct  ones,  and  I  am 
sure  that  the  subconscious  mind  had  much  to  do 
with  these  discoveries,  and  with  many  others  re- 
ported by  other  persons.  If  the  circumstances  under 
which  phantoms  appear  were  more  carefully  inves- 
tigated, we  should  doubtless  find,  in  a  large  number 
of  instances,  a  very  close  correspondence  between 
the  different  spectral  visitants  beheld  and  the  sur- 
roundings, and  other  incidents  connected  with  the 
subjects  of  such  visitations.  Our  hallucinations  and 
dreams  are  largely  colored  by  our  prevailing 
thoughts,  and  the  conditions  of  life  under  which 


DREAMS  91 

we  exist  when  the  phantasms  and  the  visions  of  the 
night  come  to  us.  Frequently,  material  things,  in 
the  way  of  surroundings,  may  affect  us,  if  they  do 
not  actually  initiate  the  genesis  of  a  ghost. 

There  is  a  condition  that  simulates  dreaming 
which  is  produced  by  drugs  like  opium,  hashsheesh, 
etc.,  but  that  is  an  abnormal  condition  and  does  not 
belong  to  dreaming  in  the  ordinary  acceptation  of 
that  term.  De  Quincey  had  hideous  phantasms 
when  he  was  drugged  with  opium.  Read  his  con- 
fessions if  you  desire  to  see  some  of  the  most  har- 
rowing and  graphic  descriptions  in  the  English 
language. 

Many  wonderful  things  have  been  received  in 
dreams  when  the  conscious  mind  has  been  quiescent 
Thoughts  have  been  caught  up,  warnings  have  been 
received,  plots  have  been  worked  out,  and  revela- 
tions have  been  unfolded.  We  are  referring  to 
dreams  that  have  in  them  valuable  information,  and 
not  to  dreams  that  are  the  result  of  a  disordered 
liver,  an  overloaded  stomach,  and  a  wild  imagina- 
tion. 

Robert  Louis  Stevenson  says  that  he  owed  sev- 
eral of  his  plots  and  situations  to  the  inspiration  of 
dreams.  "The  Strange  Case  of  Dr.  Jekyll  and  Mr. 
Hyde"  was  one  of  his  first  novels  to  excite  wide- 
spread interest,  although  he  had  previously  written 
a  number  of  books  which  appeal  to  many  readers. 
He  had  been  trying  to  write  a  story  on  the  dual 
nature  of  man,  but  could  not  create  a  satisfactory 


92  SUGGESTION 

plot  by  which  to  illustrate  it.  He  dreamed  of  the 
scene  at  the  window,  in  which  Dr.  Jekyll,  fearing  his 
immediate  transformation  into  the  monster  Hyde, 
talked  to  his  anxious  friends  in  the  street  below. 
He  also  dreamed  of  the  manner  in  which  Hyde,  pur- 
sued for  the  crime  of  murder,  took  the  fatal  powder 
and  underwent  the  change  in  the  presence  of  his 
pursuers. 

The  weird  story  of  *^01alla"  was  also  the  result 
of  a  dream.  The  court,  the  mother,  Olalla,  Olalla's 
chamber,  the  meeting  on  the  stair,  the  broken  win- 
dow, the  ugly  scene  of  the  bite,  were  all  revealed  in 
detail  while  Stevenson  was  in  the  land  of  dreams. 
He  added  only  the  characters  Felipe  and  the  priest, 
the  portrait,  the  external  scenery,  and  the  moral. 

Here  is  an  historical  case  of  forewarning  in  a 
dream.  It  is  a  case  of  a  gentleman  from  Cornwall, 
England,  who  dreamed,  eight  days  before  the  event, 
that  he  saw  Percival,  Chancellor  of  the  Exchequer, 
murdered  in  the  lobby  of  the  House  of  Commons. 
After  the  assassination,  he  distinctly  recognized 
from  prints  both  Bellingham,  the  assassin,  and  his 
victim,  neither  of  whom  he  had  seen  previously.  It 
should  be  remembered  also  that  the  gentleman  was 
dissuaded  by  his  friends  from  going  to  London  to 
warn  the  Chancellor  of  the  Exchequer.  He  pleaded 
that  the  dream  had  occurred  three  times  in  the  same 
night,  but  as  his  friends  thought  it  a  fool's  errand, 
he  listened  to  them,  and  allowed  the  matter  to  drop 
till  the  news  of  the  assassination  brought  it  all  back. 


DREAMS  93 

Dr.  Horace  Bushnell  gives  a  remarkable  incident 
in  his  work,  "Nature  and  the  Supernatural."  He 
says  that  he  was  sitting  by  the  fire,  one  stormy  No- 
vember night,  in  a  hotel  parlor  in  the  Napa  Valley, 
California,  when  a  venerable  looking  person  named 
Capt.  Yount  entered.  He  was  an  old  trapper  who 
had  lived  in  California  more  than  forty  years,  and 
had  acquired  a  large  estate.  He  told  of  a  dream 
which  he  had  six  or  seven  years  previously,  in  which 
he  saw  what  appeared  to  be  a  company  of  immi- 
grants held  by  the  snows  of  the  mountains  and 
perishing  rapidly  of  cold  and  hunger.  In  the  vivid 
dream,  he  saw  a  huge  cliff,  the  faces  of  the  suffer- 
ing, and  their  looks  or  despair.  He  awoke,  but  after- 
wards fell  asleep  again  and  dreamed  precisely  the 
same  thing.  He  was  so  much  impressed  that  he  told 
an  old  hunter,  shortly  afterwards,  who  declared 
that  he  knew  a  spot  that  exactly  corresponded  to 
the  description.  Capt.  Yount  with  a  company  of 
men  with  mules,  blankets,  provisions,  etc.,  hurried 
to  the  Carson  Pass,  one  hundred  and  fifty  miles 
away,  where  they  found  the  immigrants  exactly  in 
the  condition  in  which  he  saw  them  in  the  dream, 
and  brought  in  the  remnant  alive. 

Coleridge  composed  poetry  when  asleep,  and  one 
of  the  most  eminent  of  living  American  novelists, 
Wm.  D.  Howells,  has  confessed  that  his  dreams 
sometimes  carry  him  back  to  the  Middle  Ages,  and 
that  at  such  times  he  has  on  a  mediaeval  dress  and 
is  in  mediaeval  mood.    He  so  identifies  himself  with 


94  SUGGESTION 

the  people  of  his  dream  that  he  accepts  treachery, 
violence,  and  bloodshed  as  a  part  of  his  daily  exist- 
ence. The  morals  of  those  times  seem  to  have  no 
permanent  influence  over  his  wandering  soul,  but 
compassion  and  pity  await  the  dreamer's  return  to 
his  time.  There  is  something  very  suggestive  about 
this  when  it  is  remembered  that  Howells  is  one  of 
the  most  sympathetic  men,  and  is  easily  moved  to 
pity  by  the  sight  of  human  suffering.  These  facts 
seem  to  show  that  while  the  body  is  in  slumber  the 
mind  is  absolutely  free  and  not  confined  to  any 
special  time  or  space. 

Ordinary  consciousness  does  not  act  continually. 
But  the  essential,  the  real,  the  Ego  of  self,  is  in  a 
condition  to  receive  and  to  give  information  which, 
in  normal  waking  periods,  is  not  so  easily  received 
and  given.  Some  psychologists  call  this  the  dream- 
Ego.  It  is  that  and  more.  The  chain  of  memories 
of  that  self  may  or  may  never  be  connected  con- 
sciously with  the  memory  chain  of  the  waking  or 
ordinary  life.  It  is  possible,  by  the  law  of  associa- 
tion, that  an  object  appearing  before  us,  which  en- 
tered into  our  dreams,  may  cause  us  to  recall  part  or 
nearly  all  of  that  dream.  It  is  not  easy  to  say  where 
the  memory  of  the  conscious  mind  ends  and  that  of 
the  subconscious  mind  begins.  There  is  a  nexus  which 
is  not  yet  definitely  known,  but  it  has  been  surmised. 
In  this  we  also  find  a  partial  explanation  of  double 
as  well  as  multiple  personality.  We  shall  consider 
this  more  fully  under  another  section.     There  is 


DREAMS  95 

cessation  of  the  state  of  voluntary  activity,  and  sus- 
pension of  the  volitional,  sensory  and  motor-  func- 
tions in  dreaming. 

During  sleep,  the  brain  has  less  blood  and  in  the 
encephalic  vessels  it  is  less  in  quantity  and  moves 
less  rapidly  than  in  the  waking  state,  but  the  trophic 
or  nutritive  work  of  the  brain  and  body  goes  on 
more  freely  so  that  repair  of  tissue  and  bone,  brain 
and  brawn,  occur  more  rapidly  in  sleep  than  while 
we  are  awake.  The  decreased  amount  of  blood  in 
the  brain  causes  the  conscious  activity  to  slow  down, 
whilst  the  subconscious  mind,  which  presides  spe- 
cifically over  the  sympathetic  system,  is  alert  and 
receives  impressions,  messages,  warnings,  and 
dreams  of  doing  things  and  working  out  plans. 
Herein  we  find  the  explanation  of  Bible  dreams,  and 
all  that  is  true  and  remarkable  in  historical  and  per- 
sonal dreams. 

The  subconscious  mind  is  the  avenue  of  approach 
to  the  citadel  of  man-soul  in  sleep.  Hence,  dreams 
are  not  always  the  results  of  internal  conditions, 
but  are  frequently  channels  by  which  suggestion 
may  be  caught  up  by  the  subconscious  mind  to  be 
elaborated,  or  seen  as  a  vision,  and  subsequently 
acted  upon  and  proven  to  be  premonitory. 

Many  dreams  recorded  in  the  Bible  were  of  this 
nature,  and  also  some  that  were  published  by  the 
Psychical  Research  Society.  For  instance,  when 
Herod  sought  to  kill  Jesus,  when  a  babe,  Joseph 
being  warned  in  a  dream  took  him  and  his  mother 


96  SUGGESTION 

down  into  Egypt.  The  scientific  explanation  of  that 
dream  is  found  in  two  elements  at  least,  i.  Thought 
of  security  for  the  babe.  2.  The  telepathic  thought 
to  Joseph  from  the  Infinite  mind.  Dreams  were 
used  according  to  Scripture  as  a  medium  through 
which  God  could  speak  to  man,  either  directly  or  in- 
directly, and  thus  influence  man's  thoughts  or  com- 
municate His  own  will  to  man's  mind. 

In  the  age  of  Homer  it  was  believed  that  "dreams 
came  from  Zeus."  *  There  were  two  notable  dream- 
ers in  olden  times,  according  to  the  Old  Testament, 
as  well  as  two  great  interpreters  of  dreams. 
Pharaoh  and  Nebuchadnezzar  were  the  dreamers. 
Joseph  and  Daniel  were  the  interpreters.  The  kings 
were  idolators;  the  interpreters  were  worshippers 
of  the  true  God.  The  kings  dreamed  in  their  sleep ; 
the  interpretations  of  their  dreams  came  to  Joseph 
and  Daniel  in  a  time  of  prayer  and  waiting. 

The  memory  of  a  dream  may  abide  with  one  or 
come  to  him  the  following  day  or  later,  whilst  the 
recollection  of  what  one  did  in  his  dream  may  have 
been  forgotten.  Dr.  Tuckey  gives  an  incident  which 
he  received  from  one  of  his  patients  that  illustrates 
this.  "A  young  man,  twenty  years  of  age,  not  a 
habitual  somnambulist,  but  a  suflferer  from  night- 
mare, produced  by  chronic  dyspepsia,  on  one  occa- 
sion while  spending  the  night  in  a  hotel,  dreamed 
that  he  was  confined  in  a  dungeon  from  which  he 
must  escape.  He  probably,  in  this  dream  passed  into 
a  somnambulistic  state,  for  under  that  influence  he 


DREAMS  97 

broke  his  iron  bedstead — a  feat  of  strength,  which, 
waking,  he  assuredly  could  not  have  accomplished — 
and  tore  up  his  bed-clothes.  His  amazement  was 
great  in  the  morning  when  he  awoke  amid  the 
ruins  of  his  own  work.  He  remembered  his  dream, 
but  had  no  recollection  whatever  of  the  acts  into 
which  he  had  been  led  by  it." 

Another  remarkable  fact  about  dreams,  is  to  be 
taken  into  consideration,  that  is,  that  it  is  possible 
to  suggest  them  to  a  somnambulist.  Dr.  Tuckey 
gives  a  \ery  interesting  account  of  an  officer  whom 
he  told  to  dream  that  he  was  in  Jamaica  and  was 
playing  polo  at  Up  Park  Camp.  "When  he  awoke, 
he  volunteered  the  remark,  that  he  had  had  a  most 
vivid  dream  and  proceeded  to  describe  a  polo  match, 
of  which  he  filled  in  the  details  without  help  from 
me. 

There  are  records  of  persons  who  have  had  the 
power  to  produce  dreams  of  the  character  which 
they  desired.  This  was  done  by  auto-suggestion,  a 
marvellous  power  in  one's  own  mind. 

We  have  stated  that  a  process  of  reasoning  is 
often  carried  on  in  dreams.  Prof.  Calderwood,  in 
his  work,  "Relations  of  Mind  and  Body,"  page  42, 
says:  "I  have  gathered  a  number  of  examples  of 
mental  activity  during  sleep,  which  give  evidence 
of  concentrated  and  intellectual  effort,  such  as  a 
continuous  course  of  reasoning  reproduced  after 
working ;  listening  to  a  lengthened  discourse,  which 
must  have  been  composed  by  the  sleeper  reflecting 

7 


98  SUGGESTION 

on  a  problem  and  experiencing  such  satisfaction 
with  the  result,  that  the  person  awoke,  got  up  at 
once,  and  wrote  out  the  results." 

Some  time  ago  we  read  an  incident  of  a  very  pro- 
fane and  wicked  man  being  converted  in  a  dream. 
We  have  no  reason  to  doubt  this. 

Prof.  Barrett,  of  Dublin,  in  "Humanitarian,"  a 
magazine,  says:  "Wherever  self-consciousness  is 
subdued,  when  the  known  and  claimant  "Me"  re- 
tires to  the  background,  then  an  opportunity  is  af- 
forded for  the  emergence  of  the  other  "Me"  of  that 
large  and  unrecognized  part  of  our  personality 
which  lies  below  the  threshold  of  our  consciousness." 
In  other  words,  according  to  the  philosophy  which 
we  hold  when  the  conscious  mind  is  quiescent,  then 
the  subconscious  mind  is  in  evidence  and  it  can  re- 
ceive definite  impressions.  This  is  true  in  the  hyp- 
notic state,  or  in  sleep,  etc. 

Our  real  selves  are  often  reproduced  in  dreams. 
Then,  the  ordinary  conditions  are  removed,  the  mod- 
ifying influences  of  our  waking  life  are  held  in 
abeyance,  so  that  our  real  personality  is  known  to 
one's  life  as  in  no  other  condition. 

Dreams  appear  much  stronger  and  more  real  at 
times,  than  the  occurrences  in  the  waking  state.  A 
rap  on  the  door  gives  the  suggestion  of  a  thunder 
storm,  which  means  that  the  attention  is  not  in 
operation,  and  that  part  of  the  brain  that  reinforces 
in  waking,  is  dormant.  Ideas  come  tumbling  into  the 
mind  and  objects  are  perceived  but  are  not  present. 


DREAMS 


99 


We  see  people,  speak  to  them,  hear  them  answer, 
but  no  one  is  near.  It  seems  real,  so  real  at  times 
that  when  we  awake  we  can  scarcely  believe  that 
we  have  not  been  talking  to  real  people. 

The  ear  also  has  certain  interior  sensations,  diffi- 
cult to  isolate  and  perceive  while  awake,  but  which 
seem  to  be  clearly  perceived  during  sleep.  Some- 
times we  hear,  while  sleeping,  the  crackling  of  a  fire, 
the  rain  which  strikes  the  window,  the  wind  playing 
upon  an  opening  in  the  door.  These  are  converted 
into  conversations,  songs,  music,  and  the  like, 
according  to  the  conditions  of  the  sleeper.  Many 
people  often  dream  that  they  are  floating  through 
the  air.  The  mind  seems  to  have  the  impression 
that  one  is  separated  from  his  surroundings.  This 
sensation  of  flying  is  dissociated  from  its  cause,  and 
becomes  sensation,  pure  and  simple,  joined  to  a 
delusion  of  being  lifted  up,  which  gives  rise  to  the 
dream.  Grave  maladies  have  sometimes  been  fore- 
seen by  dreams;  in  fact,  they  have  already  begun. 
It  is  a  well  known  fact  among  physicians  that  cer- 
tain kinds  of  dreams  are  connected  with  the  different 
parts  of  the  body,  as  with  affections  of  the  diges- 
tive, the  respiratory,  or  the  circulatory  functions. 

When  we  are  in  natural  sleep  our  senses  are  not 
closed  to  all  impressions  of  the  outer  world.  Con- 
fused impressions  coming  from  the  senses  give  us 
the  materials  of  many  of  our  dreams.  Memory,  the 
power  which  converts  into  definite  objects  the 
strange  impressions  received  in  sleep  by  the  law  of 


loo  SUGGESTION 

association  seem  to  give  peculiar  power  to  our 
dreams.  Imagination  also  lends  an  element  of 
strength  and  vividness  to  our  dreaming  conditions. 
Such  sensations  are  generally  warm,  full  of  color, 
and  vibrant  with  energy.  Whilst  memory  is  a  com- 
plete power  of  the  mind,  it  is  without  life,  and  waits 
to  find  some  material  with  which  to  realize  and  man- 
ifest itself.  Imagination  is  the  picture  maker  of  the 
mind,  and  when  these  combine  they  make  a  very 
vivid  dream. 

This  philosophy  of  dreams  is  reasonable,  and 
assuming  as  we  do  the  existence  of  a  conscious  and 
a  subconscious  mind,  we  see  how  it  beautifully  fits 
into  this  theory.  There  are  also  some  other  inci- 
dental elements,  which  might  be  expanded  to  meet 
extraordinary  contingencies  which  are  not  fully  or 
even  tacitly  stated  here.  But,  as  far  as  it  goes,  we 
believe  that  the  explanation  given  is  scientific  and 
correct.    Dreams  may  be  divided  into  four  classes: 

1.  Those  dependent  directly  on  brain  activity. 

2.  Those  which  result  from  the  association  of  ideas. 

3.  Those  due  to  the  action  of  external  sensations. 

4.  Those  which  result  from  the  action  of  the  in- 

ternal sensations  and  the  animal  functions. 
The  last  have  a  diagnostic  value.  Physicians  have 
noted  that  in  dropsy  of  the  chest  the  patient  has 
dreams  of  suffocation;  in  stomach  trouble,  moving 
pictures  appear;  in  water  on  the  brain,  the  person 
dreams  of  ponds,  rivers,  and  marshes.  Different 
temperaments    have    different    dreams.      Sanguine 


TELEPATHY 


lOI 


persons  dream  of  feasts,  songs,  dances,  combats; 
melancholic  persons  dream  of  ghosts,  solitude,  and 
death;  phlegmatic  persons  dream  of  moist  places, 
water  and  white  objects;  whilst  bilious  persons 
dream  of  abduction,  poisons,  assassinations,  fires, 
and  black  things. 

Observing  physicians  have  noticed  that  dreams  of 
eating  and  drinking  are  good  signs  in  convalescence 
but  unfavorable  at  the  beginning  of  an  illness,  and 
that  bathing  in  warm  water  indicates  critical  sweats, 
whilst  dreaming  of  violent  pain  when  not  due  to 
external  action  signifies  lesion,  inflamation,  and  pos- 
sibly gangrene.  There  is  a  medical  value  in  dreams 
of  which  we  know  only  a  little  and  the  meaning  of 
which  is  only  partially  understood.  This  species  of 
phenomena  will  eventually  find  explanation  by  the 
utilization  of  suggestion  as  related  to  the  subcon- 
scious mind. 

Section  2.    Telepathy. 

There  seems  to  be  a  settled  conviction  in  the 
minds  of  psychologists  and  thinkers  that  therfiuis 
such  a  power  as  telepathy,  that  is,  thought  trans- 
mission, and  reception  without  any  visible  means. 
There  have  been  innumerable  cases  and  instances 
which  seem  to  prove  beyond  the  shadow  of  a  doubt 
that  this  is  one  of  the  characteristics  of  the  subcon- 
scious mind,  namely,  that  it  can  receive  thoughts 
and  messages  from  another  mind  under  certain  con- 
ditions irrespective  of  distance.     Prof.  Podmore  in 


I02  SUGGESTION 

his  work  on  "Apparitions  and  Thought  Transfer- 
ence" says :  "The  personal  influence  of  the  operator 
in  hypnotism  may  perhaps  be  regarded  as  proof  pre- 
sumptive of  telepathy."  The  reason  for  this  state- 
ment is  found  in  the  fact  that  there  is  a  difference 
in  operators  and  in  their  successes.  This  difference 
may  be  explained  by  the  telepathic  principle.  Pod- 
more  suggests  that  the  subjects  sensed,  caught,  or 
received  something  telepathically  from  the  soul  of 
the  operator.  The  operator  and  subject  were  en  rap- 
port by  psychic  affinity. 

Dr.  Azam  experimented  effectively  with  subjects 
by  transference  of  tastes  made  telepathically  from 
his  mouth  to  theirs.  Other  investigators  tried  other 
experiments  and  were  successful.  The  reports  of 
the  Society  of  Psychical  Research  give  many  experi- 
ments which  have  been  successful,  as  do  also  many 
later  works.  Drs.  Liebault  and  Sidgwick  transferred 
visional  images  into  the  minds  of  their  subjects. 
Dr.  Sidgwick  sent  mental  pictures.  Others  like 
Gibbert,  Janet,  and  Dusant,  have  induced  sleep  at  a 
distance  by  willing  the  subjects  to  sleep  or  com- 
manding them  to  do  so. 

Some  hypnotized  subjects  have  seemingly  been 
made  to  travel  and  bring  back  information.  They 
have  reported  marvelous  things  and  many  of  the 
scenes  have  been  accurately  described.  There  is  a 
telepathic  and  a  clairvoyant  element  in  all  this.  A 
deduction  from  all  these  experiments,  and  others 


TELEPATHY  103 

which  have  been  reported,  is  that  there  is  such  a 
power  as  telepathy. 

Thought  transference  is  one  form  of  this  power, 
and  it  is  now  generally  accepted  as  possible  and 
very  probable.  It  is  conditioned  on  a  sympathetic 
connection  between  minds.  This  may  be  illustrated 
by  two  tuning  forks  or  musical  instruments  tuned  to 
the  same  pitch,  separated  from  each  other,  and  sus- 
pended in  the  air.  Make  one  sound  and  the  other 
responds  or  sounds  the  same  tone.  This  is  called 
sympathetic  resonance  in  acoustics.  It  is  supposed 
that  the  air  and  ether  set  in  motion  by  vibrations 
carry  those  waves  of  sound  to  the  other  instrument, 
and  the  atoms  respond  in  corresponding  vibrations 
and  produce  the  same  tones. 

Suspend  two  magnets  alike  in  weight,  attracting 
power,  etc.,  or  pivot  them  some  distance  apart. 
Move  one  of  them  and  the  other  will  also  very  soon 
move,  although  it  has  been  untouched.  The  med- 
ium through  which  the  influence  from  the  one 
touched  to  the  other  is  invisible  to  sight,  but  it  is 
now  known  to  exist,  and  is  called  ether. 

In  these  experiments  the  intensity  of  response 
varies  with  the  distance,  so  that  we  may  infer  thai 
the  medium  and  the  mechanical  disturbance  is  physi- 
cal at  least.  This  is  also  true  of  a  couple  of  tele- 
phones properly  connected  by  wires.  Miles 
away,  a  strong  tap  or  voice  can  be  heard, 
so  that  the  law  of  inverse  square  of  the  dis- 
tance does  not  apply.  It  is  as  easy,  under 
proper  conditions,  to  telephone  five  hundred  miles 


I04  SUGGESTION 

as  five  miles.  A  definite  channel  is  fixed  for  this. 
There  is  no  question  whatever  but  that  the  electrical 
conditions  make  it  possible  for  the  ether  waves  to 
carry  the  voice  or  sound  a  long  or  a  short  distance. 
This  is  also  true  in  wireless  telegraphy.  There  must 
be  electrical  senders  and  sensitive  receivers.  These 
set  in  motion  etheric  waves  that  may  be  so  synchro- 
nized that  they  may  be  understood  or  read.  It  is 
reasonable  to  suppose  that  minds  can  be  so  keyed  as 
to  send  and  receive  messages. 

Telepathy  is  the  mental  ability  to  send  and  receive 
by  the  mind  thoughts  and  images  without  the 
agency  of  the  ordinary  organs  of  sense.  The  knowl- 
edge thus  communicated  enters  the  mind  and  is 
understood  without  the  ordinary  methods  of  trans- 
mitting it.  We  do  not  know  definitely  the  com- 
municating medium,  whether  it  is  a  universal  ether, 
that  is  sensitive  to  thought  and  its  influence,  or  if 
there  is  a  universal  mind  in  which  finite  mind  may 
communicate  instantaneously  or  gradually,  or  if 
there  is  a  substratum  of  life  of  which  each  individual 
is  a  manifestation,  such  that  thoughts  and  images 
sink  into  it  and  are  reproduced  more  or  less  graphi- 
cally. (  One  thing  is  quite  definitely  settled,  that  is, 
that  telepathy  is  a  power  of  the  subconscious  mind 
and  can  be  cultivated  and  developed,  j  It  is  now 
generally  conceded,  by  the  ablest  of  psychologists, 
that  the  phenomena  are  somehow  intimately  related 
and  continuous  even  to  the  transference  of  thought. 
We  know  that  there  is  a  physiological  connection 


TELEPATHY  105 

between  the  cells  of  the  body,  although  they  do  not 
come  into  contact.  Roentgen  says  "there  are  minute 
vibrations,  compared  to  the  smallest  waves  imagi- 
nable, which  seem  to  be  immeasurable  but  somehow 
correspond  to  the  distances  between  the  centres  of 
the  atoms  of  which  this  universe  is  composed."  The 
newest  science  has  gone  back  from  the  crudest  mat- 
ter of  which  we  are  cognizant  to  the  most  sublimated 
in  the  form  of  the  electron.  It  is  possible  that  the 
discovery  of  radium  and  other  elements,  will  bring 
us  to  an  infinite  life  and  mind  which  may  supply 
us  with  the  explanation  of  the  great  mysteries  which 
confront  us  now.  We  believe  that  life  and  mind 
have  in  themselves  the  promises  and  potency  of  all 
forms  of  matter. 

Thought  produces  certain  molecular  changes  and 
movements  in  the  brain,  producing  vibrations  capa- 
ble of  minutely  acting  on  other  minds  in  unison,  so 
that,  it  is  very  reasonable  for  us  to  believe  that  tele- 
pathic communication  is  a  fact.  The  painstaking 
experiments  of  the  Society  of  Psychical  Research  of 
England  and  the  comprehensively  guarded  interpre- 
tations of  those  experiments  by  Prof.  F.  W.  H. 
Myers  and  others,  confirm  the  statement  that  telepa- 
thy is  a  power  of  the  subconscious  mind.  Professors 
Janet,  Binet,  and  Richet,  in  France  and  Prof.  James, 
of  our  country,  have  illustrated  the  same  features 
and  by  careful  experiments  have  proven  that  the 
alternating  personalities  and  abnormal  states  can  be 


io6  SUGGESTION 

explained  by  the  working  and  manifestations  of  sub- 
conscious processes. 

Professors  Henry  Sidgwick  and  Edmund  Gurney 
have  probably  done  more  than  any  other  persons  to 
establish  canons  of  evidence  for  the  scientific  proof 
of  that  which  is  genuine  and  valuable  in  extraordi- 
nary phenomena.  These  men  have  laid  the  founda- 
tion for  the  scientific  investigation  of  all  such  pheno- 
mena, so  that  they  may  be  classified  and  utilized. 
The  work  of  subsequent  explorers  will  thus  be  made 
easier,  and  much  evidence  hitherto  accepted  as  prob- 
ably genuine  will  be  eliminated. 

There  are  certain  conditions  necessary  to  be 
observed  before  one  can  receive  definite  thought 
from  others  telepathically : 

1.  There  must  be  reception  and  recognition  of  such 
thoughts.  The  will  and  the  understanding  of  the 
recipient  must  be  passive.  This  implies  a  control 
of  the  recipient's  voluntary  mental  efforts. 

2.  The  ability  to  send  thoughts  requires  that  one  be 
in  a  positive  attitude,  and  that  he  inhibits  for  the 
time  the  privilege  of  receiving  them.  When  one 
is  in  a  negative  or  passive  condition  thoughts  may 
be  received,  recognized,  and  appropriated.  The 
one  danger  that  is  to  be  guarded  against  is  the 
liability  to  receive  adverse  impressions,  which  may 
work  disadvantageously  to  one's  best  interests. 
Where  there  is  a  careful  observance  of  both  the 
positive  and  the  negative  states,  thought  commun- 
ication and  reception  will  prove  helpful  and  not 


TELEPATHY  107 

hurtful.     The  trouble  with  many  people  is  that 
they  are  living  negative  lives  and  they  catch  indis- 
criminately all  thoughts  and  conditions  which  are 
attracted  to  them  and  thus  become  a  prey  to  un- 
pleasant conditions  and  unhappiness. 
It  is  a  remarkable  fact  that  spiritism  and  hypno- 
tism have  developed  side  by  side,  and  the  pheno- 
mena of  the  latter  affords  the  true  explanation  of 
all  that  is  psychical  and  genuine  of  the   former. 
These  systems  have  an  explanation  that  is  somewhat 
telepathic  as  have  also  many  similar  and  peculiar 
phenomena  in  this  world.     Inventions  have  been 
worked  out,  discoveries  have  been  made  in  different 
sections  of  the  world,  almost  simultaneously,  and 
we  believe  that  the  explanation  of  this  is  found  in 
the  existence  of  open  minds,  with  similar  tendencies, 
catching  the  thoughts  and  manifesting  them  in  the 
same  way. 

The  progress  of  mankind  has  been  from  an  animal 
condition  upward  and  is  due  to  the  ability  to  receive 
and  carry  out  thoughts  which  have  been  lodged  in 
the  subconscious  mind.  There  is  a  telepathic  power 
attending  every  thought  and  suggestion  whether 
spoken,  written,  or  unexpressed.  We  do  not  believe, 
however,  that  the  so-called  "absent  treatment"  is 
scientific  yet  as  to  definiteness.  This  is  claimed  as 
one  of  the  great  results  of  telepathy.  That  certain 
results  come  to  the  patient  by  following  the  instruc- 
tions of  the  healer,  which  are  usually  printed,  no 
one  can  doubt.    The  auto-suggestion  of  the  patient 


io8  SUGGESTION 

accomplishes  the  healing  without  any  thought  trans- 
ference of  the  healer.  The  possibility  of  thought 
transmission  or  the  exercise  of  telepathic  power  is 
not  denied,  but  we  do  not  believe  that  telepathy  is  a 
definite  science  yet,  which  can  be  utilized  always 
with  definite  results.  That  it  may  become  such  after 
wide  experimentation  and  classification  of  the  re- 
sults, so  that  we  may  learn  the  laws  by  which  its 
operations  and  effects  may  be  secured,  we  are  in- 
clined to  believe.  We  are  not  ready  to  accept  either 
the  philosophy  of  or  the  statements  made  by  some 
healers  as  to  the  methods  by  which  they  secure  cer- 
tain results. 

We  are  inclined  to  believe  that  thought-waves  go 
out  over  the  world  and  produce  some  remarkable 
conditions,  such  as  strikes  and  riots,  and  educational, 
religious,  commercial,  or  political  movements. 

It  is  impossible  to  say  what  the  effect  would  be 
on  a  person  when  the  thoughts  of  ten  or  fifteen 
other  persons  were  being  concentrated  on  him. 
There  might  be,  or  there  might  not  be,  a  great 
efifect.  There  would  be  a  good  result  if  there  was  a 
definite  understanding  between  him  and  them. 
Whether  the  result  could  be  accounted  for  on  the 
ground  of  his  anticipation  and  auto-suggestion,  or 
could  be  attributed  only  to  the  combined  thought 
of  those  persons,  we  have  no  way  of  finding  out. 
The  healing  which  occurs  after  prayer  or  whicli 
comes  after  persons  have  given  so-called  combined 
treatment,  may  set  in  operation  forces  in  the  Divine 


TELEPATHY  109 

life  which  may  be  effectively  received  and  appro- 
priated. 

The  scientific  experiments  carried  on  in  England 
and  in  this  country,  and  also  some  extraordinary 
occurrences,  seem  to  prove  beyond  a  question  that 
thought  somehow  is  carried  to  another  mind  and  is 
understood  without  any  visible  means  of  transfer- 
ence. A  number  of  illustrations  could  be  cited,  but 
we  shall  give  only  a  few. 

Dr.  Francis  Wayland,  when  a  young  man,  after 
attending  medical  lectures  in  New  York  during  the 
winter  of  1814-15,  started  home.  Mrs.  Wayland, 
his  mother,  knew  that  he  was  coming,  because  she 
received  a  letter  from  him  telling  the  probable  time 
of  his  arrival.  She  was  sitting  with  her  husband 
in  a  room  and  suddenly  arose  and  commenced  walk- 
ing the  floor  in  great  agitation,  saying,  "Pray  for 
my  son ;  Francis  is  in  danger."  Her  husband  joined 
her  in  prayer  for  his  deliverance  from  peril.  He 
reached  home  safely.  His  mother  asked  him  what 
had  occurred.  He  told  her  that  he  had  fallen  off 
the  boat  as  they  were  coming  up  the  North  River 
and  the  boat  passed  over  him.  He  was  a  good  swim- 
mer and  was  able  to  keep  himself  afloat  until  he 
could  be  rescued. 

Another  remarkable  incident  is  that  of  a  wife 
who  cried  out  in  her  sleep,  "My  husband  is  lost!" 
Subsequent  facts  showed  that  her  husband  went 
down  on  the  ship  when  disaster  overtoook  it. 

A  remarkable  incident  which  is  purely  telepathic 


no  SUGGESTION 

occurred  to  a  man  named  Thomas  Muir,  living  in 
Plainfield,  N.  J,  When  he  and  his  mother  went  to 
St.  Louis,  all  the  members  of  the  family  were  in  the 
best  of  health.  Shortly  after  midnight,  Mr.  Muir 
awoke  with  a  start  and  found  himself  in  a  very 
nervous  condition  and  an  apprehensive  state  of  mind 
and  was  not  able  to  sleep.  Referring  to  the  matter 
at  the  breakfast-table,  he  was  informed  that  his 
mother  had  passed  through  a  similar  experience, 
both  having  awakened  at  the  same  time.  Before 
they  left  the  table,  a  telegram  was  handed  to  Mr. 
Muir  informing  him  that  his  brother  had  fallen  from 
a  ladder,  the  day  before,  and  that  he  had  died  at  the 
very  moment  they  were  awakened  in  St.  Louis.  We 
believe  that  the  subconscious  minds  of  these  persons 
had  caught  the  telepathic  tidings. 

An  astonishing  experiment  of  thought  transfer- 
ence was  made  in  W.  T.  Stead's  office  in  London, 
some  time  ago,  before  a  committee  of  six,  including 
Mr.  Stead  and  Mr.  Wallace.  Telepathic  messages 
were  successfully  transmitted  from  Nottingham,  one 
hundred  and  twenty-five  miles  away. 

The  numbers  and  times  were  given  Dr.  Richard- 
son in  Mr.  Stead's  office  and  he  promptly  telepathed 
them  to  Nottingham.  It  had  been  arranged  with  Dr. 
Franks,  in  that  city,  to  expect  messages  between 
six  and  eight  o'clock.  When  he  received  his  mes- 
sages. Dr.  Franks  immediately  telegraphed  the 
committee,  repeating  the  message  given,  and  the 
time  received.    Every  door  of  Mr.  Stead's  room  was 


TELEPATHY  iii 

guarded  so  that  no  confederate  could  hear  what 
was  said  and  telephone  the  result  to  Nottingham. 
Every  member  of  the  committee  was  previously 
unknown  to  Dr.  Richardson.  Collusion  was  thus 
impossible.  A  number  consisting  of  three  figures, 
579,  was  selected  by  the  committee  and  given  to  Dr. 
Richardson  to  telepath  to  Dr.  Franks.  Dr.  Richard- 
son went  into  an  adjoining  room.  At  6.34  he 
stated  that  the  message  was  dispatched.  At  6.48  the 
committee  received  the  following  telegram  from  Dr. 
Franks:  "Number  579  received,  twenty  minutes  to 
seven."  The  message,  as  Dr.  Richardson  had  pre- 
dicted, occupied  about  eight  minutes. 

An  extraordinary  test  followed  at  seven  o'clock. 
Mr.  Stead's  secretary  telegraphed  Dr.  Franks  a 
time,  a  number,  a  name  and  place,  which  Dr. 
Franks  was  to  telepathically  transmit  to  Dr. 
Richardson.  The  latter  was  kept  in  ignorance 
of  the  contents  of  the  telegram.  Dr.  Richard- 
son received  it  between  7:22  and  7:58.  "The 
time  7:20;  the  number  yyj',  the  name,  Scotland." 
The  committee  at  once  pronounced  them  to  be  the 
contents  of  the  telegram  which  Mr.  Stead's  secre- 
tary sent  Dr.  Franks.  Thought  transference  is  in- 
stantaneous and  the  time  elapsing  was  due  to  tele- 
graphing the  committee.  Mr.  Stead  said  "the  exper- 
iments added  proof  to  the  fact  that  it  is  possible  for 
mind  to  communicate  with  mind  irrespective  of  dis- 
tance." The  long  distance  covered  and  the  precise 
and  definite  nature  of  the  messages  make  these 
experiments  remarkable.    There  have  been  many  re- 


112  SUGGESTION 

ports  published  concerning  messages  received  from 
distant  persons  presaging  death,  or  serious  illness,  or 
some  form  of  information  that  is  very  astonishing. 

A  final  illustration  that  we  shall  now  give  is  a 
very  remarkable  one.  The  Rev.  Henry  Rollings, 
who  was  taking  a  special  course  in  the  New  York 
Homeopathic  Medical  College,  saw  as  in  a  vision 
the  death  of  his  father,  three  thousand  miles  away. 
The  death-bed  scene,  as  he  saw  it  in  his  mind,  was 
corroborated,  in  every  detail,  in  a  letter  two  weeks 
later.  Rev.  Mr.  Rollings,  telling  his  experience,  says 
that  after  a  hard  day's  work,  he  threw  himself  on 
his  bed  and  fell  into  a  sleep  from  which  he  was 
awakened  by  a  vivid  picture.  He  saw  his  father, 
as  distinctly  as  he  ever  saw  him  in  his  life,  and 
heard  him  say,  "My  boy,  my  boy,  I  am  dying." 

He  says  his  father  was  lying  in  bed,  in  a  room 
which  he  did  not  recognize,  but  knew  from  the  fur- 
nishings that  it  was  English.  He  saw  all  of  his 
relatives  there,  except  his  sister,  and  he  wondered 
why  she  was  absent.  He  saw  his  father  sink  back 
on  the  bed  and  he  knew  for  a  certainty  that  his 
father  was  dead. 

A  letter  from  England,  a  fortnight  afterward 
stated  that  the  elder  Rollings  died  on  the  exact  day 
and  hour  that  the  son  had  his  father's  death  pictured 
to  him.  Not  only  that,  but  the  letter  informed  him 
that  the  father  said,  just  before  he  passed  away,  that 
he  could  see  his  son  standing  by  the  bedside.  The 
strange  room  in  the  vision  was  explained  by  the 


TELEPATHY  113 

statement  that  the  family  had  moved  from  the  old 
homestead  in  Bedfordshire  into  another  house,  and 
the  absence  of  the  sister  from  the  room  was  ex- 
plained  by  the  statement  that  at  this  time  she  was 
ill. 

We  find  two  elements  of  interest  in  this  remark- 
able incident,  the  one  telepathic  and  the  other  clair- 
voyant. There  is  no  question  whatever  but  that 
telepathy,  the  transmission  of  thought  from  one  Hv- 
ing  mind  to  another,  either  spontaneous  or  induced 
experimentally,  is  a  fact  which  cannot  be  contra- 
dicted. 

There  is  a  deduction  or  two  which  we  think  can 
be  logically  made  concerning  the  matter  of  telepathy 
in  its  present  state:  i.  Thought  transference  can- 
not be  classed  with  sensations,  and  opens  up  another 
channel  of  human  knowledge,  which  practically 
destroys  the  conclusions  of  the  sensational  philoso- 
phy of  Hobbes,  Locke,  and  Comte.  2.  Divine  inspi- 
ration, instead  of  violating  the  law  of  probabilitieSv 
is  possibly  and  probably  the  most  likely  and  natural 
method  of  communication  between  God  and  man. 
The  mind  of  God  may  inspire  the  human  mind  with 
the  greatest  thoughts  and  words,  and  this  process 
may  be  accomplished  by  suggesting  these  things  to 
the  subconscious  mind  of  man.  The  wonderful  reve- 
lations of  the  Bible  came  to  men  when  they  were 
passive  and  open-minded  to  God  and  in  a  receptive 
condition  to  the  suggestions  of  the  Divine  mind. 
8 


114  SUGGESTION 

Section  3.     Clairvoyance. 

Clairvoyance  is  that  power  of  the  subconscious 
mind  in  which  one  sees,  without  the  aid  of  the 
physical  eye,  a  distant  scene  or  external  or  internal 
conditions.  Clair-audience  is  generally  applied  to 
the  sensations  of  hearing  an  internal  (but  in  some 
way  veridical)  voice.  Some  psychologists  use  the 
word  telsesthesia  as  applying  to  distant  perception. 
Clairvoyance  is  not  analogous  to  ordinary  vision 
extended,  as  what  is  seen  clairvoyantly  may  not 
accord  with  what  actual  sight  would  show  in  the 
place  of  the  vision.  Clairvoyance  may  include  ap- 
paritions and  visions,  but  technically  they  ought  to 
be  excluded. 

Mrs.  Sidgewick  discusses  the  difference  between 
clairvoyance  and  telepathy.  She  illustrates  it  thus: 
"A  dies,  and  at  the  same  time  his  friend  B  at  a  dis- 
tance has  an  impression  about  A  or  sees  an  appari- 
tion of  him,  or  perhaps  even  knows  that  A  is  dying." 
If  the  knowledge  goes  no  further  than  this,  she 
regards  it  as  a  case  of  simple  telepathy  and  as  dis- 
tinct from  clairvoyance.  She  thinks  that  if  B  seems 
to  see  the  scene  of  A's  death,  with  details  that  would 
preclude  the  possibility  of  its  originating  in  B's  mind 
or  as  an  accidental  occurrence,  it  would  be  a  case  of 
clairvoyance.  It  is  not  easy  to  separate  or  differen- 
tiate these  two  great  characteristics  of  the  subcon- 
scious mind.  It  is  not  yet  possible,  with  the  imper- 
fect data  which  we  possess,  concerning  these  two 
remarkable  powers,  to  define  either  so  scientifically 


CLAIRVOYANCE  115 

that  there  may  not  be  an  element  in  common  to  both. 
We  believe  that  they  both  exist  and  play  a  part  in 
the  subconscious  life  of  man. 

Clairvoyance,  or  lucidity,  is  a  hypersensitive  men- 
tal condition,  by  which  things,  occurrences,  persons 
or  states,  are  seen  mentally  without  the  aid  of  the 
physical  eyes.  It  has  been  believed  by  some  inves- 
tigators that  clairvoyance  may  be  regarded  as  a 
direct  perception — not  through  the  senses,  but  an 
immediate  seeing  of  things  and  conditions.  For 
this  reason,  this  power  has  sometimes  been  called 
the  sixth  sense. 

There  are  related  phenomena  which  have  their 
origin  in  and  manifestation  through  the  subconscious 
mind.  Such  for  instance  is  kinetic  energy — the 
moving  of  bodies  without  physical  contact.  The 
proHuction  of  a  speciaHight,  the  transformation  and 
transfer  of  physical  energy,  the  rearrangement  of 
chemical  elements,  telepathic  and  clairvoyant  com- 
munications, all  belong  to  and  are  accomplished  by 
subconscious  activity.  There  is  one  great  difficulty 
that  we  meet  in  all  these  phenomena,  that  is,  we  do 
not  know  enough  about  them  to  deduce  a  law  that 
will  be  unfailing  in  its  application  in  securing  defi- 
nite and  unvarying  results. 

Clairvoyance  is  a  power  which  has  been  claimed  by 
many  through  the  ages,  and  has  afforded  an  expla- 
nation for  some  very  remarkable  things  which  have 
occurred  in  the  lives  of  some  persons.  For  example, 
Gregory  of  Tours,  it  is  said,  saw  St.  Martin,  of  the 


ii6  SUGGESTION 

same  city,  die  when  he  was  some  distance  away.  It 
was  a  fact  that  he  died  at  the  time  when  Gregory 
said  he  saw  this  condition.  Swedenborg  claimed 
that  he  saw  the  great  fire  in  London  whilst  it  was 
in  progress.    He  was  in  Stockholm  at  the  time. 

A  remarkable  case  in  some  respects  was  concern- 
ing a  Mr.  Drake  in  England,  who  called  on  a  neigh- 
bor, a  Mr.  Wilson,  whose  daughter  had  gone  to 
India  on  a  slow-going  sailing  vessel.  Mr.  Drake 
said  to  Mr.  Wilson,  "Your  daughter  has  arrived 
safely."  Mr.  Wilson  said  that  was  absurd,  as  the  ves- 
sel was  not  due  for  a  fortnight.  Mr.  Drake  declared 
that  he  had  seen  the  vessel  in  the  harbor.  This 
led  to  a  challenge  of  Mr.  Drake's  assertion  and  he 
wrote  the  account  on  a  piece  of  paper.  In  due  time 
a  letter  arrived  from  the  daughter  to  the  father,  and, 
subsequently,  what  she  said  was  confirmed  by  the 
testimony  of  others,  in  which  he  was  informed  that 
the  vessel  arrived  nearly  a  fortnight  earlier  than  it 
was  expected  to  arrive. 

Another  case  equally  astonishing  was  that  of  a 
young  man  who  was  studying  geometry  in  his  room 
at  school.  He  saw  the  vision  of  his  mother  lying 
on  the  floor  in  the  white  room  in  her  home,  to  all 
appearance  dead.  The  vision  remained  for  awhile, 
and  then  faded  away.  The  school  was  in  the  same 
town  as  his  home,  and  he  went  to  the  family  doc- 
tor's office  and  told  him  the  story  of  his  vision.  Both 
of  them  went  to  the  home  and  found  the  mother  in 
the  room  just  as  the  vision  portrayed  her,  with  a 


CLAIRVOYANCE  117 

serious  attack  of  heart  trouble.     If  it  had  not  been 
for  their  arrival  she  would  probably  have  died. 

There  are  many  authentic  cases  of  clairvoyance 
given  in  the  Psychical  Research  Society's  reports 
and  in  other  psychological  literature.  This  charac- 
teristic of  the  deeper  personality  seems  to  be  able  to 
manifest  its  wonderful  power  completely  when  the 
person  is  in  an  hypnotized  condition.  Some  persons 
have  this  power  in  operation  continually,  and  seem- 
ingly it  is  natural. 

The  following  experimental  case  is  one  that  could 
be  multiplied  many  times  under  similar  circum- 
stances. A  young  man  was  hypnotized  in  a  social 
circle  one  evening  and  then  blindfolded.  A  young 
woman  went  into  an  adjoining  room,  which  was  a 
library,  and  took  down  a  book  from  the  bookcase, 
sat  down  and  read  from  it.  The  young  man  was 
asked  if  he  could  see  into  the  next  room.  He  an- 
swered that  he  could.  The  door  was  shut  and  no  one 
was  allowed  to  open  it  during  the  experiment.  The 
young  lady  was  alone  in  the  room.  He  was  asked 
if  he  could  see  anyone  in  the  room.  He  answered 
in  the  affirmative.  Then  he  was  asked  who  it  was. 
He  quickly  answered,  "A  young  lady."  "What  is 
she  doing?"  He  answered,  "Sitting  down  and  read- 
ing a  book."  "Can  you  tell  what  the  title  of  the 
book  is,  the  exact  page  where  it  is  opened?"  He 
answered  both  correctly.  When  the  young  lady 
came  into  the  room  she  was  informed  what  the 
young  man  said.    She  declared  that  every  particular 


ii8  SUGGESTION 

was  correct.  There  may  be  a  telepathic  element  in 
this  experiment,  but  there  is  a  predominant  clair- 
voyant element. 

Clairvoyance  (clear  seeing)  scientifically,  must 
not  be  confounded  with  fortune-telling  or  the  work 
of  professional  clairvoyants,  mediums,  etc.  Most 
of  these  people  are  fakirs  and  frauds.  It  is  claimed 
and  asserted  by  men  who  have  investigated  these 
parasites  and  excrescences  of  society  and  their  spe- 
cial messages  and  work  that  ninety-five  per  cent  of 
them  are  frauds,  and  that  the  remaining  five  per 
cent  have  the  ability  to  do  certain  things  telepathi- 
cally  and  clairvoyantly.  The  small  amount  of  gen- 
uine phenomena  practically  justifies  the  condemna- 
tion of  this  professional  class.  These  persons  usu- 
ally ask  for  some  small  object  belonging  to  the  per- 
son of  the  seeker  for  information,  such  as  a  ring, 
key,  handkerchief,  lock  of  hair,  which  they  say  is 
charged  with  the  personal  influence  or  magnetism  of 
the  one  desiring  to  know  his  future  or  what  he  ought 
to  do.  The  professional  fakir  claims  that  the  mag- 
netism passes  to  himself  from  the  object  and  enables 
him  to  give  the  information  desired,  which  he  calls 
a  reading.  Dr.  Dufay  of  France  narrated  the  ac- 
count of  a  practical  joke  played  on  one  of  this  pro- 
fessional class.  He  wrote  it  out  and  it  was  published 
in  the  Revue  Philosphique  for  February,  1889.  He 
cut  a  lock  of  hair,  which  was  soft  and  gray,  from  a 
monkey  that  he  owned,  and  took  it  to  the  wonderful 
clairvoyant.     She  took  it,   sank  into  a  simulated 


CLAIRVOYANCE  119 

trance,  sighed  and  breathed  heavily  and  declared  in 
solemn  tones  "This  lock  of  hair  belongs  to  your  dear 
grandmother,  she  has  cancer  of  the  liver,  but  this 
prescription  will  cure  her."  The  prescription  was 
worse  than  the  diagnosis. 

Clairvoyants  can  be  sent  seemingly  on  expeditions 
and  they  will  report  what  they  see  and  what  is  being 
done  by  the  people  whom  they  behold.  The  descrip- 
tions of  beautiful  scenery  will  be  often  very  minute 
and  complete.  There  are  Hindoo  people,  who  are 
called  adepts,  that  can  produce  in  themselves  this 
clairvoyant  condition,  and  they  are  able  to  give 
accurate  descriptions  of  battles  and  things  going  on 
many  miles  distant  from  themselves. 

Many  experiments  by  such  men  as  Gurney,  Sidg- 
wick,  Hodgson,  Stead,  and  many  others,  confirm 
our  convictions  that  clairvoyance  is  a  power  of  the 
subconscious  mind  and  is  in  some  persons  natural 
in  its  manifestation,  in  others  it  may  be  developed 
or  induced  by  certain  methods. 

The  present  condition  of  knowledge  concerning 
this  remarkable  power  leads  us  to  make  the  following 
deduction :  Clairvoyance  or  lucidity  strikes  a  deadly 
blow  at  the  philosophy  of  sensationalism.  If  a  per- 
son can  see  without  the  physical  eyes,  people  in 
other  rooms,  other  persons  at  a  distance,  and  can 
tell  what  they  are  doing ;  if  they  have  the  ability  to 
see  what  is  going  on  far  away,  and  describe  houses 
and  actual  things  being  done  hundreds  of  miles  dis- 
tant, we  have  further  proof  of  the  possibility  and 


I20  SUGGESTION 

probability  that  the  prophets  among  the  Hebrews 
and  nations  may  have  been  seers.  They  saw  visions. 
The  future  may  have  appeared  to  them  by  sugges- 
tion of  Almighty  God  as  a  shifting  panorama. 

The  laws  which  control  these  phenomena  are 
gradually  becoming  clearer  to  the  minds  of  thinkers, 
and  in  time  will  be  so  definitely  established  that  they 
can  be  used  with  unvarying  results.  This  has  been 
true  of  the  application  of  electricity,  which  as  to  its 
real  essence  is  mysterious  and  unknown.  This  is 
also  true  of  some  of  the  greatest  things  that  are 
used  in  the  world  today.  The  mystery  as  to  the 
thing  itself  will  probably  continue;  but  as  to  its 
utility  for  the  benefit  of  man,  the  laws  have  been 
discovered  and  formulated.  This  is  true  of  the  laws 
which  govern  the  extraordinary  phenomena  of  the 
subconscious  mind. 

Section  4.    Marvelous  Cures. 

There  have  been  many  men  who  have  had  great 
success  in  the  cure  of  diseases,  and  naturally  we  ask 
how  these  cures  have  been  wrought.  It  is  also  a  well 
known  fact  that  adverse  and  distasteful  news  will 
bring  back  a  disease  of  which  one  has  been  cured. 
An  illustration  will  make  this  plain.  "When  Dr. 
Martineau  was  a  student  in  Berlin,  he  had  the  oppor- 
tunity to  witness  some  interesting  cures  through  the 
agency  of  faith.  One  case,  especially,  was  that  of  an 
old  woman  who  had  been  bedridden  for  years  with 
rheumatism.    Medicine  had  done  no  good,  but  hear- 


MARVELOUS  CURES  121 

ing  of  the  successful  cures  by  a  young  lady,  she  be- 
came anxious  to  see  her.  An  almost  instantaneous 
cure  was  effected,  and  the  old  woman  left  her  bed 
and  became  very  active,  well,  and  free  from  pain. 
It  happened  that  there  was  a  strong  anti- Jewish 
feeling  at  Berlin  and  this  young  woman  was  a 
Jewess.  The  result  of  this  discovery  by  the  old 
woman  resulted  in  the  return  of  her  malady  and  she 
took  to  her  bed,  on  learning  this  news,  and  was  soon 
as  bad  as  ever.  The  unbelief  that  a  Jewess  could  do 
anything  good,  proved  stronger  to  the  mind  of  the 
old  woman  than  the  fact  that  she  had  been  cured. 
One  great  factor  must  always  be  reckoned  with  in 
the.  cure  of  any  disease  by  mental  therapeutics,  thai 
is,  auto-suggestion. 

Dr.  John  R.  Newton,  one  of  the  most  remarkable 
healers,  practiced  in  America  and  England  between 
1858  and  1870  .  During  this  time,  it  has  been 
claimed,  he  cured  250,000  people.  He  treated  as 
many  as  500  persons  a  day.  Many  were  instantan- 
eously cured,  although  they  had  been  pronounced 
incurable  by  their  physicians.  Mesmerists,  Christian 
scientists,  faith-curists,  mental  healers,  medicine 
men,  priests,  saints,  physicians,  and  many  others 
have  succeeded  in  curing  diseases.  Many  explana- 
tions have  been  given  as  to  how  the  cures  have  been 
wrought  and  the  bodily  changes  effected.  Some 
claim  that  these  results  came  from  playing  upon 
the  imagination;  others  that  they  have  been  ac- 
complished by  changing  the  thought;   others,   still, 


122  SUGGESTION 

have  declared  that  operators  have  imparted  new- 
strength  from  themselves ;  whilst  the  physician  con- 
tends that  the  medicine  which  he  gives  does  the  work. 
These  explanations  are  very  imperfect,  though  in 
most  of  them  there  is  an  element  of  truth.  Every 
school  of  healing;  every  cult,  as  well  as  every 
successful  practitioner,  whether  practicing  in  the 
mental  or  physical  sphere,  has  cured  disease.  But 
very  frequently  we  find  upon  close  examination  that 
there  is  no  vital  connection  between  the  teachings 
and  principles  advocated  and  the  results  accom- 
plished. What,  then,  is  the  real  explanation  of  these 
cures  ?  It  is  the  utilization  of  suggestion,  in  control- 
ling the  subconscious  mind.  This  mind  governs  all 
of  the  vital  functions  of  the  body.  Hence  the  mar- 
vellous cures  that  have  been  wrought,  sometimes 
almost  considered  miraculous,  as  well  as  the  ordi- 
nary cures,  have  been  commonly  due  to  the  influ- 
ence of  suggestion  on  the  subconscious  mind. 

It  may  be  asked  how  the  subconscious  mind  can 
affect  and  modify  these  vital  functions?  To  illus- 
trate very  simply  what  we  mean,  it  is  a  well-known 
physiological  law  that  the  vasomotor  nervous  sys- 
tem is  greatly  influenced  by  the  emotions.  Those 
who  have  experience  in  the  use  of  suggestive  ther- 
apeutics know  that  the  psychic  centers  govern  very 
largely  the  vaso-motor  nerves,  and,  consequently, 
the  circulation  and  the  secretions.  This  is  the  rea- 
son why  pills  made  of  bread-crumbs  or  other  harm- 
less substances,  with  suggestions,  have  been  capable 


MARVELOUS  CURES  123 

of  causing  diarrhoea ;  this  explains  why  disagfreeable 
psychic  sensations  or  depressing  emotions  are  able 
to  stop  or  poison  the  milk  of  a  nursing  mother. 
Herein  is  found  also  the  explanation  why  a  tumor 
increases  rapidly  in  size  if  the  patient  is  constantly 
preoccupied  in  thought  with  it,  also  with  the  natur- 
ally attending  thoughts  that  depress.  So,  also  is  the 
concentration  of  the  mind  on  a  particular  part  of  the 
body  capable  of  modifying  the  flow  of  blood  to  that 
part. 

Great  joy  or  sorrow  may  produce  death  in  the 
same  way  through  vaso-motor  excitation  or  depres- 
sion. It  has  been  said  that  imagination  can  cure 
disease,  and  that  it  can  also  kill  a  patient.  That  it 
has  a  great  power  on  the  body  through  the  vaso- 
motor nerves  and  the  subconscious  mind,  none  can 
doubt. 

The  wicked  device  of  the  Chinese  for  punishing 
a  victim  by  letting  a  drop  of  water  fall  on  his  head 
at  short  intervals,  when  he  is  blindfolded,  produces 
spasms,  contortions  and  frequently  death.  These 
drops  of  water  are  harmless,  but  there  is  a  certain 
mental  agony  produced  which  becomes  unbearable. 
The  victim  anticipates  the  drop  coming  and  the  men- 
tal torment  increases,  as  time  passes,  and  the  unfor- 
tunate victim,  by  his  own  imagination,  dies  ulti- 
mately in  awful  agony. 

Mr.  Julian  Ralph,  the  newspaper  correspon- 
dent, who  has  travelled  over  a  large  part  of 
China,  tells  of  another  method  of  inflicting  death, 


124  SUGGESTION 

through  the  imagination,  by  compelling  the  victim 
to  hear  the  sound  of  a  bell  at  regular  intervals  near 
his  ear.  It  does  no  actual  harm,  apparently,  for 
him  to  hear  the  bell,  but  it  excites  the  nerves  of  the 
ear  and  carries  the  sound  to  the  brain.  The  over- 
strained imagination  and  the  anticipation  brings  on 
a  state  of  coma  and  eventually  death.  Since  it  is 
evident  that  the  mind  through  the  imagination  can 
destroy  life,  it  is  equally  true  that  the  mind  can  also 
restore,  strengthen,  and  prolong  life.  It  is  well 
known  that  a  spirit  of  cheerfulness  can  overcome  a 
feeling  of  despondency.  Pleasure  can  stimulate  the 
heart  and  increase  the  activity  of  the  lungs,  whilst 
laughter  will  cause  one  to  absorb  an  increased 
amount  of  oxygen  and  produce  a  feeling  of  thrill  all 
over  the  system.  Every  part  of  our  body  is  subject 
to  the  influence  of  the  mind,  and  it  is,  therefore, 
necessary  that  these  influences  shall  be  controlled. 

Dr.  Hack  Tuke,  in  his  book  on  "The  Influence  of 
the  Mind  upon  the  Body  in  Health  and  Disease," 
gives  many  illustrations  of  the  power  of  the  mind 
over  the  body,  as  does  also  Dr.  Carpenter  of  Eng- 
land in  his  work  on  "Mesmerism  and  Spiritualism." 
There  is  no  doubt  that  a  suggestion  and  anticipa- 
tion with  co-operating  circumstances  or  a  great 
emotion,  may  control  a  person  both  mentally  and 
physically,  producing  health  or  disease,  and  in 
crowds  or  communities  may  produce  epidemic  delu- 
sions. 

It  is  scarcely  necessary  to  mention  the   dancing 


MARVELOUS  CURES  125 

mania  of  the  Middle  Ages ;  the  supposed  demoniacal 
possessions  in  the  nunneries  of  France ;  the  cat  mew- 
ing and  biting  manias  in  the  nunneries  of  Germany ; 
the  ecstatic  revelations  of  Roman  Catholics  and 
Protestant  visionaries;  the  Tarantism  of  Southern 
Italy;  the  leaping  Ague  of  Scotland;  the  Witch- 
craft mania  of  New  England,  and  similar  manias 
in  other  places  are  illustrations  which  may  be  ex- 
plained upon  the  hypothesis  that  the  subjection  of 
the  mind  to  a  dominant  idea  or  suggestion  results  in 
the  expectation  and  realization  of  a  corresponding 
action.  This  is  not  only  true  in  the  production  of 
delusions,  but  it  is  also  true  in  the  causation  of 
health  and  disease.  The  cure  of  disease  is  effected 
in  many  cases  by  suggestion  and  the  expectation  of 
health,  with  or  without  the  use  of  means. 

There  are  many  diseases  like  insomnia,  chorea, 
paralysis  of  certain  types,  some  forms  of  epilepsy, 
headache,  neuralgia,  hypochondria,  hysteria,  neuras- 
thenia, alcoholism,  morphinism,  asthma,  and  other 
ailments  which  are  frequently  relived,  either  tem- 
porarily or  permanently  by  the  use  of  psychic  sug- 
gestion. 

There  are  other  diseases,  like  Bright's  disease 
and  tuberculosis,  which  may  be  relieved  of  some  of 
their  more  distressing  symptoms  by  mental  sugges- 
tion. It  is  a  fact  that  one  method  of  mental  thera- 
peutics will  sometimes  prove  efficacious  when 
another  has  failed.  The  one  great  object  is  to 
change   the   patient's   thought   concerning  his   ail- 


126  SUGGESTION 

ments  and  convince  him  of  the  possibility  of  a  cure. 
This  result  is  naturally  secured  in  certain  cases  by 
various  methods. 

There  are  diseases,  such  as  typhoid  fever,  small- 
pox, cholera,  and  bubonic  plague,  and  many  cases 
of  fractures  and  injuries,  internal  and  external,  in 
which  the  mental  factors  seem  to  give  but  very  little 
help.  Cancer  is  another  disease  that  has  not  yet 
yielded  wholly  to  suggestion. 

Different  men  have  adopted  different  methods  by 
which  to  cure  the  infirmities  of  the  flesh.  Some 
have  advocated  two  meals  a  day,  and  frequently 
fasting  for  several  days,  as  an  efficacious  method 
of  relieving  the  body  of  its  ailments.  Some  special- 
ists advocate  a  careful  diet;  some  believe  that  the 
body  can  be  nourished  only  by  animal  food,  and 
therefore  they  advocate  that.  Others  say  that  all 
starch  ought  to  be  eliminated,  and  that  bread  is 
the  staff  of  death.  Others  say  that  it  does  not  make 
much  difference  what  one  eats,  so  long  as  the  food 
is  well  masticated,  and  daily  baths  are  taken  inter- 
nally and  externally — to  them  the  fountain  syringe 
is  a  fountain  of  youth.  Many  have  contended  that 
germs  cause  all  diseases,  and  they  have  also  pre- 
sented a  specific  in  the  form  of  a  toothbrush,  mouth- 
wash and  what  not  to  destroy  the  bacteria.  Others 
have  contended  that  it  is  necessary  to  watch  and 
control  the  emunctories,  so  that  the  system  shall 
be  relieved  of  its  waste  and  all  other  hygenic  meas- 
ures being  observed,  there  cannot  be,  they  say,  any 


MARVELOUS  CURES  127 

other  result  thah  health.  The  magnetic  healer 
says  that  it  is  necessary  for  the  system  to  have, 
from  an  outside  source,  new  power  and  life,  so  he 
lays  his  hands  on  the  patient  and  gives  a  treat- 
ment which  is  tactile  suggestion.  The  Christian 
scientist  says  to  the  patient  that  he  is  all  mind,  there 
is  nothing  to  get  sick,  and  that  he  is  thoroughly 
well  and  dismisses  him  as  cured.  Many  mental 
healers  also  make  a  denial  of  disease  and  talk  health, 
to  the  advantage  of  their  patients.  The  one  mighty 
factor  in  the  cure  of  human  ailments  is  found  in  the 
utilization  of  suggestion  and  its  influences  upon  the 
subconscious  mind  which  controls  the  vital  func- 
tions of  the  body. 

Dr.  Bernheim  was  about  to  treat  a  young  woman 
who  was  afflicted  with  aphonia  (loss  of  voice),  with 
electricity.  Before  doing  so  he  put  his  hand  over 
the  larnyx  and  moved  it  up  and  down  and  said  to 
her,  "Now  you  can  speak  aloud."  He  told  her  to  say 
"a."    She  said  it,  and  the  aphonia  disappeared. 

A  Catholic  woman  went  to  Dr.  Hammond  to  con- 
sult with  him  about  her  sickness.  He  considered 
that  she  had  an  incurable  disorder  and  he  told  her 
so.  She  turned  away  with  a  sigh.  "Ah,"  she  said, 
"If  I  only  had  some  of  the  water  of  Lourdes,  then 
I  should  be  cured."  It  so  happened  that  a  friend 
had  brought  the  doctor  a  bottle  of  the  genuine 
water,  that  he  might  chemically  analyze  it  and  find 
out  its  medicinal  properties.  He  told  her  that  he 
had  some  of  that  water  and  promised  to  give  her 


128  SUGGESTION 

some  of  it,  provided  she  would  first  try  a  more 
potent  remedy,  Aqua  Crotonis — Croton  Aqueduct 
water.  She  said  that  it  could  not  reach  her  case. 
(The  suggestion  of  the  water  of  Lourdes  had  com- 
plete control  of  her  mind).  He  gave  her  a  little 
bottle  of  Lourdes  water,  but  labelled  it  Aqua  Cro- 
tonis. She  returned  to  his  office  no  better.  Then 
he  gave  her  a  vial  of  Croton  water  and  labelled  it 
"Water  of  Lourdes."    She  was  completely  cured. 

There  are  records  of  cases  of  people  being  made 
sick  by  suggestion,  and  of  people  being  executed 
in  like  manner,  and  records  also  of  multitudes  cured 
by  the  same  method,  so  (that  we  are  justified  in 
concluding  that  the  influence  of  the  mind  on  the 
body  is  potent  in  producing  and  healing  disease.  } 

Prof.  Rolleston  says,  "That  a  defeated  army  read- 
ily succumbs  to  dysentery,  scurvy,  malarial  fever, 
and  other  diseases.  These  diseases  are  usually 
infrequent  and  very  mild  amongst  the  victorious." 

Faith,  fear,  and  other  emotions  set  into  operation 
certain  powers  of  the  body  which  are  controlled  by 
the  subconscious  mind  and  thus  produce  and  cure 
disease.  The  medical  profession,  where  one  might 
expect  uniformity  of  practice,  adopt  many  methods 
of  treatment  which  are  very  diverse,  because  of  the 
different  diagnoses.  It  has  been  said  that  no  two 
doctors  will  agree  on  the  same  diagnosis.  Be  that 
as  it  may,  we  know  that  there  is  a  very  great  differ- 
ence in  diagnosis  among  physicians.  Eclectics  pur- 
sue one  system  of  cure;  homeopaths  and  allopaths 


MARVELOUS  CURES  129 

each  pursue  a  different  system  of  diagnosis  and 
method  of  cure;  whilst  the  irregulars  have  their 
electric  belts,  oxydonors,  bottled  electricity  and 
whiskey,  doctored  bitters  and  preparations,  each 
one  claiming  that  his  particular  remedy  is  practi- 
cally a  cure-all  for  the  ills  of  the  people  who  come 
to  them  for  treatment. 

Dr.  J.  M.  Bruce  says:  ''We  are  compelled  to 
acknowledge  a  power  of  natural  recovery  inherent 
in  the  body ;  and  a  similar  statement  has  been  made 
by  the  writers  on  the  principle  of  medicine  in  all 
ages."  Dr.  John  Hunter  says :  "As  the  state  of  the 
mind  is  capable  of  producing  a  disease  another  state 
of  it  may  affect  a  cure."  Sir  Thomas  G.  Stewart 
has  said :  "In  heart  disease,  the  most  important  ele- 
ment is  rest.  Second  in  importance  is  perhaps  the 
element  of  hope."  Many  cures  more  marvellous 
than  those  which  have  been  performed  by  Christian 
scientists,  faith  healers,  and  other  classes  who 
have  promulgated  teachings  that  are  unreasonable, 
unscientific  and  illogical,  have  been  wrought  by 
Charcot,  Bernheim,  Moll,  Forel,  Tuckey,  Bramwell, 
and  others.  They  did  not  teach  heresy  in  order  to 
affect  these  cures,  but  used  scientific  principles, 
which  have  been  discovered,  and  which  are  in  per- 
fect harmony  with  all  that  is  true  and  real.  They 
utilized  the  great  principle  of  suggestion  to  cure 
disease,  to  change  abnormal  conditions,  to  modify 
mental  processes,  to  bring  relief  to  the  afflicted  and 
to  the  ailing. 

9 


130  SUGGESTION 

It  is  easily  proven  that  there  is  no  particular 
virtue  in  many  teachings  and  pretensions  made  by 
many  so-called  healers.  If  the  cures  prove  the  cor- 
rectness of  their  teachings,  then  spiritists,  mental 
healers,  Christian  scientists,  faith  curists,  Indian 
medicine  men,  powwowers,  voodooists,  the  fakirs 
of  India,  vitopaths,  mesmerists,  occultists,  animal 
magnetists,  and  any  and  every  pretender,  quack  and 
fraud,  all  hold  correct  views  as  to  the  nature,  treat- 
ment, and  cure  of  disease,  for  they  all  cure  some 
people. 

For  instance,  Dowie  said,  "There  is  a  physical  body, 
and  it  sometimes  gets  sick,  because  the  devil  controls 
it,  but  God  heals  disease  in  answer  to  prayer,  and 
can  thus  destroy  the  power  of  the  devil."  Mrs. 
Eddy  says,  "There  is  no  physical  body,  and  no  sick- 
ness, but  only  spiritual  existence,  and  that  is  in  per- 
fect health."  If  Dowie's  cures  prove  that  his  teach- 
ings are  correct  and  vital  in  the  cure  of  disease, 
Mrs.  Eddy's  teachings,  which  directly  contradict 
them,  cannot  be  correct  and  vital.  If  Mrs.  Eddy's 
teachings  are  true,  then  Dowie's  cannot  be.  As  to 
the  number  of  cures  they  are  about  equal.  Other 
schools  professing  to  effect  cures  claim  that  their 
teachings  are  correct,  essential,  and  true.  They  all 
cure  some  diseases.  Some  of  their  theories  and 
teachings  are  in  many  respects  fundamentally  op- 
posed to  each  other,  therefore  they  cannot  be  cor- 
rect and  true.  The  supreme  element  that  becomes 
effective  in  these  systems,  and  in  all  others  used  in 


GENIUS  131 

the  cure  of  diseases  is  suggestion  in  its  various  forms 
of  application. 

Section  5.    Genius. 

It  has  been  suggested  many  times  by  students  of 
psychology  that  genius  is  related  to  madness.  Some 
years  ago,  C.  Lombroso,  professor  of  legal  medi- 
cine in  the  University  of  Turin,  wrote  a  book  on 
"The  Man  of  Genius,"  in  whch  he  tried  to  maintain 
the  position  that  genius  is  a  variety  and  a  product 
of  degeneration.  The  work  shows  a  great  deal  of 
erudition  and  research,  but  it  is  a  question  I  think 
with  him,  whether  the  spirit  of  genius  produces  the 
insanity  and  degeneration  or  the  converse. 

Aristotle  observed  that  under  the  influence  of  a 
congestion  of  the  brain,  "Many  persons  become 
poets,  prophets,  sybils,  and,  like  Marcus  the  Syracu- 
san,  are  pretty  good  poets  while  they  are  maniacal ; 
but  when  cuted  no  longer  write  verse."  He  also  said : 
"Men  illustrious  in  poetry,  politics,  and  arts,  have 
often  been  melancholic  and  mad,  like  Ajax,  or  mis- 
anthropic, like  Bellerophen.  Even  in  modern 
times  such  characteristics  have  been  noted  in  such 
men  as  Socrates,  Empedocles,  Plato,  and  many 
others,  especially  poets." 

Lombroso  claims  that  the  shortness  of  stature 
and  smallness  of  body  are  signs  of  degeneration. 
For  instance,  the  following  persons  answer  te  this 
description.  Alexander,  Aristotle,  Plato,  Epicurus, 
Archimedes,     Diogenes,     Attila,     and     Epictetus. 


132  SUGGESTION 

Among  moderns  he  names  Erasmus,  Socinus,  Gib- 
bon, Spinoza,  Montaigne,  Gray,  John  Hunter,  Mo- 
zart, Beethoven,  Goldsmith,  Hogarth,  Thomas 
Moore,  Thomas  Campbell,  Wilberforce,  Heine, 
Charles  Lamb,  Maria  Edgeworth,  Balzac,  De  Quin- 
cey,  Wm.  Blake,  Browning,  Ibsen,  George  Eliot, 
Mrs.  Browning,  Mendelssohn,  and  Swinburne. 
Other  conditions  are  also  mentioned  by  this  author, 
such  as  rickets,  lesions  of  the  brain,  emaciation  and 
pallor,  as  being  characteristic  of  many  men  of 
genius. 

Forgetfulness  is  another  mark  of  genius.  For 
instance  it  is  said  that  Newton  once  pushed  his 
niece's  finger  into  his  pipe  thinking  it  was  his  own; 
when  he  left  his  room  to  look  for  anything  he  usu- 
ally returned  without  bringing  it.  One  day  Buffon, 
lost  in  thought,  ascended  a  tower  and  slid  down  by 
the  ropes,  unconscious  of  what  he  was  doing,  like 
a  somnambulist.  Mozart,  in  carving  meat,  so  often 
oit  his  fingers  that  he  had  to  give  up  this  duty  to 
other  persons.  Bishop  Munster,  it  is  said,  seeing  at 
the  door  of  his  own  ante-chamber  the  notice :  "The 
master  of  the  house  is  out,"  stood  awaiting  his  own 
return.  Another  characteristic  of  the  genius  is  mel- 
ancholy. It  is  proverbially  said  that  geniuses  are 
continually  wearing  crowns  of  thorns. 

Lombroso  classifies  the  great  men  as  "Insane  Men 
of  Genius,"  and  "Sane  Men  of  Genius."  Under 
the  head  of  insane  and  partially  insane,  he  included 
Tasso,   Socrates,  Rousseau,  Dean  Swift,   Moham- 


GENIUS  133 

med,  Bruno,  Newton  (in  his  later  years),  Poe,  Whit- 
man, Napoleon,  Comte,  Schopenhauer,  Coleridge, 
Savonarola,  Luther,  Dante,  Julius  Caesar,  in  fact 
the  majority  of  the  names  of  the  most  conspicuous 
men  in  history.  The  one  serious  fault  to  be  found 
with  this  classification,  is  that  he  makes  peculiarities 
and  eccentricities  to  be  equivalent  to  insanity  or 
partial  insanity.  This  is  not  fair  to  those  men,  nor 
to  the  real  facts  in  their  lives. 

A  recent  work,  published  in  this  country,  by 
Joseph  Grasset,  of  France,  on  the  subject  "The 
Semi-Insane  and  the  Semi-Responsible"  takes  also 
very  largely  Lombroso's  view.  Dr.  Grasset  does 
not  classify  great  people  as  Lombroso  does,  but 
refers  to  all  as  more  or  less  insane.  He  looks  upon 
the  conditions  as  gradation  from  the  least  to  the 
most.  He  illustrates  his  view  with  a  diagram  of  a 
polygon  with  its  apex  centering  at  a  certain  point 
which  he  calls  "the  superior  center,"  the  seat  of  men- 
tality.* He  looks  upon  this  center  as  the  directing 
and  controlling  force  of  the  mental  power.  If  the 
neurons  centering  there  are  diseased,  the  man  is 
irresponsible  and  insane.  If  some  neurons  are 
diseased,  the  man  is  semi-insane.  The  superior 
mental  power  is  thus  inhibited  and  unable  to  carry 
on  all  normal  processes,  and  will  manifest  the 
diseased  condition,  sooner  or  later,  showing  his  in- 
sanity. 

His  complete  classification  of  conditions  is  a 
remarkable  analysis,  but  it  conforms  to  a  theory 

*See  page  209. 


134  SUGGESTION 

with  which  facts  do  not  always  accord.  We  are 
inclined  to  agree  with  Dr.  Grasset,  to  a  considerable 
extent,  but  we  do  not  accept  fully  his  theory  as  to 
the  real  character  of  genius  and  its  origin.  We  are 
inclined  to  look  upon  the  origin  of  genius  as  largely 
psychical  and  its  incidental  manifestations  as  physi- 
cal. The  one  belongs  to  the  subconscious  mind,  and 
the  other  to  the  conscious  and  physical  realm. 

Dr.  Grasset's  cumulative  clinic  of  eminent  men, 
to  whom  he  refers  as  demifous  or  semi-insane,  is 
interesting.  He  admits  that  "not  all  the  facts 
quoted  are  of  equal  documentary  value.  Many 
may  be  inexact  or  open  to  question.  I  have  tried, 
nevertheless  to  complete  and  to  verify  the  some- 
what questionable  statements  of  Lombroso  by  those 
of  other  authors,  and  it  seems  to  me  that  the  most 
critical  must  admit  this  fact,  that  intellectual  super- 
iors frequently  possess  psychic  defects  which  are 
sometimes  very  marked." 

As  an  illustration  the  clinic  includes  Socrates 
(who  had  fits),  Pascal  (with  brain  lesion),  Auguste 
Comte  (epileptic),  Tolstoy  (who  in  his  youth  nearly 
killed  himself  trying  to  fly,  and  never  wanted  to  do 
anything  that  anybody  else  did),  Gorky  (who  tried 
suicide  at  eighteen),  Rosseau  (who  had  a  neuro- 
pathic heredity  of  four  generations  of  hard  drink- 
ers and  who  tried  to  kill  himself),  Alfred  De  Musset 
(addicted  to  drugs),  Moliere  (hypochondrical), 
Zola  (a  symphonist  of  odors),  Balzac  (who  had  a 
walking  mania),  Victor  Hugo  (who  had  a  diseased 


GENIUS  135 

ego),  Tasso  (who  had  illusions  of  beasts  laughing, 
whips  cracking,  bells  tinkling),  Schopenhauer  (who 
was  so  afraid  of  a  razor  that  he  used  to  singe  away 
his  beard,  instead  of  shaving),  Swift  (who  became 
insane),  Poe  (who  drank  like  a  savage),  Newton 
(who  became  insane  in  his  later  life),  Schiller  (who 
used  to  put  his  feet  on  ice  and  seek  inspiration  in 
rotten  apples),  and  many  other  cases  which  he  cites 
specifying  the  different  ailments  with  which  they 
were  afflicted.  It  has  been  said  also  by  others  who 
have  made  a  study  of  genius,  that  Richard  Wagner 
was  crazy,  Mohammed  had  convulsions,  Annie  Lee, 
who  formed  the  Society  of  Shakers,  had  spasms, 
that  Mozart  thought  the  people  were  trying  to 
poison  him,  that  Voltaire  continually  thought  he 
was  dying,  that  Abraham  Lincoln  was  a  victim  of 
melancholia,  which  was  serious  on  one  of  two  occa- 
sions ;  that  John  Stuart  Mill  was  insane  at  twenty ; 
that  Samuel  Johnson  touched  every  post  he  passed 
in  London,  and  that  musicians  have  manifested 
eccentricities  which  really  bordered  on  insanity. 

We  do  not  believe  that  these  men  were  peculiar 
and  eccentric  because  they  were  geniuses,  but  they 
were  geniuses  because  of  the  peculiar  psychical 
and  physiological  constitution  with  which  they  were 
endowed.  He  who  is  a  genius  has  a  remarkable 
manifestation  of  some  power  or  powers  of  the  sub- 
conscious mind,  and  this  manifestation  seems  to  be 
unhindered  by  the  conscious  mind,  and  they  are 
therefore  really  in  an  hypnotic  condition. 


136  SUGGESTION 

The  subtle  powers  of  the  subconscious  mind,  when 
excited  and  unhindered,  bloom  into  genius.  The 
superior  psychical  centre  so-called  is  substituted  by 
a  supreme  thought  which  comes  to  them  intuitively 
by  virtue  of  their  associations,  their  intellectual 
equipment,  or  by  their  auto-suggestion.  It  is  not 
easy  to  separate  the  physical  body  from  the  psychi- 
cal life,  but  we  believe  that  the  latter  produces 
somehow  the  former  and  controls  the  physical. 
Those  who  believe  in  the  materialistic  theory  will 
try  to  explain  all  these  peculiar  and  extraordinary 
manifestations  of  life  by  the  physical  constitution 
with  which  these  persons  were  endowed.  It  is  very 
probable  that  the  body  has  to  a  certain  degree  mod- 
ifying influence  and  power  over  the  psychical  life, 
but  we  do  not  believe  it  is  possible  to  give  a  com- 
plete, reasonable,  and  philosophical  explanation  of 
the  origin  and  character  of  genius  from  this  stand- 
point. There  seems  to  be  a  swinging  away  from  the 
materialistic  philosophy  to  a  better  and  more  reas- 
onable view,  advocated  from  the  standpoint  of  the 
higher  and  spiritual  side  of  life.  There  is  a  vital 
relationship  between  the  body  and  the  mind,  and 
when  that  relationship  is  broken  we  believe  that 
the  mind  or  spirit  exists  separated  from  the  body. 
The  real  origin,  character,  and  power  in  the  life  of 
the  geniuses  of  the  world  is  conditioned  largely  on 
the  manifestation  of  the  subconscious  mind. 


RELIGIOUS  MOVEMENTS  137 

Section  6.     Special  and  Remarkable  Religious 
Movements. 

There  have  been  some  very  remarkable  religious 
movements  through  the  ages  which  have  seemed  to 
be  very  mysterious.  But  there  is  an  explanation 
found  in  the  fact  that  the  subconscious  mind  con- 
trols many  of  the  remarkable  and  extraordinary 
manifestations,  and  is  therefore  responsible  for  the 
peculiar  conditions  that  have  been  seen. 

For  instance,  the  cat-mewing  mania  among  the 
nuns  of  France ;  the  Crusades  of  the  Middle  Ages ; 
some  of  the  great  historical  revivals,  the  devil-chas- 
ing in  Kentucky  in  its  early  history;  the  witch- 
craft mania  in  Massachusetts;  the  black  art  of 
the  Middle  Ages  all  find  explanation  in  the  princi- 
ples of  the  new  psychology.  Fanaticism  is  contag- 
ious, and  when  it  becomes  a  graphic  suggestion  it 
has  a  tendency  to  control  the  minds  of  all  the  people 
who  do  not  resist  and  some  who  do  resist  it.  Some 
very  remarkable  things  are  told  about  the  early 
settlers  of  the  South.  The  people  were  very  super- 
stitious and  when  one  man  with  a  strong  imagina- 
tion, augumented  by  peculiar  teachings  and  by  the 
primitive  conditions  in  Kentucky,  in  the  dim  twi- 
light saw  something,  he  immediately  inferred 
that  it  was  his  horned  majesty.  He  rushed  off  to  his 
equally  superstitious  neighbors  and  told  them,  and 
they  told  others,  and,  like  a  story  which  increases 
in  the  telling,  the  report  went  out  that  Satan  was 
prowling   about   the   community.      Everybody   ex- 


138  SUGGESTION 

pected  to  see  him.  The  fear  and  anticipation  that 
possessed  their  minds  changed  many  things  per- 
fectly natural  into  the  likeness  of  his  satanship. 
The  people  went  to  church.  A  report  was  given 
out,  by  several  persons  with  abnormal  imagination, 
that  Satan  had  just  passed  the  door.  The  sugges- 
tion was  caught  up  by  the  subconscious  mind  of  the 
people  and  acted  upon,  and  a  general  rush  was  made 
to  catch  and  destroy  their  enemy.  They  ran  to  the 
woods,  and,  thinking  they  had  treed  him,  some  of 
them  barked  like  dogs,  whilst  others  climbed  trees 
and  chased  him  down  and  all  followed  their  leaders 
until,  utterly  weary,  they  let  the  spectre  of  their 
imaginations  and  suggestion  go. 

The  Stigmatists  among  the  Roman  Catholics  have 
gotten  sometimes  what  they  asked  for  because  they 
took  the  proper  course  to  secure  it.  Their  desires 
were  to  enter  into  all  the  feelings  and  sufferings 
which  they  believed  Christ  experiencd.  They  also 
expressed  a  desire  to  have  outward  evidences  to  cor- 
roborate the  internal  wish.  They  expected  on  each 
foot,  hand,  and  the  side  of  the  body  some  scar  cor- 
responding to  the  broken  flesh  in  the  Saviour's  body. 
They  believed  those  marks  would  come.  They  med- 
itated day  and  night,  encouraging  religious  motives, 
looking  on  the  crucifix  silently  and  intently,  whilst 
quietly  trying  to  express  in  their  bodies  the  great 
suggestion  which  possessed  their  souls.  The  con- 
scious mind  was  quiescent,  the  spirit  of  ecstasy  in 
prayer,  meditation  and  watching  for  the  scars  to 


RELIGIOUS  MOVEMENTS  139 

appear,  and  the  exercise  of  faith  that  they  would 
be  produced,  eventually  secured  the  result.  They 
did  everything  that  corresponded  to  the  life  of 
Christ  which  they  tried  to  follow.  They  obeyed,  as 
far  as  possible,  all  they  believed  He  had  commanded 
and  they  thought  about  Him  and  His  sufferings 
day  and  night.  It  was  not  a  spasm  of  concentration, 
but  an  entire  concentration  to  this  one  purpose,  of 
showing  the  life  of  Christ  in  His  sufferings  in  their 
bodies.  They  held  the  picture  in  their  minds  until 
it  was  involuntarily  taken  up  by  the  subconscious 
mind,  impressed  on  the  living  cells  of  the  tissues, 
and,  finally,  the  marks  were  seen  in  the  feet,  hands 
and  side.  Man  becomes  that  which  in  his  deepest 
mind  he  believes  he  can  realize  in  his  life.  An  unhin- 
dered and  untrammeled  faith  is  necessary  to  secure 
this  result.  Sight  and  sense  are  no  help  in  realizing 
the  deep  and  most  helpful  ideals  of  life,  but  rather  a 
hindrance,  because  they  raise  doubt,  cast  a  shadow 
over  the  intuitions  and  over  the  supreme  power  of 
the  expression  of  the  real  self  and  all  that  pertains 
to  it.  Auto-suggestions,  which  are  confidently  be- 
lieved and  made  to  the  sub-conscious  mind,  will 
secure  great  results.  If  there  is  doubt  about  the 
results,  and  about  the  power  of  the  suggestions,  no 
real,  permanent  good  will  be  secured.  Every  help- 
ful impulse  and  every  good  emotion  that  can  be 
stirred  in  the  human  soul  and  be  led  to  find  its 
expression  in  a  noble  thought  or  act,  will  put  fibre 
and  virility  into  the  character.    He  who  gives  way 


140  SUGGESTION 

to  irritation,  morbid  thoughts,  and  unhappy  emo- 
tions will  so  affect  the  cells  and  tissue?  of  the  body 
that  disease  will  result.  A  physical  change  will 
follow  from  a  mental  change. 

Some  of  the  great  revivals,  like  those  in  the  early 
history  of  Methodism  and  some  denominations  In 
this  country  and  in  England,  can  be  explained  by 
the  power  of  suggestion  through  preaching  which 
stirred  the  minds  of  the  people.  The  success  of 
Finney,  Cartwright,  Moody  and  Sankey,  Evan 
Roberts,  Torrey  and  Alexander,  can  thus  very  easily 
be  understood.  Some  of  these  men  and  others  have 
special  hypnotic  power  over  the  minds  of  their  hear- 
ers, and  large  numbers  are  converted  and  show 
much  zeal  and  earnestness. 

Evan  Roberts,  the  Welsh  evangelist,  had  great 
power  with  the  people  in  the  Welsh  revival, 
and  it  was  hypnotic  in  character.  The  music, 
also,  was  a  feature  in  bringing  the  minds  of 
the  people  into  a  receptive  condition,  after  which 
the  addresses,  which  were  neither  profound 
nor  Scriptural,  were  delivered  in  the  exclam- 
atory and  dictatorial  style,  which  doubtless  se- 
cured great  results  at  the  time.  As  far  as 
the  truth  was  declared  by  the  speakers  and  re- 
ceived by  the  hearers,  so  far  have  there  been  good 
results.  But  it  is  sad  to  say  that  the  far-reaching 
influences  exerted  and  manifested  during  the  re- 
vival have  largely  ceased,  and  many  people  who 
were  under  the  hypnotic  spell  of  the  leader  and 
others   have    drifted   back  into  their  old  ways  and 


RELIGIOUS  MOVEMENTS  141 

habits.  The  history  of  Robert's  call  to  the  min- 
istry and  his  methods  of  work,  as  well  as  his  periods 
of  withdrawal  from  the  people  into  a  silence  for  a 
long  while,  all  lead  to  the  inference  that  his  condi- 
tion and  work  were  the  outgrowth  of  hypnotic  and 
psychological  processes. 

It  is  well  known  that  the  human  mind  is  capable 
of  producing  very  remarkable  phenomena  under  the 
influence  of  a  powerful  suggestion.  It  is  said  the 
Welsh  revival  was  the  work  of  the  Holy  Spirit,  and 
there  may  be  an  element  of  truth  in  the  statement; 
but  the  largest  influence  was  psychological,  and 
therefore  limited  to  the  human  rather  than  coming 
directly  from  the  Divine  mind. 

Suggestion  is  more  than  hypnotism,  because  th?s 
latter  condition  is  a  part  of  the  former.  Suggestion 
is  the  presentation  of  such  thoughts  and  ideas  to 
the  mind,  that  is  prepared  to  receive  them  without 
question  and  to  act  upon  them  without  hesitation, 
so  that  the  impression  thus  received  produces  great 
mental,  moral,  or  physical  changes,  or  all  of  them 
together. 

The  great  changes  wrought  in  the  lives  of 
wicked  people  who  believe  God's  word  is  another 
effect  of  the  power  of  suggestion.  No  one  will  thus 
be  changed  unless  he  gives  attention,  receives  the 
Word,  and  anticipates  the  realization  of  its  promises. 
We  see  therefore  the  necessity  of  the  preacher  mak- 
ing positive  suggestions,  with  repeated  affirmations, 
so  as  to  convince  the  mind  that  it  needs  what  is 


142  SUGGESTION 

offered  and  may  receive  the  benefits  of  the  Gospel. 

There  are  two  things  necessary  to  be  looked  after, 
namely,  the  suggestions  made  and  the  susceptibility 
of  the  hearer.  If  the  hearer  is  ignorant,  but  honest, 
and  a  preacher  suggests  that  remarkable  results, 
either  physical  or  mental,  will  occur  when  one  is 
converted,  that  kind  of  a  person  will  manifest  in  his 
emotional  life  the  peculiar  form  of  the  suggestions 
made.  If  the  speaker  suggests  that  lights  will  be 
seen,  heavenly  music  will  be  heard,  visions  will  be 
beheld,  or  jerking  of  the  body  will  be  manifested, 
as  in  some  of  the  old  revivals,  these  results 
may  occur.  Where  much  is  said  about  "Holy 
Ghost  conversions"  and  the  old  time  religion,  where 
the  people  are  ready  to  receive  suggestions  from  a 
fiery  leader,  or  what  in  their  mind  they  conceive  to 
be  the  characteristics  of  these  remarkable  exper- 
iences, or  what  they  have  seen  in  the  past  in  similar 
meetings — in  accordance  with  this  will  be  their  man- 
ifestations under  the  power  of  suggestion.  A  few 
months  will  tell  the  story  of  those  professing  to  be 
converted,  whether  they  have  been  hypnotized  by 
the  evangelist,  or  whether  the  truth  has  anchored  in 
the  real  life  and  the  deeper  mind  and  produced  a 
change  that  will  abide  and  prove  itself  by  noble 
life  and  constant  activity  in  goodness.  The  remark- 
able success,  but  failure  now,  of  Alexander 
Dowie's  work;  the  existence  and  continuance  of 
Babism;  "The  Holy  Ghost  and  Us  Society"  under 
the  leadership  of  Sanford;  Schlatter's  remarkable 


RELIGIOUS  MOVEMENTS  143 

success  in  curing  diseases;  Schrader's  pretensions; 
"The  Holy  Rollers"  with  Anne  dis  de  Barr,  a  notor- 
ious character  with  an  unsavory  reputation  as 
"Mother  Elinor;"  "The  Flying  Rollers;"  "The  Holy 
Jumpers;"  the  followers  of  the  "Apostolic  Faith;" 
the  "Tongue  Speaking  Crowd;"  "The  Golden 
Rulers;"  "The  Brotherhood  of  Light;"  "The 
Church  of  God  and  Saints  of  Jesus  Christ,"  whose 
prophet  was  so  ignorant  that  he  could  not  write  his 
own  name,  and  who  hid  away  about  Easter  time 
two  or  three  days  and  then  had  his  resurrection  an- 
nounced, all  of  these  and  many  other  classes  of 
religionists  are  controlled  by  suggestions  made  by 
their  leaders,  whom  they  follow  with  unquestioning 
obedience.  Their  leaders  accomplish  their  own  will 
in  their  work  and  in  the  minds  of  their  followers 
by  the  positive  way  in  which  they  make  their 
demands. 

The  followers  of  these  leaders  often  make  a 
failure  of  the  work  which  they  try  to  perform  be- 
cause as  followers  they  lack  the  hypnotic  power  in 
giving  their  suggestions.  That  has  been  the  case 
of  many  of  the  people  who  claim  to  speak  with 
tongues.  Some  of  them  went  to  China  and  Japan 
without  any  other  qualification  for  missionary  work 
than  the  supposed  endowment  of  the  ability  to  speak 
in  those  languages.  They  were  greatly  disappointed 
when  they  found  that  they  could  not  supernaturally 
speak  the  Chinese  and  Japanese  languages  and 
could  not  understand  what  was  said  to  them.    These 


144  SUGGESTION 

deluded  people  make  great  claims,  and  when  they 
endeavor  to  practically  carry  out  their  claims  they 
find  that  they  are  unable  to  do  so. 

The  gratuitous  assumption  concerning  their  sup- 
ernatural qualifications  and  endowments  is  pitiful 
and  disappointing.  Were  they  to  think  about  these 
things  rationally,  they  would  soon  discover  that  it 
is  impossible  to  get  out  of  the  mind  what  has  never 
been  in  it. 

They  have  misinterpreted  the  New  Testament 
idea.  That  is  also  true  of  many  of  the  other  cults  to 
which  reference  has  been  made. 

A  careful  examination  of  the  New  Testament 
records  show  that  the  power  to  speak  with  tongues 
was  not  conferred  or  exercised  for  the  purpose  of 
preaching  to  people  in  other  languages,  but  was 
exercised  in  the  church  by  the  people  of  different 
nationalities  requiring  an  interpreter  to  make  plain 
what  they  said.  The  special  accounts  in  Acts  2,  had 
to  do  with  a  supernatural  condition,  in  which  the 
different  nationalities  represented  in  Jerusalem 
understood  in  their  own  language  or  tongue  what 
was  said  by  the  Apostles.  Paul's  ability  to  use  dif- 
ferent languages,  is  nowhere  spoken  of  as  his 
method  of  preaching  to  the  people,  in  those  lang- 
uages, on  his  missionary  tours.  The  one  language 
that  he  usually  spoke  and  preached  in  was  Greek. 
He  knew  others,  and  probably  could  converse  well 
in  them.  That  has  been  also  true  of  remarkable 
linguists  like  Elihu  Burrett,  Gladstone,  and  others. 


RELIGIOUS  MOVEMENTS  145 

It  was  my  privilege,  in  the  West,  to  hear  effu- 
sions of  men  and  women  who  claimed  the  remark- 
able endowment  of  the  "gift  of  tongues."  The 
sounds  which  they  uttered  were  more  like  the  jab- 
bering of  monkeys  than  anything  else  to  which  they 
could  be  compared.  The  persons  themselves  were 
in  an  h^pngtic^condition,  controlled  by  the  thought 
that  the  Holy  Spirit  had  imparted  to  them  this  ex- 
traordinary gift,  and  that  they  were  telling  some- 
thing remarkable  in  the  form  of  a  revelation.  It 
is  not  strange,  but  it  is  rather  sad,  that  these  pecul- 
iarities are  presented  under  the  cloak  of  religion. 
But  when  we  consider  that  the  mysteries  of  the  past 
were  related  to  or  taken  up  by  religious  enthusiasts, 
or  by  some  form  of  religious  teachings,  we  can 
easily  understand  how  it  is  that  these  things  are 
thus  related  to  man's  noblest  manifestations  of  life. 

Some  revivals,  and  the  remarkable  things  that 
have  occurred  in  connection  with  them,  the  Crusades, 
and  the  religious  manias  in  different  parts  of  the 
world,  are  only  possible  as  the  people  give  way  to 
predominant  suggestions  and  follow  them  to  their 
extreme  limits.  When  the  conscious  mind  gets  con- 
trol, and  reason  asserts  itself,  those  people  will 
excuse  themselves  by  saying  that  they  were  swept 
along  with  the  crowd  and  could  not  help  doing  what 
was  demanded  of  them.  They  will  even  express 
sorrow  for  their  conduct.  They  will  also  promise 
not  to  be  caught  in  that  way  again.  But  when 
another  tide  of  feeling  comes  along  and  they  are  not 
10 


146  SUGGESTION 

able  to  assert  control  over  themselves,  they  will 
again  be  swept  along  to  do  acts  of  which  they  will 
be  ashamed. 

The  subconscious  mind  will  run  wild  without  the 
conscious  mind  acting  as  a  pilot.  That  mind  does 
not  reason  inductively,  but  accepts  suggestions  com- 
ing from  other  minds,  conditions,  surroundings, 
and  from  the  conscious  mind,  and  will  carry  these 
suggestions  to  the  extreme  limit,  providing  they  are 
not  destructive  of  the  person's  own  conception  of 
morality,  and  do  not  run  counter  to  his  education. 
If,  as  in  the  case  of  supposed  "gift  of  tongues,"  the 
people  believe  that  they  have  received  that  gift,  they 
will  plead  that  it  is  for  a  good  purpose.  In  the  case 
of  a  mob,  the  people  will  claim  that  injustice  had 
to  be  avenged.  In  revivals,  they  will  justify  their 
actions  by  claiming  that  they  are  doing  the  will  of 
God  and  helping  others  to  do  the  same.  The 
silliest  and  most  unreasonable  things  are  justified 
by  the  people  who  are  swept  along  with  the  crowd 
to  do  things  that  are  wrong. 

The  subconscious  mind  has  a  mighty  power  hi 
itself,  and,  if  properly  directed,  remarkable  things 
can  be  accomplished,  and,  if  wrongly  directed,  great 
harm  will  be  wrought.  Some  of  the  great  leaders 
of  the  world,  like  Mohammed,  have  been  insane  on 
some  things,  and  their  followers  have  been  misled. 
Religion  is  not  responsible  for  these  things  but  has 
become  somewhat  the  occasion  for  them. 


SPIRITISM  147 

Section  7.     Spiritism. 

The  central  teaching  of  this  "ism"  is  that  the 
spirits  of  the  departed  return  to  earth  and  communi- 
cate special  revelations  through  living  mediums  to 
inquiring  people.  The  kind  of  spirit  depends  on 
the  kind  of  revelation  or  knowledge  sought  after. 
Sometimes  it  is  the  spirit  of  an  Indian,  a  doctor,  a 
poet,  an  orator,  a  statesman,  a  parent,  a  child,  a 
friend,  etc.,  etc. 

The  real  phenomena  emanates  either  from  the 
spirits  of  the  dead  or  from  living  beings.  If  all 
the  real  extraordinary  phenomena  can  be  produced 
by  the  living,  it  is  evident  that  there  is  no  necessity 
for  believing  in  the  return  of  the  spirits  of  the  dead, 
to  make  such  an  assumption  would  be  unnecessary 
and  superfluous. 

It  is  a  well  known  fact  amongst  psychical  experi- 
menters that  most  if  not  all,  of  the  so-called  spiritis- 
tic phenomena  which  are  true  and  genuine  have  been 
produced  by  persons  that  have  been  hypnotized,  or 
who  could  hold  the  conscious  mind  in  abeyance.  All 
the  physical  phenomena  have  been  duplicated  and 
explained  many  times  by  Kellar,  Abbott,  and  many 
others ;  there  is  therefore  nothing  supernatural  about 
such  manifestations.  Several  statements  about  these 
psychical  phenomena  ought  to  be  made : 

I.  So-called  spirit-communications  neither  rise 
above  nor  sink  below  the  ordinary  intelligence  of 
humanity. 


148  SUGGESTION 

2.  The  messages  received  are  no  higher  than  those 
of  the  medium's  intellectuahty.  The  same  gram- 
matical mistakes  which  he  ordinarily  makes  will  be 
found  in  the  messages,  and  the  revelations  which 
he  purports  to  give  are  no  higher  than  those  which 
the  medium  could  and  would  give  if  hypnotized. 

3.  The  knowledge  given  by  the  medium  may  be 
knowledge  which  his  conscious  mind  may  have  for- 
gotten, but  which  his  subconscious  mind  has  re- 
tained ;  or,  it  may  be  knowledge  received  by  thouglit 
transference  or  lucidity  from  an  individual  near  by, 
or  from  the  person  who  is  inquiring  for  certain  in- 
formation. 

It  is  generally  admitted  by  writers  on  this  subject 
that  spirit  communications  always  correspond  to 
the  nature  and  intelligence  of  the  medium's  mind 
and  character,  and  that  they  are  limited  by  his  men- 
tal capacity.  Hence,  alleged  communications  from 
philosophers,  poets,  artists,  statesmen  are  the  merest 
twaddle  when  coming  through  an  ignorant  medium. 

4.  The  mind  of  the  medium  can  be  controlled  by 
suggestion.  For  instance,  I  have  asked  a  medium 
for  a  message  from  a  dead  brother  or  from  a  person 
that  I  named.  I  have  no  dead  brother,  and  the  per- 
son I  named  I  never  knew.  But  communications 
came,  nevertheless,  from  them.  Why  should  they 
not? 

5.  The  conditions  must  be  harmonious,  or  im- 
perfect messages  or  no  messages  at  all  will  be  re- 


SPIRITISM  149 

ceived.    That  is  the  exact  condition  of  receiving  a 
message  from  the  subconscious  mind. 

The  explanation  of  all  the  real  phenomena  of 
spiritism  is  this:  The  subconscious  mind  of  a 
medium  is  subject  to  suggestion,  and  believes  itself 
to  be  controlled  by  the  spirit  of  any  deceased  person 
whose  name  is  suggested  by  the  conscious  mind  or 
by  the  mind  of  another.  If  it  is  requested  that  the 
medium  give  a  message  from  Daniel  Webster,  or 
any  other  prominent  person  in  history,  or  from  one 
not  well  known,  he  will  assume  the  voice  and  man- 
ner, as  far  as  there  is  any  knowledge  of  the  charac- 
ter and  characteristics  of  such  persons  and  what  he 
has  heard  or  learned  about  that  person  will  be  given 
first  with  his  own  embellishments  and  dramatic 
ability.  If  the  medium  does  not  know  anything 
about  the  person  named  or  the  person  for  whom  the 
message  is  given,  the  information  will  be  very 
meager  and  general.  These  things  are  also  true 
where  one  is  hypnotized  and  it  is  suggested  to  him, 
that  the  spirit  of  Daniel  Webster,  or  anyone  else 
will  now  give  communications  to  those  that  want  to 
receive  them. 

One  deduction  which  covers  this  subject  generally 
must  be  emphasized,  that  is,  that  nothing  is  ever 
presented  by  the  medium  which  is  not  or  has  not 
been  in  the  subconscious  mind  or  received  by  it  by 
thought  transference  or  clairvoyance  or  intuition. 

The  trickery  of  spiritism  has  been  exposed  many 
times,  and  that  which  is  real  phenomena  can  be  ex- 


I50  SUGGESTION 

plained  by  the  application  of  psychic  principles 
which  have  been  discovered.  Inside  of  the  next 
twenty  years  the  business  financially  of  this  cult  will 
be  dead. 

Our  conviction  is  that  there  is  considerable  fraud 
practiced  by  mediums.  We  have  been  treated  in  the 
newspapers  to  accounts  which  ought  to  warn  many 
people  who  attend  seances  and  believe  in  all  the  phy- 
sical phenomena  manifested  by  mediums. 

A  prominent  publisher  in  New  York  was  taken  in 
by  a  medium  and  he  wrote  favorably  at  first  about 
her  messages  and  work,  but  he  has  since  gotten  his 
eyes  open.  He  says,  "After  much  and  careful  inves- 
tigation, covering  a  number  of  years,  I  think  I  am 
within  bounds  in  saying  that  nine-tenths  of  what 
passes  as  psychic  phenomena  is  fraudulent.  Of  the 
remaining  one-tenth,  coincidence,  telepathy,  and 
clairvoyance  would  explain  some."  Let  me  add  .will 
explain  nearly  all,  if  not  all,  of  this  remnant. 

Section  8.     Hallucinations  and  Delusions. 

An  hallucination  is  a  profound  conviction  of  actu- 
ally perceived  sensation,  when  there  is  no  external 
object  to  excite  it.  It  is  an  idea  projected  outward, 
and  is  seen  or  heard  or  felt  as  though  it  had  external 
existence,  so  that  the  person  may  seem  to  hear 
voices  in  absolute  silence,  or  see  forms  in  a  cloud- 
less sky,  or  feel  the  touch  of  a  hand  when  none  is 
near. 


HALLUCINATIONS— DELUSIONS      151 

Sensations  are  individualized  in  the  brain  cortex, 
occipital  lobe,  of  hearing  in  the  auditory  area  of 
the  temporal  lobe,  etc.,  and  it  is  probable  that 
pathological  sensations  or  hallucinations  are  also 
located  there.  A  pathological  condition  in  these 
areas  ,and  other  sensation  centres,  produces  the 
corresponding  hallucinations.  Sensations  of  a  nor- 
mal nature  go  into  these  centres  and  come  out 
motor-impulses  and  hallucinations.  The  abnormal 
condition  of  end-organs  or  senses  will  produce  that 
result  as  well  as  diseased  cortical  centres  and  sen- 
sory nerve  tracks.  All  the  senses  may  be  thus 
affected  and  corresponding  hallucinations  produced. 
There  may  be  also  compound  hallucinations,  in 
which  two  or  more  organs,  cortical  centres,  or  nerve 
tracts  may  be  involved.  There  may  be  recognition 
of  familiar  voices  when  no  one  is  around,  sight  of 
faces  in  the  absence  of  the  person,  and  words,  sen- 
tences, etc.,  may  be  heard  when  no  voice  speaks. 
Different  tastes  may  be  experienced  in  the  mouth 
when  nothing  is  eaten,  odors  may  be  perceived 
when  none  are  present  and  a  spiderweb  feeling  may 
occur  when  there  is  no  web  in  sight.  Shocks  of 
electricity  may  be  seemingly  experienced,  delusions 
of  persecution  may  also  prevail,  and  an  enrapturing 
feeling  in  the  supposed  association  with  the  beloved 
one.  Horrible  suggestions  may  occur  and  their  con- 
tinuation may  so  work  upon  the  mind  of  the  person 
that  he  may  yield  to  them.  Crawling  internal  sensa- 
tions, which  may  produce  horror,  and  the  feeling  of 


152  SUGGESTION 

being  Ifited  into  the  air  seemingly,  as  though  one 
were  flying,  all  these  things  belong  to  certain  forms 
of  hallucinations. 

Hallucinations  are  often  the  direct  cause  of  dis- 
order of  the  contents  of  thought,  that  is,  they  then 
become  delusions.  For  example,  a  voice  says,  "Thou 
art  Christ,"  the  idea  becomes  regnant,  and  grandiose 
delusions  prevail,  and  are  acted  out  according  to 
the  conception  in  the  person's  mind.  They  are  cer- 
tain drugs  which  will  produce  hallucinations,  such 
as  opium,  belladonna,  stramonium,  with  their  alka- 
loids, especially  in  persons  in  a  psychopathic  condi- 
tion. Alcohol,  in  some  persons  addicted  to  its  use, 
when  suddenly  withdrawn,  will  cause  hallucinations. 
Febrile  conditions  will,  in  this  class  of  persons,  pro- 
duce the  same  conditions.  This  is  true  of  nutri- 
tional disorders,  and  of  hysteria,  chorea,  epilepsy, 
etc.,  and  similar  disorders  as  well  as  in  some  states 
of  exaltation  and  depression. 

Hallucinations  are  not  new  creations,  but  are  con- 
stituted of  present  or  latent  mental  pictures  or  ideas 
and  may  be  concomitant  or  spontaneous.  These  are 
not  due  to  external  stimuli,  but  to  an  internal  corti- 
cal, nerve-tract,  or  end  organ  condition.  Halluci- 
nations may  effect  one  or  more  senses  at  once,  and 
may  influence  thought  or  action  according  to  their 
supposed  importance.  They  may  also  be  caused  by 
toxic  conditions  and  functional  neuroses. 

Hallucinations  and  delusions  are  related  as 
brother  and  brother.       They  go  together.       The 


HALLUCINATIONS— DELUSIONS      153 

former  may  be  temporary,  the  latter  are  more  per- 
manent. The  latter  seems  to  have  less  of  the  physi- 
cal and  more  of  the  psychical  element. 

The  peculiar  manifestations  of  delusions  are 
many.  For  example,  a  woman  imagines  that  she 
cannot  sit  down  without  suffering  excruciating 
pain,  and  when  forced  into  a  seat  cries  out  in  awful 
agony.  Another  one  blackens  with  ink  parts  of 
her  fingers  and  declares  that  she  has  written  the 
Psalms  on  them.  She  persists  that  she  is  the  only 
person  who  knows  them,  and  if  she  did  not  contin- 
ually rewrite  them,  they  would  be  absorbed  into  her 
body  and  it  would  have  to  be  dissected  in  order  to 
secure  them  again. 

We  know  of  a  man  who  declared  that  a  large 
table  chased  him  upstairs.  The  table  was  too  large 
by  several  feet  to  get  into  the  stairway.  Another 
man  said  that  his  soul  had  gradually  perished  under 
the  displeasure  of  God,  and  only  the  animal  life 
remained. 

There  are  persons  who  have  not  crossed  the 
thresholds  of  their  homes  for  months,  but  remain 
continually  indoors,  fearing  to  go  out  lest  an  acci- 
dent occur.  Others  refuse  to  ride  in  a  car  or  ele- 
vator. Some  will  not  shake  hands  with  people,  be- 
lieving that  they  will  take  incurable  diseases.  Oth- 
ers refuse  to  wash  and  dress  themselves,  saying  that 
certain  dangers  confront  them  in  bathing  which  they 
must  guardedly  watch  and  avoid.  Some  see  birds 
flutteriHg  about  them,  when  no  birds  are  near ;  they 


154  SUGGESTION 

hear  footsteps  when  no  one  is  about,  and  some  de- 
clare that  summer  flies  whisper  secrets  to  them. 

We  read  not  long  ago  of  an  authoress  of  consid- 
erable reputation  who  believes  "she  is  under  the 
hypnotic  power  of  a  doctor  who  comes  in  to  her 
room  disguised  as  a  cloud  and  flaps  his  astral 
wings." 

Certain  psychical  conditions  manifest  themselves 
as  a  sense  of  awful  fear.  These  fears  take  a  con- 
crete form,  as  in  horror  of  the  dark,  fear  of  matri- 
mony, shrinking  back  from  proposing  to  a  beloved 
one,  dread  of  going  to  bed  lest  in  waking  all  knowl- 
edge may  have  fled  away,  shrinking  from  a  task 
for  fear  that  death  may  overtake  one,  dislike  of  the 
ordinary  duties  of  life,  dread  of  going  away  alone, 
all  these  things  and  many  others  belong  to  delusions 
as  a  class  and  to  an  abnormal  mental  condition.  For 
example,  Erasmus  had  such  an  aversion  to  fish  that 
the  smell  of  them  would  bring  on  fever.  Henry 
III  could  not  remain  in  a  room  where  there  was  a 
cat,  and  Chrisippas  hated  bowing  so  much  that  when 
a  person  bowed  to  him  he  fell  to  the  ground.  Tissot 
tells  of  one  who  declared  that  seven  horsemen  were 
constantly  fighting  within  him. 

Continually  pursuing  one  line  of  work,  or  eating 
one  kind  of  food,  or  receiving  unexpectedly  a  very 
vivid  impression  in  the  mind  often  produces  a  delu- 
sion. Orestes  constantly  saw  the  blood  gushing  from 
the  wound  inflicted  on  his  mother  by  his  own  hand. 
Spinello,  after  painting  Satan  in  the  most  hideous 


HALLUCINATIONS— DELUSIONS     155 

colors,  had  his  imagination  so  filled  with  the  pic- 
ture that  he  saw  Satan  constantly  standing  by  his 
side  upbraiding  him  for  having  painted  him  so  ugly. 
Poisonous  food  sometimes  acts  very  strangely  on 
the  mind  through  the  body.  Two  monks  ate  water 
hemlock,  both  felt  a  great  thirst  and  plunged  into 
water,  one  declaring  himself  a  goose,  and  the  other 
assuming  the  role  of  a  duck,  and  both  avowing  that 
they  would  live  nowhere  else  than  in  the  water. 

Many  of  these  delusions  and  hallucinations  belong 
to  the  peculiar  brain  formation  of  the  individual  and 
to  the  conscious  mind.  But  some  of  the  extraordi- 
nary manifestations  have  their  roots  in  the  subcon- 
scious mind.  It  may  be  profitable  to  finish  this  part 
of  the  discussion  with  a  remarkable  outline  by  an 
acute  thinker  who  has  used  a  new  term  which 
applies  to  extraordinary  phenomena.  It  is  "Psy- 
chlepsy." 

The  analysis  is  as  follows: 

(a)  Theological  illumination,  or  ecstasy. 

(b)  Metaphysical  intuition,  or  ecstasy. 

(c)  Catalepsy  and  its  allied  trances. 

(d)  Fanatical  transport  of  enthusiasm  or  of  fury. 

(e)  Frenzy  or  epidemic  emotion. 

(f)  Fascination  of  fear. 

(g)  Ecstasy  of  gross  brain  disease. 

Some  of  the  sub-titles  pertain  to  the  abnormal, 
and  some  belong  to  the  extraordinary  phenomena. 
These  will  be  elaborated  in  a  subsequent  work. 


156  SUGGESTION 


CHAPTER  VI. 

The  Law  of  Suggestion. 

It  will  be  necessary  to  consider  some  principles 
in  this  connection  in  order  to  understand  the  appli- 
cation of  the  law  of  suggestion. 

It  is  generally,  if  not  universally,  admitted  by 
science  that  there  is  a  force  which  can  be  measured 
and  described,  that  somehow  leaves  its  mark  on  the 
photographic  plate,  and  is  radiated  from  every 
living  person,  and  can  act  at  distances  with  power 
to  save  and  help  or  destroy.  Different  names  have 
been  applied  to  this  force.  Crooks  calls  it  Psychic 
Baretz  refers  to  it  as  Neuric,  Barraduc  says  it  is 
Vital,  Reichenbrach  names  it  Odic,  wnilst  others 
refer  to  it  under  other  names.  This  power  has  been 
utilized  under  many  circumstances  through  the 
ages  and  it  has  puzzled  users,  as  well  as  observers, 
by  its  manifestations. 

There  are  characteristics  of  this  force  which  have 
been  observed,  utilized  and  discussed  to  a  certain 
extent,  but  the  power  itself  no  one  yet  has  been  able 
definitely  to  describe  as  to  its  substance  and  all  of 
its  various  movements. 

I.  It  is  capable  of  acting  on  matter  without  visible 
and  physical  contact.     This  form  of  manifestation 


THE  LAW  DF  suggestion  157 

is  called  telekiiiesis,  whilst  another  phenomenon  of 
this  force  is  luminosity,  etc. 

2.  It  is  capable  also  of  gathering  knowledge  aside 
from  the  ordinary  method.  This  applies  particularly 
to,  and  uses  what  is  usually  called  telepathy,  clair- 
voyance and  intuition. 

3.  It  is  generally  conceded  by  science  that  there 
may  be  a  psychic  world  in  which  this  unknown  force 
moves  unhindered  and  shows  its  power  to  be  very 
real,  strong  and  terrible. 

4.  This  force  is  not  material,  as  we  understand 
the  meaning  of  the  word,  but  is  the  master  of  matter 
and  can  transmit  its  beneficial  effects  to  one's  life 
or  to  the  life  of  others. 

5.  It  is  not  limited  as  to  space  and  time,  but  can 
show  its  power  and  use  it  miles  away  or  near,  and 
can  do  this  instantly. 

It  is  unnecessary  to  give  further  illustrations  to 
prove  these  propositions,  as  a  number  of  cases  have 
been  cited  under  previous  topics. 

The  seat  of  this  wonderful  force  is  in  the  subcon- 
scious mind,  and,  under  special  conditions,  it  can 
manifest  its  power  in  different  ways  and  for  differ- 
ent purposes. 

Having  described  previously  the  conscious  and 
the  subconscious  mind,  it  is  only  necessary  to  say 
here  that  the  conscious  mind  has  to  do  with  external 
environment  and  the  voluntary  choice  of  all  that 
we  deem  necessary  for  our  best  condition  and  highest 
interests.    The  cerebro-spinal  nervous  system  is  the 


158  SUGGESTION 

special  instrument  of  that  mind.  The  senses  are 
the  media  through  which  knowledge  is  gathered, 
and  the  conscious  mind  classifies  and  stores  this 
knowledge  away  for  future  use. 

The  subconscious  mind  has  a  power  which  is 
peculiar  to  itself  and  does  not  depend  on  the  cere- 
bro-spinal  nervous  system  entirely  as  a  necessary 
means  of  communication,  but  uses  any  part  of  the 
physical  system,  and  no  particular  part  of  it,  for  its 
work,  but  seems  to  work  specifically  through  the 
sympathetic  nervous  system. 

The  application  of  the  law  of  suggestion  depends 
on  the  peculiar  constitution  of  the  mental  life.  The 
effective  working  of  this  law  depends  on  a  special 
sympathy  or  "rapport"  between  the  operator  and 
subject.  This  may  be  called  an  agreement.  Where 
two  agree  as  touching  anything,  it  shall  be  done. 
That  is  true  in  many  spheres  of  life,  especially  in 
the  highest.  "If  two  of  you  shall  agree  on  earth  as 
touching  anything  that  they  shall  ask,  it  shall  be 
done  for  them  of  my  Father  which  is  in  heaven.*' 
Suggestion  becomes  thus  not  only  an  agreement 
between  two  but  also  a  basis  for  the  operation  of 
the  Divine  Mind.  If  this  mind  can  use  suggestion 
to  bring  about  its  purpose,  why  cannot  this  method 
also  be  used  by  human  minds  in  doing  the  same 
thing?  The  subconscious  mind  being  controlled  by 
suggestion  and  that  mind  being  the  point  of  contact 
with  the  Infinite  mind  great  results  can  be  secured 
in  this  spirit  of  agreement.     The  conscious  mind 


THE  LAW  OF  SUGGESTION  159 

itself  can  thus  make  effective  suggestion  to  the  sub- 
conscious mind.  Suggestions  themselves  become 
impressions,  which,  when  carried  into  the  subcon- 
scious mind,  will  become  on  the  part  of  that  mind 
impressions  for  health,  improvement,  development, 
or  for  appropriation  of  the  highest  gifts  and  bless- 
ings. 

Suggestion  may  be  called  the  insinuation  of  im- 
pulses or  beliefs,  by  repeated  gentle,  but  emphatic 
declarations,  for  the  accomplishment  of  the  best  and 
highest  purposes  of  life. 

When  one  is  suggestible,  the  subliminal  self  con- 
trols the  intellect,  the  emotions,  and  the  will,  in  which 
state  suggestion  definitely  and  positively  impressed 
on  the  mind,  will  be  carried  out  at  the  time  or  after 
waking.  It  is  needless  to  produce  deep  sleep  in 
order  to  get  excellent  results  by  suggestion.  There 
are  times  when  the  waking  state,  or  a  restful, 
relaxed  condition,  will  be  best  for  effective  sugges- 
tion. The  one  supreme  requirement  is  that  the  sub- 
conscious mind  shall  unhesitatingly  accept  the  sug- 
gestion of  the  operator.  In  some  persons  it  is  neces- 
sary to  produce  light  sleep,  in  others  deep  sleep, 
but  these  are  exceptions  rather  than  the  rule.  Some 
persons  are  very  receptive,  so  that  for  one  to  forc- 
ibly and  definitely  wiU  certain  things,  brings  help 
to  such  sensitive  ones.  ) 

(  It  is  best  usually -to  get  the  consent  of  one  who 
desires  to  be  helped  and  then  put  him  in  an  easy 
position  and  prepare  the  way  to  relax  all  the  mus- 


i6o  SUGGESTION 

cles,  etc.,  and  give  definite  suggestion.  In  this  way 
morbid  mental  states,  delusions,  hysterical  crises, 
insomnia,  emotional  weaknesses,  and  adverse  physi- 
cal conditions  can  be  speedily  changed.  Not  only 
functional  nervous  disorders  can  be  remedied  and 
cured  by  this  method  but  organic  ^conditions  can 
be  modified  and  some  of  them  cured.' 


0 


The  subconscious  mind  does  not  reason  inductive- 
ly but  it  takes  a  statement  or  suggestion  and  carries 
it  out  fully  and  secures  the  results.)  For  instance, 
Christian  Science  teaches  that  "there  is  no  sickness, 
pain,  or  matter.  All  is  spirit,  and  there  cannot  be 
pain  and  sickness  in  that."  The  subconscious  mind 
accepts  the  statements  which  the  conscious  mind 
looks  upon  as  false,  and  as  the  subconscious  mind 
controls  the  vital  functions  of  the  body  this  mind 
goes  to  work  under  the  influence  of  the  negative 
suggestion  and  often  secures  remarkable  results. 
If  that  system  of  teaching  would  accept  the 
reasonable  hypothesis  that  there  is  sickness  and 
pain,  but  that  they  can  be  controlled  and  eliminated, 
and  would  lodge  these  suggestions  in  the  subcon- 
scious mind,  the  same  results  would  be  secured, 
and  the  reputation  of  Christian  Science  leaders 
would  be  beyond  attack  and  some  of  their  teachings 
would  be  accepted  as  reasonable  and  philosophical. 
These  people  act  ordinarily  very  reasonably,  but 
talk  very  unreasonably. 

Suggestion  in  some  respects  is  superior  in  power 


THE  LAW  OF  SUGGESTION  i6i 

to  logical  reasoning  and  for  moving  and  inspiring 
men  to  noble  deeds  it  is  far  ahead  of  reasoning. 
(  From  what  we  have  said  here,  and  in  other  parts 
of  this  work,  we  are  led  to  infer  that  mind  is  natur- 
ally impressible  and  that  such  a  condition  leads  nat- 
urally to  action.  If  the  thought  of  an  action  is  sug- 
gested so  that  there  is  no  competing  or  inhibiting 
idea  arising,  that  thought  will  be  carried  out  almost 
involuntarily.^ 

There  is  one  thing  that  an  operator  must  always 
observe,  that  is,  he  must  give  his  suggestion  in  a 
plain,  precise,  and  direct  way  to  the  patient.  If  this 
is  not  done,  there  will  be  hesitancy  on  the  part  of  the 
subject,  and  the  results  will  be  unsatisfactory.  Sug- 
gestion ought  to  be  direct  in  order  to  be  quickly  and 
effectively  realized. 

The  law  of  suggestion  may  be  stated  as  follows : 

1.  Mind  is  impressible  by  suggestion  and  it  will 
carry  out  the  same  to  its  ultimate  conclusions,  un- 
less there  is  a  hindering,  competing  idea  or  physi- 
cal inability  or  impediment. 

2.  The  subconscious  mind  accepts  a  statement  or 
suggestion  and  will  carry  it  out  completely  unless 
a  counter-suggestion  is  made  by  the  conscious 
mind  or  by  another. 

3.  The  suggestion  is  accepted  by  the  subconscious 
mind  as  true,  unless  antagonized  by  an  opposite 
statement  either  by  the  conscious  mind  or  the 
mind  of  another. 

II 


i62  SUGGESTION 

4.  The  external  channels  of  suggestion  are  the  voice, 
face,  expression,  demeanor,  gesture,  word,  and 
personality. 

5.  Suggestion  in  public  address  or  in  conversation, 
to  be  effective  and  accomplish  the  purpose  intend- 
ed, must  limit  the  consciousness  of  the  hearer  to 
the  ideas  presented  and  prevent  the  ideas  arising 
in  the  hearer's  mind  which  would  invalidate  or 
contradict  the  ideas  of  the  speaker.  This  is  also 
true  in  the  treatment  of  patients.N 

'  Confidence  must  be  secured;  authority  must  be 
manifested ;  repetition  must  be  practiced ;  figures  of 
speech  must  be  used  to  simplify  the  thought.  Indi- 
rect suggestion  can  be  and  is  used  in  the  waking 
state,  but  in  the  suggestible  condition  direct  sugges- 
tion is  very  eflfective.  There  are  elements  which 
enter  into  and  go  to  make  up^  the  law  of  suggestion 
in  its  operation  on  the  mind.- 

•^hen  we  apply  this  law  to  a  crowd  we  find  cer- 
tain characteristics  which  usually  control  a  body  of 
people : 

1.  Emotions  are  awake. 

2.  Anticipations  are  operative. 

3.  There  is  a  play  of  ideas  in  the  mind  of  the  people 
which  images  itself  in  thought. 

4.  Experience  is  the  strongest  factor  in  such  a  time, 
and  the  joint  influence  may  be  cumulative  for 
good  or  evil. 


THE  LAW  OF  SUGGESTION  163 

5.  That  which  will  bring  the  mind  to  one  great  pur- 
pose will  prepare  the  people  for  that  which  is  to 
be  the  climax  of  the  occasion. 
In  church  service,  a  sentence,   music   and   ritual, 
have  this  tendency.    The  sermon  or  the  address,  the 
exercises  must  all  be  in  line  with  one  supreme  ob- 
ject, or  the  purpose  of  the  gathering  will  be  de- 
feated.   This  is  true  in  other  meetings  and  on  other 
occasions. 

It  is  equally  true  in  treating  people  for  their  ail- 
ments. A  certain  preparation  is  needed  as  narrow- 
ing the  consciousness  down  to  one  supreme  idea, 
and  then  make  that  a  power  through  the  suggestion 
in  the  subconscious  mind,  so  that  the  impression 
becomes  a  healthy  expression.  Suggestibility  is 
that  state  of  mind  which  receives  suggestions.  It 
varies  as  the  amount  of  dissociation  of  conscious- 
ness, and  is  effective  inversely  as  consciousness  be- 
comes unified.    Certain  conditions  are  necessary. 

1.  Fixation  of  attention. 

2.  The  limitation  of  voluntary  or  conscious  move- 
ments. 

3.  Narrowing  the  field  of  consciousness. 

4.  Inhibition  of  certain  mental  operations. 

This  law  applies  to  all  normally  constituted 
human  beings,  and  its  application  is  practically  uni- 
versal among  mankind.  The  specific  application  of 
this  law  has  secured  in  the  past  and  will  secure  in 
the  future  marvelous  results.; 


i64  SUGGESTION 


CHAPTER  VII. 

Conditions  of  Operator.. 

There  are  certain  qualifications  which  the  men- 
tal operator  ought  to  have  and  must  have,  and  cer- 
tain conditions  with  which  he  must  comply,  before 
he  can  make  effective  suggestions  to  help  physically, 
morally,  mentally  and  spiritually  those  whom  he  de- 
sires to  heal  and  influence. 

1.  He  must  know  something  of  the  mind  and  its 
operations  and  be  master  of  this  knowledge.  He 
must  know  how  to  make  definite  and  helpful  sug- 
gestions so  that  the  subconscious  mind  of  the  sub- 
ject will  promptly  and  implicitly  obey  his  commands 
and  receive  his  instruction.  Indefiniteness,  hesita- 
tion, vacillation,  changeableness,  will  cause  the  sub- 
ject to  take  on  the  same  conditions  mentally  and  will 
make  the  operator's  suggestions  non-operative,  pro- 
ducing little  if  any  definite  effect.  He  must  be  dom- 
inantly  master  of  the  situation. 

2.  The  operator  must  adapt  himself  to  his  envir- 
onment, and  must  not  produce  an  appearance  in  atti- 
tude, demeanour,  face  and  dress,  antagonistic  to  the 
subject.  Those  things  which  will  help  to  win  the 
confidence  of  the  subject  ought  to  be  utilized  and 
maintained.     I  have  known  of  several  cases  where 


CONDITIONS  OF  OPERATOR         165 

operators  used  tobacco — chewing  and  smoking — so 
that  the  odor  utterly  nullified  the  efforts  to  hypno- 
tize or  to  make  effective  suggestions  to  the  subject. 
So  of  the  use  of  liquor  and  any  other  questionable 
practices.  A  trivial  circumstance,  action,  or  word 
may  lose  him  a  good  subject. 

The  actions  and  bearing  of  the  operator  must  be 
such  as  to  impress  the  subject  with  the  idea  that  he 
knows  exactly  what  he  is  doing.  He  must  be  master 
of  the  situation,  and  the  subject  will  quickly  discern 
this.  Therefore,  the  operator  must  be 
(a)  Positive. 

This  condition  or  attitude  of  mind  must  be  mani- 
fested in  speech  and  action.  Hesitation  in  know- 
ing what  to  do  will  sometimes  have  a  tendency  to 
dehypnotize  a  subject.  He  cannot  be  hypnotized 
again  by  that  operator.  One  must  know  what  sug- 
gestions ought  to  be  given  and  what  he  wants  the 
subject  to  do.  It  is  unwise  to  tell  the  subject  to 
close  his  eyes  and  then  decide  that  you  will 
have  him  look  you  in  the  eyes.  The  first  suggestion 
will  counteract  the  other  in  effectiveness  of  desired 
result.  If  the  subject  finds  that  an  operator  is  not 
competent  to  make,  or  is  undecided  in  making,  sug- 
gestions, he  will  not  allow  himself  to  be  hypnotized 
although  he  may  act  as  though  he  was  going  to 
sleep  or  was  trying  to  do  so.  There  is  but  one  way. 
to  make  effective  sugestions,  establish  confidence 
and  be  a  good  operator,  and  that  is  to  know  what 
you  want  to  do,  and  have  done,  and  then  always 


i66  SUGGESTION 

to  act  and  to  speak  positively.  This  requires  care- 
ful preparation  and  forethought  as  to  the  line  of 
procedure.  It  is  therefore  unwise  to  attempt  to 
hypnotize  or  make  suggestions  in  a  reckless,  slip- 
shod manner.  Failure  is  almost  sure  to  result  and 
confidence  on  the  part  of  the. subject  and  observers 
will  be  lost  as  well  as  confidence  in  one's  self  as  an 
operator.  A  balanced,  calm,  masterful  mood  will 
make  one  very  positive. 

Unless  an  operator  is  positive,  as  a  result  of  con- 
fidence in  his  ability,  he  is  bound  to  make  a  failure 
of  his  effort  to  hypnotize  a  subject.  Fear  as  to  his 
ability  will  be  quickly  sensed  by  a  sensitive  subject, 
and  this  condition  is  somehow  more  easily  felt  by 
the  subject  than  the  assurance  of  the  operator's 
ability.  The  ability  is  more  of  a  growth  than  a  gift. 
Hence,  one  success  after  another  leads  the  operator 
on  in  the  feeling  of  assurance,  self-possession, 
adroitness,  and  even  audacity.  Each  victory  adds 
power  and  confidence  in  one's  self,  and  even  a  few 
failures  after  successes  only  stimulate  one  to  make 
more  careful  and  positive  effort  which  will  result  in 
wonderful  victories. 

Some  persons  say  that  "not  every  one  has  the 
power  to  hypnotize."  No,  that  is  true,  because  they 
do  not  know  how  to  use  suggestions,  and  they  have 
no  confidence  in  themselves  in  making  them. 

There  is  no  mystical  aura  surrounding  a  man 
who  knows  how  to  hypnotize.  There  is  no  chemical 
or  electrical  conditions  which  will  compel  the  sub- 


CONDITIONS  OF  OPERATOR         167 

ject  to  sleep  or  fall  over.  Mesmerism  and  some  occult 
teachings  seem  to  have  taught  this,  but  modem  dis- 
coveries, investigations,  and  the  science  of  mind  and 
suggestion  have  shown  this  to  be  untrue,  faith  and 
confidence  on  the  part  of  both  the  operator  and  sub- 
ject beget  a  positive  assurance  that  the  operator  can 
use  the  forces  already  in  existence,  and  by  sugges- 
tion acting  on  the  mind  of  the  willing  subject 
through  expectation,  he  can  be  hypnotized.  The 
truth  of  the  matter  is  that  the  subject  does  the  most 
of  the  work  and  the  operator  knows  how  to  utilize 
the  passive  or  the  hypnotic  state  in  getting  sugges- 
tions lodged  in  the  subconscious  mind  and  thus 
securing  extraordinary  phenomena,  which  so  aston- 
ishes spectators,  and  he  also  knows  how  to  restore 
the  subject  to  normal  condition.  There  must  be  a 
positive  attitude  of  mind  in  the  operator  and  also  a 
knowledge  and  belief  in  the  psychic  processes,  all 
founded  on  mutual  confidence  between  operator  and 
subject,  before  there  can  be  temporary  or  permanent 
results  in  experimentation  or  treatments  given. 

Psycho-therapeutic  treatment  requires  high  intel- 
lectual and  moral  qualities  in  the  physician  in  order 
to  realize  the  best  results.  Permanent  success  de- 
pends on  the  moral  worth  of  the  practitioner.  He 
needs  gifts  of  persuasive  speech,  convincing  logic, 
tact,  knowledge  of  psychology,  authority  to  com- 
mand confidence,  truthfulness,  and  tactfulness  to  tell 
the  patient  the  truth,  calm  and  firm  character,  faith 
in  himself  and  his  treatment    Jesus  was  perfect  in 


i68  SUGGESTION 

all  these  things  and  He  was,  therefore,  this  world's 
greatest  healer  of  disease.  He  was  the  perfect  em- 
bodiment of  the  characteristics  mentioned  above, 
and  therefore  was  positive  in  what  He  said  and  in 
the  results  which  He  secured.  He  did  not  practice 
thaumaturgy,  but  moral,  mental  and  spiritual 
therapy. 

(b)   Good. 

Goodness  is  a  characteristic  that  is  as  essential 
as  positiveness  for  one  who  desires  to  use  sug- 
gestion effectively  and  widely.  He  may  not  be 
intellectual  in  the  sense  of  being  thoroughly 
trained  mentally,  he  may  not  be  rich  in  money,  nor 
beautiful  in  features,  but  he  must  be  thoroughly 
good.  Such  a  character  wields  an  influence  for 
helpfulness  wherever  it  is  found,  and  if  such  an  one 
knows  how  to  use  suggestion  helpfully  he  will  be  a 
great  blessing  to  those  with  whom  he  comes 
in  contact  and  treats.  Neurasthenics  are  usually 
somewhat  suspicious,  and,  if  they  are  not,  they  are 
susceptible  to  influences  that  are  in  the  life  of  the 
practitioner,  though  he  may  not  willfully  or  inten- 
tionally produce  or  manifest  them.  Sincerity  of 
motive,  goodness  of  heart,  sympathetic  helpfulness, 
as  well  as  the  opposite  conditions  of  life,  will  be 
felt  by  a  sensitive  and  nervous  person.  The  former 
condition  will  win  the  person's  consent  to  receive 
help,  whilst  the  latter  condition  will  produce  a  spirit 
of  questioning  and  fear  on  the  part  of  the  subject. 

There  must  be  an  agreement  between  the  patient 


CONDITIONS  OF  OPERATOR         169 

and  the  practitioner,  mutual  confidence,  and  a 
proper  understanding,  or  else  the  treatment  will  be 
unsatisfactory  and  the  practitioner  and  the  subject 
will  be  disappointed.  There  is  a  great  principle 
underlying  all  of  this,  namely,  according  to  his  faith 
so  shall  it  be  unto  the  patient,  with  the  manifestation 
of  goodness,  sympathy,  and  love  of  the  operator. 

This  is  the  law  of  Christ  himself  in  His  healing 
The  operator,  of  all  men,  should  be  mentally,  mor- 
ally, physically  healthy — which  is  goodness  in  power 
and  operation — in  order  to  do  his  best  work. 

(c)   Tactful. 

An  ignorant,  boisterous,  unskilled  operator  will 
make  a  fool  of  himself  and  of  the  subject.  But  a 
wise,  careful,  tactful  one  will  bring  very  remarka- 
ble things  to  pass  when  working  with  the  subcon- 
scious self  or  mind.  There  are  some  methods  em- 
ployed which  are  brutal,  cruel,  and  even  fiendish. 
These  will  never  be  advocated  nor  practised  by  a 
gentleman  or  by  one  who  has  tact  and  wisdom. 
It  is  a  great  shock  to  the  nervous  system  to  gain 
control  of  a  person  by  sudden  surprise  or  by  fright- 
ening him.  No  person  can  be  made  a  good  subject 
by  such  a  method. 

There  are  manoeuvers,  which  allow  no  parleying 
on  the  part  of  the  patient,  and  compel  capitulation 
to  the  suggestions  that  are  made  by  the  operator, 
because  the  consent  of  the  mind  of  the  subject  has 
helped  him  to  be  hypnotized.  He  is  a  tactful 
operator  who  knows  how  to  utilize  these  things. 


I70  SUGGESTION 

There  are  also  persons  who  vary  in  moods.  They 
will  submit  easily  and  readily  at  one  time  and  not 
at  another.  Others  must  be  approached  by  various 
suggestions.  These  things  require  tact  and  sagacity 
on  the  part  of  the  operator.  Tact  makes  the  diag- 
nostician. He  sees  through  the  person  with  whom 
he  is  healing.  He  is  a  seer.  The  voice,  the  eye,  and 
the  movements  of  the  subject  are  a  key  or  clue  to 
his  general  character  and  condition.  Tact  is  the 
ability  to  utilize  these  things  in  such  a  way  as  to 
help  the  subject  according  to  his  need. 

He  who  knows  how  to  handle  moods  and  control 
conditions  tactfully,  cannot  help  but  be  an  efficient 
operator,  providing  he  has  the  other  qualifications 
referred  to. 

Here  is  a  man,  for  instance,  who  desires  to  heal 
the  sick  of  their  diseases,  ailments,  and  troubles. 
He  must  be  positive  and  confident,  good  and  tactful, 
in  order  to  control  the  conditions  manifested  in  the 
patient.  Take  for  illustration  a  person  that  has  mel- 
ancholia. The  operator  must  be  reserved,  he  must 
not  talk  too  much,  as  familiarity  robs  one  of  psychi- 
cal power.  His  personal  appearance  must  impress. 
His  methods  must  have  something  of  originality  to 
convince  the  patient  of  his  power  to  cure.  He  must 
be  pleasant  and  cheerful  and  and  know  his  patient. 
What  is  called  magnetism  is  frequently  the  out- 
growth of  a  sympathetic  nature;  and  with  patience 
that  nature  will  conquer  and  control  the  mind  of  the 
patient  very  largely.    He,  who  tactfully  utilizes  his 


CONDITIONS  OF  OPERATOR         171 

purposes,  knowledge,  and  power,  becomes  magnetic 

and  he  will  succeed. 

(d)  Sympathetic  and  Patient. 

If  there  is  a  real  desire  to  help  the  suffering,  based 
on  benevolence,  that  feeling  will  quickly  be  respond- 
ed to  in  the  afflicted.  If  the  monetary  considera- 
tion controls  the  mind  of  the  operator,  that  wiU 
usually  be  discovered  also.  The  true  man  is  quickly 
discovered  in  the  presence  of  suffering,  trouble,  and 
sickness.  People  know  very  soon  if  the  operator  is 
sincere  or  not,  not  so  much  by  the  look  of  the  eye 
and  the  tone  of  the  voice  as  by  the  peculiar  psychic 
impression  that  is  left.  When  one  is  suggestible,  he 
is  in  a  peculiarly  sensitive  condition  and  the  inward 
feelings  and  personality  of  the  operator  are  sensed 
or  felt  by  the  subject.  Some  persons  will  not  sub- 
mit to  be  treated  a  second  time,  because  of  the 
adverse  impressions  they  have  received.  There 
must  be  real  and  genuine  sympathy,  sincerity,  and 
confidence  between  the  operator  and  the  subject  or 
the  opposite  condition  will  cause  a  break  and  a  non- 
effect  in  suggestion. 

There  must  also  be  patience  on  the  part  of  both. 
"No  trial  is  a  fair  one  which  is  less  than  an  hour  in 
duration"  is  an  old  and  a  good  rule.  In  the  treat- 
ment of  disease  this  is  especially  true,  for  you  have 
not  only  a  possible  psychical  condition  which  may  be 
pathological,  but  also  a  predominant  psychical  con- 
dition, which  may  be  the  cause  of  the  ailment.  In 
some  cases  it  may  take  one,  two,  three,  four  and 


172  SUGGESTION 

even  as  many  as  twenty,  trials  or  more  to  bring  the 
conscious  mind  in  abeyance,  and  the  subconscious 
mind  in  an  unhindered  condition  to  accept  sugges- 
tions fully. 

I  doubt  if  it  is  best  to  go  beyond  the  fourth  or 
fifth  trial  to  hypnotize  one  who  shows  no  perceptible 
effect;  however,  there  are  writers  who  believe  that 
everyone  can  be  hypnotized  in  the  course  of  time. 
Dr.  Moll  holds  this  view.  Dr.  Milne  Bramwell 
says  that  he  has  induced  somnambulism  after  the 
patient  has  proven  insusceptible  fifty,  sixty,  and 
more  times.  Some  subjects  will  yield  more  readily 
to  one  operator  than  to  another.  Dr.  Augusta 
Voisin,  of  Paris,  made  many  trials  of  hypnotizing 
a  person,  and  failing  in  the  ordinary  methods  he 
used  chloroform  as  an  auxiliary  and  finally  suc- 
ceeded. I  have  read  of  one  person  who  tried  210 
times  to  be  hypnotized  with  very  little  effect.  There 
was  a  mental  condition  that  prevented  her  being 
hypnotized.  There  seems  to  be  no  other  reasonable 
explanation.  This  person  suffered  great  pain,  and 
doubtless  the  power  of  concentrating  the  mind  was 
interfered  with.  Dr.  Bramwell  gives  an  account  of 
a  person  whom  he  tried  to  hypnotize  65  times  and 
then  succeeded.     (See  Tuckey  p.  155). 

Many  persons  have  boasted  that  they  could  not 
be  hypnotized  and  that  the  hypnotist  could  not  affect 
them.  The  few  minutes  trial  was  probably  success- 
fully resisted  by  them,  or  they  did  or  could  not  con- 
centrate their  minds  on  the  suggestions  given,  and 


CONDITIONS  OF  OPERATOR         173 

then  boasted  that  they  could  not  be  hypnotized  and 
pronounced  the  whole  thing  an  impossibility. 

One  must  have  patience  with  such  ignorant  preju- 
dice. It  may  be  that  many  cases  of  prejudice  can 
be  overcome  and  helped  by  a  wise  course  in  the 
healer.  Systematic  deception  will  sometimes  be 
practiced  by  ordinarily  good  people  and  the  opera- 
tor's patience  will  be  severely  tried. 

The  true  healer  gives  something  of  himself  to  his 
patient  and  will  see  sooner  or  later  that  his  own 
mental  and  moral  conditions  will  be  disclosed  to  the 
mind  of  the  subject.  His  life  should  be  controlled 
and  well  poised  so  that  no  adverse  conditions  shall 
be  awakened  in  the  mind  of  the  person  treated. 

Many  an  operator  fails  because  he  lacks  confi- 
dence in  himself.  Let  me  say  to  the  reader,  if  you 
want  to  be  successful  in  this  work — and  that  is  true 
of  any  work  of  worth — be  confident  that  you  can 
do  the  work  before  you.  Faith  in  yourself  and  in 
your  ability,  with  a  concentration  of  your  mind  on 
your  work,  will  bring  great  results.  One  splendid 
result  of  this  kind  of  work  will  give  you  great  con- 
fidence. Do  not  let  a  failure  cause  you  to  lose  con- 
fidence in  yourself  and  in  your  ability.  Try  again, 
do  not  be  defeated,  for  the  principles  are  tried  prin- 
ciples. Say,  "I  will  succeed;  I  will  not  fail;"  and 
prove  what  you  say. 

Study  how  to  make  suggestions  eflFectively.  The 
tone  of  voice,  the  emphasis  on  a  word,  the  preceding 
mental  determination  and  a  desire  to  succeed  all 


174  SUGGESTION 

enter  into  the  operator's  power.  Make  your  sug- 
gestions firmly  and  positively,  emphasizing  the  word 
or  work  which  contains  the  suggestion  you  desire 
the  subject  to  carry  out.  The  look  of  the  operator 
leaves  an  impression  on  the  subject  that  will  be 
favorable  or  unfavorable.  Let  your  gaze  be 
direct  with  power  and  intensity.  If  you  sit  the 
proper  distance  where  you  can  look  "at  the  root  of 
the  nose"  and  not  produce  a  cross-eyed  condition  in 
yourself,  look  at  that  point.  If  you  sit  at  a  distance 
where  a  cross-eyed  look  is  discovered  by  the  sub- 
ject, look  directly  into  and  through  his  eyes,  compos- 
edly and  yet  intensely  and  with  strength,  dignity  and 
sincerity  born  of  a  purpose  to  do  him  good,  and  see 
how  quickly  you  will  succeed  in  your  work  and  pur- 
pose. Your  whole  demeanor  must  be  manly,  benev- 
olent and  helpful. 

It  might  be  well  for  me  to  explain  what  I  mean 
by  the  direct  look.  It  is  not  a  vacant  stare,  but 
looking  straight  into  the  eyes  of  another  intensely, 
as  though  looking  through  his  eyes  at  something  far 
back  of  them.  Your  mind  must  also  be  concentrated 
upon  the  suggestions  you  are  giving,  with  a  definite 
intention  that  they  shall  accomplish  the  purposes 
you  have  in  your  mind. 

An  operator  must  know  how  to  concentrate  his 
mind,  for  in  this  power  he  will  find  greater  effective- 
ness in  making  suggestions.  To  develop  this  power 
is  very  easy.  The  following  exercises  may  help : 
Write  a  word  on  a  sheet  of  paper  so  that  it  can  be 


CONDITIONS  OF  OPERATOR         175 

read  a  little  distance  away.  Sit  down  and  look  at 
the  word,  thinking  what  it  means  and  confining 
your  mind  to  the  word  as  long  as  you  can,  exclud- 
ing other  thoughts  and  words.  Then  close  your  eyes 
with  a  picture  of  the  word  before  you  mentally  and 
keep  it  in  the  mind  as  long  as  you  can,  excluding 
all  else. 

You  can  gaze  at  a  bare  wall  and  imagine  a  pic- 
ture hanging  there.  Look  at  it  carefully  and  do  not 
see  for  the  time  anything  else.  Keep  your  thought 
on  it  only,  as  long  as  possible.  It  will  not  be  easy 
at  first,  but  by  and  by  you  will  become  very  profi- 
cient in  this.  It  will  mean  much  for  you  in  the 
future  if  you  cultivate  the  power  of  concentration. 

Good  health,  good  habits,  and  a  good  feeling  for 
everybody  are  conditions  of  prime  importance  to 
one  who  wishes  to  be  successful  in  Suggestive  Ther- 
apeutics. If  one's  health  is  not  good  and  infirmi- 
ties show  themselves  in  body  and  face,  and  habits 
of  carelessness  prevail  in  dress  and  person,  one  will 
find  that  these  things  will  tell  heavily  against  him. 

The  use  of  tobacco,  liquor,  drugs,  especially  if 
there  is  an  odor  about  th^  clothes  or  body,  will  be 
detected  by  a  sensitive,  sick  person,  and  that  person 
will  either  give  up  treatment  or  go  to  some  one  else, 
less  offensive  and  objectionable.  The  inability  of 
the  operator  to  look  into  the  eyes  of  the  subject 
when  conversing  or  when  treating  the  subject,  if 
that  is  necessary,  will  weaken  his  power  and  develop 
suspicions  in  the  mind  of  the  subject.    No  one  ought 


176  SUGGESTION 

to  be  a  physician  to  the  soul  who  is  not  perfectly 
sincere,  honest,  and  open  in  life,  conduct,  and  char- 
acter. Sensitive  subjects  know  more  quickly  than 
anyone  else  whether  that  is  true  of  the  operator. 
Many  an  operator  has  failed  with  a  subject,  and 
eventually  in  this  business,  because  of  his  use  of 
those  things  which  have  led  the  subjects  to  believe 
that  he  was  a  slave  to  a  habit  instead  of  a  master 
of  himself.  Some  patients  have  told  me  that  some 
operators  could  do  them  no  good  because  they  were 
slaves  to  an  appetite  or  habit  and  ought  to  cure 
themselves  before  trying  to  cure  others.  No  man 
can  give  another  the  mastery  over  himself  or  his 
diseases  until  he  as  an  operator  knows  the  way  and 
has  the  experience.  So  beware  of  your  habits  if 
you  practice  Psycho-Therapeutics. 

The  reflex  influence  on  the  operator  is  simply 
amazing.  He  gets  back  into  his  own  mind  that 
which  he  tries  to  give  to  another.  Action  and  reac- 
tion are  opposite  and  equal.  He  who  would  help 
another  in  the  highest  life  will  be  helped  in  like 
manner.  He  who  helps  a  patient  to  use  higher 
forces  will  involuntarily  use  them  himself. 

No  one  can  be  sympathetic  in  the  truest  sense 
unless  he  strives  to  be  true  and  noble. 

(e)  Definite. 

This  applies  to  the  giving  of  suggestion  and  to 
the  purpose  of  securing  the  possible  results.  There 
ought  to  be  a  definite  purpose  in  all  that  is  done, 
otherwise  energy  and  time  will  be  wasted  and  power 


CONDITIONS  OF  OPERATOR         177 

and  words  will  be  lost.  Conscious  thoughts  of  help- 
fulness will  greatly  assist  in  the  restoration  of  a 
patient's  health.  The  characteristic  of  definiteness 
is  conditioned  on  several  important  things  in  the 
operator.  One  is  health  of  body  and  mind.  Another 
is  belief  in  one's  ability  to  accomplish  what  one  sets 
out  to  do.  "I  can  and  I  will,"  is  a  good  motto  for 
the  operator.  This  will  lead  to  very  definite  sug- 
gestions and  also  to  a  definite  study  of  the  case  in 
hand. 

A  fearless  attitude  of  the  operator's  mind  will 
cause  him  to  try  new  but  definite  suggestions  in 
order  to  secure  large  results.  Concentration  of 
thought  on  the  work  in  hand,  with  the  feeling  that 
the  case  must  be  helped,  will  accomplish  wonders. 
On  the  other  hand,  a  rambling  method  of  making 
suggestions,  changing  them  too  frequently,  indiffer- 
ence in  the  operator's  mind,  and  a  feeling  that  he 
wants  to  get  through  quickly,  will  greatly  militate 
against  one's  effectiveness  in  this  method  of  help  to 
the  afflicted  and  ailing.  Be  careful  about  making 
contradictory  suggestions  and  changing  them  so 
that  an  indefinite  feeling  is  imparted  to  the  subcon- 
scious mind  of  the  patient  as  these  conditions  will 
produce  hesitancy  if  not  complete  non-effect.  Be 
definite  in  your  mind  as  to  what  you  want  to  do, 
what  results  you  want  to  secure,  what  suggestions 
you  want  to  give,  what  effects  you  want  to  work  in 
the  subject.  It  is  a  good  thing  to  put  one's  self  in 
a  definite  frame  of  mind  before  endeavoring  to 
12 


178  SUGGESTION 

treat.  Quietly,  but  positively  say  to  yourself  "I  can 
and  I  will  help  the  patient,"  and  similar  suggestions. 
Confidence  and  sincerity  lead  to  definite  work  and 
results. 

2.  The  Conditions  of  the  Subject. 

No  person  can  or  will  receive  suggestions  effec- 
tively unless  there  is  a  passive  and  receptive  con- 
dition of  mind.  This  is  a  law  without  exception. 
No  one  in  good  health  and  in  normal  condition  can 
be  hypnotized  against  his  will.  The  statements  made 
to  the  contrary  are  false,  and  stand  without  proof 
to  confirm  them.  There  are  nervous  and  unhealthy 
persons  who  may  be  hypnotized  cautiously,  who  are 
not  aware  of  it,  but  if  they  realize  what  is  being 
done,  and  if  they  assert  their  will  in  auto-suggestion 
against  it,  the  effort  to  hypnotize  them  will  be  futile. 

There  are  persons  who  are  naturally  in  an  hypnotic 
condition,  or  rather  in  a  suggestible  state.  These 
persons  will  receive  and  act  on  many  suggestions. 
They  will  dissent,  however,  as  soon  as  they  find  the 
operator  trying  to  get  advantage  of  them  mentally. 
These  things  ought  to  be  taken  into  consideration 
where  a  person  is  prosecuted  for  taking  advantage 
of  another  by  hypnotism  or  suggestion.  The  sub- 
jects can  and  will  break  the  spell  if  there  is  a  desire 
on  their  part  to  do  so.  If  there  is  submission  to  the 
operator's  suggestions,  until  a  passive  or  complete 
suggestible  state  is  reached,  then  the  operator  can 
have  his  own  way  as  long  as  he  does  not  run  counter 
to  the  subject's  moral  education  and  habits. 


CONDITIONS  OF  SUBJECT  179 

Everybody  can  be  hypnotized  except  young  chil- 
dren and  idiots.  Some  more  readily  than  others. 
There  are,  however,  special  psychological  factors  to 
be  reckoned  with,  and  also  certain  ethical  principles 
which  lie  imbedded  in  the  subconscious  life  which 
are  a  protection  against  immoral  action  on  the  part 
of  the  subject. 

The  suggestible  state  is  one  in  which  the  subject 
is: 

(a)  Passive. 

There  is  also  an  expectant  condition  in  the  sub- 
ject's mind,  and  his  suggestion  is  also  ready  to  nul- 
lify the  suggestion  of  the  operator  when  it  runs 
counter  to  his  moral  education.  The  mind  may 
be  also  very  desirous  of  getting  definite  benefits 
in  the  body,  and  the  intenseness  of  the  desire  may 
put  the  mind  into  a  positive  instead  of  a  passive 
condition.  A  passive  state  is  one  in  which  the  con- 
scious mind  is  temporarily  quiescent,  the  body  re- 
laxed, the  whole  condition  one  of  restfulness.  In 
such  a  state  the  operator  can  do  his  best  work  and 
secure  his  greatest  results,  as  the  auto-suggestion 
of  the  subject  and  the  suggestion  of  the  operator 
can  work  together.  It  is  not  necessary  that  the  sub- 
ject shall  be  hypnotized,  if  that  state  can  be  secured 
without  hypnotism. 

I  have  discovered  a  method  by  which  this  can  be 
done  without  using  hypnotism.  However,  if  the 
subject  cannot  secure  this  state  completely,  I  some- 
times hypnotize  him,  and  thus  make  it  easier  at  the 


i8o  SUGGESTION 

next  treatment  for  the  patient  to  get  into  that  state 
without  hypnotization.  There  are  two  things  re- 
quired : 

1.  A  definite  consent  of  the  will. 

2.  Obedience  to  suggestion,  by  which  the  passive 
state  is  secured. 

The  element  of  consent  is  a  very  important  one, 
with  a  condition  of  expectation,  through  which 
cures  have  been  wrought  in  persons  who  are  sug- 
gestible. About  a  century  ago,  when  Perkin's 
Tractors  were  popular,  many  of  the  cures  were 
affected  by  these  principles.  When  the  explanation 
of  the  needlessness  of  the  tractors  was  published, 
and  the  people  had  received  it,  the  efficacy  of  that 
mechanical  device  was  at  an  end. 

John  St.  John  Long  prepared  a  "wonderful  lini- 
ment" for  rheumatism.  Many  remarkable  cures 
were  made.  The  reputation  of  this  liniment  spread 
far  and  wide.  The  British  Government  bought  the 
recipe  for  a  large  amount  of  money  and  intended  to 
give  it  to  the  public,  so  that  the  chronic  rheumatic 
sufferers  might  be  cured.  It  was  subsequently 
analyzed  and  found  to  be  turpentine  and  the  white 
of  an  tgg.  The  power  was  gone.  The  liniment's 
efficacy  had  evaporated.  This  would  be  true  also 
of  many  medicines,  and  many  prescriptions  of  doc- 
tors, if  the  real  ingredients  were  known.  Hence, 
Latin  prescriptions  are  used,  and  the  elements  of 
the  mental  life  are  permitted  to  do  the  curing, 
whilst  the  medicine  gets  the  credit.    The  pure  food 


CONDITIONS  OF  SUBJECT  i8i 

law  in  its  application  to  medicines  will  diminish  their 
sales  and  efficacy  many  per  cent.  Is  it  any  wonder 
that  the  quacks  and  fakirs  who  have  been  playing 
on  the  credulity  of  many  people  are  raising  a  great 
protest  against  this  law?  For  instance,  we  know 
of  a  quack  preparation,  that  has  centers  of  distribu- 
tion in  many  large  cities,  for  which  a  large  price  is 
charged,  a  remedy  for  women  exclusively.  It  con- 
sists of  a  species  of  massage  and  exercise  and  some 
ointments.  If  the  massage  and  exercises  were  taken, 
without  the  use  of  the  drugs,  the  virtue  would 
be  segregated  from  the  business  and  the  effects 
would  be  just  as  beneficial.  It  has  been  an  awful 
blow  to  the  fakirs  to  have  to  put  on  their  quack 
preparations  the  names  of  the  ingredients.  The 
truth  of  the  matter  is,  that  the  passive  condition  of 
mind  and  the  expectant  result,  which  are  mental 
conditions,  produce  a  large  number  of  cures.  This 
passive  condition  is  very  necessary  to  get  the  best 
results  from  suggestion  in  the  hands  of  a  practi- 
tioner. 

(b)  Receptive. 

Many  things  said  under  the  preceding  head  will 
apply  here.  A  receptive  condition  applies  particu- 
larly to  receiving  mentally  the  suggestions  made. 
The  relation  of  healer  and  subject  is  analogous  to 
that  existing  between  pupil  and  teacher.  The  cure 
is  wrought  by  arousing  into  normal  activity  the 
dormant  powers  of  the  mind,  and  not  through  the 
arbitrary  imposition  of  any  power  or  influence  from 


i82  SUGGESTION 

without.  The  operator  is  anxious  to  get  truth 
lodged  in  the  subconscious  mind  and  through  that 
mind  accepted,  recognized  and  appHed.  All  perma- 
nent healing  in  its  final  analysis  is  self-healing.  A 
sick  person  is  generally  controlled  by  a  self-knowl- 
edge contrary  to  the  truth,  and  when  the  truth  is 
lodged  in  the  subconscious  mind  it  is  relieved 
from  repressing  self-suggestion.  Much  can  thus  be 
accomplished  for  the  sick  or  for  those  ill  at  ease. 

If  the  possibility  of  suggestion  can  be  aided  by 
the  subconsciousness,  greater  effects  and  quicker  re- 
sults follow.  If  the  mind  is  receptive  in  the  sense  of 
carrying  out  suggestions,  many  marvellous  conse- 
quences will  be  produced.  We  do  not  say  that  no 
results  follow  when  the  subject  does  not  unhesitat- 
ingly accept  the  suggestion.  There  is  doubtless 
some  effect  secured,  but  the  best  results  occur  when 
the  subject  quietly,  intentionally  and  willingly  re- 
ceives the  suggestions  given.  It  is  possible  also 
gradually  to  help  one  who  at  first  may  be  opposed 
to  hetero-suggestion,  but  when  certain  results  are 
seen  by  him,  he  yields  and  secures  beneficial  effects. 

(c)   Willing. 

This  condition  applies  to  the  carrying  out  of  the 
suggestions.  This  state  of  mind  implies  faith  on  the 
part  of  the  subject.  If  the  subject  has  no  faith  in 
the  operator,  all  that  may  be  suggested  will  be  inert 
to  a  great  degree.  Jesus,  when  he  was  doing  such 
wonderful  things,  came  into  a  place  where  unbelief 
made  his  work  ineffective,  or  largely  so.  The  en  rap- 


CONDITIONS  OF  SUBJECT  183 

port  condition  between  practitioner  and  subject  is 
conditioned  on  faith,  and  willingness  on  the  part  of 
the  subject  to  receive  what  is  suggested  or  offered. 
All  orators,  professional  men,  and  especially  physi- 
cians, have  experienced  the  paralyzing  effect  of 
doubt  and  unwillingness  to  receive  their  statements, 
by  certain  people,  and  they  are,  under  those  cir- 
cumstances, generally  quite  desirous  of  getting  away 
from  that  kind  of  environment. 

Where  faith  exists,  a  willing  spirit  naturally  fol- 
lows. If  the  patient  is  in  an  expectant  attitude,  and 
the  operator  has  won  the  confidence  of  the  subject, 
willingness  naturally  results.  Suggestions  may  take 
effect  when  repeated  frequently,  even  if  there  is 
but  little  faith  and  corresponding  little  willingness 
to  act  on  them.  Eventually,  the  subconscious  mind 
may  so  assert  its  power  that  the  conscious  mind 
must  yield  its  opposition  because  of  the  results 
seen,  but  the  best  results  and  speediest  effects  will 
be  gotten  in  an  atmosphere  of  faith  and  acquiescence 
of  the  mind  of  the  subject  to  the  suggestions  given. 

Cures  may  sometimes  be  wrought  through  the 
subconscious  mind  of  one  who  outwardly  antago- 
nizes the  suggestions  given,  but  that  is  the  exception 
not  the  rule.  When  faith  accepts  the  suggestion  and 
believes  that  the  results  will  be  accomplished,  half 
of  the  battle  is  over,  and  beneficial  results  will  fol- 
low. If  the  faith  goes  out  towards  certain  objects 
or  persons,  the  more  exalted  they  are  the  greater 
and  quicker  the  action.    If  towards  one  whose  repu- 


i84  SUGGESTION 

tation  is  worth  nothing,  the  action  will  be  slow.  If 
the  reputation  is  great,  results  will  come  quickly. 
If  faith  is  manifested  towards  God,  the  effect  will 
be  deep  and  the  action  will  be  pronounced.  If  a 
patient  believes  that  he  is  part  of  the  Divine  and 
Universal  Spirit,  and  pronounces  himself  so  to  the 
subconscious  mind,  or  is  pronounced  so  by  another, 
and  the  subject  believes  this,  the  results  are  fre- 
quently amazing.  The  suggestion  must  present 
power  which  faith  may  appropriate,  and  in 
that  appropriation  the  subject  must  consent  to  re- 
ceive what  is  offered.  Faith,  and  its  attending 
appropriation  by  the  act  of  willing,  is  the  one  su- 
preme condition  of  accomplishing  anything  great  in 
one's  life  and  is  quite  essential  to  all  permanent 
cures.  Purposive  attention  is  an  expression  of  the 
will,  and  when  quietness  is  observed  the  attention 
and  expectation  operate  and  appropriate  what  is 
offered  by  suggestion  orally  or  silently  by  one's  own 
mind,  or  by  the  mind  of  another. 

The  more  reasonable  the  knowledge  imparted  or 
existing  in  the  conscious  mind  so  will  be  the  effect 
of  suggestion ;  the  more  completely  the  conscious 
mind  co-operates  and  consents,  the  more  speedy 
the  results.  Energetic  suggestion  calls  for  immed- 
iate consequences,  and  it  frequently  secures  them. 
The  tone  of  the  voice  should  be  filled  with  nervous 
power.  It  need  not  be  loud,  but  must  be  throbbing 
with  strength.  Deep  feeling  and  earnestness  must 
characterize  the  operator,  so  that  a  whisper  thus 


CONDITIONS  OF  SUBJECT  185 

energized  may  be  more  effective  than  a  loud  tone, 
There  must  be  an  exercise  of  the  will  on  the  part  of 
the  operator,  and  a  definite  conscious  purpose  to 
impress  the  subconscious  mind  of  the  patient,  and 
thus  will  be  accomplished  desirable  effects.  Will- 
ingness to  receive  suggestions  of  the  operator  by  the 
subject  is  a  necessary  condition  in  order  to  accom- 
plish far-reaching  consequences  in  the  life  of  the 
subject. 

(d)  Desirous. 

This  is  a  longing  and  expectant  condition.  The 
greatest  benefits  may  be  derived  from  suggestions 
in  this  state  of  mind. 

This  condition  also  lays  the  foundation  for  at- 
tracting to  one's  self  what  is  needed  and  desirable. 

Thought  has  a  twofold  power : 

1.  It  produces  a  positive  effect. 

2.  It  has  also  a  negative  side  which  attracts.  The 
subject,  in  a  receptive  condition,  has  also  a  desire 
to  be  helped,  and  thus  attracts  what  is  highest  and 
best  from  the  thought  of  the  operator.  The  two- 
fold power  of  thought  may  be  referred  to  as  will 
and  desire. 

All  mental  energy  is  manifested  either  as  will  or 
desire.  The  former  compels,  impels,  and  de- 
mands. The  latter  draws  towards  itself,  allures, 
charms,  fascinates,  and  thus  secures  what  is  best,  or 
it  may  secure,  under  certain  circumstances,  what  is 
worst.  The  general  attitude  of  the  mind  will  deter- 
mine which.     Electricity  may  be  compared  to  the 


i86  SUGGESTION 

will-power  in  its  tendency  to  drive  forward  that 
which  is  influenced.  Magnetism  may  be  compared  to 
desire-power,  in  its  tendency  to  draw  to  itself  that 
which  is  needed  and  hold  it  for  the  highest  pur- 
poses. Hence,  the  will-power  of  the  subject  may  be 
held  in  abeyance  and  his  desire-force  may  receive 
the  thought,  suggestion,  and  power  of  the  operator's 
mind;  and  in  certain  mental  conditions  of  the 
subject,  the  feelings  or  emotions  of  the  operator 
and  his  thought-power  will  have  a  wonderful  effect 
on  the  subject's  mind.  We  do  not  doubt  that  there 
are  thought  currents  and  waves  which  induce  in  the 
mind  of  the  subject  what  is  in  the  mind  of  the  oper- 
ator. Suggestion  thus  becomes  the  outward  expres- 
sion of  the  inward  mental  state  of  the  operator. 
The  subject,  to  get  the  highest  and  best  results  of 
suggestion,  must  be  in  a  condition  of  desire. 

(e)  Helpful. 

This  condition  will  have  a  tendency  to  deepen  the 
suggestions  given.  Auto-suggestion  is  not  only  a 
profitable  assistance  in  securing  the  largest  and  best 
results  in  one's  self,  but  is  also  a  great  power  in 
deepening  and  anchoring  the  hetero-suggestions 
received.  We  have  discussed  auto-suggestion  in 
another  section,  but  there  are  some  things  that  ought 
to  be  said  under  self-help  for  the  benefit  of  prac- 
titioners who  desire  to  get  the  co-operation  of  the 
persons  whom  they  treat. 

The  subjects  ought  to  be  instructed  to  look  upon 
themselves  as  active  centres  of  energy  and  power, 


CONDITIONS  OF  SUBJECT  187 

and  know  that  by  the  exercise  of  their  wills  and  by 
the  power  of  attraction,  through  desire,  they  can 
greatly  aid  themselves  and  carry  out  more  fully  the 
suggestions  which  are  given.  If  the  subjects  are 
in  an  hypnotic  condition,  the  operator  can  tell  them 
that  they  will  do  certain  things  to  help  themselves 
in  the  future,  specifying  the  time.  They  can  be  in- 
structed that  their  will  power  and  desire-force  will 
accomplish  what  is  necessary  to  be  done  and  attract 
to  them  what  they  need.  The  former  is  electrical, 
the  later  is  magnetic.  The  former  drives,  compels ; 
the  latter  draws,  attracts.  Show  them  that  this 
great  law  applies  on  the  physical,  mental,  and  spirit- 
ual planes  of  life.  Show  them  how  they  may  be 
electro-magnetic,  which  is  the  greatest  power  that 
one  can  possess.  Show  them  that  if  a  circle  repre- 
sents a  great  ocean  of  mind-energy,  holding  in  itself 
all  power,  wisdom,  etc.,  and  if  a  dot  in  the  centre  of 
it  represents  a  living  person  like  themselves  and  that 
all  that  belongs  to  that  ocean  can  be  accepted  by  the 
dot  because  it  lives  in  that  ocean;  being  also  the 
centre  of  force,  all  this  energy  about  them  can  be 
used.  It  will  be  surprising  to  the  operator  how  the 
subject  will  be  able  to  help  himself  if  he  gets  these 
truths  anchored  in  his  mind  and  will  graphically  see 
these  things. 

The  subject  can  be  given  special  suggestions  also 
which  he  may  use  in  self-help.  He  can  be  led  to 
visualize  what  he  desires  to  be.  Visualization  is  the 
bringing  of  the  positive  imagination  to  see  and  feel 


i88  SUGGESTION 

that  which  we  desire  to  be  actually  existent.  Let 
the  operator  tell  the  subject  to  see  himself  as  he 
wishes  to  be.  Tell  him  to  see  others  in  the  same 
way.  Tell  him  to  see  conditions  about  as  he  wishes 
them  to  be.  Tell  him  to  surround  himself  with  an 
atmosphere  of  health,  success,  power,  love,  and 
bank  on  these  things. 

The  suggestions  given  by  the  operator  can  also 
be  used  from  time  to  time  by  the  subject,  and  thus 
he  can  help  himself  and  keep  himself  in  health  and 
strength  and  in  whatever  state  he  may  desire. 


PHYSIOLOGY  189 


CHAPTER  Vni. 

The  Physiology  of  Suggestion. 

"The  brain  and  spinal  cord  form  a  coherent  mass 
consisting  of  a  white  and  gray  delicate  substance. 
The  gray  matter  is  cellular,  the  white  is  a  conductor, 
and  every  conducting  fibre  is  a  continuation  of  a 
nerve  cell.  The  white  substance  is  composed  almost 
exclusively  of  medulated  fibres,  criss-crossing 
through  each  other,  in  larger  and  smaller  bundles, 
running  in  all  directions.  This  fibrous,  white  tissue 
contains  portions  of  neurons  which  frequently  origi- 
nate in  different  parts  of  the  brain  and  spinal  cord 
and  run  into  other  parts  than  where  they  originate. 
They  are  like  cable-wires  running  through  sub- 
stances, not  parallel,  but  crossing  many  ways  and 
pressed  together  like  hairs  of  a  piece  of  felt.  , 

"The  gray  substance  of  the  cerebrum  contains 
cells  as  well  as  terminal  branches  of  neurons.  Lin- 
ing all  the  convolutions  and  fissures  of  the  cerebrum 
is  found  a  ring  or  cortex  of  varying  thickness,  which 
is  prominently  the  seat  of  certain  mental  processes 
and  into  which  directly  and  indirectly  the  neurons 
of  other  parts  of  the  brain  and  body  send  nerve 
fibres. 


190  SUGGESTION 

"Long  neurons  may  be  divided  into : 

1.  "The  association  systems,  through  which  a  gang- 
lion cell  sends  its  nerve-fibre  to  one  or  more 
groups  of  ganglion  cells,  and  to  other  distant  cen- 
tres of  the  cortex  on  the  same  or  on  the  opposite 
side. 

2.  "The  projection  system  consists  of  two  kinds,  (a) 
The  centrifugal,  in  which  ganglion  cell  of  the  cor- 
tex sends  its  fibres  to  the  spinal  cord  or  other  sub- 
ordinate neuron  centres,  (b)  The  centripetal,  in 
which  a  ganglion  cell  of  the  spinal  cord  or  of  a 
lower  centre  sends  its  fibres  to  the  cortex. 

3.  "Short  or  local  neurons  (cells  of  Golgi),  in  which 
the  gangHa  cells  send  the  branches  of  its  principle 
processes  only  to  neighboring  cells.  There  is  no 
direct  connection  between  a  sense  organ  and  the 
cortex,  or  between  the  cortex  and  a  muscle." 

"There  are  in  the  central  nervous  system  com- 
plete isolated  chains  of  successive  neurons  between 
the  cortex  and  peripheral  neurons.  Two  various 
telegraph  stations  are  found  in  which  messages  are 
delivered  or  combined,  and  then  sent  on.  The 
largest  uninterrupted  neurons  run  through  the  pyra- 
midal tract  from  the  central  convolutions  of  the  cor- 
tex to  the  anterior  horns  of  the  spinal  cord  and  those 
which  lead  from  the  anterior  horns  to  the  muscles. 
These  two,  ranked  one  above  the  other,  transmit 
the  combined  stimuli  of  the  voluntary  impulse  to 
the   muscles    and   produce   voluntary    movements. 


PHYSIOLOGY  191 

The  centres  of  sense  and  activity  are  also  in  the 
brain." 

We  see  from  the  statements  made,  concerning 
the  physical  constitution  of  the  nervous  system,  that 
we  have  no  direct  knowledge  of  anything  in  the 
outer  world,  but  only  mental  processes  and  contents 
of  consciousness  which  result  from  the  connection 
we  have  physically  with  external  nature. 

Dreams  and  somnambulistic  experiences  depend 
upon  the  automatic  action  of  the  nerves  and  the 
dissociation,  in  a  degree  at  least,  of  the  superior  or 
conscious  centres  from  the  lower  or  automatic  cen- 
tres which  are  under  the  control  of  the  subconscious 
mind.     This  is  also  true  in  the  hypnotic  condition. 

In  these  conditions,  sounds  or  pricking  by  pins, 
and  many  ordinary  perceived  sensations,  are  not  con- 
sciously realized  by  the  subject.  Anesthesia  and 
similar  and  other  varied  states  occur  in  this  condi- 
tion. 

I  am  indebted  to  an  unknown  author  for  some  of 
the  following  thoughts : 

Superconsciousness  would  be  a  good  word  to  use 
to  express  the  idea  of  consciousness  in  activity. 
Subconsciousness  could  then  be  used  concerning  the 
state  which  has  been  or  may  be  superconsciousness 
broken  off  or  continued,  as  the  case  may  be. 

Physiologically,  sensory  nerves  act  centripetally, 
motor  nerves  act  centrifugally.  There  is  physically 
a  wave-like  molecular  movement  in  the  motor,  and 


192  SUGGESTION 

probably  also  in  the  sensory  nerves  and  nerve  neu- 
rons. 

Co-ordinate  reflexes  depend  on  a  connected  set  of 
reflex  contractions.  Instinct  in  birds  and  animals 
has  been  called  inherited  automatism,  but  we  shall 
have  to  go  back  to  the  mental  manifestations  to  find 
an  explanation  of  instinct.  Some  one  has  given  the 
physical  side  of  instinct  by  an  illustration.  For  in- 
stance, if  a  pigeon's  cerebrum  is  removed  and  the 
bird  is  thrown  into  the  air,  it  will  fly  to  the  nearest 
object  and  settle  on  it.  It  will  eat,  if  fed,  but  it 
would  die  near  a  pile  of  grain  if  left  alone.  The 
reason  given  is  that  the  motor  impulse  is  gone  with 
the  co-ordinating  reflexes,  although  the  sensory  im- 
pulse may  remain.  This  is  physically  correct,  and 
as  conclusions  from  this  and  similar  illustrations 
there  are  three  steps  from  a  simple  reflex  to  an  auto- 
matic action: 

1.  A  simple  twitch. 

2.  A  simple  purposive  reflex  act. 

3.  A  larger  chain  of  purposive  performances.  Stim- 
ulus to  the  brain  which  gives  rise  to  no  movement 
or  outward  action  becomes  transferred  into  ten- 
sion and  thus  leads  to  arrest  or  inhibition  of 
action. 

There  are  certain  results  which  follow  cerebral 
excisions  in  pigeons  or  dogs.    The  following  deduc- 
tions may  be  considered  settled : 
I.  Complicated  and  purposive    instincts    and   auto- 
matic  actions   can   exist   without  the   cerebrum. 


PHYSIOLOGY  193 

That  is,  dogs  and  pigeons  can  feel,  hear,  and  act. 

2.  If  the  cerebrum  is  removed,'  automatic  acts  lose 
connection  with  each  other,  so  that  there  is  a  lack 
of  purposive  cooperation  for  the  carrying  on  of 
the  life  work,  and  the  animal  becomes  like  an  im- 
becile, neglectful  of  the  ordinary  duties,  like  eat- 
ing, drinking,  etc. 

3.  When  the  cerebrum  is  smaller  than  the  brain  cen- 
tre, the  latter  takes  over  the  direction  of  the  auto- 
matic action  and  makes  the  physical  guidance  of 
life  possible  for  the  creature  or  animal  without  a 
cerebrum. 

We  must  not  confuse  consciousness,  which  is 
psychological,  with  physiological  function. 

There  is  no  organ  of  consciousness,  because  it  is 
not  an  organic  conception,  and  has  nothing  to  do 
with  the  physiological  conception  of  energy  whose 
inner  introspective  side  it  presents.  We  know  that 
the  spinal  cord  and  the  subordinate  centres  possess 
subordinate  minds,  and  that  the  subconscious  im- 
pulses and  passions  as  well  as  lower  feelings  are 
somehow  connected.  These  have  been  considered 
by  many  physiologists  to  be  remnants  of  the  instincts 
of  early  life,  and  that  they  rest  on  automatic  action 
which  has  been  developed  by  exercise.  There  may 
be  a  large  element  of  truth  in  this  view,  but  we  are 
inclined  to  think  that  instinct,  passions,  and  many 
other  things  which  are  proven  to  belong  to  the  men- 
tal side  of  man's  life,  and  that  are  manifested 
through  the  physical  side,  are  inherent  in  his  consti- 

13 


194  SUGGESTION 

tution.  In  other  words,  life  is  first,  and  it  forms 
the  body  and  all  that  pertains  to  it,  so  that  all  that 
is  essential  to  man's  highest  interests  here,  and  all 
that  he  may  be,  is  potentially  found  in  this  life.  The 
plastic  condition  of  the  cerebrum,  the  power  of  sec- 
ondary automatic  action,  the  plastic  tendency  of 
vital  energies,  the  disturbances  of  cerebral  function 
producing  mental  disturbances,  we  concede,  but 
these  things  do  not  invalidate  our  position  that  life 
manifests  itself  through  organism,  and  this  makes 
possible  all  these  things. 

The  pathologist  finds  the  matter  of  the  nervous 
system  arranged  differently  than  in  abnormal  condi- 
tion. A  blood  clot  pressing  on  a  volitional  tract 
causes  paralysis  or  speechlessness;  a  thickened  or 
displaced  bone  pressing  upon  certain  areas  deprive 
those  areas  and  their  connections  from  functioning ; 
a  fluid  accumulation  in  the  brain  cavity  causes 
hydrocephalous,  etc.  To  cure  these  abnormal  condi- 
tions means  that  there  must  be  a  removal  of  the 
pathological  condition  and  a  rearrangement  of  the 
cells.  Nervous  diseases  can  be  cured  by  impressions 
on  matter  or  nerves  in  securing  good  reflexes,  or  by 
impressions  on  the  mind  in  order  to  produce  a  re- 
newed activity. 

Hence  the  water  of  Lourdes  and  certain  things 
like  faith-healings  and  Christian  Science  can  assist 
in  the  cure  of  real  diseases. 

"There  is  frequently  a  functional  element  added 
to  organic  diseases  as  in  disseminated  sclerosis  of 


PHYSIOLOGY  195 

the  brain  and  spinal  cord.  Hence,  physicians  may 
be  deceived  who  regard  it  only  as  functional.  The 
simulation  may  lead  to  deception.  On  the  other 
hand,  functional  disorder  by  interfering  with  gen- 
eral nutrition  may  lead  to  organic  disease  and  intro- 
duce the  converse  complication." 

Let  it  be  understood  that,  back  of  all  the  normal 
or  pathological  conditions,  is  the  thing  called  mind, 
which  controls  all  the  vital  functions,  and  which  can 
itself  be  influenced  by  certain  elements,  conditions, 
or  suggestions,  and  be  led  to  correct  the  abnormal 
and  control  the  pathological,  so  that  the  cure  may 
be  effected  in  what  might  be  called  a  perfectly  nat- 
ural way.  The  physiological  conditions  all  tend  to 
the  normal,  if  there  is  no  interference  with  physical 
functioning.  If  there  is,  there  are  certain  aids  to 
assist  in  establishing  the  normal. 

The  living  cell  is  the  basis  of  the  physical  body 
and  it  possesses  life  and  mind  in  itself.  Histology, 
especially  cytology,  proves  that  the  body  of  man  is 
composed  of  microscopic  cells,  and  that  every  organ, 
tissue,  and  part  of  the  body  is  made  up  of  these  tiny 
particles.  The  elements  are  the  same,  yet  different 
proportions  of  these  elements,  in  the  chemical  ar- 
rangements, determine  the  kind  of  tissue  or  organ 
formed.  The  physiological  view  is  that  the  organ- 
ized form  of  these  cells  produces  an  organism  which 
is  controlled  by  a  living  power,  which  we  call  mind. 
Looking  at  mind  from  this  standpoint,  we  might 
suppose  that  it  is  produced  by  the  cells  in  their  cor- 


196  SUGGESTION 

porate  form.  But  when  we  take  into  consideration 
the  teachings  of  psychology  we  cannot  accept  that 
view.  That  there  is  a  form  of  intelligence  in  the 
cells,  and  that  they  respond  to  the  presence  of  cer- 
tain things  favorably  and  unfavorably,  has  been 
demonstrated  many  times.  Take,  for  instance,  some 
tissue  cells,  place  them  on  a  microscopic  slide  and  in 
the  focused  instrument.  Put  some  nitroglycerine 
close  to  them  and  they  make  a  rapid  flight  as  far 
away  from  the  drug  as  they  can  get.  They  seem  to 
recognize  an  enemy.  Take  opium  and  substitute  it 
for  nitroglycerine  and  the  cells  resist  at  first,  then 
quiver  and  succumb  as  though  they  were  conquered. 
Use  capsicum,  and  the  cells  seem  to  come  together 
as  though  they  were  meeting  a  friend.  What  makes 
the  difference  ?  Why  did  they  fly  from  the  first,  sur- 
render to  the  second,  seem  to  meet  the  third.  Either 
the  influence  in  the  drug  or  a  form  of  intelligence 
in  the  cells  produced  these  effects.  We  are  inclined 
to  believe  the  latter  view.  These  experiments  seem 
to  explain  the  instinct  of  self-preservation,  which  is 
so  strong  and  natural  in  the  human  being. 

The  amoeba,  that  remarkable  one-cell  organism, 
knows  its  enemies  and  flies  from  them.  It  has  mind 
enough  to  find  a  hiding-place  and  gather  food,  prov- 
ing that  it  has  intelligence.    It  also  reproduces  itself. 

Man,  who  is  the  climax  of  all  animal  nature,  the 
most  perfect  as  to  his  bodily  structure,  the  most  mar- 
vellous as  to  brain  and  thought-power,  has  a  physi- 
cal organism  which  is  an  aggregation  of  physical 


PHYSIOLOGY  197 

cells  and  their  corporate  living  manifestation.  His 
brain  seems  to  be  the  centre  and  supreme  consum- 
mation of  the  most  perfect  arrangement  of  cells,  on 
its  cortical  surface,  and  is  the  great  automatic  re- 
ceiver and  the  voluntary  sender  of  messages  from 
and  to  the  world  in  which  he  lives.  This  wonderful 
congeries  of  nerves,  blood  vessels,  gray  and  white 
matter,  seem  to  be  the  instrument  of  the  conscious 
mind. 

The  solar  plexus  and  the  sympathetic  nervous 
system  seem  to  be  the  seat  and  channel  of  the  mani- 
festation of  the  subconscious  mind  as  to  its  physical 
relationship. 

The  healthy  condition  of  the  cells  means  health 
for  the  body.  A  disturbed,  unbalanced  condition  of 
the  cells  means  disease  for  the  physical  organism, 
abnormal  conditions  of  the  body  and  insanity  of 
the  cells.  As  the  combination  of  the  cells 
makes  tissues  and  organs,  and  organs  make 
the  body,  may  not  the  aggregate  mentality  of 
the  cells  make  the  conscious  mind  of  man  as  to  man- 
ifestation? If  there  is  intelligence  in  the  cells,  may 
there  not  also  be  mind  in  the  atoms  that  compose 
the  cells,  may  it  not  have  been  mind  that  created 
the  atoms  ?  May  that  not  be  the  subconscious  mind, 
and  the  manifestations  of  the  mind  of  God  ?  We  do 
not  answer,  but  only  raise  the  question. 

Remarkable  changes  occur  in  the  body  under  the 
influence  of  the  emotions.  Take  anger,  fear,  jealousy 
in  a  nursing  mother,  and  how  quickly  the  manifesta- 


198  SUGGESTION 

tion  of  those  emotions  changes  the  condition  of  her 
milk,  which  will  act  almost  like  a  poison  to  the 
child.  If  a  few  moments  of  passion  can  cause  such 
chemical  changes  of  the  body,  what  may  not  a  con- 
stant morbid  condition  produce  ? 

Every  tissue,  function,  and  organ  are  affected  by 
these  emotional  states,  and,  if  they  continue,  degen- 
erative changes  will  occur,  disease  will  be  produced. 

Fear  and  its  brood  of  worries  all  have  a  tendency 
to  disarrange  the  normal  bodily  conditions  and  pro- 
duce chemical  changes  for  the  worse,  so  that  other 
compounds  are  formed  and  secretions  naturally  acid 
become  alkaline,  and  conversely  so,  and  thus  the 
system  becomes  depleted  of  necessary  power,  or  mor- 
bid changes  occur  and  nervous  prostration  results. 
Malnutrition,  anemia,  and  a  lowered  standard  of 
power  and  strength  result,  which  condition  will 
breed  all  kinds  of  ailments. 

Many  cases  of  tuberculosis  originate  primarily 
from  this  cause. 

The  old  metaphysicians  were  not  far  wrong  when 
they  classified  the  various  diseases  according  to  their 
corresponding  mental  states.  They  said  impatience 
or  covetousness  would  produce  bad  breath;  doubt, 
fear  and  obstinancy,  asthma;  hot  temper,  and  jeal- 
ousy, boils;  criticism,  Bright's  disease;  suppressed 
passion,  cancer;  diabetes  they  said  was  produced  by 
foolishness;  ear-ache  by  disobedience;  eczema  by 
censure;  nausea  by  thought  of  separation;  pneu- 


PHYSIOLOGY  199 

monia  by  disappointment  in  love  or  business ;  rheu- 
matism by  fretting,  anger,  or  stubbornness.  The 
idea  is  quite  correct,  but  the  classifications  are  not 
so.  Certain  states  will  produce  physical  changes 
which  may  result  in  certain  ailments. 

A  morbid  condition,  a  fixed  idea,  a  depressed 
mental  state,  a  mania  will  change  the  countenance, 
the  chemical  compositions  of  the  secretions  and  the 
flow  of  blood  until  the  person  may  become  hypo- 
chondrical.  No  change  will  occur  from  this  condi- 
tion until  the  thought  is  changed,  which  will  produce 
a  physical  change. 

There  is  in  nature  a  great  law  which  we  may  call 
the  law  of  correspondence.  Habit,  will,  thought, 
desire,  and  emotion  all  somehow  produce  a  corres- 
ponding effect  in  the  physical  form  and  feature. 
Hence  we  look  and  become  as  we  think  and  do. 
Spencer  calls  this  a  mental  and  physical  correspon- 
dence, a  co-ordination  of  mind  and  body. 

The  psychical  area  of  the  brain  is  connected  vitally 
with  many  centres  of  other  areas  which  control  var- 
ious functions  of  the  body.  When  these  centres  are 
disturbed  as  to  their  equilibrium,  a  corresponding 
disturbance  occurs  in  those  functions.  For  example, 
fear  and  worry  may  so  depress  the  psychical  mani- 
festations, and  through  its  brain  centre  affect  the 
digestion,  and  even  turn  the  body  into  a  temple  of 
pain  rather  than  one  of  health. 

Hence  the  emotions  that  have  a  tendency  to  work 
abnormal  conditions  and  functional  disturbances  are 


200  SUGGESTION 

to  be  watched  and  those  tendencies  avoided.  It  is 
wrong  physically,  morally,  and  spiritually  to  be  so 
angry  that  one  has  no  control  over  himself ;  so  pos- 
sessed with  grief  that  the  life  is  despaired  of;  so 
jealous  that  a  man  becomes  a  beast,  and  so  filled  with 
fear  that  life  is  not  worth  living. 

The  mind  gives  the  force  to  control  and  move  the 
body,  but  the  brain  is  the  channel  for  the  manifes- 
tation of  that  force.  Hence  the  instrument  must  be 
in  good  condition  if  the  player  shall  get  the  best 
music  out  of  it. 

To  fix  one's  attention  on  anything  causes  one  to 
have  a  clearer  and  a  more  comprehensive  idea  of  it. 
Take  pain  as  an  example.  If  one  thinks  about  it, 
talks  about  it,  coddles  it,  the  pain  will  grow  worse, 
and  the  person  will  be  absorbed  in  it  to  the  exclu- 
sion of  all  else.  Herein  we  find  the  explanation 
of  hypchondria.  The  persons  so  afflicted  have  been 
talking,  thinking,  dreaming,  reading,  about  their  ills 
until  they  are  self-hypnotized  by  them. 

Fix  the  attention  on  any  part  of  the  body,  and 
uncomfortable  sensations  will  soon  be  felt  there. 
Many  people  induce  a  diseased  condition  by  this 
process.  Dr.  T.  Hack  Tuke,  of  England,  has 
truthfully  said:  "If  the  attention  be  directed 
toward  any  bodily  organ,  abnormal  sensations  may 
be  perceived  in  it,  and  disease  may  be  developed." 

From  a  physical  standpoint  two  things  are  essen- 
tial to  health ;  a  good  nerve  impulse  and  a  pure  and 
abundant  blood  supply.     If  either  are  interfered 


PHYSIOLOGY  201 

with,  there  will  be  disease,  and  cellular  degeneration 
will  occur.  To  increase  the  pure  blood  supply  and 
the  nerve  force,  means  relief  from  disease  and  a 
normal  condition.  How  to  do  this  is  a  large  ques- 
tion, but,  in  a  general  way,  it  may  be  stated  that 
suggestion  is  one  method.  We  have  referred  to  the 
concentration  of  the  attention  on  a  particular  part 
of  the  body  for  the  purpose  of  increasing  the  func- 
tional action  of  that  part.  This  has  been  and  can  be 
very  easily  done  with  great  results.  Dr.  Laycock 
says :  "If  the  attention  be  daily  directed  to  an  opaque 
cornea  during  a  hypnotic  trance,  a  deposit  of  lymph 
will  be  observed  to  form."  A  conscious  act  of 
attention  will  also  produce  a  physical  change  and 
action  of  a  part.  We  have  cited  instances  enough 
of  this,  so  we  do  not  stop  to  cite  more.  The 
Yogis  of  India  can  destroy  pain  by  this  power,  pro- 
duce at  times  levitation,  they  can  walk  on  water  and 
hot  stones,  doing  the  former  without  sinking,  doing 
the  latter  without  being  burned.  They  can  stop  the 
beating  of  the  heart,  and  do  many  things  which 
savor  of  the  supernormal.  The  explanation  of  all 
this  is  found  in  the  power  of  the  mind  over  the 
body.  The  supreme  work  of  the  one  who  will  try 
to  help  another  by  the  use  of  mental  suggestion  is 
to  change  the  subject's  mode  of  thought  and  inspire 
him  with  new  motives.  When  the  ideal  of  health, 
hope,  strength,  courage  and  power,  are  imparted  to 
the  mind  that  has  been  controlled  by  the  opposite 
conditions,  the  great  law  of  self-preservation  asserts 


202  SUGGESTION 

itself  and  the  physical  response  to  the  mental  activity 
is  very  quick.  Those  ideals  first  referred  to  may 
be  presented  by  the  suggestion  of  another,  by  one's 
own  suggestion,  direct  or  by  prayer,  or  by  the  exer- 
cise of  the  will.  The  subconscious  mind  goes 
to  work  immediately  to  realize  the  ideals  when 
the  suggestion  is  anchored.  Its  work  may 
be  hindered  or  inhibited  by  the  conscious  mind. 
Hence,  it  is  best  to  have  consent  and  co-op- 
eration of  that  mind  or  to  have  it  in  a  quiescent 
or  passive  condition.  To  secure  permanent  results, 
it  is  necessary  to  have  a  good  normal  nervous  activ- 
ity, and  a  good  blood  supply  and  a  proper  adjust- 
ment to  outward  conditions.  Hence,  there  must  be 
the  exercise  of  self-control,  observance  of  sanitary 
law,  the  development  of  the  physical  organism,  and 
the  exercise  of  common  sense.  The  twofold  forms 
of  life  are  in  a  general  way  mental  and  physical. 
The  great  world  of  mental  activity  fruits  in  the 
Infinite  mind  and  the  physical  side  adapts  itself  to 
the  forces  and  conditions  of  its  material  existence. 
For  instance,  the  mental  is  the  real  as  to  permanent 
existence,  the  physical  is  essential  to  this  present  en- 
vironment. There  are  essentials  of  physical  life  which 
must  be  taken  into  consideration  and  used.  Those 
essentials  are  sunshine,  air,  and  water.  These  are 
God's  gifts  to  man.  There  are  also  clothing,  food, 
and  shelter,  which  man  must  provide  for  himself. 
These  six  things  are  necessary  to  this  present  form 
of  existence,  and  he  who  turns  away  from  or  does 


PHYSIOLOGY  203 

not  use  them  will  show  not  only  lack  of  judgment, 
but  will  suffer.  Let  any  man  refuse  to  get  the  fresh 
air,  the  golden  sunshine,  refuse  to  sleep,  eat  pure 
food  and  drink  pure  water,  and  I  care  not  how  much 
mental  power  he  may  have,  he  will  very  soon  be  in 
a  state  of  physical  collapse.  Many  people  are  sick 
today  because  they  violate  the  laws  of  their  physi- 
cal nature.  But  the  observance  of  these  laws  with 
mental  power  means  happiness,  peace  and  health. 
The  brain  tissue  must  be  kept  healthy,  the  blood 
supply  pure  and  sufficient,  the  nerve  impulses  and 
activity  strong  and  normal,  and  the  whole  person- 
ality in  right  relation  to  the  Infinite  and  finite,  so 
that  man  may  get  the  best  out  of  his  life  and  realize 
the  true,  the  beautiful,  and  the  good. 

Breathing  is  one  great  help  in  establishing  health. 
Oxygen  is  essential  to  physical  life,  it  is  the  great 
cleanser  with  water  of  the  physical  system,  and  it  is 
the  great  vitalizer  of  the  blood.     Learn  to  breathe. 

If  you  follow  a  sedentary  and  indoor  life,  go  to 
the  open  door  or  open  a  window  and  take  a  number 
of  deep  breaths,  completely  filling  the  lungs  and  hold 
the  air  and  then  exhale  it. 

Another  good  exercise  is  to  stand  erect,  breathe 
deeply,  hold  the  air,  clench  the  hands,  tense  the 
muscles,  and  then  exhale.  The  circulation  is  greatly 
aided  by  this  exercise.  Many  people  could  be  recov- 
ered from  many  of  their  physical  ailments  if  they 
were  to  do  this  and  practice  deep  breathing  regu- 
larly.    Let  there  be  a  definite  mental  intention  and 


^ 


204  SUGGESTION 

determination  in  the  mind  to  get  a  renewal  of  life 
and  strength. 

Take,  for  instance,  stomach  trouble  or  indigestion, 
and  see  how  this  works.  The  ailment  is  due  to  the 
inactivity  or  possibly  the  over-activity  of  the  vaso- 
motor nerves,  the  result  of  which  is  that  there  is 
too  little  or  too  much  blood  there.  Fix  your  thought 
by  definite  intention  upon  the  stomach  and  you  will 
increase  the  nerve  power  or  equalize  it  so  that  the 
blood  can  be  equalized  or  increased.  The  equaliza- 
tion of  the  blood  means  a  normal  amount  of  gastric 
juice  secreted.  Keep  the  attention  on  the  stomach 
for  fifteen  minutes  and  the  feeling  of  fullness  will 
disappear  with  other  disagreeable  symptoms.  Then 
suggest  when  you  are  in  a  relaxed  condition  that 
the  stomach  is  strong  and  that  it  will  do  its  work 
well.  Have  a  picture  in  your  mind  that  it  is  doing 
its  work  normally  and  naturally  and  that  it  is  be- 
coming healthy  and  strong.  And  it  will.  This  has 
been  demonstrated  over  and  over  again. 

A  surprise  or  a  transfer  of  the  mental  activity 
will  sometimes  cure  for  the  time  serious  ailments. 
The  cry  of  fire  has  set  the  rheumatic,  who  has  been 
helpless,  into  activity,  and  by  the  law  of  self-defense 
he  has  run  away  from  the  fire  and  been  cured.  A 
scene  or  performance  or  something  that  has  held 
the  attention  has  changed  the  feeling  of  severe  pain, 
like  neuralgia  and  other  conditions.  The  thinking 
of  pain  has  augmented  it  and  the  mind  occupied 
with  other  things  has  relieved  it.    The  exercise  of 


PHYSIOLOGY  205 

will,  and  physical  exercise,  will  produce  the  same 
results. 

Vivid  imagination  may  kill  a  person.  A  news- 
paper in  Chicago  published  the  following,  "Not 
poisoned,  but  dead  because  she  thought  she  was 
poisoned,  was  the  singular  verdict  pronounced  by 
Coroner's  physician  Springer  today,  after  perform- 
ing an  autopsy  on  the  body  of  Virginia  Jackson,  an 
aged  negro  woman  and  former  slave.  This  old  lady 
thought  she  had  been  poisoned,"  said  Dr.  Springer, 
"and  it  affected  her  heart  to  such  an  extent  that  it 
killed  her." 

A  neighbor  gave  Mrs.  Jackson  a  bottle  contain- 
ing a  brownish  liquid.  "Evidently,"  say  the  police, 
"the  old  negro  woman  jumped  to  the  conclusion, 
on  feeHng  ill  immediately  after  she  had  tasted  of  the 
contents  of  the  bottle,  that  she  had  been  poisoned." 
Here  is  a  case  illustrating  the  power  of  imagination 
and  auto-suggestion. 

The  physiological  results  of  suggestion  are  far- 
reaching  in  their  consequences  and  they  are  uni- 
versal in  their  effects. 


2o6  SUGGESTION 


CHAPTER  IX. 
The  Psychology  of  Suggestion. 

The  relation  of  suggestion  to  psychology  and  its 
outgrowth  from  that  science  makes  it  a  subject  of 
regnant  import.  Psychology  has  to  do  with  all  men- 
tal states,  conditions,  and  manifestations,  and  it  will 
be  found  that  suggestion  occupies  a  large  part  of 
that  science.  We  have  hinted  at,  and  in  several 
places  stated,  something  of  the  psychology  of  sug- 
gestion. But  here  we  shall  enlarge  the  discussion 
and  show  the  scientific  purposes  and  relationships 
of  the  twofold  manifestation  of  mind,  or  of  the  two 
minds,  as  some  prefer  to  call  them. 

The  materialist  denies  the  existence  of  the  soul, 
in  the  sense  of  its  possible  existence  independently 
of  the  body.  Physiological  Psychology  has  in  the 
past  been  materialistic  in  its  conclusions,  and  thus 
we  have  had  a  psychology  without  the  soul.  The  day 
for  that  teaching  is  practically  past.  The  pendulum 
is  swinging  to  the  other  extreme,  so  that  even  the 
body  is  being  swallowed  up  by  the  soul  or  the  spir- 
itual nature,  so  that  we  have  come  to  a  time  when 
some  people  say  all  is  spirit  and  there  is  no  body.  It 
would  in  the  light  of  the  investigations  during  the 
last  twenty  years,  be  more  reasonable  to  agree  with 


PSYCHOLOGY  207 

Plato  that  the  soul  is  a  thin,  misty,  hazy  something 
which  might  be  blown  away  if  a  person  died,  than 
to  believe  that  we  are  nothing  more  than  a  fortui- 
tous congeres  of  psychic  states  that  somehow  min- 
gle with  our  personality.  To  see  the  manifesta- 
tion of  the  human  soul  and  analyze  its  peculiar 
characteristics,  naturally  leads  us  to  infer  that  it  is 
the  leading  factor  of  human  personality.  Take 
anger,  for  instance.  It  is  a  species  of  insanity.  It 
could  also  be  called  a  kind  of  epilepsy,  having  all 
the  marks,  especially  tremendous  increase  of  activ- 
ity. Psychology  has  for  its  practical  work  to  teach 
people  what  to  be  angry  at  so  their  emotions  may 
make  for  moral  heroism  and  power.  Fear  is  another 
passion  that  will  yield  strength  if  properly  guided. 
It  is  in  certain  ways  a  species  of  self-preservation 
against  animals,  storms,  vice,  etc.  But  fear,  in  the 
sense  of  conjuring  up  prospective  ills,  calamities, 
etc.,  is  an  unmitigated  curse.  Fearing  God  in  the 
truest,  noblest  sense  makes  for  righteousness.  Fear- 
ing all  that  sullies  the  mind  and  heart  will  lead  to 
the  highest  development  of  the  soul. 

Love  is  the  passion  that  makes  us  truly  human, 
and  leads  us  to  the  noblest  activity,  and  eventually 
transforms  the  life  into  the  divine  likeness.  It  is 
the  strongest  and  most  powerful  instinct  in  the 
human  soul,  possibly  hunger  excepted.  But  see 
how  it  has  been  perverted.  It  can  make  man  a 
human  being  like  Judas  or  Jesus,  like  a  demon  or 
like  a  denizen  of  heaven.    The  heart  is  looked  upon 


2o8  SUGGESTION 

as  greater  than  the  head.  I  use  these  words  not  in 
a  physical  but  in  a  metaphorical  sense.  As  the 
heart  is,  so  is  the  man.  "As  a  man  thinketh  in  his 
heart  so  is  he."  The  real  seat  and  reservoir  of  love 
is  the  subconscious  mind  or  nature  and  that  love  is 
also  the  avenue  of  power  and  helpfulness  to  those 
that  are  in  need.  Pity  is  a  child  of  love,  and  so  is 
sympathy,  and  he  who  would  help  the  sick,  the 
diseased,  and  the  degenerate,  must  have  love  in  the 
two-fold  manifestation  of  pity  and  sympathy.  Only 
thus  can  the  person  be  cured  and  changed  and  can 
one^s  own  life  of  helpfulness  be  developed  and  puri- 
fied. Three  things  are  absolutely  necessary  in  one 
who  would  deal  effectively  with  other  people  whom 
he  would  help,  namely,  love,  health,  and  happiness. 
This  last  term  is  not  used  to  express  simply  a  sense 
condition,  but  a  real  true  happiness  that  does  not 
change  with  feeling  or  passing  conditions.  It  is 
distinct  from  pleasure.  There  is  an  animal  happi- 
ness, which  is  joy  in  existence  that  makes  us  feel 
good  just  because  we  live.  True  happiness  depends 
upon  and  flows  from  true,  sincere  goodness.  When 
we  have  that,  and  regulate  our  lives  accordingly, 
we  can  be  dispensers  of  health,  joy,  and  happiness. 
The  peculiar  constitution  of  man  in  its  psychical 
and  physical  aspects  fit  him  not  only  for  the  environ- 
ment that  he  has  in  his  material  relationships,  but 
also  for  the  exercise  of  his  psychical  powers  over 
these  things  and  in  higher  conditions  than  animal 
existence.     To  illustrate  this  psychical  manifesta- 


PSYCHOLOGY 


209 


tion  and  to  make  our  thought  plainer,  we  present 
the  following  diagram: 


O  center  constituting  the  highest  psychic  power. 
It  is  a  congeries  of  a  great  number  of  distinct  neu- 
rons. 

14 


210  SUGGESTION 

The  foregoing  illustration  or  diagram  and  much 
of  the  description  is  from  Dr.  Grasset's  work  on  the 
"Semi-Insane  and  Semi-Responsible,"  a  great  work, 
and  one  that  ought  to  be  read  by  students 
of  psychic  problems.  It  will  graphically  help  in 
our   explanation   of  the  psychology  of  suggestion. 

O  centre  constituting  the  highest  psychic  power. 

O  also  superior  psychic  centre  of  conscious  per- 
sonality, free  will,  and  responsible  ego. 

A  V  T  E  M  K  polygon  of  automatic  centres  (in- 
ferior psychic  centres  of  psychological  automatism. ) 

A  auditory  or  hearing  centre. 

V  visual  or  seeing  centre. 

T  tactile  or  touch  centre. 

E  writing. 

M  speech  centre. 

K  general  movement  centre. 

On  one  side  are  receiving  centres  for  incoming 
sensations  through  sense  organs,  on  the  other  side, 
transmitting  centres  for  outgoing  impulses,  for  gen- 
eral motion,  speech,  and  writing.  All  these  centres 
are  situated  in  the  gray  matter  of  the  cortex  of  the 
brain,  and  closely  connected  by  intra-polygonal 
fibres  AE  AM  AK  VE  VM  VK  TE  TM  TK 
which  are  in  association  with  the  outside  world, 
from  the  surface  of  the  body,  through  the  connecting 
fibres  aA  vV  tT  and  out-going  fibres  to  muscles  Ee 
Mm  Kk  all  connected  with  the  superior  centre  O 
by  means  of  over-polygonal  fibres;  one  set  is  sen- 


PSYCHOLOGY 


211 


sory,  AO  VO  TO,  bearing  perceptions  to  O  centre. 
The  other  set  motor,  OE  OM  OK,  bearing  motor 
impulses  outward. 

Voluntary  acts  take  place  within  the  polygon 
whenever  AO  VO  TO  KO  MO  NO  EO  fibres  are 
intact  and  functionating.  One  then  has  conscious- 
ness of  voluntary  acts.  When  over  polygonal  fibres 
are  not  functionating  a  disaggregation  or  dissocia- 
tion takes  place  between  the  O  and  the  polygon  and 
automatic  acts  take  place  unknown  to  consciousness. 

If  the  senses  are  gently  stimulated  by  monotonous 
sound  or  touch,  or  objects  looked  at,  a  condition  of 
inhibition  of  the  cortical  cells,  with  a  consequent 
intermission  or  suspension  of  voluntary,  higher,, 
cerebral  functions,  will  occur.  The  automatic  cen- 
tres carry  on  their  work  efficiently,  and  the  whole 
sympathetic  nervous  system  seems  to  be  called  into 
play  through  which  the  subconscious  mind  operates. 
If  hypnosis  occurs  completely,  the  cortical  centres 
do  not  remember  anything  of  what  is  done,  but,  if 
only  partially,  the  cortical  centres  act,  and  there  is 
a  more  or  less  vivid  memory  of  what  was  done  and 
said  to  one  in  this  condition. 

There  are  several  psychological  factors  entering 
into  the  production  of  an  hypnotic  condition  as  well 
as  a  suggestible  frame  of  mind: 

I.  Suggestion.  This  is  the  first  step  as  explanatory 
of  what  is  desired.  This  may  be  accomplished  by 
words,  imitation  or  by  tactile  manipulation. 


212  SUGGESTION 

2.  Expectation  on  the  part  of  the  subject.  If  this 
condition  is  not  present  to  a  greater  or  less  ex- 
tent, a  person  may  gaze  at  an  object  or  hear  the 
monotonous  suggestion  of  sleep,  or  by  tactile  ma- 
nipulation know  the  desire  of  the  operator,  and  yet 
not  be  hypnotized.  If  it  were  otherwise,  spontan- 
eous somnambulism  would  be  general,  and  any- 
one would  have  very  little  voluntary  control  over 
himself. 

A  cerebral  center  used  to  excess,  or  absorbed  in 
thought  or  work,  will  cause  other  centres  to  be 
inhibited  for  the  time  being.  Noises  will  be  unheard 
and  other  sense-perceptions  unnoticed  as  when  the 
attention  is  held  by  an  interesting  book. 

A  monotonous  sound,  sight,  or  touch,  will  induce 
drowsiness  or  sleep.  The  blood  seems  to  flow 
slower.  But  a  sudden  noise  or  flash  of  light  startles 
and  awakens  and  sends  the  blood  leaping  through 
the  vessels.  In  gazing  at  an  object  there  is  a  tendency 
to  centre  attention  on  that,  exclude  all  other  objects, 
until  the  continued  strain  seems  to  exhaust  the 
visual  centre  and  it  ceases  to  act  and  a  condition 
of  mental  vacuity  and  rest  occurs. 

Man  is  kept  awake  by  many  and  varied  impulses 
and  ideas,  and  if  they  are  diminished  and  become 
monotonous  by  reiteration  he  comes  to  a  condition  of 
mental  vacuity,  in  which  state  the  outer  world  does 
not  seem  to  voluntarily  affect  him.  Into  this  state  of 
mind  the  operator  may  send  his  suggestions  and 
ideas.    They  will  be  carried  into  the  very  centre  of 


PSYCHOLOGY  213 

the  subject's  life  and  marvellous  results  will  be  se- 
cured. 

The  voluntary  and  conscious  mind  is  quiescent,  the 
essential  and  psychic  life  can  be  transformed,  so 
that  subsequently  the  conscious  mind  itself  will 
stand  amazed  at  the  results.  Persons  meeting  with 
an  injury  when,  returning  to  consciousness,  fre- 
quently continue  in  thought  that  which  they  were 
doing  when  injured;  so  that  the  mind  under  the 
power  of  suggestion  will  carry  out  those  suggestions 
in  a  post-hypnotic  condition  and  secure  great  bene- 
fit, mentally,  morally,  and  physically  from  them. 

The  polygon  presented  on  page  209  brings 
out  graphically  the  superior  automatic  centres.  On 
the  right  side  are  sensory  centres  for  reception,  as 
A,  auditory;  V,  visional;  and  T,  centre  for  general 
sensation.  On  the  left  side  motor  centres,  K, 
kinetic;  M,  centre  for  articulate  speech;  E,  centre 
for  writing.  These  centres  are  all  situated  in  the 
gray  substance  of  the  cerebral  convolutions  and 
connected  by  all  manner  of  cortical,  inter-polygonal 
fibres;  connected  also  with  the  periphery  by  sub- 
polygonal  centripetal  and  contrifugal  paths  and 
united  with  the  superior  centre  O  by  superpolygonal 
fibres,  some  centripetal  (Ideo-sensory),  the  others 
centrifugal  (Ideo-motor).  Automatic  acts  may  or 
may  not  be  conscious,  according  as  the  automatic 
activity  is  or  is  not  communicated  to  the  centre  O, 
which  is  the  centre  of  personal  consciousness. 


214  SUGGESTION 

The  actions  represented  by  the  polygon  are  psy- 
chic, because  memory  and  intellectuahty  are  in  their 
functioning.  In  a  normal  and  physiological  state, 
as  a  rule,  all  these  are  active  at  the  same  time ;  their 
activities  are  interwoven  and  superimposed. 

Dissociation  occurs  between  O  and  the  polygon 
in  distraction,  weakness  and  sleep,  nightmare,  auto- 
matic acts,  involuntary  and  unconscious  move- 
ments, like  table-moving,  the  divining  rod,  mind 
reading,  planchette,  and  automatic  writing  of  spir- 
itistic mediums  and  other  conditions. 

An  aroused,  awakened  condition  seems  to  have  its 
supreme  manifestation  from  O  and  the  automatic 
and  subconscious  manifestation  from  substations 
and  from  the  sympathetic  nervous  systems  in  the 
nervous  mechanism.  Certain  centres  can  be  aroused 
to  perform  the  corresponding  activities  that  belong 
to  them.  For  instance,  one  who  is  unaffected  by 
fumes  of  strong  ammonia,  in  a  suggestible  state  can 
be  aroused  to  a  perceiving  condition  when  the 
faintest  odor  is  perceptible.  Especially  is  that 
true  in  an  hypnotic  condition.  One  unable  in  this 
condition  to  move  his  arm,  by  a  stimulation  of  sug- 
gestion can  perform  extraordinary  feats  of  strength. 
Normally,  self-control  can  prevent  any  extraordinary 
manifestation  of  emotion,  but  in  the  hypnotic  con- 
dition emotions  may  be  called  forth  one  by  one  with 
a  power  that  seems  to  make  them  supreme. 

There  are  really  three  groups  of  psychical  func- 
tions : 


PSYCHOLOGY  215 

1.  Motor-sensory  of  psychical  functions  of  external 
relations. 

2.  The  superior  psychical  functions  which  are  con- 
scious and  voluntary.  Herein  is  found  a  well- 
known  psychological  law;  namely,  that  the  intel- 
lectual life  is  at  one  and  the  same  time  emotional, 
mental  and  psychical.  We  find  herein  the  explana- 
tion of  many  extraordinary  phenomena.  These 
three  groups  have  their  anatomical  location  in  dif- 
ferent parts  of  the  cerebral  cortex,  whilst  the  sec- 
ond group  have  their  supreme  manifestations  also 
through  the  sympathetic  system. 

3.  The  simple  obedience  to  a  command  involves  the 
auditory  centre,  the  ganglionic  cells  of  the  cortex, 
the  motor  power  of  the  will,  the  basal  ganglia,  and 
the  conducting  medium  of  the  spinal  cord  to  the 
muscles  through  which  a  resultant  activity  is 
manifested. 

If  the  activity  in  its  finality  is  inhibited,  providing 
the  action  is  one  that  has  been  frequently  repeated, 
there  will  be  some  muscular  movement.  The  inhibi- 
tion of  the  highest  centres  check  the  complete  action. 
Some  actions,  like  soldiers  drilling,  or  certain  kinds 
of  work,  become  automatic.  In  time,  the  commands 
are  obeyed  so  perfectly  that  the  auditory  and  motor 
centres  are  the  direct  way  through  the  basal  ganglia 
to  the  muscles.  The  actions  become  cerebro-reflex 
and  in  a  measure  beyond  the  man's  control.  A  hyp- 
notized person  is  in  a  similar  condition.  The  intel- 
lectual centres  are  quiescent,  and  a  command  or  sug- 


2i6  SUGGESTION 

gestion  is  fulfilled,  and  frequently  without,  and  pos- 
sibly contrary  to,  will  and  reason. 

A  fall  or  mental  shock  may  produce  such  an  inhi- 
bition of  reason,  so  that  the  automatic  movements 
may  continue  and  the  person  seem  apparently  nor- 
mal. There  seems  to  be  a  similar  condition  pro- 
duced by  hypnotism.  As  in  those  conditions  there 
seems  to  be  no  memory  of  what  occurred  after  the 
shock  or  fall,  so  in  a  deep  hypnotic  condition  all 
memory  seems  to  be  lost. 

There  may  not  be  anaemia  of  the  whole  brain  in 
hypnotism,  but  there  is  a  slowing  down  of  the  blood 
circulation  and  a  stupefying  effect  of  the  venous 
blood  in  the  brain  and  a  coincident  anaemia  of  the 
cerebrum.  That  I  believe  to  be  especially  true  in 
certain  areas  of  the  cortex.  There  is  an  anaemic 
condition  so  that  the  cortex  brain-centres  are  quies- 
cent. There  are  also  inhibitory  fibres  in  nerves 
connected  with  the  cortex  which  assist  in  slowing 
down  the  activity,  and  also  exciting  fibres  in  nerves 
that  act  more  rapidly  under  certain  stimuli  in  cer- 
tain areas.  When  the  suggestion  of  sleep  is  made,  if 
the  subject  is  willing  to  take  the  suggestion,  then 
the  operator  becomes  the  superior  mind  and  the  sub- 
ject, as  in  automatic  action  carries  out  what  the 
operator  commands  or  requests.  The  superior  or 
voluntary  powers  are  not,  for  the  time,  in  operation 
actively.  The  regular  nerves  or  centres  send  out 
impulses  which  check  the  activity  of  the  superior 


PSYCHOLOGY  217 

group  of  physical  centres  and  those  controlling  the 
automatic  centres  continue  unabated  in  activity. 

The  resemblance  between  natural  and  hypnotic 
sleep  is  very  marked.  They  differ  in  respect  to  con- 
sciousness. In  the  latter,  the  sleep  is  arrested  be- 
fore complete  unconsciousness  occurs.  It  is  possi- 
ble that  the  activity  of  an  organ  depends  on  the 
amount  of  blood  passing  through  it,  rather  than  the 
amount  in  it  at  a  given  moment.  Dr.  Lehman,  in 
his  lectures  on  Experimental  Psychology,  says  the 
result  of  blood  stasis  from  withdrawal  of  its  influ- 
ence, affecting  the  vaso-motor  centres  from  the  Sen- 
sorium  is  drowsiness  and  sleep.  The  whole  of  the 
hemispheres  are  equally  affected.  It  is  partial  in 
hypnosis,  and  the  suggestion  of  the  hypnotist  can 
modify.it,  and  the  subject,  through  suggestion,  may 
dream  a  series  of  dreams.  Natural  sleep  can  be 
changed  into  hypnotic  by  partially  awaking  the  sub- 
ject, but  not  sufficiently  to  regain  the  use  of  all  his 
faculties.  There  is  possibly  a  modification  of  cere- 
bral circulation  which  becomes  the  physical  basis 
for  the  phenomena  of  hypnotism. 

There  are  several  drugs  which  produce  exag- 
gerated susceptibility  to  suggestion.  Cannabis 
indica,  modified  forms  of  ether,  and  opium  in  a  few 
of  its  forms.  The  first  seems  to  produce  the  quickest 
results  and  secures  the  best  conditions  for  sugges- 
tion. Post-narcotic  suggestion  will  frequently  be 
carried  out.  Alcoholism  brings  one  into  a  sugges- 
tible state.     Epileptics  are  usually  very  susceptible 


2i8  SUGGESTION 

to  hypnotism.  The  reason  may  be  found  that  the 
higher  centres  are  easily  dissociated  from  the  lower. 
Young  children  in  their  sleep  are  almost  in  a  state 
of  somnambulism,  responding  readily  to  suggestion 
and  the  next  morning  knowing  nothing  about  it. 
There  are  times  in  a  child's  life  when  its  condition  is 
practically  hypnotic.  This  may  explain  why  children 
yield  so  easily  to  and  get  such  great  benefits  from 
hypnotic  treatment.  The  connections  with  the 
superior  centres  have  not  been  balanced  and  set  by 
development,  and  thus  mental  readjustment  may  be 
accomplished. 

From  a  physiological  standpoint  we  cannot  ex- 
plain clairvoyance.  Only  as  we  assume  that  the  sub- 
conscious mind  can  operate  through  the  nerve  cen- 
tres, and  under  nervous  stimulation  can  produce 
a  possible  exaggerated  perception,  do  we  have  a 
probable  explanation  of  this  remarkable  power. 

Numerous  questions  also  arise  that  are  not  easily 
answered.  Why  is  it  that  a  hypnotic  subject  will 
hear  and  obey  only  the  voice  of  the  operator  ?  There 
must  be  a  mind  that  is  alert  to  all  impressions  that 
may  reach  it,  when  the  voluntary  condition  is  quies- 
cent, or  they  would  not  hear  and  obey. 

I.     Characteristics  of  the  hypnotic  and  allied  states. 

The  suggestive  condition  of  the  subject  will  heed 
what  an  operator  says,  give  from  memory  long 
selections  of  prose  and  poetry  which  he  has  care- 
fully read,  omit  certain  letters  in  spelling  certain 


PSYCHOLOGY  219 

words  in  speech  and  under  the  influence  of  sugges- 
tion, and  declare  that  the  words  are  spelled  right, 
until  he  is  brought  into  his  normal  condition  when 
he  detects  the  errors.  Aphasia  can  be  produced 
with  a  good  susceptible  subject.  He  can  be  told 
that  he  has  forgotten  his  name  or  cannot  give  it, 
or  that  he  is  unable  to  pronounce  a  or  i  or  any  letter 
and  he  will  not  be  able  to  do  so. 

A  strong  emotion  may  produce  speech  where  it 
has  been  lost.  There  are  numerous  instances  on 
record  of  the  dumb  being  made  to  speak  and  the 
infirm  to  walk  under  excitement. 

Violent  emotion  may  produce  serious  results, 
such  as  loss  of  speech,  loss  of  memory  of  visual 
impressions.  Objects  may  be  seen,  such  as  trees, 
friends,  one's  image  in  a  glass  and  he  may  not  rec- 
ognize them. 

The  condition  induced  by  accident  or  injury  to 
the  brain,  especially  the  lower  parietal  lobe,  is  a  sim- 
ilar condition  as  that  produced  by  suggestion  on  a 
sensitive  hypnotized  subject.  The  dissociation  be- 
tween the  higher  and  lower  centres  is  such  that  the 
lower  act,  whilst  the  higher  are  inhibited. 

As  a  man  can  in  a  degree,  and  by  practice  volun- 
tarily, inhibit  the  perceptive  centres  consciously,  so 
the  operator  can  by  hypnotic  control,  and  with  the 
use  of  suggestion,  inhibit  the  same  centres.  Elimi- 
nating simulations  and  clever-acting  it  has  been 
proven,  beyond  any  question,  that  normal  people  in 
an  hypnotic  condition  have  surrendered  the  higher 


220  SUGGESTION 

or  superior  voluntary  psychical  control  to  the  opera- 
tor and  really  do  only  the  things  suggested.  Apha- 
sia, agraphia,  amimia,  alexia,  and  many  other  condi- 
tions may  be  produced  by  an  inhibition  of  the  volun- 
tary perception  centres.  Under  this  condition 
knowledge  gained  through  the  senses,  memory,  and 
reasoning  may  be  called  out  and  be  reproduced,  but 
not  voluntarily  and  intentionally  by  the  subject,  but 
by  the  suggestion  given  him. 

Paralysis  can  be  induced  by  suggestion.  Many 
times  I  have  by  suggestion  produced  the  inability 
to  move  the  legs  or  arms  or  body.  Commanding 
one  to  walk  and  telling  him  that  he  cannot  stop,  or 
have  him  cross  his  legs  and  command  him  to  move 
the  upper  one  faster  and  faster  and  faster  and  he 
will  obey.  I  have  had  him  twirl  his  hands  faster  and 
faster  and  he  could  not  stop  them.  He  will  twirl 
them  until  commanded  to  stop  or  becomes  utterly 
exhausted.  The  movement  becomes  automatic.  O 
of  the  diagram  becomes  inactive  and  the  polygonal 
centres  become  active  and  a  new  superior  centre  is 
established  by  the  operator.  The  fixed  idea  will  be 
carried  out  to  the  limit  of  strength  and  knowledge. 

A  monotonous  sound,  the  ticking  of  a  watch,  the 
quiet  monotone,  the  raising  of  the  eyes  toward  the 
forehead  as  if  looking  up  at  an  object,  and  many 
similar  things,  will  put  one  into  an  hypnotic  sleep. 
I  have  found  that  two  points  of  contact  with  the  sub- 
ject, and  verbal  suggestions,  are  the  best  and  most 


PSYCHOLOGY  221 

effective  things  that  can  be  used  to  induce  that  sleep. 
If  the  subject  is  very  susceptible,  verbal  suggestions 
are  enough  without  the  tactile.  If  the  subject  takes 
a  dislike  to  anything  suggested,  the  conscious  mind 
asserts  itself  against  that,  or  may  awaken  the  per- 
son completely,  showing  that  it  is  possible  in  an 
hypnotic  condition  to  re-establish,  and  that  quickly, 
the  connection  between  the  lower  and  the  higher 
brain  centres.  One  thing  must  be  remembered, 
which  is  vital  to  the  whole  discussion;  namely,  the 
superior  brain  centre  for  the  time  is  quiescent  so  that 
an  extraneous  centre  is  established  and  the  subcon- 
scious mind  has  free  play,  so  that  in  the  hypnotic  or 
suggestive  state,  experience,  knowledge,  processes 
of  reasoning,  accustomed  abilities  and  powers  can  be 
manifested  to  their  fullest  degree.  If  an  hypnotized 
person  is  asked  why  he  does  a  certain  thing,  like 
carrying  out  a  post-hypnotic  suggestion,  he  will  give 
a  reason  for  it.  For  instance,  I  gave  a  suggestion  to 
be  carried  out  two  hours  after  I  brought  the  person 
out  of  an  hypnotic  condition.  The  suggestion  was  to 
get  a  volume  of  Tennyson's  poems  and  to  read 
"The  Deserted  House."  The  subject  carried  out 
the  suggestion. 

2.     Suggestion  Without  Hypnotism. 

Remarkable  results  are  sometimes  obtained  by 
suggestion  without  hypnotism.  It  will  be  found, 
however,  that  such  persons  are  naturally  in  an  hyp- 
notic condition.  Probably  about  three  out  of  ten 
persons  are  naturally  so,  and  with  the  strenuous  con- 


222  SUGGESTION 

ditions  of  our  civilization,  the  number  is  increasing. 
Many  persons  are  on  the  border  Hne  today  of  losing 
control  of  the  highest  psychical  centres,  and  that 
makes  it  possible  to  find  them  naturally  hypnotic. 
Many  young  people,  by  habits  that  are  hurtful,  are 
brought  into  an  hypnotic  condition,  and  if  taken  in 
time  can  be  morally  and  wonderfully  changed. 

Dr.  Ireland,  quoting  from  Dr.  Edgar  Berillon's 
book  on  "Experimental  Hypnotism;  the  Duality  of 
the  Brain  and  the  Independent  Functioning  of  the 
Two  Hemispheres  of  the  Brain,"  shows  that  in  a 
profound  state  of  hypnotism  one  can  tell  an  amusing 
story  in  one  ear  and  a  pathetic  story  in  the  other 
and  the  one  side  of  the  subject's  face  will  show 
pleasure,  laughter,  and  amusement,  whilst  the 
other  side  will  show  grief,  sympathy,  and  even 
horror. 

These  effects  cannot  be  produced  when  the  higher 
voluntary  centres  are  in  contact.  Dr.  Berillon 
makes  some  very  pertinent  deductions  which  are 
logical  and  true : 

1.  Hypnotism  can  suppress  the  physical  motor  and 
sensory  motor  activity  of  one  hemisphere  of  the 
brain. 

2.  It  can  give  to  each  hemisphere  of  the  brain  a  dif- 
ferent degree  of  activity. 

3.  The  two  hemispheres  having  an  equal  degree  of 
activity,  we  can  create  for  them  at  the  same  time 
manifestations  which  vary  in  their  nature  and 


PSYCHOLOGY  223 

character.  It  is  a  proven  fact  that  in  the  hypnotic 
condition  each  hemisphere  of  the  brain  seems  to 
have  independent  functioning  abihty,  and  there 
may  be  a  transference  of  functional  manifestation 
from  one  side  to  the  other  in  the  same  condition. 

Dr.  Tuckey  gives  an  instance  that  illustrates  the 
latter  part  of  this  statement.  One  of  his  subjects  was 
easily  hypnotized.  In  that  state  "he  would  lose  the 
right  hemiplegia,  with  which  he  was  suffering,  and 
would  walk  quite  naturally.  When  he  was  hypnotiz- 
ed, both  his  eyes  were  shut,  as  in  natural  sleep,  and  if 
either  of  them  was  forcibly  opened  the  correspond- 
ing side  of  his  body  became  cataleptic,  while  if  both 
were  opened  the  whole  body  took  on  this  condition. 
If  the  right  eye  was  opened  while  he  was  talking  or 
reciting  in  the  hypnotized  state,  he  not  only  became 
cataleptic  on  the  right  side  but  also  aphasic.  When 
the  eye  was  again  closed,  he  took  up  his  speaking 
or  reciting  where  he  had  left  off.  The  opening  of 
his  eye  in  his  first  stage  had  no  effect  on  his  speech, 
but  in  his  second  stage,  during  which  his  words  and 
mode  of  expression  were  extremely  childish,  open- 
ing the  left  eye  stopped  speech,  whereas  opening 
the  right  eye  produced  no  effect."  The  speech  centre 
had  probably  shifted  sides.  The  subject  used 
chiefly  the  left  hemisphere  of  his  brain  and  in  his 
second  state  the  right  hemisphere  which,  being  less 
educated  than  the  other,  accounted  for  the  imperfect 
character  of  the  speech  produced  during  its  prepon- 
derence.    Double  consciousness,  double  personality, 


224  SUGGESTION 

can  be  explained  in  a  similar  manner.  Automatic 
action  can  explain  the  ability  to  do  two  or  possibly 
three  things  at  the  same  time,  but  thus  far  it  has 
not  been  found  that  a  human  being  can  follow  three 
consecutive  trains  of  thought.  Two  may  be  fol- 
lowed quite  successfully,  but  not  always  perfectly. 
The  brain  is  a  double  organ  and  the  parts  usually 
act  together  as  one,  but  under  certain  conditions 
the  unity  may  become  a  duality,  and  independent 
action  may  occur  and  alternate.  As  Dr.  Ireland  sug- 
gests, this  may  be  the  key  to  the  possible  explana- 
tion of  many  cases  of  spirit  possession  and  hallu- 
cination. 

Physiologically,  the  left  side  of  the  brain  is  much 
more  used  than  the  right,  and  naturally  would  be 
stronger  and  more  developed.  The  exception  to 
this  rule  is  in  left-handed  persons  when  the  right 
would  be  more  developed.  There  are  certain  sick- 
nesses that  result  in  the  inability  to  use  certain  pow- 
ers, then  the  patient  has  to  relearn  everything  over 
again.  This  is  true  also  of  injuries.  Hypnotism 
would  doubtless  be  a  great  help  in  such  cases  in 
securing  normal  and  natural  conditions. 

Dissociation  of  the  two  hemispheres  of  the  brain, 
and  the  transference  of  influence  from  one  to  the 
other,  and  also  the  dissociation  between  the  higher 
and  lower  centres,  afford  at  least  a  good  working 
hypothesis  for  the  explanation  of  many  remarkable 
phenomena  in  their  advanced  stages. 


PSYCHOLOGY  225 

One  thing  seems  to  be  certain  in  reference  to 
psychical  manifestations  in  thought  forms;  that  is, 
that  all  logical  conclusions  of  brain  activities  formed 
below  our  chief  consciousness  are  intuitions  and  in- 
stinctive reasoning.  They  are  often  more  rapid  and 
safer  than  those  we  are  conscious  of,  but  they  may 
go  astray,  especially  in  a  new  territory. 

The  power  of  dissociation  between  the  superior 
and  automatic  brain  centres  seems  to  be  generally 
accepted  by  all  psychologists. 

There  seems  also  to  be  a  tacit  agreement  that 
hypnotism  may  be  produced  in  three  different  ways 
at  least : 

1.  By  psychical  influence  of  one  person  on  another 
by  ideas,  so  that  these  ideas  are  accepted.  This  is 
a  suggestion,  or  as  the  Nancy  school  would  call  it, 
dictation. 

2.  By  direct  action  of  living  or  lifeless  objects,  or  a 
mysterious  agent  on  the  nervous  system.  Tiring 
of  one  sense  or  two,  magnets,  the  human  hand, 
medicaments  enclosed  in  a  bottle,  and  the  like  may 
be  used  suggestively. 

3.  By  the  mind's  reaction  on  itself,  which  is  auto- 
hypnotic  or  auto-suggestion. 

The  twofold  form  of  skepticism   once   so  preva- 
lent, in  the  face  of  all  the  remarkable  cures  wrought 
and  phenomena  established,  is  now  seldom  met  ex- 
cept in  an  egoist,  who  seems  to  know  everything, 
15 


226  SUGGESTION 

or  in  an  ignoramus,  who  knows  nothing  of  the 
psychical  side  of  human  nature.  This  skepticism 
declared  that  there  was  no  such  thing  as  the  hyp- 
notic state,  and  if  there  was  it  was  rejected  as  a 
remedial  agent. 

The  great  problem  to  be  solved  is  to  understand 
definitely  how  these  phenomena  are  produced  and 
how  they  may  be  used  beneficially  among  men. 

There  are  two  terms  that  are  used  in  physiology 
which  can  be  profitably  used  in  this  present  discus- 
sion. They  are  inhibition  and  stimulation.  The 
possibility  of  the  manifestation  expressed  by  these 
terms  is  found  in  the  constitution  of  the  ganglia  and 
terminal  branchlets  or  clubs  of  the  neurons  each  bor- 
dering on  the  other.  It  is  unaJvisable  for  me  to 
discuss  the  neuron  theory  here  but  any  one  desirous 
of  taking  it  up  and  understanding  what  it  means, 
and  how  it  applies  to  nerve  activity  in  stimulation 
or  inhibition,  can  consult  Brown  Sequard,  Heiden- 
hain.  Dr.  L.  Barker's  work  on  "The  Neuron  The- 
ory," and  others. 

Inhibition  is  the  more  or  less  complete  arrest  of 
present  functional  activity  of  a  structure  or  organ 
by  a  restraining  influence  exerted  over  it  through 
a  nerve  centre,  or  as  Dr.  L.  Brunton  says,  it  is  "the 
arrest  of  the  functions  of  a  structure  or  organ  by 
the  action  upon  it  of  another,  while  its  power  to 
execute  those  functions  is  still  retained  and  can  be 
manifested  as  soon  as  the  restraining  power  is  re- 
moved." 


PSYCHOLOGY  227 

This  passivity  or  inhibition  can  be  induced  sud- 
denly or  in  a  short  time  and  can  be  removed  in  like 
manner.  Cause  and  effect  seem  to  be  out  of  pro- 
portion, for  simple  excitation  or  suggestion  secures 
great  results. 

Over-stimulation  may  also  result  in  inhibition. 
This  is  a  well  known  law  in  physiology.  The  prin- 
ciple applies  to  a  certain  extent  in  psychology.  Drug 
medication  illustrates  this  principle  also.  Inhibi- 
tion and  stimulation  are  related  very  largely  to 
vital  phenomena,  and  assist  in  explaining  the  nature, 
phenomena,  and  results  of  the  hypnotic  states. 

The  heart  can  be  slowed  down  by  stimulating  the 
pneumogastric  nerve  and  by  inhibiting  over  the 
connections  of  the  cardiac  ganglia.  The  inhibition 
of  the  vagus  nerve  and  stimulation  of  the  cardiac 
ganglia  will  accelerate  the  heart  action.  Medicines 
that  are  stimulants  may  produce  an  inhibiting  effect 
on  the  nerves  controlling  the  heart,  those  that  de- 
press nerve-activity  may  stimulate  the  action  of  the 
heart.  The  heart  is  regulated  in  its  beats  by  certain 
nerves,  and  if  the  pneumogastric  branches  are  stimu- 
lated by  an  interrupted  electric  current  the  heart 
will  stop  beating  and  relax  its  muscles.  A  sudden 
and  severe  blow  on  the  stomach  or  over  the  solar 
plexus,  will  stop  the  heart.  Any  good  physiology 
will  present  this  teaching  at  length  and  give  much 
more  than  we  can  here,  so  that  we  need  only  deduce 
this  law;  namely,  that  inhibition  and  stimulation  of 


228  SUGGESTION 

certain  nerves  or  centres  will  affect  favorably  or  un- 
favorably vital  processes  and  modify  their  action. 

It  is  well  known  that  the  heart  action  may  be 
inhibited  or  modified  by  psychical  causes.  Emotion, 
shock,  or  sudden  bad  news,  may  stop  the  action  of 
the  heart  and  produce  dire  results.  The  heart  and 
other  organs  have  exciting  and  restraining  nerve 
energies,  hence  there  is  a  balance  in  health  of  action 
and  reaction;  so  that  by  the  interacting  nervous 
force  there  may  be  proper  adjustment  and  normal 
health.  Anything  interfering  with  this  means  an 
abnormal  condition  and  disease. 

Where  the  higher  cortical  centres  are  operative, 
there  will  be  a  modification  of  effects,  physically  and 
mentally,  when  the  automatic  centres  are  suddenly 
affected.  When  those  centres  are  quiescent  or 
the  mind  is  absorbed  in  thought  or  reverie,  if 
one  is  surprised  by  a  sound  or  touch,  the 
automatic  centres,  by  the  force  of  the  law 
of  self-preservation,  will  act  quickly  and  pro- 
duce physical  shock,  and  until  the  superior  vol- 
untary psychic  centres  get  control,  there  will  be  ex- 
aggerated reflexes  which  may  excite  the  heart  and 
other  organs  to  increased  activity.  So  in  hypnotism 
the  highest  cortical  centres  are  inhibited,  and  the 
automatic  centres  by  dissociation  under  another 
mind,  will  have  exaggerated  reflex  action.  The 
subconscious  mind  controls  the  automatic  activities, 
and  when  it  is  controlled  by  suggestion,  and  the  con- 
scious mind  by  dissociation,  is  quiescent  and  inactive. 


PSYCHOLOGY  229 

certain  results  are  secured  to  the  body  and  its  vital 
functions  which  are  helpful  or  hurtful,  according  to 
the  nature  of  the  suggestions. 

There  are  many  illustrations  which  might  be 
given,  but  one  only  need  be  cited  here.  If  a  certain 
small  mass  of  gray  matter  at  the  upper  part  of  the 
medulla  be  irritated,  the  inhibition  impulses  dis- 
charged may  result  in  instant  death,  by  interfer- 
ance  with  the  vital  action  of  heart  and  lungs. 
Brown-Sequard  has  fully  illustrated  this  and  similar 
conditions.  He  has  shown  that  sleepiness  through 
inhibitory  impulses  affects  different  muscles.  The 
eyelids  become  heavy,  the  head  tends  to  fall,  the 
heart  and  lungs  are  affected  and  their  action  becomes 
slower  all  through  inhibitory  impulses.  The  volun- 
tary mental  faculties  become  dull  and  quiescent. 
This  is  also  the  condition  in  hypnotism.  Fleming 
and  Waller  have  by  experiment  shown  that  simul- 
taneous pressure  on  the  cervical,  sympathetic,  the 
pneumo-gastric  and  the  carotid  nerve  plexus  pro- 
cures sleep.  It  is  probable,  as  they  conclude,  that 
the  external  irritations  are  carried  to  a  part  of  the 
base  of  the  brain  and,  from  there,  inhibitory  im- 
pulses proceed  to  the  vital  organs  and  certain  mus- 
cles, affecting  them  functionally,  and  producing 
sleep. 

Inhibition  may  have  a  general  or  specific  effect 
on  the  body.  Fear  which  becomes  inhibitory,  will 
make  the  mouth  dry  and  produce  at  times  trembling, 
whilst  the  thought  of  food,  or  something  one  likes. 


230  SUGGESTION 

will  make  the  mouth  water,  and  the  thought  of  a 
friend  will  make  the  heart  beat  more  rapidly. 

Inhibition,  whether  as  a  result  of  slowing  down 
functional  activity  of  the  organs  or  by  voluntary 
mental  effort,  has  its  power  in  special  nerve  centres 
of  the  brain  and  spinal  cord  and  from  these  centres 
nervous  discharges  of  an  inhibitory  nature  proceed. 
Higher  centres  of  the  brain  exercise  inhibitory 
action  of  those  centres  below  them,  and  these  again 
on  those  next  below,  etc.  But  automatic  or  reflex 
action  increases  as  higher  centres  are  removed  or 
reduced  in  control. 

The  highest  centres  can  be  inhibited  by  different 
channels  of  the  senses.  Tactile  suggestion  or  gentle 
friction  will  put  some  persons  to  sleep.  Auditory 
suggestion  will  control  others  and  cause  them  to 
sleep,  whilst  optical  suggestion  will  produce  the 
same  result,  and  a  combination  of  these  will  more 
quickly  secure  this  result  with  some  persons  than 
with  either  alone.  Prof.  Pitres  claims  to  have  dis- 
covered certain  hypnogenic  zones,  but  we  are  slow 
to  accept  this,  except  in  hysterical  subjects,  who 
have  either  by  suspicion  or  by  previous  hypnotism 
accepted  the  suggestion  that  they  will  go  to  sleep 
when  touched  at  certain  places  on  the  body.  There 
are  two  points  of  contact  which  I  have  frequently 
used  which  seem  to  be  more  hypnogenic  than  any 
other.  When  other  methods  fail  to  accomplish 
bringing  the  subject  into  a  state  of  suggestion  or 
hypnotism,  I  use  these  points  and  have  been  gener- 


PSYCHOLOGY  231 

ally  successful.    But  those  zones  are  as  a  usual  thing 
made  by  suggestion. 

Drs.  Van  Renterghen  and  Van  Eeden  seem  to  be 
successful  in  awakening  some  of  their  patients  by 
touching  the  end  of  their  noses,  and  no  matter  how 
deep  asleep  they  may  be,  the  subjects  will  be 
awakened.  A  person  accustomed  to  going  to  sleep 
reading  his  newspaper,  could  be  easily  put  into  an 
hypnotic  sleep  by  giving  him  either  a  newspaper  or 
a  part  of  it  and  suggest  sleep.  It  is  the  sleep  of 
simple  inhibition.  Anaemia  is  also  a  predisposing 
cause  of  inhibition,  and  persons  who  are  anaemic 
make  excellent  subjects. 

The  philosophy  of  hypnotism  is  related  in  a  form 
to  a  deduction  from  physiological  processes.  The 
science  of  hypnotism  is  the  method  of  producing  a 
dissociation  of  higher  cortical  centres  from  the 
lower,  which  are  automatic  and  reflex.  These  cen- 
tres are  affected  by  stimulation  and  inhibition 
through  which  changes  are  wrought  on  the  vital 
functions,  and  by  an  anaemic  condition  by  which 
the  activities  slow  down  and  sleep  results.  This 
sleep  is  similar  to  natural  sleep,  and,  in  this  passive 
condition,  the  operator  becomes  the  superior  mind 
of  the  subject  and  secures  vital  changes  in  the  body 
and  mental  changes  in  the  brain  centres  and  pro- 
duces effects  through  the  body  which  are  phenom- 
enal. 

There  are  certain  statements  which  bear  on  the 


232  SUGGESTION 

psychology  and  physiology  of  suggestion  which  we 
ought  to  make  here. 

1.  Mental  emotion  may  produce  sickness  or 
death,  in  time  or  even  immediately,  and  in  persons 
of  robust  health. 

2.  The  physical  phenomena  induced  by  such  a 
cause  indicate  deep  perturbation — vibration,  we  may 
call  it,  of  the  nervous  organism,  and  they  are  gener- 
ally of  an  organic  character. 

3.  Thought  strongly  and  continuously  directed  to 
any  part  has  a  tendency  to  increase  the  vascularity 
and  sensibility  of  that  part. 

4.  Thought  directed  away  from  any  part  dimin- 
ishes vascularity  and  decreases  sensibility,  and 
especially  so  when  strong  emotions  are  in  operation. 

5.  Emotions  play  unobstructedly  in  the  subcon- 
scious nature  and  thus  excite  the  sensory  ganglia 
and  the  nerves  of  sensation. 

6.  Dr.  Tuke  says  "There  is  no  sensation,  whether 
general  or  special,  excited  by  agents  acting  on  the 
body  from  without,  which  cannot  be  excited  also 
from  within  by  emotional  states  affecting  the  sen- 
sory ganglia,  such  sensations  being  referred  by  the 
mind  to  the  point  at  which  the  nerve  terminates  in 
the  body." 


ITS  PHILOSOPHY  233 


CHAPTER  X. 

The  Philosophy  and  Sphere  of  Suggestion. 

One  thing  must  be  re-stated  many  times,  although 
it  is  an  accepted  fact  by  readers  and  thinkers  gener- 
ally. It  is  this :  the  world  in  which  we  live  and  this 
universe  are  governed  by  law.  We  may  not  always 
know  the  law,  but  it  exists,  and  when  discovered  it 
explains  all  the  phenomena  that  have  been  or  ever 
will  be.  There  is  no  fraction  or  part  of  this  universe 
which  is  not  governed  by  the  laws  which  the  Creator 
has  established  or  inaugurated.  We  understand 
some  laws  now  that  were  not  understood  in  the 
past,  but  they  existed  and  governed  phenomena  just 
the  same  as  since  they  have  been  discovered.  Every 
event,  every  occurrence,  and  all  phenomena  are 
governed  by  law. 

The  development  of  science  has  been  a  growth  of 
the  recognition  and  utilization  of  law.  There  was 
a  time  when  man  looked  upon  comets  and  meteors 
as  heralds  of  good  or  evil.  Great  battles  and  great 
events  were  looked  upon  as  the  result  of  the  juxta- 
position of  the  planets  or  of  certain  arrangements 
of  the  stars,  or  conditions  of  the  clouds,  or  of  a  cer- 
tain flight  of  birds.    Sickness,  calamity,  misfortune, 


234  SUGGESTION 

and  death  were  believed  to  be  a  visitation  of  God's 
displeasure. 

Men  have  long  since  come  to  the  conclusion  that 
all  these  things,  and  every  event,  follow  an  irresistible 
and  established  law  of  sequence  of  cause  and  effect. 
Magic  and  Providence  were  the  main  elements  used 
in  the  past  in  the  explanation  of  ordinary  and  extra- 
ordinary phenomena.  In  the  light  of  science,  phil- 
osophy, and  common  sense  we  find  that  cause  and 
effect  are  interlinked  and  all  things  occurring  are  in 
accordance  with  laws  which  an  all-wise  Creator  has 
inaugurated.  Hence,  nothing  happens  by  chance. 
The  reign  of  law  is  universal,  because  the  reign  of 
God  is  universal. 

There  are  laws  which  govern  and  explain  the 
phenomena  of  the  physical,  the  mental,  and  the 
spiritual  worlds.  These  worlds  may  be  considered 
relatively,  but  in  a  large  sense  they  may  be  philo- 
sophically considered  one.  But  law  is  supreme  in 
all  of  these  relative  manifestations. 

The  emotional  life,  erratic  as  it  is  at  times,  is  as 
much  under  the  control  of  law  as  is  the  power  of 
gravitation  or  the  rainfall.  Insanity,  in  its  many 
phases,  is  traceable  to  natural  causes,  and  may  be 
recognized  as  the  result  of  the  interplay  of  psychic 
forces.  Demoniacal  possession  was  the  assumed  ex- 
planation in  the  past.  We  affirm  again  that  the 
physical  life,  the  mental,  and  the  spiritual  life,  are 
all  under  the  control  of  law,  and  all  the  phenomena 
manifested   by   them   are   governed  by   immutable 


ITS  PHILOSOPHY  235 

laws.  There  is  nothing  mystical  about  this  view. 
However,  there  are  writers  who  express  themselves 
in  such  a  manner  that  one  is  led  to  think  that  they 
must  have  received  directly  from  the  Almighty  a 
special  revelation  concerning  the  wonderful  things 
which  they  discuss.  The  same  laws  which  they  claim 
to  have  discovered  and  utilized  for  the  purposes  of 
making  money — a  very  low  motive — are  the  laws 
which  others  have  also  discovered  and  utilized  for 
the  good  of  man.  This  universe  is  a  book  of  life  to 
all  who  approach  its  laws  and  their  manifestations 
in  a  proper  spirit.  For  our  purpose  now  we  shall 
only  consider  the  psychological  bearing  of  this  sub- 
ject, having  considered  the  physiological  in  the  pre- 
ceding section.  The  latter  gives  us  the  physical 
foundation  for  the  operation  of  suggestion,  whilst 
the  former  gives  us  the  psychical  foundation. 

We  can  give  only  an  outline  of  this  part  of  our 
subject,  as  it  would  take  a  volume  to  present  it  in 
all  its  bearings. 

Under  the  section  in  which  we  discussed  the  Psy- 
chology of  Suggestion,  we  also  presented  something 
of  the  philosophy  of  suggestion.  Certain  kinds  of 
suggestions  are  more  easily,  and  more  readily, 
caught  up  and  held  by  the  mind  than  others.  Let 
me  illustrate  what  I  mean.  You  may  be  reading  an 
interesting  book  and  many  noises  about  you  that 
would  ordinarily  attract  your  attention  seem  to 
have  no  power  over  it,  as  you  are  wholly  occupied 
with  the  story  or  whatever  you  are  reading.     Sup- 


^36  SUGGESTION 

pose  in  the  very  midst  of  the  reading  a  hand-organ 
should  be  played  in  front  of  your  window  or  even 
some  little  distance  away,  you  would  find  that  your 
attention  would  be  attracted  to  it,  and  as  long  as  it 
played  you  would  find  it  hard  work  to  read  witii 
undivided  attention.  The  reason  for  this  is  that  the 
rythmical  sound  seems  to  have  a  predominating 
power  over  the  psychic  nature,  whilst  the  many 
noises  seem  to  counteract  each  other. 

If  you  have  ever  visited  an  asylum  for  the  insane 
where  there  is  an  unconscious  and  inattentive 
speaking  of  words  by  the  inmates  you  have  been  sur- 
prised at  the  incoherence.  The  reason  is  that  the 
superior  psychical  centre,  the  necessary  guide  for 
the  mental  life,  has  been  surrendered  to  and  sup- 
planted by  the  automatic  centres,  which  produce  all 
kinds  of  unaccountable  and  unconscious  things.  The 
attention  and  its  power  of  concentration  are  weak. 
A  vacillating  and  automatic  memory  and  the  men- 
tal activities  play  their  part  perfectly,  but  unguided 
do  not  produce  normal  or  perfect  results.  Herein 
we  find  an  explanation  of  a  similar  condition  in  the 
old.  The  same  stories  are  told,  the  same  experiences 
are  described,  the  same  descriptions  are  given,  the 
same  routine  is  gone  through  in  tireless  repetition, 
and  there  is  a  satisfaction  to  the  actor  but  not  to 
those  who  are  observers.  We  speak  of  getting  into 
a  rut ;  crossing  the  dead  line  at  fifty,  losing  interest 
in  life  at  sixty,  ready  to  quit  this  stage  of  existence 
at  seventy.      Why?      Because  the  automatic  pre- 


ITS  PHILOSOPHY  237 

dominates,  the  power  of  invention,  of  discovering 
new  truths,  is  practically  nil,  and  the  whole  physical 
plasticity  of  the  brain  is  gone ;  the  mental  expression 
is  simply  the  production  of  a  certain  routine  of 
thought  automatism  in  life. 

Gladstone,  one  of  the  most  remarkable  men  that 
ever  lived  kept  control  of  himself  and  his  mental 
processes  so  that  in  his  advanced  age  he  was  master 
of  himself,  of  men,  and  of  matters. 

Double  as  well  as  multiple  personality  is  explained 
by  the  automatic  activities  taking,  for  the  time  being, 
the  control  of  the  superior  centres,  and  varying  this 
with  the  thought  of  different  individuals  possessing 
one's  personality  at  different  times. 

A  man  goes  away  and  stays  away  a  long  or  a 
short  time,  living  under  another  name,  unconscious 
of  the  loss  of  his  former  name  and  personality,  he 
then  suddenly  comes  to  himself,  returns  to  his  home 
and  friends,  but  does  not  remember  where  he  has 
been  or  what  he  has  done.  This  all  can  be  explained 
in  the  same  way. 

Dr.  Louis  Waldstein,  of  London,  was  at  a  book- 
stall looking  at  a  book.  He  suddenly  felt  very  happy. 
He  could  not  tell  why,  but  thought  about  what  pro- 
duced this  condition.  First  he  looked  at  the  old 
book.  There  was  a  babble  of  voices  about  him.  He 
listened  a  minute  or  two  and  gradually  began  to 
isolate  the  noises,  and  at  last  he  caught  the  sound 
of  a  hand-organ  and  it  was  playing  the  very  tune 
that  was  played  when  he  danced  his  first  quadrille 


238  SUGGESTION 

with  his  sweetheart  years  before.  The  mind  was 
busy  about  that  book  so  that  the  noises  did  not  inter- 
fere much  with  his  attention  which  he  gave  to  the 
book,  but  when  the  rythmical  sounds  awakened  his 
memory  they  attracted  his  attention  to  the  time  and 
the  place  of  his  pleasure  in  the  early  days  of  his  life. 

Take  worry,  also,  and  see  how  it  becomes  the  su- 
perior operating  force  in  the  physical  life.  No  one 
would  worry  if  he  had  never  heard  of  anything 
bad.  So  we  see  that  worry  is  taking  memory-images 
of  the  past  and  placing  them  in  the  future  and  allow- 
ing them  to  produce  ill-anticipation  and  forebodings 
of  trouble  and  discomfort 

Projected  memory-images  in  the  lives  of  people 
have  caused  them  more  worry,  anxiety,  and  trouble, 
than  any  one  thing  in  human  life.  The  primary  and 
memory-images  start  up  together;  they  are  united. 
They  come  by  inclusion,  by  contrast,  and  by  associa- 
tion. 

There  is  a  law  of  mind  that  operates  in  this 
sphere  also,  which  is  known,  but  not  fully  under- 
stood. If  you  think  about  or  look  at  anything  it  will 
influence  you  either  favorably  or  unfavorably.  If 
you  do  not  want  to  have  an  opinion,  you  must  avoid 
looking  at  things  and  persons,  as  the  opinion  and 
its  influence  are  sure  to  take  form  in  the  mind.  If 
you  do  not  want  to  do  a  certain  thing,  do  not  think 
about  it. 

This  law  of  the  control  of  the  superior  psychical 
centre  by  suggestion  from  one's  own  mind  or  by 


ITS  PHILOSOPHY  239 

another  mind  or  by  circumstances  and  environment 
is  a  very  important  one  and  is  operative  under  every 
condition  and  relation  of  life.  This  makes  hypnosis, 
change  of  mind,  control  by  suggestion  possible,  and 
explains  many  things  that  seem  to  be  of  an  extraor  - 
dinary  nature. 

The  laughter  of  an  audience,  the  purpose  of  drill- 
ing an  army,  the  insane  conduct  of  a  mob,  can  all  be 
explained  by  this  law.  The  only  way  to  break  up  a 
mob  is  to  interject  a  strong  counter-suggestion  to 
meet  their  controlling  thought.  This  is  also  true  in 
other  circurnstances  of  life,  some  of  them  very  criti- 
cal. James  A.  Garfield  quelled  a  mob  by  his  perfect 
mastery  over  himself  and  repeating  in  a  command- 
ing manner  a  sentence.  Franklin  Pierce  drove  a 
mob  from  his  house  because  the  people  were  taught 
to  respect  him.  Ben  Butler  could  break  up  a  mob 
by  standing  quietly  before  the  crowd. 

Each  man  has  his  own  individuality  or  personal- 
ity. He  is  his  personality,  hereditary  tendencies 
and  endowments,  plus  all  that  he  has  thought,  felt, 
sensed,  and  done.  He  is  conscious  of  a  small  part 
only  of  these  things. 

"Lulled  in  the  countless  chambers  of  the  brain 
Our  thoughts  are  linked  by  many  a  hidden  chain. 
Awake  but  one,  and,  lo,  what  myriads  rise. 
Each  stamps  his  image  as  the  other  flies." 

It  is  generally  accepted  today  by  thinking  people 
that  there  is  a  physical  and  psychical  combination 
in  every  human  being.     The  physical  holds  him  to 


240  SUGGESTION 

this  world,  and  through  it  the  psychical  can  manifest 
itself.  The  five  senses  are  the  channels  through 
which  information  concerning  the  outer  world 
reaches  the  psychical  life.  The  motor-impulses  and 
the  will-power  exercised  through  the  organs  and 
muscles  are  channels  for  the  manifestation  of  the 
psychical  life. 

Connected  with  the  five  senses  are  all  the  charac- 
teristics of  animal  life,  including  the  power  to  think, 
plan,  and  express  the  thoughts.  The  motor-side  of 
the  life  also  exercises  a  control  over  one's  self  and 
all  that  attacks  it  in  this  life.  Man  holds  himself  in 
mental  balance  and  is  capable  of  expressing  his 
thoughts  and  his  life  in  words  and  acts. 

There  is  also  a  subconsciousness  in  which  man 
can  hear  himself  think  and  from  which  the  highest 
and  best  inspirations  and  help  seem  to  come,  whilst 
on  the  motor-side  he  uses  all  the  powers  which  be- 
long to  the  physical  organism,  and  thus  manifests 
a  variety  of  psychical  expressions. 

On  the  sensory  side,  in  view  of  the  subliminal  life, 
visions  are  possible  and  other  remarkable  things 
under  the  guidance  of  training  and  development; 
whilst  on  the  motor-side  miracles,  remarkable  cures, 
and  extraordinary  phenomena  are  possible. 

The  philosophy,  stated  briefly,  of  man's  existence 
and  mental  life  has  a  twofold  outlook — towards  this 
present  environment,  and  towards  a  larger  environ- 
ment which  shall  be  revealed  hereafter. 

The  body  is  a  magnificent  vital  electric  battery, 


ITS  PHILOSOPHY  241 

with  thorough  and  intimate  psychical  control,  which 
meets  all  the  requirements  made  upon  it  in  its  pres- 
ent existence. 

The  conscious  and  subconscious  minds  are  both 
amenable  to  suggestion,  and  thus  can  be  brought  un- 
der its  control.  One  great  characteristic  of  the  con- 
scious mind  is  the  power  of  reason  which  it  pos- 
sesses and  by  which  the  suggestion  can  be  inhibited 
or  thwarted,  or  made  nil.  The  subconscious  mind, 
on  the  other  hand,  has  an  avidity  for  and  is  directed 
by  the  suggestion,  because  the  suggestion  takes  con- 
trol of  the  superior  psychical  centre  and  directs 
when  the  conscious  mind  is  held  in  abeyance  or  if 
the  suggestion  is  stronger  than  the  conscious  exer- 
cise of  the  mental  power. 

The  philosophy  of  suggestion  is  valuable  in  it& 
application  to  the  mental  constitution  of  man,  in  his 
present  condition,  and  for  the  correction  of  any 
abnormal  manifestation  in  his  life  and  controlling 
the  psychical  life  for  its  highest  and  noblest  pur- 
poses and  development. 

There  is  scarcely  a  limit  to  the  power  of  sugges- 
tion. It  can  kill  as  well  as  cure.  Here  is  an  illus- 
tration. A  blind-folded  boy  was  told  that  his  com- 
panions would  behead  him.  They  laid  him  down 
on  the  ground,  bared  his  neck,  and  at  a  word  of 
command  one  of  them  struck  the  boy  with  a  wet 
towel.    He  died  instantly. 

A  nurse  injected  ten  drops  of  solution  of  common 
salt  under  the  name  of  morphia  and  the  patient  went 
16 


242  SUGGESTION 

sound  asleep.  Suggestion  can  make  one  immune 
from,  or  subject  to,  infectious  disease.  It  can  pro- 
duce or  relieve  pain.  It  can  produce  subcutaneous 
hemorrhages,  as  in  the  stigmatists.  It  can  produce 
the  hypnotic  state  and  cure  all  functional,  and  mod- 
ify organic  disease.  Our  constitution  makes  it  pos- 
sible to  have  a  philosophy  of  suggestion,  and  it 
proves  that  suggestion  is  governed  by  law. 

Its  Sphere. 

The  thoughtful  reader  will  infer  from  what  has 
been  said,  and  he  will  see,  that  the  sphere  of  sugges- 
tion is  almost  illimitable.  There  is  no  place  or  time 
in  life  that , suggestion  does  not  or  cannot  apply  in 
one  form  or  another.  This  is  particularly  true  of 
the  suggestion  that  enters  into  the  influence  and 
environment  of  human  life. 

It  is  supposed  that  suggestion  applies  normally 
and  ordinarily  to  .the  conscious  mmd  and  its  mani- 
festations. But  the  field  is  larger  than  that,  for  it 
applies  specifically  to  the  subconscious  mind  as  an 
instrument  or  key  to  open  and  reveal  its  treasures, 
wonders  and  healing  influences.  It  is  true  that  the 
subconscious  mind  can  be  reached  through  the  con- 
scious mind  by  suggestion  as  a  method  and  the 
senses  as  media.  This,  however,  is  not  the  only 
process.  Religious  teachings,  the  stories  of  charla- 
tans, the  manipulations  of  fakirs,  the  pow-wowings 
of  the  superstitious,  larvated  suggestion  of  medi- 
cine, physical  manipulation,  scientific  suggestion, 
these  all  play  their  part  in  the  mental  life  and  physi- 


ITS  SPHERE  243 

cal  control  of  sensitive  persons,  as  well  as  in  the  life 
of  others,  who  ordinarily  are  quite  normal  in  their 
mental  manifestation. 

Education  is  suggestion  utilized  in  the  develop- 
ment of  the  mental  powers,  and  it  consists  largely, 
if  not  entirely,  of  suggestion.  Religion  and  relig- 
ious instruction  is  largely  made  up  of  suggestion, 
which  the  conscious  and  the  subconscious  nature  of 
man  receives  and  utilizes. 

Social  life  is  grounded  in  different  kinds  of  sug- 
gestion, and  their  applications. 

The  normal  nature  is  developed  by  and  lives  in 
ethical  suggestion. 

The  physical  nature  is  a  subject  of,  and  utilizes, 
tactile,  optical,  auditory,  and  all  sense  suggestions 
for  its  protection  and  development. 

Medicine — larvated  suggestion — largely  depends 
on  the  response  of  nerves  to  its  presence  and  utilizes 
certain  conditions,  and  thus  it  gets  credit  for  that 
which  is  often  effected  by  suggestion. 

There  are  numerous  schools  or  cults  which  are 
claiming  and  trying  to  cure  disease.  The  one  uni- 
fying principle  utilized  in  all  of  them  is  suggestion. 
The  teachings  of  many  of  these  cults  are  unreason- 
able, contradictory,  and  unscientific.  The  teachings 
could  be  given  up,  and  if  the  healers  would  use  the 
principle  of  definite  suggestion,  they  would  not  only 
be  able  to  heal  as  many  as  now,  but  probably  many 
others  who  do  not  accept  their  teachings.  In  order 
to  unify  these  schools  or  classes  of  healers,  it  would 


244  SUGGESTION 

be  necessary  to  use  some  common  therapeutic  term 
or  phrase  that  would  be  consistently  accepted  by  all. 
Such  a  phrase  might  be  "Mental  Medicine."  Whilst 
that  would  specify  a  general  curative  purpose  of 
all  systems,  it  would  not  individualize  the  great  prin- 
ciple that  is  used  by  all.  The  reader  may  ask  if 
there  is  a  law  of  mind  that  can  be  formulated  as  a 
general,  if  not  universal,  principal  of  action?  In 
theology,  God  and  the  instinct  of  worship  are  the 
foundation  of  all  religious  faiths;  so  in  psychology 
the  mind  and  the  controlling  and  governing  princi- 
ple by  which  it  manifests  itself  in  action,  whether 
in  ordinary  affairs  or  in  the  cure  of  disease  and  in 
extraordinary  phenomena,  is  suggestion.  This  prin- 
ciple can  unify  all  of  the  seemingly  diverse  teachings 
and  practices  from  the  witch  to  the  most  enlightened 
physician  who  is  not  afraid  to  use  everything  that 
is  good  and  effective  in  accomplishing  desirable  re- 
sults. The  sphere  of  suggestion  is  as  great  as  human 
life  in  all  of  its  phases  and  manifestations. 

It  is  the  chief  element  in  telepathy,  as  it  is  also 
in  the  telling  of  an  incident ;  it  is  the  supreme  pas- 
sageway into  the  real  self,  as  well  as  the  command 
or  demand  upon  the  ordinary  waking  life.  Visions 
as  well  as  ordinary  sight  depend  upon  it,  for  there 
must  be  the  power  to  see  in  the  clairvoyant  state  as 
well  as  in  the  normal.  Why  shall  not  the  soul  be 
adjudged  as  having  the  power  of  seeing  long  dis- 
tances, if  it  is  a  proven  fact  now  that  pictures  of 


ITS  SPHERE  245 

persons  talking  by  telephone  can  be  seen  long  dis- 
tances apart? 

In  these  conditions  may  we  not  find  a  scientific 
explanation  and  philosophy  of  the  visions  of  men  of 
old  ?  They  were  true  Seers.  If  telepathy  and  clair- 
voyance are  true,  in  which  a  passive  condition  of 
the  mind  is  necessary,  can  we  not  explain  how,  when 
men  were  quiescent  before  God,  receptive  to  the 
thoughts  of  the  mind  of  the  Infinite  that  such 
thoughts  and  visions  by  suggestion  were  carried  into 
the  soul  of  man  and  were  recorded  then  or  subse- 
quently. Given  the  abihty  of  one  mind  to  telepath 
to  another  and  the  ability  of  another  mind  to  re- 
ceive the  messages,  and  we  have  the  foundation  for 
a  revelation  from  God  to  man.  The  possibility  of 
the  clairvoyant  power  of  the  human  soul  presents 
the  basis  upon  which  visions  of  the  Old  and  New 
Testament  may  be  explained.  The  sphere  of  sug- 
gestion in  its  manifold  forms  is  applicable  to,  co- 
etaneous  and  co-eternal  with  man's  life.  Hence, 
suggestion  as  a  science  has  to  do  with  man  in  his 
whole  relationship  in  life. 


246  SUGGESTION 


CHAPTER  XI. 
The  Subconscious  Mind. 

Notwithstanding  what  Dr.  Hugo  Munsterberg 
says,  that  is,  that  there  is  no  subconscious  mind,  we 
believe  that  there  is,  or  something  that  answers  to  it. 
He  has  to  conjure  up  something  that  is  equivalent  to 
it.  Materialism  is  a  dead  issue  and  the  new  psy- 
chology has  given  it  a  decent  burial  from  which 
there  will  never  be  a  resurrection. 

The  subconscious  mind  is  the  seat  of  the  emo- 
tions; the  reservoir  of  inherent  knowledge;  it  pos- 
sesses intuitive  power;  is  the  residence  of  inspira- 
tion, invention,  genius;  it  has  perfect  memory, 
kinetic  energy,  and  has  something  corresponding  to 
fore-knowledge;  it  also  possesses  creative  power  as 
regards  the  body  and  presides  over  all  tissue  change 
through  cell  production,  and  controls  all  of  the  vital 
functions  of  the  body,  and  is  the  supreme  object  of 
the  highest  culture,  etc.  The  conscious  mind  often 
represses  the  manifestations  of  these  characteristics 
so  that  the  best  in  man  usually  does  not  come  out. 
People  voluntarily  try  to  do  things  and  fail.  They 
fail  because  they  do  not  let  the  real  self  assert  itself 
untrammelled.    They  try  to  cure  disease,  and  do  not 


THE  SUBCONSCIOUS  MIND         247 

let  the  real  power  work  unhindered.  They  should 
stop  trying  and  let  the  subconscious  mind  act.  In- 
spiration, genius,  power,  are  all  interfered  with  by 
the  conscious  mind  interposing  and  making  all  these 
manifestations  mechanical  and  mediocre. 

This  is  true  in  every  sphere  of  life,  in  occupation 
and  expression,  in  art,  music,  literature,  excel- 
lence in  business,  teaching,  self-healing,  etc.  The 
subconscious  mind  governs,  controls,  and  sustains 
the  vital  functions  of  the  body — its  chemistry,  func- 
tion, structure  by  cell-reproduction,  elimination, 
functioning,  and  vibration  and  it  determines  all  the 
nutritive  and  eliminative  processes,  it  creates  and 
destroys.  These  processes  are  increased  or  dimin- 
ished by  auto-  and  hetero-suggestion,  and  in  the 
same  mind  there  is  found  the  power  to  restore  lost 
health,  cure  disease,  and  develop  the  best  in  life.  If 
a  suggestion  is  fixed,  in  perfect  faith,  in  the  subcon- 
scious mind,  that  mind  immediately  commences  its 
work  of  changing  the  organism  chemically,  structur- 
ally, and  functionally  to  produce  the  changes  that 
will  result  in  health  and  in  a  normal  condition. 
If  hurtful  suggestions  are  received  and  followed,  ab- 
normal conditions  will  be  produced ;  if  good  sugges- 
tions, normal  conditions  will  result. 

The  subconscious  mind  can  be  educated  as  well 
as  the  conscious  mind.  The  thoughts,  desires,  inten- 
tions, feelings,  and  resolutions  of  the  day  go  with 
us  into  the  sleeping  state  and  affect  the  real  person- 
ality in  a  remarkable  manner.     The  reactions  oc- 


248  SUGGESTION 

curing  therefrom  become  the  measure  of  the  power 
of  those  things  in  the  mind.  Undesirable  thoughts 
and  wrong  impressions  ought  to  be  eliminated  from 
the  mind  before  we  fall  asleep;  and  the  best  things- 
and  most  desirable  thoughts  ought  to  be  held  and  re- 
traced on  account  of  their  beneficial  effects  on  the 
life.  Sleep  can  be  encouraged  by  keeping  the  physi- 
cal condition  good,  and  by  avoiding  things  that 
cause  one  to  be  restless  and  disturbed  in  mind.  The 
circulation  should  be  equalized  by  relaxation  and 
the  concentrative  demands  of  the  mind.  If  the  sys- 
tem is  held  in  a  tense  and  rigid  condition,  the  circu- 
lation will  be  interfered  with ;  but  if  the  mind  com- 
mands relaxation  the  influence  will  be  felt  in  every 
organ  by  virtue  of  the  circulation  of  the  blood  which 
flows  easily  and  unimpeded  to  every  part  of  the  body. 
If  any  part  of  the  body  is  cold,  it  can  be  warmed  by 
concentration  of  the  mind  to  that  part.  Relaxation 
and  concentration  will  relieve  headache,  congestion, 
colds,  and  fevers. 

If  the  mental  condition  is  peaceful,  and  all  unde- 
sirable feelings  and  thoughts  of  the  day  are  elimi- 
nated, the  sleep  will  be  as  sweet  and  restful  as  the 
sleep  of  a  child.  The  subconscious  mind  will  feel 
the  influence  of  such  a  condition  and  it  will  bring 
rest,  recuperation,  and  power  into  the  life. 

You  ask  how  one  may  remove  thoughts  and  im- 
pressions of  the  day?  It  can  be  done  by  thinking 
the  opposite  kind  of  thoughts  and  demanding  that 
you  will  have  a  good  feeling  for  everybody.    If  you 


THE  SUBCONSCIOUS  MIND  249 

nurse  and  fondle  a  bitter  feeling,  if  you  entertain 
thoughts  that  are  impure  and  impressions  that  are 
uncharitable  at  night,  you  will  arise  in  the  morning 
depressed  and  feeling  that  the  world  is  all  wrong 
and  going  to  the  bad.  If,  on  the  contrary,  you  cul- 
tivate a  forgiving  spirit  and  think  charitably  of 
deeds  that  may  seem  to  have  been  done  against  you, 
and  keep  yourself  in  a  good  physical  condition,  the 
subconscious  mind  will  make  you  sweet  in  disposi- 
tion and  make  this  world  look  beautiful  and  bright 
to  you. 

The  subconscious  mind  is  an  excellent  servant 
when  trained  and  educated  to  help,  but  a  fearful 
master  if  left  to  do  as  it  may  choose.  A  quiet,  se- 
rene faith  in  God  and  a  belief  in  a  Providence  that 
knows  and  does  what  is  best  with  an  assurance  that 
your  life  is  in  that  plan  and  you  can  co-operate  in 
bringing  to  pass  that  which  is  best  for  yourself  and 
others,  will  put  the  mind  into  a  restful,  happy  frame 
that  will  make  sleep  blessed. 

Insomnia  can  be  cured  by  the  subconscious  mind 
by  centering  the  mind  on  the  brain  and  getting  a 
good  picture  of  it,  and  mentally  seeing  the  blood 
slowly  and  regularly  going  down  and  the  cells  rest- 
ing. A  quiet  restful  feeHng  will  follow,  and  the 
whole  body  will  feel  the  result.  Then  mentally  see- 
ing the  heart  and  circulation  slowing  down  and  the 
whole  weight  resting  heavily  on  the  bed,  will  soon 
send  one  to  sleep,  and  with  the  utilization  of  what 
we  have  already  said  will  bring  strength,  health. 


250  SUGGESTION 

happiness,  and  good-feeling,  for  the  following  day. 
The  subconscious  mind  will  do  what  it  is  given  to 
do.  It  will  re-charge  the  body  with  the  kind  of 
power  it  receives.  Hence  the  injunction  by  Paul  in 
Pillippians,  4:8,  "Finally,  brethren,  whatsoever 
things  are  true,  whatsoever  things  are  honest,  what- 
soever things  are  just,  whatsoever  things  are  pure, 
whatsoever  things  are  lovely,  whatsoever  things  are 
of  good  report ;  if  there  be  any  virtue,  and  if  there  be 
any  praise,  think  of  these  things,"  is  good  psy- 
chology and  if  followed  it  will  produce  in  the  life 
effects  that  will  be  eternal  in  their  consequences. 

Consciousness  and  subconsciousness  are  one  in 
essential  nature,  except  the  latter  lies  deeper  and 
receives  the  impressions  from  the  former  and  util- 
izes them  for  the  life.  Hence,  when  consciousness 
returns  after  sleep  it  brings  with  it  suggestions  that 
have  passed  down  into  subconsciousness.  If  worry, 
pain,  malice,  envy,  and  ill-will  were  in  the  mind 
when  you  went  to  sleep,  they  will  be  in  the  con^ 
scious  mind  when  you  awake,  and  on  the  other  side 
will  have  produced  an  effect  that  will  be  adverse  to 
your  feelings  and  physical  condition.  If  you  went 
to  sleep  with  a  good  feeling  for  everybody,  trusting 
in  God  and  His  providence,  forgiving  any  that  have 
injured  you,  and  desiring  to  help  all  you  know  and 
meet  in  the  morning  when  you  awake,  you  will  feel 
happy  and  physically,  you  will  feel  rested. 

Before  arising  in  the  morning  relax  all  your  mus- 
cles and  concentrate  your  mind  on  what  you  will  do 


THE  SUBCONSCIOUS  MIND         251 

during  the  day  and  train  yourself  for  getting  the 
best  out  of  your  life  and  giving  the  best  that  is  in 
you,  and  see  what  a  wonderful  effect  it  will  have  on 
your  whole  life. 

The  subconscious  mind  has  solved  problems,  in- 
vented some  great  things,  discovered  principles  of 
wide  application  when  the  conscious  mind  was  at 
rest.  Lay  some  duty — specifically  stated — on  the 
subconscious  mind  and  see  how  faithfully  it  will 
carry  it  out.  Whenever  you  feel  depressed,  or  have 
the  ''blues"  in  the  morning,  you  may  know  that  you 
have  not  treated  the  subconscious  mind  as  you 
ought,  and  that  you  have  violated  some  laws  that 
are  visiting  their  penalties  upon  you.  The  conscious 
mind  ought  to  be  serene  for  one  or  two  hours  in 
the  morning  so  that  the  subconscious  mind  could 
pass  up  what  is  best  and  noblest  and  the  results  of 
the  new  life  and  thoughts  which  have  entered  and 
grown  in  it  during  the  sleeping  hours. 

No  work  should  be  undertaken,  no  venture  even 
made,  where  the  opportunity  is  not  afforded  to  be 
quiet  and  find  out  if  it  is  the  best  move  to  be  taken. 
How  many  mistakes  would  be  avoided  if  this  were 
done!  The  conscious  mind  deals  with  the  sense- 
life  and  the  rational  methods  of  reaching  conclu- 
sions, but  the  subconscious  mind  deals  with  the  intu- 
itive and  the  spiritual  side  of  life  and  works  out 
plans  and  purposes  that  are  far  beyond  the  ordinary. 
It  deals  with  the  fundamental  and  enduring  things 
of  life,  and  he  is  unwise  who  does  not  heed  its  warn- 


252  SUGGESTION 

ings  and  follow  its  directions.  This  is  true  in  all 
spheres  of  life.  There  is  nothing  to  lose  but  much 
to  be  gained  by  a  scientific  training  of  the  subcon- 
scious mind,  and  power  can  be  obtained  by  educat- 
ing it  which  no  one  knows  who  has  not  had  exper- 
ience in  this  matter. 

I.  The  subconscious  mind  and  nature  is  always 
healthy.  The  personality,  which  is  self-conscious  and 
self -determinate,  constitutes  the  two  great  charac- 
teristics of  our  enduring  and  spiritual  existence — 
this  personality  is  divine  and  shall  be  eternal.  This 
personality  and  the  corresponding  wholeness  of  the 
subconscious  mind  are  healthy  and  shall  remain  so. 
That  nature  which  is  related  to  the  conscious  mind, 
and  the  conscious  mind,  which  is  the  mind  of  the 
flesh,  are  subject  to  disease.  If  you  take  a  person 
who  has  perfect  health,  it  is  the  same  as  saying  that 
all  of  his  organs,  faculties,  and  powers  are  perform- 
ing their  work  normally  and  naturally.  This  per- 
son is  conforming  to  the  laws  which  govern  health. 
These  laws  are  God-given,  and  the  power  of  obed- 
ience is  resident  in  man's  personality.  Health  is 
wholeness,  and  "holiness"  is  one  of  the  character- 
istics of  God's  nature.  Hence,  health  is  such  con- 
formity to  law,  which  expresses  God's  will,  that  the 
man,  who  has  it  in  his  whole  nature  has  the  image 
of  God  to  that  extent  in  manifestation.  On  the 
other  hand,  one  who  is  unhealthy  is  unholy,  in  the 
highest  sense  of  the  word,  and  is  out  of  harmony 
with    God's    laws.      Harmony    with   natural    laws 


THE  SUBCONSCIOUS  MIND  253 

means  physical  health,  with  moral  law  means  moral 
health,  with  spiritual  law  means  spiritual  health. 
The  unchanging  nature  or  part  of  man — that  is — 
the  subconscious,  is  in  perpetual  health.  Hence,  we 
shall  have  to  go  to  that  nature  to  send  health  into 
every  part  of  the  nature  which  is  diseased.  The 
subconscious  mind  is  the  supreme  physician,  and, 
constituting  the  real  and  fundamental  part  of  man's 
nature,  and  we  can  affirm  that  that  mind  is  always 
well. 

2.  Man's  thinking  and  habits  determine  largely 
what  his  health  is  and  will  be.  "As  man  thinketh 
in  his  heart,  so  is  he."  No  truer  words  were  ever 
spoken  that  these.  Thought  has  a  power  in  it  that 
is  not  yet  completely  understood.  Habits  of  life 
and  action  can  change  the  functioning  of  the  organs 
of  the  body,  or  may  cause  them  to  cease  to  act  at 
all.  The  power  that  can  change  habits  is  thought. 
The  Proverbialist  tells  the  truth  as  to  man's  condi- 
tion in  the  above  statement  "as  man  a  thinketh,  so 
is  he." 

If  an  impulse  of  fear  controls  the  mind,  nerve  de- 
pression will  follow  with  corresponding  physical 
depression.  If  the  bouyant  feeling  of  joy  prevails, 
the  nerves  catch  the  excitement  and  the  circulation 
becomes  faster  and  physical  happiness  and  health 
follow.  The  fear  of  a  disease  can  produce  it  in  the 
body.  A  desire  and  expectation  of  health  can  also 
produce  health  in  the  body,  even  after  the  doctors 
have  come  to  the  extreme  limit  of  their  skill.     We 


254  SUGGESTION 

are  largely  what  we  think,  and  we  do  generally  what 
we  are  in  the  habit  of  doing.  Our  environment  and 
conditions  around  us  may  not  affect  us  according  to 
the  state  and  condition  of  our  mind.  Change  of 
thought  will  produce  a  change  of  character  and 
physical  condition.  We  believe  this,  but  are  not 
persistent  in  carrying  this  principle  out  to  its 
fullest  application. 

If  certain  laws  of  mind  are  persistently  followed, 
habits  can  be  entirely  changed  and  possible  devel- 
opments in  our  nature  can  be  effected.  The  mental 
and  spiritual  mastery  of  one's  self  depends  on 
thought  and  its  application.  Every  thought  has  in 
it  a  certain  amount  of  power,  and  where  the  nature 
of  that  thought  is  fully  understood  and  the  possibil- 
ity of  the  mental  changes  which  can  be  affected 
through  it,  then  we  shall  understand  something  of 
the  simple  but  philosophical  and  deep  principle 
uttered  by  the  Proverbialist,  that  "As  a  man  think- 
eth  in  his  heart,  so  is  he." 

3.  Our  knowledge  of  thought  and  of  its  applica- 
tion will  bring  its  results  within  the  range  of  scien- 
tific utilization.  When  we  utilize  oxygen  we  know 
that  certain  results  will  be  secured,  when  we 
use  food  we  know  that  certain  results  will 
be  obtained,  why  shall  this  not  be  true  of 
the  utilization  of  thought?  We  may  not  know 
fully  just  what  these  things  are,  in  their  es- 
sential nature,  but  we  can  use  them  and  get  bene- 
fits from  them.    In  like  manner,  we  can  use  thought, 


THE  SUBCONSCIOUS  MIND         255 

although  we  do  not  understand  fully  its  essential 
nature.  Thought  is  creative.  The  mind  has  a  pic- 
ture of  what  is  desired  to  be  done,  and  thought  goes 
to  work  and  uses  all  the  auxilliary  forces  and  accom- 
plishes the  work. 

It  may  be  wrong  to  deny  the  existence  of  evil,  as 
some  writers  tell  us,  but  it  is  a  wiser  thing  to  admit 
it  and  by  positive  thought  to  meet  and  conquer  it. 
Man's  strength  is  found  in  meeting  and  mastering 
evil  and  weakness.  Good  can  master  evil  as  it  is 
stronger  than  evil.  Good  is  positive  and  evil  is 
negative.  Thought  is  ever  ready  to  help  us  if  we 
are  willing  to  let  it  manifest  its  power.  Thought 
is  a  part  of  our  personality,  and  hence  has  its  origin 
in  God  as  to  its  ultimate  possibility. 

No  limit  can  be  put  on  the  power  of  thought,  if 
man  is  in  thorough  accord  with  Him  who  gives  the 
capacity  for  thought  and  inspires  it.  Who  can 
measure  the  results  of  such  thought  on  life,  condi- 
tions, and  the  human  body. 

4.  If  the  subconscious  mind  and  nature  are 
always  well  and  thought  is  capable  of  producing 
great  changes  in  the  physical  organism  and  thought 
as  to  its  greatest  potency  is  found  in  perfection  of 
power  in  the  subconscious  nature,  then  we  see  how 
health  may  be  restored  in  the  body  and  how  it  may 
be  maintained. 

Every  good  emotion  that  comes  into  the  plane 
of  consciousness  strives  for  expression  on  that  plane. 
This  is  also  true  of  emotions  that  are  not  good. 


256  SUGGESTION 

The  one  guard  that  must  be  set  at  the  gateway  of 
the  human  soul  must  be  the  judgment  as  to  these 
emotions  and  any  that  are  questionable  are  not  to  be 
permitted  to  enter  that  plane,  but  the  good  may,  and 
they  will  produce  corresponding  pleasure,  profit,  and 
health.  If  the  real  self  that  lies  back  of  all  we  see 
and  the  subconscious  nature  which  connects  us  with 
the  Infinite  Spirit  control  and  govern  then  it  is  easy 
to  recover  health  and  maintain  it.  It  is  time  that 
we  allow  the  better  and  not  the  worst  impulses  to 
control  our  lives.  The  bad  emotions  produce  con- 
ditions adverse  to  our  best  interests.  The  thought 
of  health  will  create  health,  and,  if  unhindered,  will 
produce  it  in  the  body.  Where  light  floods  a  room 
darkness  will  not  be ;  where  health  thoughts  contin- 
ually prevail  and  the  real  person  controls,  health  will 
be  the  result. 

Thought  is  a  product  as  well  as  an  occasion  of 
impression,  and  if  the  health  is  to  be  restored  or 
maintained  impressions  of  health  must  be  kept  in  the 
mind. 

Thought  has  vibratory  energy  and  can  affect 
every  cell  of  the  body.  Hence  the  more  strongly, 
intently,  and  definitely  we  think,  the  greater  the 
effects  on  ourselves.  The  exercise  of  the  will  also 
enters  into  the  impression  made  on  the  body.  Hav- 
ing a  picture  of  what  we  desire  to  do  and  be  is  also 
an  assistance  in  securing  what  we  want  to  be.  The 
subconscious  mind  holds  the  key  to  health,  charac- 
ter, power,  and  perfection. 


THE  SUBCONSCIOUS  MIND         257 

A  well-balanced  and  equable  mind,  serenity  of 
feeling,  an  open  mind  to  the  Infinite  will  bring 
pleasure,  happiness,  and  power,  as  well  as  health, 
that  people  little  dream  of  today. 

(a)   What  it  is. 

The  old  psychology  made  mind  and  consciousness 
synonymous.  The  deduction  from  that  position  was 
"No  consciousness,  no  mind."  That  has  been  proven 
false,  for  there  is  a  great  field  of  mind  in  which  no 
consciousness  is  apparent  in  the  old  sense.  The  dif- 
ferent terms  applied  to  that  mind  are  "unconscious,"' 
"subconscious,"  "superconscious,"  "subliminal," 
"supraliminal,"  "cosmical,"  etc.  So  that  conscious- 
ness is  now  looked  upon  as  only  an  insignificant  part 
of  mind. 

It  will  be  well  for  the  reader  to  turn  to  the  two 
longer  descriptions  of  the  subconscious  mind  and 
re-read  them  in  order  to  get  a  comprehensive  view 
of  this  wonderful  part  of  man.  Let  me  only  briefly 
repeat  a  few  characteristics  of  this  mind.  It  has 
control  of  all  the  vital  functions  of  the  body — respir- 
ation, the  circulation  of  blood,  the  digestion,  assim- 
ilation, the  distribution  of  food,  and  the  excretory 
organs,  while  the  muscular  and  nervous  systems  are 
all  under  its  immediate  supervision.  It  has  power 
to  increase  or  diminish  the  supply  of  blood  to  any 
organ  of  the  body,  or  to  hasten  or  retard  its  speed. 
Hence  it  can  produce  or  allay  inflammation.  It  can 
contract  or  relax  any  muscle  at  its  pleasure.  It  is 
very  credulous.    When  the  conscious  mind  is  asleep, 

17 


258  SUGGESTION 

or  in  abeyance,  it  will  accept,  believe  in,  and  act 
upon,  what  is  then  taught.  In  many  instances  the 
subconscious  mind  has  carried  out  in  the  future, 
even  when  the  other  mind  is  on  guard,  the  instruc- 
tions given  to  it.  The  subconscious  mind  never 
sleeps;  if  it  were  to  fall  asleep  all  the  functions  of 
the  body  would  cease  and  death  would  ensue.  The 
subconscious  mind  receives  some  of  its  knowledge 
from  the  five  senses,  through  the  conscious  mind, 
and  from  other  subconscious  minds  by  telepathy. 

It  is  the  great  connecting  link  between  the  body 
and  the  Eternal  Spirit  of  this  Universe  and  makes 
it  possible,  by  virtue  of  its  intuition,  spiritual  per- 
ception and  perfect  faith,  for  man  to  appropriate 
all  that  the  Universal  Mind  has  to  give. 

This  mind  is  the  seat  of  personality  and  holiness, 
or  wholeness,  and  this  mind,  with  these  characteris- 
tics in  manifestations,  guarantees  its  eternal  exist- 
ence and  happiness. 

(b)   What  it  Does. 

The  subconscious  mind  possesses  other  latent 
powers  to  which  we  have  referred  in  previous  de- 
scriptions. It  is  this  mind  that  carries  on  the  work 
of  assimilation  and  upbuilding  whilst  we  sleep.  It 
brings  us  the  greatest  inspirations  for  trying  con- 
ditions and  carries  us  through  sicknesses.  It  reveals 
to  us  things  that  the  conscious  mind  has  no  concep- 
tion of  until  the  consummations  have  occurred.  It 
can  communicate  with  other  minds  without  the 
ordinary  physical  means.    It  gets  glimpses  of  things 


THE  SUBCONSCIOUS  MIND         259 

that  ordinary  sight  does  not  behold.  It  makes  God's 
presence  an  actual,  realizable  fact,  and  keeps  the 
personality  in  peace  and  quietness.  It  warns  of  ap- 
proaching danger.  It  approves  or  disapproves  of  a 
course  of  conduct  and  conversation.  It  carries  out 
all  the  best  things  which  are  given  to  it,  providing 
the  conscious  mind  does  not  intercept  and  change 
the  course  of  its  manifestation.  It  heals  the  body 
and  keeps  it  in  health,  if  it  is  at  all  encouraged. 
Whilst  it  is  not  open  to  introspection,  yet  it  proves 
to  be  a  retentive  power  making  retrospection  possi- 
ble. It  possesses  creative  energy  of  thought  in  every 
department  of  life  and  practice.  It  is  powerful  in 
the  formation  of  habits,  the  causation  and  cure  of 
many  abnormal  conditions  and  disorders.  The 
supreme  power  that  is  the  key  of  this  mind,  as  well 
as  a  potent  factor  in  bringing  forth  its  hidden  treas- 
ures and  inspiring  it  to  do  what  is  best  and  noblest, 
is  suggestion. 

No  one  can  explain  how  suggestion  operates,  but 
any  one  who  has  made  any  study  of  the  subject  will 
admit  that  wonders  have  been  achieved  by  this  great 
therapeutic  agent. 

(c)  How  Controlled. 

How  is  the  subconscious  mind  controlled  ? 

I.  By  the  conscious  mind  in  the  waking  hours. 
The  suggestions  by  this  mind  are  helpful  or  hurtful, 
and  have  a  tendency  to  fasten  on  the  subconscious 
mind  influences  that  are  uplifting  or  detrimental. 
We  have  referred  to  the  power  of  auto-suggestion, 


26o  SUGGESTION 

which    in    a    very    potent    form    is    given    by    the 
conscious  mind. 

2.  The  subconscious  mind  is  controlled  by  the 
exercise  of  its  own  peculiar  powers.  Take  for  in- 
stance the  manifestation  of  spiritual  perception  and 
the  exercise  of  that  characteristic  will  keep  it  in 
peace  and  quietness  and  will  produce  a  like  feeling 
throughout  the  whole  being.  The  exercise  of  faith 
will  be  productive  of  far-reaching  results.  Some 
one  has  well  put  this  idea  and  I  quote  it.  "At 
Lourdes,  at  Baden  Baden,  in  Christian  Science  gath- 
erings, at  St.  Anne  de  Beaupre,  in  Canada;  in  con- 
nection with  the  Christian  Alliance  for  faith-healing 
in  New  York,  under  every  variety  of  creed  and 
metaphysics,  faith  has  wrought  astonishing  and  un- 
questioned cures.  We  may  go  further,  and  say 
that  the  alleged  bone  of  a  saint  or  a  fragment  of 
his  clothing,  or  any  other  relic  of  superstition,  may 
achieve  as  great  things  in  the  removal  of  physical 
disorders  as  faith  in  the  living  God.  But  if  we  re- 
gard life  as  a  whole,  and  would  address  the  living 
man  in  his  entirety,  and  not  one  of  his  functions 
merely,  then  it  is  of  the  utmost  importance  that  his 
faith  should  be  set  upon  an  object  worthy  of  his 
ethical  dignity  and  spiritual  nature. 

"Jesus  refused  to  use  any  lower  motive  in  His 
healing  work  than  faith  in  His  heavenly  Father,  and 
in  Himself  as  the  Father's  messenger.  And  from 
those  who  would  be  healed  He  demanded  such  a 
trust  as  the  psychological  medium  in  which  He  could 


THE  SUBCONSCIOUS  MIND         261 

work  His  deeds  of  mercy.  He  calls  upon  men  to 
trust  in  God,  because  it  is  rational  and  right  that 
they  should  do  so.  The  blind  and  half-superstitious 
faith,  as  in  the  case  of  the  woman  who  thought  to 
be  healed  by  touching  the  hem  of  His  garment,  He 
developed  into  spiritual  confidence,  not  in  His 
clothes,  but  in  Himself. 

"When  a  moral  good  is  to  be  won,  or  a  disease 
of  character  is  to  be  healed,  no  therapeutic  agency 
can  take  the  place  of  faith  in  God,  as  He  has  re- 
vealed himself  in  Christ.  Such  a  faith  stirs  power- 
fully the  forces  of  the  inner  life,  arouses  the  deepest 
and  purest  feelings,  removes  the  inhibitions  that 
arrest  the  will,  harmonize  the  dissociated  elements 
of  the  soul,  and  all  these  psychical  events  react  bene- 
ficially upon  the  bodily  organism." 

Prayer,  which  is  the  result  of  spiritual  perception 
and  faith,  has  a  tendency  to  bring  the  whole  nature 
into  subjection  to  God,  to  whom  the  subconscious 
mind  is  open  and  receptive. 

3.  The  subconscious  mind  is  controlled  by  the 
suggestion  of  others.  This  is  so  well  known  that  it  is 
needless  to  discuss  that  here.  To  sum  up  the  whole 
matter  as  to  control  of  that  mind,  we  can  truly  say 
the  supreme  instrument  is  suggestion,  and  the 
supreme  force  of  control  is  mind,  no  difference 
where  it  may  be  found. 

(d)   To  What  Related. 

The  subconscious  mind  is  related  to  every  part 
of  our  life  and  is  the  under-stratum  of  its  exist- 


262  SUGGESTION 

ence.  It  is  directly  related  to  our  recovery  from 
sickness  or  disease  of  the  mind  or  body.  Nervous 
unbalance  is  a  prevailing  condition  today  among  so 
many  people,  and  their  hope  of  recovery  is  found  in 
letting  loose  the  powers  of  the  subconscious  mind, 
rather  than  by  using  the  powders  and  potions  of  the 
drug  store.  If  the  wise  physician  and  minister 
knew  how  to  get  hold  of  that  mind  and  change  its 
habits  and  thought  impressions  which  it  receives 
from  the  conscious  mind  and  the  physical  reflexes, 
they  could  work  wonders  for  the  people  of  this  na- 
tion. But  the  work  must  be  done  particularly 
through  that  mind.  Take  the  emotions,  for  exam- 
ple. It  is  to  this  element  in  our  psychic  life  that  the 
unconscious  chemistries  of  the  body,  the  consump- 
tion of  oxygen  in  the  lungs,  digestion,  elimination 
of  waste  products,  and  so  forth,  are  in  closest  con- 
nection. Fear,  worry,  anger — a  diabolical  trinity — 
disorganizes  and  paralyzes  these;  love,  joy,  peace 
stimulate  and  harmonize  them.  Hence  all  nervous 
health  depends  upon  a  habitual  control  of  the  emo- 
tions, not  only  feelings  of  depression,  but,  as  Bishop 
Butler  pointed  out,  passive  emotions  that  have  no 
fruit  in  action  waste  the  nervous  energy.  As  Presi- 
dent Henry  Churchill  King  well  says :  "By  the  sure 
working  of  mental  laws,  to  indulge  merely  passive 
emotion,  followed  by  no  action,  is  just  so  far  to  inca- 
pacitate ourselves  from  action.  *  *  *  This  con- 
sideration needs  to  be  urged  in  audiences  of  religious 
people,  for  passive  religious  emotion  has  identical 


THE  SUBCONSCIOUS  MIND  263 

dangers.  The  principle  indicates  also  the  weakness 
of  mere  exhortation;  the  crying  need  is  often  for 
definite  suggestion  or  direction  of  precise  ways  in 
which  the  feeling  or  resolution  stirred  may  be  wisely 
expressed." 

Truer  statements  than  these  were  never  made. 

This  mind  is  not  only  related  to  all  that  pertains 
to  one's  own  personality,  life,  and  condition,  but  it  is 
related  to  all  mankind,  and  to  the  Infinite  One  in  a 
very  special  manner. 

Wrong  ideas  of  God  have  brought  a  vast  deal  of 
misery  into  the  world,  and  to  sensitive  and  morbid 
natures  some  of  the  conceptions  presented  in  the 
earlier  history  of  the  country,  made  Him  worse  than 
a  Moloch  with  red-hot  arms  or  a  Jupiter  Tonans 
hurling  thunder-bolts  at  those  whom  he  hated.  Is 
it  any  wonder  that  so-called  witches  were  hanged 
and  burned  by  people  who  believed  in  such  a  God  ? 

The  newer  conception  of  God*s  Fatherhood,  love, 
and  helpfulness  opens  up  new  possibilities  for  man; 
awakening  confidence  and  hope,  inspiring  with  new 
power  to  live  and  dare,  leading  to  the  thought  of 
brotherhood  and  heaven,  and  binding  the  soul  to 
Him  with  undying  devotion  and  strength. 

The  subconscious  mind  relates  man  to  this  uni- 
verse and  to  all  that  is  in  it. 

(e)  Immortality. 

The  subconscious  mind  is  the  part  of  our  nature 
that  will  survive  the  shock  of  death.  The  conscious 
mind  and  the  physical  body  are  essential  for  our 


264  SUGGESTION 

present  environment.  The  powers  and  characteris- 
tics of  the  subconscious  mind  will  be  probably  mani- 
fested through  a  spiritual  body  which  will  be  adapt- 
ed to  a  spiritual  or  heavenly  environment.  Herein, 
we  shall  find  the  realization  of  immortality,  freedom 
from  all  pain,  sickness,  and  death.  There  will  be  the 
possibility  of  going  from  place  to  place;  knowing 
God  intuitively;  able  to  communicate  directly  with 
Him  and  others  without  any  physical  means,  as  now; 
seeing  without  the  physical  eyes;  hearing  without 
the  physical  ears;  knowing  without  the  physical 
brain.  Spiritual  perception  and  faith  will  be  spirit- 
ual sight  and  realization.  Immortality  has  in  it  the 
implication  that  the  real  person  does  not  only  pass 
beyond  the  power  of  death,  but  is  eternally  happy 
and  blessed  with  the  possibility  of  continuing  on  to 
know  what  God  has  done  and  so  becoming  more 
and  more  like  Him  in  life,  spirit,  and  work. 


HOW  TO  USE  IT  265 


CHAPTER  Xn. 
How  To  Use  Suggestion. 

The  use  of  suggestion  is  far-reaching  in  its 
application  and  consequences.  Various  methods 
may  be  employed  to  bring  about  desirable  results. 
Bad  habits  may  be  changed,  moral  tendencies  may 
be  established,  and  the  noblest  part  of  one's  nature 
may  be  made  regnant  in  thought  and  action,  so  that 
the  consequences  of  suggestion  are  almost  immeas- 
urable. The  necessity  for  various  methods  is  found 
in  the  requirements  of  various  minds,  but  the  utiliza- 
tion of  suggestion  is  conditioned  upon  the  subcon- 
scious mind  gripping  and  carrying  it  out.  Hence,  a 
suggestible  condition  must  be  present  and  mani- 
fested if  the  power  and  influence  of  suggestions  are 
to  be  realized  for  helpfulness  in  one's  self. 

The  application  is  as  wide  as  the  human  need  and 
the  race.  The  moral,  emotional,  mental,  and  physi- 
cal life  are  all  within  the  scope  of  its  beneficial  effect. 
Whilst  some  organic  diseases  probably  cannot  be 
cured  by  it,  yet  by  changing  the  thought  and  cheer- 
ing the  mind  of  persons  so  afflicted,  thus  increasing 
the  will-power,  controlling  the  nerve  forces,  and 
producing  sleep,  the  physical  power  will  be  increased 
and  the  mental  endurance  augmented  so  that  there  is 


266  SUGGESTION 

comfort  if  not  cure.  The  diseases  that  run  a  natural 
course,  like  typhoid  fever,  etc.,  can  be  indirectly 
helped  in  like  manner. 

Surgery,  the  most  scientific  branch  of  medical 
practice,  uses  the  regular  anaesthetics,  and  those  are 
for  ordinary  practices  the  quickest,  but  in  serious 
heart  trouble  where  they  cannot  be  used  profound 
anaesthesia  can  be  produced  by  suggestion.  Sug- 
gestion has  been  so  used  in  Germany,  in  France,  and 
also  in  our  own  country.  It  has  also  been  used 
effectively  for  parturition,  dentistry,  and  minor  sur- 
gery. 

In  functional  disorders  it  is  the  best  medicine  to 
take.  For  constipation,  insomnia,  anaemic  headache, 
St.  Vitus'  Dance,  neurasthenia,  paralysis,  etc.,  and 
for  all  functional  troubles,  there  is  nothing  superior 
to  suggestion. 

The  practitioner  ought  to  know  something  of 
anatomy,  physiology,  and  psychology  to  make  effec- 
tive and  wise  suggestions. 

The  power  of  suggestion  is  not  necessarily  condi- 
tioned on  hypnotism.  It  can  be  used  wherever  the 
attention  of  the  patient  is  secured.  There  are  many 
methods  used  to  do  this.  Mesmerism  was  at  one 
time  used  for  this  purpose,  but  it  is  now  found  to  be 
only  a  part  of  hypnotic  practice.  Physical  contact 
is  one  essential  feature  of  mesmerism,  which  distin- 
guishes it  from  that  of  hypnotism.  It  is  the  only 
visible,  tangible  difference.     However,  it  is  really 


HOW  TO  USE  IT  267 

only  a  species  of  tactile  suggestion.     Laying  on  of 
hands  belongs  to  this  class. 

There  are  numerous  methods  proposed  for  the 
utilization  of  suggestion: 

1.  Cheerful  and  sanitary  surroundings  exercise  a 
great  influence  indirectly  on  the  subconscious 
mind. 

2.  Faith,  through  various  means,  which  appeals  di- 
rectly to  the  conscious  mind. 

3.  Suggestion  by  the  conscious  mind  of  others  or  of 
one's  own  mind  by  repeated  affirmation  or  nega- 
tions until  the  subconscious  mind  accepts  and  car- 
ries them  out.  Affirmations  secure  the  best  results. 

4.  The  influence  of  the  mind  of  the  operator  on  the 
subconscious  mind  of  the  subject.  This  may  be 
by  words,  thoughts,  or  touch. 

The  practitioner  ought  to  know  how  to  make  sug- 
gestions so  that  they  shall  be  effective.  He  must 
present,  for  moral  change,  the  attractiveness  and 
power  of  good  and  the  hatefulness  of  evil.  It  is 
necessary  to  avoid  reference  to  vice  and  to  show 
that  a  better  way,  with  its  attractive  features  and 
good  qualities,  can  have  a  great  power  on  one  who 
desires  to  get  away  from  a  low  life  and  its  debase- 
ment. Reason  and  feeling  generally  precede  the 
will  in  action.  These  laws  of  suggestion  are  simple, 
and  it  is  needless  to  surround  them  with  mystery 
and  useless  names.  It  is  the  work  of  charlatanism 
to  do  so.    These  laws  are  God-given  and  have  wide 


268  SUGGESTION 

application.  Their  observance  brings  man  into 
Christ-likeness.  This  is  the  method  of  wakening 
man  to  the  great  possiblities  of  progress  and  self- 
development. 

Let  me  give  a  simple  illustration.  A  young  girl 
persisted  in  lying.  Many  things  were  done  to  break 
her  of  the  habit.  She  was  taken  in  hand  by  one  who 
understood  how  to  use  suggestion  effectively.  She 
was  put  into  a  passive  and  receptive  condition  and 
was  told  that  people  did  and  would  avoid  her  and 
hate  her  if  she  continued  to  tell  lies;  but  if  she  be- 
came truthful  she  would  be  loved  and  have  many 
friends.  Many  suggestions  of  a  similar  character 
were  made.  A  great  change  came  into  her  life.  She 
was  encouraged  in  her  truth-telling  by  the  family, 
and  she  became  changed  utterly  and  her  influence 
for  goodness  and  truthfulness  were  known  wherever 
she  went.  The  possibilities  of  the  use  of  suggestion 
none  can  measure. 

Every  normal  mind  is  amenable  to  suggestion,  to 
a  greater  or  lesser  degree.  This  principle  helps  us 
to  understand  the  reason  for  the  existence  of  a  mul- 
titude of  false  religions  and  why  they  all  have  fol- 
lowers; it  explains  why  men  accept  "gold  bricks" 
for  hard  money ;  why  so  many  buy  and  take  patent 
medicines;  it  also  shows  why  many  mountebanks 
thrive.  This  principle  and  characteristic  of  mankind 
is  the  basis  for  the  explanation  of  financial  crazes, 
demonphobia,    mediaeval    mental    epidemics,    stam- 


HOW  TO  USE  IT  269 

pedes  *(see  note  below),  the  Millerite  craze,  the 
dancing,  laughing,  barking  manias  of  the  South, 
Salem  Witchcraft  Craze,  crusades,  and  mobs. 

All  these  things  illustrate  the  suggestibility  of  the 
human  mind.  A  sweeping  revival  of  religion  also 
is  possible  on  account  of  this  condition  of  mind. 

In  ordinary  life  this  condition  is  reckoned  with, 
and  in  the  business  world  men  take  advantage  of 
this  characteristic  in  their  fellowmen.  The  drum- 
mer uses  it  and  sells  his  wares  or  goods.  The  rea- 
son why  one  is  so  much  more  successful  than 
another  is  because  he  uses  suggestion  and  presents 
his  case  more  plausibly  and  effectively  than  the 
other.  Goods  are  not  enough,  but  a  man  must  know 
how  to  show  them  and  how  to  induce  the  customer 
to  buy.  Let  a  man  go  into  a  store  to  sell  his  goods 
and  ask  the  proprietor  abruptly  what  he  wants,  and 
he  will  probably  be  met  with  the  response  that  he 
does  not  want  anything.  But  let  him  go  in  and 
quietly  and  confidently  expect  that  he  is  going  to  do 
business  and  he  will  succeed. 

How  to  make  effective  suggestions  is  always  puz- 
zling to  beginners,  but  the  art  can  be  learned  by 
study  and  practice. 

This  characteristic  of  suggestibility  of  the  human 
mind  explains  also  the  wonderful  results  in  "pow- 
wowing." It  also  explains  how  a  child  of  twelve  that 
has  ceased  to  grow  and  begins  to  do  so  again  when 

♦Chronological  Table  of  Epidemics  in  Europe.  From 
Dr.  Sidis'  "Psychology  of  Suggestion." 


270  SUGGESTION 

measured  against  a  young  growing  sapling  and  is 
told  that  he  will  grow  as  it  does.  He  watches  the 
little  tree  and  thinks  about  what  was  said  and  the 
subconscious  mind  catches  on  to  the  suggestion,  and 
the  result  follows  in  the  child's  growth. 

Schlatter,  Dowie,  Sandford,  Newton,  Christian 
Science,  and  other  persons  and  cults  all  used  and  use 
suggestion  effectively.  Many  followers  owe  their 
adherence  to  these  leaders,  cults,  and  other  organi- 
zations by  virtue  of  the  suggestions  which  control 
them.  The  effects  of  charms,  magnetized  rings, 
talismans,  and  many  things  innocent  in  themselves, 
are  the  result  of  suggestions  which  the  subconscious 
mind  accepts. 

Suggestion  may  be  given  in  three  ways : 

1.  The  patient  may  be  hypnotized.  The  conscious 
mind  in  this  state  is  asleep  and  off  duty.  The  opera- 
tor becomes  a  conscious  mind  to  the  subject.  Some 
of  the  most  effective  and  permanent  work  has  been 
accomplished  with  the  sick  by  this  method.  Some 
years  ago  it  was  thought  to  be  the  only  way  of  men- 
tally helping  the  afflicted  and  the  abnormal,  but  this 
view  is  now  given  up  and  hypnotism  is  now  only 
used  in  exceptional  cases,  as  in  phobias  and  fixed 
ideas. 

2.  Suggestion  in  the  waking  state.  Most  treat- 
ments are  given  to  the  afflicted  now  when  they  are 
conscious  of  all  that  is  being  said  and  done.  All 
that  is  necessary  is  that  the  patient  should  be  in  a  re- 
laxed condition  and  have  his  mind  passive  and  re- 


HOW  TO  USE  IT  271 

ceptive.  Some  of  the  best  work  is  done  in  this 
state. 

3.  Suggestion  in  natural  sleep.  The  healer  sits 
by  the  side  of  the  sleeper,  whether  adult  or  child, 
and  in  a  low  tone  of  voice  tells  the  subject  that  he 
will  sleep  soundly  and  will  not  awaken.  He  is  also 
told  that  his  sleep  will  be  very  deep  and  restful,  and 
that  the  subconscious  mind  will  accept  all  that  is 
said  and  will  carry  out  the  suggestions  to  the  letter. 
The  voice  is  raised  now  to  a  good  conversational 
tone.  The  hand  is  laid  gently  on  the  forehead  and 
temples  and  is  passed  down  to  the  chest.  An  en 
rapport  condition  will  be  established,  and  the  patient 
will  receive  the  suggestions  given  and  will  carry 
them  out  in  the  waking  state.  It  is  necessary  to 
repeat  the  suggestions  at  each  treatment,  and  be 
very  specific  in  what  you  give  with  a  determination 
that  the  subconscious  mind  will  receive  them  and 
carry  them  out  fully. 

There  are  no  legitimate  objections  that  can  be 
reasonably  urged  against  any  of  these  methods,  and, 
when  favorable,  either  of  them  or  all  of  them  can 
be  profitably  used  for  the  recovery  of  the  sick  and 
the  disabled  physically,  morally  or  spiritually. 

The  following  is  a  simple  method  of  using  sug- 
gestion, and  with  some  persons  it  is  very  effective. 
For  instance,  take  insomnia  and  morbidness  as  ail- 
ments. A  patient  suffers  from  insomnia  and  mor- 
bid fears,  he  is  taken  to  a  partly  darkened  room  and 
told  to  relax  body  and  mind  as  completely  as  possi- 


272  SUGGESTION 

ble,  not  to  dispute  mentally  the  suggestions  to  be 
made  by  the  physician  or  operator  and  to  keep  the 
eyes  closed.  Then  the  patient  hears  low  repetitions 
in  a  monotone  of  the  words,  "be  calm,"  "rest," 
"sleep."  This  is  followed  by  statements  Hke  these: 
"You  will  sleep  to-night  far  better  than  you  slept 
last  night.  You  will  say  to  yourself  when  you  re- 
tire, 'I  am  going  to  sleep  peacefully.'  You  will 
awake  in  the  morning  refreshed.  You  will  not  have 
so  much  fear  to  oppress  you.  Your  mind,  given  to 
a  loving  God,  has  all  the  equipment  needed  for  your 
work,  and  will  become  more  and  more  a  help  to 
you.  You  will  trust  more  fully  in  the  love  and  help 
of  a  Father  who  understands  all  things,  and  who 
intends  that  you  should  be  contented.  You  must 
not  dwell  on  the  past.  You  may  find  peace,  if  only 
you  will  follow  the  path  that  leads  to  peace.  You 
must  fix  your  whole  thought  on  the  fact  that  you 
are  going  to  feel  better,  and  be  better  able  to  do  your 
work.  You  must  believe  that  if  you  do  your  part, 
strength  will  come  as  you  need  it  from  a  higher 
source.  You  must  rest  as  if  you  were  safe  in  the 
Everlasting  Arms,  with  the  smile  of  the  Almighty's 
love  shining  upon  you.  Put  away  every  doubt  and 
hesitation  and  fear.  Be  cheerful  and  hopeful. 
Think  less  about  yourself  and  more  about  others. 
Rest.  Sleep.  Be  calm !"  This  will  have  a  wonder- 
ful effect  on  the  patient. 

Auto-suggestion  is  easily  used  and  helpfully  so, 
if  the  following  simple  rules  are  followed: 


HOW  TO  USE  IT  273 

"Sit  in  an  easy  chair,  or  recline  on  a  lounge,  or  lie 
in  bed.  Relax  every  muscle,  just  as  you  do  when 
you  get  into  bed.  If  in  a  chair,  let  your  feet  rest  on 
the  floor.  Let  the  hands  lie  outstretched  upon  the 
thighs.  Empty  the  lungs,  then  take  a  long,  deep 
inspiration  occupying  ten  to  twelve  seconds.  Rest 
two  or  three  seconds,  then  slowly  exhale  during  ten 
to  twelve  seconds.  Rest  two  or  three  seconds  and 
inhale  as  before.  This  will  make  about  two  inhala- 
tions a  minute.  Keep  it  up  for  five  or  six  minutes. 
The  body  is  now  getting  rest.  Let  the  mind  be  as 
passive  as  possible.  Let  no  one  be  near  you  to  in- 
terrupt you  or  distract  your  attention." 

Then  make  suggestions  to  yourself  as  to  anything 
you  want  or  may  want  to  do.  Concentrate  your 
mind  on  what  you  are  saying,  expecting  to  get  the 
results  without  fail.  Repeat  your  suggestions  over 
many  times.  Be  in  earnest  and  speak  emphatically, 
as  though  you  were  speaking  earnestly  to  some  one 
in  your  presence  and  making  your  demands  expect- 
ing them  to  be  carried  out.  Suppose  you  want  to 
treat  yourself  for  constipation.  The  following  for- 
mula may  be  an  example  for  any  one  to  follow : 

"O  Mind,  listen  to  my  instructions,  and  heed  my 
commands.  The  machinery  of  the  body  is  out  of 
order ;  it  is  not  working  right.  The  colon  is  filled  up 
with  impacted  matter,  and  the  whole  body  is  suffer- 
ing from  it.  The  remedy  is  in  your  hands.  You 
can  relieve  it.  Get  the  peristaltic  muscles  in  order 
and  produce  a  passage  of  the  bowels.  Clean  out  the 
18 


274  SUGGESTION 

colon  thoroughly.  Get  the  lymphatics  at  work  and 
remove  through  the  venous  blood,  the  pores  of  the 
skin,  the  bile,  the  kidneys,  and  the  colon  all  dead, 
effete,  and  noxious  matters  from  the  system ;  cleanse 
it  thoroughly  from  head  to  foot.  You  will  produce 
a  passage  tonight  at  seven  o'clock."  Be  particular 
about  the  last  clause — that  there  will  be  a  passage 
at  seven  o'clock  that  night.  And  there  will  be  one. 
Keep  up  these  suggestions  at  stated  times,  once  or 
twice  daily,  and  you  will  soon  effect  a  cure.  Prac- 
tice deep  breathing  in  pure,  fresh  air  several  times 
a  day.  Cultivate  the  best  thoughts.  ''The  mind 
thrives  upon  what  it  feeds." 

Much  has  been  said  and  written  about  the  effec- 
tiveness of  suggestion  for  functional  disorders,  but 
that  it  is  useless  in  cases  of  organic  diseases.  There 
are  some  organic  diseases,  because  of  the  destruc- 
tion of  tissues  or  organs,  that  cannot  be  affected  by 
suggestion.  There  are  some  organic  diseases  that 
can  be  greatly  modified  and  helped,  and  some  of 
them  that  can  be  cured.  All  organic  diseases  were 
in  the  primary  stages  functional.  We  have  been 
taught  that  functional  disease  is  a  disorder  in  the 
arrangement  of  the  cells  involved  in  the  tissues, 
whilst  in  organic  disease  the  structure  of  the  cells 
is  changed.  Our  study  of  pathological  conditions 
seem  to  ^yarrant  in  a  degree  this  discrimination,  but 
it  is  not  easy  to  conceive  of  even  a  functional  disor- 
der that  is  not  accompanied  by  a  structural  change. 
There  is  an  element  that  is  not  taken  into  the  dis- 


HOW  TO  USE  IT  275 

cussion  of  these  changes,  namely,  the  operation  of 
mind-working  cells. 

One  thing  has  been  noticed  by  some  physicians 
concerning  hay  fever  symptoms,  that  is,  that  they 
come  by  expectancy,  and  they  disappear  by  sugges- 
tion when  given  scientifically.  Take  the  case  of 
Dr.  Morton  Prince,  when  he  presented  an  artificial 
rose  to  a  lady  patient,  and  when  she  smelled  it  de- 
veloped immediately  the  symptoms  of  hay  fever. 
When  he  showed  her  that  it  was  a  paper  rose  and 
had  no  pollen,  she  immediately  recovered  and  never 
had  the  symptoms  again. 

A  cure  is  usually  assured  if  the  patient  is  con- 
vinced that  he  will  recover  from  his  sickness  or 
trouble,  and  he  is  practically  cured  when  he  believes 
himself  cured.  Hence,  it  is  a  good  thing  to  find  out 
how  the  patient  is,  mentally  and  physically.  It 
is  more  important  to  know  the  condition  of  the  inner 
life  than  to  know  the  pathological  condition  of  the 
body.  It  is  becoming  a  well-recognized  principle 
that  all  suffering  is  psychical  rather  than  physical. 

There  is  one  serious  defect  in  Dr.  Dubois's  book 
on  "The  Psychic  Treatment  of  Nervous  Disorders." 
He  seems  to  be  a  materialistic  psychologist.  The 
reason  we  say  this  is,  that  his  use  of  the  phrase 
"Mental  Constitution"  is  equivalent  to  another 
phrase,  namely,  "Cerebral  Structure."  Our  conten- 
tion is  that  it  is  utterly  impossible  to  give  a  psycho- 
logical account  or  description  of  the  mental  self  or 
personality  in  such  terms  as  "Cerebral  Structure.' 


276  SUGGESTION 

Dubois  seems  to  be  a  psychological  determinist  in 
thought.  He  is  so  hampered  philosophically  that  he 
limits  himself  to  the  "Cerebral  Structure,"  thus 
closing  himself  out  of  a  large  and  an  illimitable  field 
of  investigation  beyond  this.  There  are  some  per- 
sons who  cannot  be  reached  through  hypnotism  or 
by  the  methods  of  psycho-therapy,  but  whose  power 
of  control  and  development  will  depend  upon  their 
own  self-development  and  spiritual  methods  now  in 
use. 

There  are  some  persons  who  will  be  helped  from 
without  inward,  and  others  who  will  be  assisted 
from  within  outward.  The  former  will  be  the  per- 
sons who  will  be  aided  by  the  various  methods  of 
psycho-therapeutics,  the  others  will  get  their  results 
from  sheer  strength  of  will  and  power  from  within. 
The  very  presence  of  the  healer,  even  though  he  only 
sits  quietly  by  or  in  the  presence  of  the  patient,  will 
help  the  patient  feel  the  influence  and  anticipate  defi- 
nite results.  The  patient  himself  has  also  a  tendency, 
in  such  environment,  to  become  open-minded  and 
passive,  so  that  his  mind  is  not  only  open  to  what  the 
operator  may  definitely  will  that  he  should  be  or  get, 
but  the  Infinite  mind  can  also  enter  such  a  receptive 
mind  and  produce  great  results.  But  this  possibility 
is  far  beyond  the  "cerebral  structure"  of  the  patient. 
Materialism  is  a  dead  issue,  and  no  Suggestive- 
Therapeutist  can  get  the  best  for  his  patient  or  him- 
self by  a  limitation  to  the  "Cerebral  Structure." 
It  is  time  that  men  who  expect  to  be  physicians  to 


HOW  TO  USE  IT  277 

the  soul  shall  see  something  beyond  the  material 
organism  and  an  Infinite  mind  in  this  universe  from 
which  originates  all  power  and  health.  This  is  phil- 
osophical in  the  light  of  all  that  we  now  know  and 
see.  The  peculiar  constitution  of  man,  the  won- 
derful forces  of  nature,  the  oneness  of  man  and 
mind  all  lead  us  to  this  conclusion. 


278  SUGGESTION 


CHAPTER  XIII. 

How  To  Use  Suggestion  on  Children  and 
Young  People. 

Children  are  very  susceptible  to  suggestion.  The 
reason  may  be  found  in  the  fact  that  they  expect 
to  be  obedient  to  those  over  them,  and  to  those  who 
have  their  best  interests  at  heart.  Many  are  ready 
to  accept  counsel  and  commands,  instructions  and 
guidance.  This  is  true  of  normal  and  ordinary  chil- 
dren who  have  received  proper  instructions  as  to 
their  relationship  and  duty.  The  element  of  faith 
is  strong  in  the  child's  mind,  so  that  it  is  willing  and 
ready  to  receive  what  it  is  told.  Hence,  suggestions 
having  a  far-reaching  consequence  may  be  given 
and  a  modification  of  tendencies  in  the  child's  life 
may  soon  be  observed.  Two  conditions  are  neces- 
sary in  order  to  secure  these  results : 

1.  Mutual  affection  and  confidence  between  the 
practitioner  and  child. 

2.  Definiteness  of  suggestion  as  well  as  simplicity. 
Parents  make  the  best  operators,  if  they  know  how 
to  make  needful  suggestions.  Too  many  parents 
are  utterly  ignorant  of  both  the  method  and  power 
of  this  remedial  and  reformatory  agency. 


FOR  THE  YOUNG  '  279 

It  might  be  well  to  give  a  general  method  of  appli- 
cation of  suggestion,  so  that  all  who  would  use  it, 
to  change  the  nature  of  a  child  or  cure  his  sickness, 
may  do  so  if  they  desire.  The  whole  life  of  the  child 
can  be  practically  reformed,  bad  habits  can  be  sup- 
planted by  good  ones,  unbecoming  conduct  can  be 
changed,  undesirable  tendencies  can  be  modified, 
and  desires  for  a  moral  life,  education,  and  the  noble 
things  of  life  can  be  instilled.  The  best  one  to  do 
this  work  is  the  parent,  because  of  the  intimate  rela- 
tion to  the  child,  and  because  the  child  ordinarily  has 
perfect  confidence  in  the  parent,  especially  the 
mother. 

The  best  time  to  do  this  work  is  when  the  mother 
puts  the  child  to  bed.  A  simple  method  to  adopt  is 
to  sing  quietly  to  the  child  and  when  the  little  one  is 
going  to  sleep  change  the  song  into  a  quiet,  sooth- 
ing conversation,  of  a  monotonous  or  sing-song 
tone.  When  the  child  becomes  partially  uncon- 
scious, suggest  somewhat  in  this  form:  ''My  dear, 
I  shall  talk  to  you  a  little  while  and  you  will  not 
waken  up.  You  will  sleep  and  hear  everything  I 
say  to  you.  Your  sleep  will  be  very  sweet  and  your 
life  will  be  full  of  happiness.  You  will  be  kind  and 
loving,  obedient  and  true.  Your  life  will  be  pure, 
and  you  will  hate  everything  wrong  and  impure. 
You  will  be  thoughtful  and  gentle.  Your  life  will 
become  very  much  changed,  and  any  bad  habits  will 
be  given  up.  You  will  always  want  to  do  right; 
you  will  not  be  fretful  and  quarrelsome.     You  will 


28o  SUGGESTION 

do  those  things  which  will  make  your  playmates  love 
you.  You  will  help  them  to  do  right,  and  you  will 
talk  to  them  lovingly  about  anything  bad  they  say, 
and  you  will  not  use  bad  words.  You  will  be  pure 
and  sweet  and  kind."  Repeat  these  things  a  num- 
ber of  times  when  you  put  the  child  to  bed.  Another 
example  may  be  helpful.  It  might  be  given  thus, 
beginning  in  a  low,  whispering  voice,  gradually  in- 
creasing in  loudness :  "Johnny,  you  are  fast  asleep, 
yet  you  can  hear  my  voice.  You  will  not  wake  up, 
but  will  sleep  deeper  and  deeper.  You  will  hear 
and  heed  all  I  am  saying  to  you.  You  don't  like  to 
go  to  school  because  you  are  backward  in  your  stud- 
ies ;  you  are  backward  because  you  have  been  playing 
truant.  If  you  neglect  school  you  will  grow  up  to  be 
an  ignorant,  idle,  vicious  man,  fit  only  to  be  a  laborer. 
If  you  get  an  education,  you  will  be  fitted  for  a  much 
better  position  in  life,  and  will  be  much  happier. 
You  are  going  to  make  a  change  now  and  will  aban- 
don your  past  life.  You  will  love  your  school.  Your 
memory  will  improve.  Lessons  that  were  hard  to 
learn  will  be  easier  now,  because  you  can  remem- 
ber them  much  better.  You  will  improve  so  rapidly 
that  you  will  soon  be  at  the  head  of  your  classes. 
You  will  no  longer  play  truant.  Instead  of  being 
idle,  lazy,  and  indifferent,  you  will  become  indus- 
trious, studious,  kind  and  gentle."  Repeat  these 
suggestions  several  times  for  fifteen  minutes,  giving 
your  words  due  emphasis.    Continue  this  treatment 


FOR  THE  YOUNG  281 

nightly  for  a  month,  and  you  will  work  a  wonderful 
change  in  your  boy. 

Suggestions  can  be  multiplied  to  an  almost  unlim- 
ited degree.  The  above  examples  are  enough  to 
show  the  method.  The  mother  will  know  what  she 
desires  to  change  in  the  child's  life  and  she  can  make 
definite  statements  so  that  the  subconscious  mind 
may  grip  them  and  commence  the  modifying 
effect. 

Little  heart-to-heart  talks  with  the  child  when 
awake  will  deepen  the  suggestions  made  when  the 
child  is  asleep,  and  will  secure  the  cooperation  of 
the  conscious  mind,  which  will  be  a  great  help. 
This  work  of  change  applies  to  the  physical,  mental, 
moral  and  spiritual  life.  If  parents  would  faith- 
fully carry  out  this  work  with  their  children  we 
should  soon  behold  a  marvellous  change  in  the  race. 

This  wonderful  power  of  suggestion  commences 
before  the  child  is  born.  The  relationship  of  the 
mother  and  child  is  so  intimate  that  the  mother's 
conscious  mind  influences  the  child's  life,  tendencies, 
and  character  in  utero.  The  unborn  child  is  in  the 
same  relationship  to  her  deep  organization  as  the 
cells  of  her  body,  and  just  as  impressible  by  her 
deeper  nature.  The  physical  aggregate  of  the  child's 
being  is  built  by  the  subconscious  life  of  the  mother. 
Her  idealsy  her  physical  condition,  her  strongest  de- 
sires are  imparted  to  the  child.  Here  is  the  begin- 
ning of  the  possible  physical,  mental,  and  spiritual 
perfection  which  God  asks  and  man  desires  in  his 


282  SUGGESTION 

best  moments.  This  work  of  the  mother,  in  the  be- 
ginning of  the  life  of  the  child,  is  exceedingly  im- 
portant, but  how  many  parents  are  utterly  ignorant 
of  this. 

The  marvellous  results  which  can  be  accomplished 
in  the  life  of  a  child  whose  tendency  is  away  from 
the  truth,  purity,  and  virtue,  no  one  can  tell.  A 
trial  will  convince  the  most  sceptical  and  the  conse- 
quences will  extend  beyond  this  life. 

(a)  In  Sickness. 

When  the  child  sees  the  love  that  parents  have  for 
it  and  how  it  may  confide  in  them,  also  in  the  nurse 
and  doctor,  when  these  persons  know  how  to  make 
effective  suggestions  for  healing,  a  modifica- 
tion of  the  sickness  will  be  seen  very  soon  after 
the  suggestions  are  made.  I  am  not  opposed  to  the 
use  of  medicines,  or  larvated  suggestion,  in  cer- 
tain diseases  or  stages  of  sicknesses,  but  I  am  only 
showing  how  a  mighty  power  can  be  brought  to 
bear  on  the  mind  of  the  child  and  greatly  assist  in 
its  recovery.  The  vital  forces  are  usually  strong  in 
children  and  the  acceptance  of  suggestion  quickly 
works  recovery.  The  subconscious  mind  of  the 
child  seems  to  be  open  naturally  to  suggestion,  and 
the  elements  of  that  mind,  such  as  faith,  spiritual  in- 
tuition, desire — all  seem  to  keep  the  child  in  an  atti- 
tude of  receiving  what  is  given.  The  dependence  of 
the  child  on  others  when  sick  seems  to  prepare  it  for 
any  suggestions  that  may  be  given,  and  it  has  been 


MORAL  PERVERSENESS  283 

proven  that  children  in  this  condition  are  splendid 
subjects. 

(b)  In  Moral  Perverseness. 

The  most  terrible  thing  for  parents  to  learn  is  that 
their  children  are  morally  perverse  in  thought,  habit, 
and  action.  How  to  remedy  this  condition  is  a  hard 
problem  and  one  that  every  parent  and  teacher, 
every  moralist  and  preacher,  ought  to  understand. 
Where  perverseness  and  its  extreme  manifestation 
and  degeneration  are  seen  in  one's  life,  it  is  an  indi- 
cation that  habits  are  deep-seated  and  that  the  con- 
scious mind  cannot  of  itself  control  this  condition, 
no  matter  how  strongly  the  will  may  assert  itself. 
There  is  a  peculiarity  in  the  psychical  condition  of 
such  a  one  in  that  the  exercise  of  the  will  as  to 
negation  only  increases  the  tendency  to  erotic  or 
perverted  habits.  The  will  has  been  quietly  acqui- 
escing in  those  habits  so  long  that  when  the  person 
would  do  good  he  cannot.  The  auto-suggestion  of 
the  conscious  mind  produces  a  powerful,  and  almost, 
if  not  an  entirely,  automatic  action  leaving  the  habit 
in  control,  even  though  there  may  be  a  desire  for 
something  better  and  nobler.  No  description  in  lit- 
erature so  well  illustrates  this  condition  of  victory 
of  the  lower,  habitual  life  over  nobler  desires,  inven- 
tions, and  efforts  as  Romans  7:15-25,  and  "Dr. 
Jekyl  and  Mr.  Hyde."  Let  any  one  of  perverse 
habits  and  degenerate  tendencies  make  an  effort 
alone  to  conquer  and  he  will  see  Paul's  meaning  as 


284  SUGGESTION 


never  before  and  find  out  the  truth  of  Robert  Louis 
Stevenson's  wonderful  story. 

Many  times  I  have  been  asked  what  can  be  done 
to  overcome  Hcentious  thoughts  and  vicious  tenden- 
cies. Here  is  where  wise,  helpful  suggestions  come 
to  the  rescue.  The  minds  of  such  persons  must  be 
controlled  and  reinforced  by  assurance  of  victory 
over  these  things,  and  it  may  be  necessary  to  put 
one  into  a  state  of  hypnosis  before  effective  sugges- 
tion can  be  instilled  into  the  subconscious  mind 
which  is  able  to  control  bodily  functions,  physical 
tendencies,  and  an  immoral  life.  When  auto-sug- 
gestion, intentional  or  not,  gets  control  of  one's 
thoughts,  tendencies,  and  habits,  when  they  are  bad 
with  no  desire  to  make  them  better,  there  is  no  pos- 
sible redemption  for  such  persons,  except  by  get- 
ting noble,  moral,  and  often  religious  suggestions 
into  the  subconscious  mind  and  giving  new  im- 
pulses, a  new  inspiration,  and  a  new  thought  of  life 
and  its  possibilities.  Herein  is  found  an  explanation 
of  changes  wrought  in  persons  whose  lives  have 
been  wicked  and  worthless. 

Religious  suggestions  are  the  most  potent  for 
good  in  many  lives,  because  there  is  a  certain  rever- 
ence for  God,  and  any  suggestion  about  Him  will 
hold  the  attention.  Hence,  any  one  who  has  rever- 
ence in  a  large  degree,  no  difference  how  wicked 
through  impulse  his  outward  life  is  and  has  been,  he 
will,  with  a  religious  environment,  listen  to  anjrthing 
that  excites  his  reverence  and  he  will  often  heed  and 


MORAL  PERVERSENESS  285 

act  upon  the  suggestion.  Jerry  McAuley,  Francis 
Murphy,  John  B.  Gough,  and  many  other  persons 
are  illustrations  of  this  principle. 

There  is  very  little  hope  for  persons  who  seem  to 
be  beyond  redemption,  excepting  through  religious 
suggestion,  as  presented  in  the  Bible  and  by  posi- 
tive religious  teachers  and  preachers.  The  ordinary 
suggestions  have  but  little  effect  upon  such  persons, 
and  it  is  almost  impossible  for  them  to  be  hypnotized 
as  they  frequently  lack  the  power  to  concentrate 
their  minds  on  a  thought,  and,  as  to  desire,  they 
have  very  little,  if  any,  for  that  kind  of  treatment, 
as  they  usually  are  suspicious  of  everybody. 

When  persons  are  morally  perverse  and  have  a 
sense  of  guilt  and  a  desire  to  change  that  perverse- 
ness,  they  are  willing  to  do  almost  anything  in  order 
to  get  rid  of  the  slavery  and  the  lashings  of  con- 
science, after  yielding  to  certain  things,  which  in 
their  best  moments  they  abhor  and  detest.  For  such 
persons  there  is  great  hope  of  an  effective  cure  in 
the  application  of  suggestion.  We  cite  a  few  cases 
that  will  illustrate  the  method  of  using  suggestion 
and  its  beneficial  effects.  The  first  report  which  we 
give  is  from  Dr.  John  D.  Quackenbos,  who  has  had 
great  success  in  his  efforts  to  help  young  boys  and 
young  men.  Dr.  Quackenbos  says:  "In  one  the 
New  York  lodging  houses  for  boys,  the  only  institu- 
tion of  the  kind  to  which  I  am  accorded  access,  a 
number  of  intelligent  young  fellows  representing  the 
newsboy,   bootblack,   and   errand-boy    class,    were 


286  SUGGESTION 

found  desirous  of  being  freed  from  practices  pre- 
judicial to  their  physical  and  moral  health.  These 
cases  may  be  classified  under  the  heads  of  cigarette 
addiction,  kleptomania,  sexual  perversion,  and  low 
or  misdirected  intelligence.  The  method  pursued 
with  cigarette  smokers,  some  of  whom  admitted  the 
smoking  and  inhaling  of  forty  to  fifty  cigarettes  a 
day  and  exhibited  many  symptoms  of  nicotine  poi- 
soning, was  to  deprive  them  gradually  of  the  stimu- 
lant. The  suggestion  was  given  to  smoke  fewer 
cigarettes  each  day  of  the  ensuing  week,  until  the 
number  was  finally  reduced  to  one  after  each  meal. 
"At  the  second  hypnotism  the  suggestion  was, 
you  have  got  through  with  cigarettes  and  have  no 
further  use  for  tobacco;  it  will  nauseate  you,  keep 
up  your  nervous  symptoms,  increase  the  irregular 
action  of  your  heart,  continue  to  irritate  your  throat, 
and  aggravate  the  eye  trouble  it  has  induced.  It 
will  interfere  with  your  success  in  life.  This  was  re- 
peated three  times.  The  rewards  of  honesty,  moder- 
ation, and  devotion  to  employment  interests  were 
then  pictured,  and  the  patient  was  told  to  wake  up 
at  a  designated  time  feeling  encouraged,  ambitious, 
and  happy.  These  suggestions  are  always  fulfilled. 
A  disgust  for  tobacco  is  produced;  sometimes  so 
strong  that  after  the  first  treatment  the  patient  will 
almost  entirely  forego  its  use.  One  subject,  Wil- 
liam B.,  who  had  been  smoking  twenty-two  cigar- 
ettes a  day,  dropped  to  four  a  week  after  a  single 
sitting. 


MORAL  PERVERSENESS  287 

"A  thief,  seventeen  years  old,  who  developed 
kleptomania  at  the  age  of  twelve,  and  had  been  re- 
peatedly arrested,  begged  to  be  cured  of  his  uncon- 
trollable impulse  to  steal.  The  suggestion  was  given 
to  him  (in  the  slang  that  he  used  and  understood) 
that  he  would  no  longer  feel  the  inclination  to  steal 
and  then  that  he  would  not  steal,  each  being  repeat- 
ed emphatically  three  times.  He  was  then  told  that 
he  lived  in  a  country  where  an  honest  boy  was  sure 
to  rise,  and  an  honorable  career  was  suggested  to 
him,  dependent  on  his  respect  for  the  property  of 
other  people.  The  final  suggestion  was  to  lay 
aside  his  hang-dog,  guilty  look,  put  on  a  frank  and 
manly  expression,  and  be  afraid  to  look  no  man  in 
the  face.  Words  cannot  express  my  gratification 
at  meeting  my  light-fingered  young  friend  a  week 
later  with  his  head  erect,  an  open  countenance,  a 
smile  of  acknowledgement  on  his  face,  and  at  hear- 
ing him  volunteer  the  information:  'Doctor,  I  have 
not  had  the  least  temptation  to  swipe  anything  since 
last  Sunday.' 

"Young  persons  of  either  sex  under  twenty  are 
phenomenally  susceptible  to  hypnotism.  Boys  ad- 
dicted to  the  cigarette  habit,  profanity,  and  the  sex- 
ual vices,  are  curable  by  this  means.  The  impulse 
to  steal  is  removable  through  hypnotism.  Stam- 
merers may  be  relieved  of  their  defect.  High  re- 
solves may  be  made  to  take  the  place  of  sordid  and 
sensual  aims ;  lofty  ideals,  of  low  standards ;  mental 
brilliancy  instead  of  stupidity  and  indifference. 


288  SUGGESTION 

"I  have  no  hesitation  in  adding  to  this  list  of  cur- 
able moral  diseases  the  gambling  mania,  so  marked 
among  American  schoolboys,  as  well  as  the  arabs 
of  the  street,  the  growing  lack  of  reverence  for 
superiors,  habits  of  disobedience,  habits  of  lying, 
and  general  incorrigibility. 

"The  sexual  perversions  that  have  been  treated 
successfully  have  been  many.  Ungovernable  abuses 
have  been  controlled  and  patients  have  been  obliqued 
from  sexual  manias  which  no  appeal  to  self-respect, 
fear  of  physical  or  mental  ruin,  conscience  or  reason, 
and  which  no  use  of  drugs,  had  any  effect  on.  Ani- 
mal standards  have  been  displaced  from  some  boy's 
minds,  and  intellectual,  moral,  and  spiritual  ideas 
substituted  therefor.  The  thought  of  marriage  with 
an  honorable  woman,  who  would  be  in  sympathy 
with  the  patient's  aims  and  share  his  life's  work, 
was  made  in  the  case  of  one  subject  to  take  the  place 
of  a  mania  for  promiscuous  concubinage,  from 
which  I  am  confident  a  bright  young  life  has  been 
rescued.  Worthy  ambitions  were  suggested  to  one 
young  man,  assurance  that  he  could  master  the 
study  he  was  engaged  in  and  would  develop  intel- 
lectually along  the  lines  he  had  chosen — ^with  the 
result  of  awakening  a  superior  interest  in  his  books, 
and  clothing  him  with  power  to  overcome  the  diffi- 
culties of  higher  arithmetic  and  geometry." 

This  testimony  covers  the  ground  in  illustrative 
form,  and  it  confirms  the  testimony  of  others  who 
have  secured  equally  good  results  by  the  same  or 


MORAL  PERVERSENESS  289 

similar  methods.  If  there  could  be  a  number  of 
places  in  our  large  cities  where  suggestion  could  be 
effectively  applied  to  young  people  of  criminal  ten- 
dencies, the  criminals  of  the  future  would  be  greatly 
diminished  in  numbers. 

Suggestion  has  been  efficiently  used  on  boys  who 
seem  to  be  on  the  borderland  of  insanity.  We  give 
another  case  from  Dr.  Quackenbos: 

"I  have  examined  the  Rubin  boy.  He  is  on  the 
borderland  that  divides  the  sane  from  the  insane. 
He  seems  to  be  a  cross  between  a  degenerate  or 
idiot  and  a  lunatic,  with  one  drop  in  favor  of  nor- 
mal blood.  The  boy  is  the  most  difficult  subject  I 
have  ever  put  under  hypnotic  control.  He  had  that 
inevitable  characteristic  of  the  lunatic — lack  of 
power  of  concentration.  I  have  treated  him  four 
times.  I  secured  his  attention  by  suspending  a 
large  diamond  above  his  head.  He  looked  at  this 
for  an  hour  before  he  was  hypnotized.  I  then  gave 
him  the  suggestion  that  he  was  no  longer  nervous ; 
that  he  would  sleep  without  bad  dreams;  that  he 
really  had  no  fear  of  the  dark;  that  rats  would  not 
hurt  him ;  that  he  would  obey  his  parents  and  mingle 
peaceably  with  other  children,  his  mind  would  be 
tranquil,  and  he  would  draw  more  music  from  his 
violin.  He  accepted  all  these  suggestions,  and  his 
home  life  is  improved.  The  boy^s  genius  for  music 
is  no  part  of  his  incipient  insanity.  It  is  distinct 
from  it,  and  is  his  one  talent.  His  mental  balance 
has  been  restored,  and  he  has  had  the  tranquilizing 

19 


290  SUGGESTION 

preparation  necessary  for  his  study.  I  believe  that 
George  Rubin's  case  demonstrates  that  mild,  or  in- 
cipient, insanity  can  be  cured  by  hypnotism." 

The  possibility  of  suggestion  no  one  can  yet 
measure  fully;  but  that  it  can  be  effectively  used 
for  the  cure  of  mental  perversion,  mild  forms  of 
insanity,  abnormal  conditions,  and  for  moral  regen- 
eration, no  one  can  doubt  the  evidences  that  are  on 
record. 

(c)  In  Moral  Regeneration. 

The  far-reaching  power  of  suggestion  is  seen  in 
the  moral  regeneration  which  may  be  wrought  in 
the  depraved.  The  cases  of  depravity  are  many,  and 
some  of  them  are  almost  incurable  because  of  the 
deleterious  changes  which  have  been  produced  in 
the  bodies  of  such  persons. 

This  application  of  suggestion  is  producing  won- 
derful results  according  to  the  testimony  of  many 
persons  who  are  utilizing  it  for  moral  purposes.  We 
must  make  a  clear  discrimination  between  the  oper- 
ation of  man's  mind  and  the  work  of  the  Holy 
Spirit.  We  shall  consider  this  more  at  length  under 
the  head  of  Suggestion  in  the  Spiritual  Life.  Dr. 
Quackenbos,  in  his  excellent  work  on  "Hypnotism 
were  irreverent  to  trust  to  prayer  alone,  hoping  for 
in  Mental  Culture,"  says:  "In  the  treatment  of 
psychical  ailments,  God  helps  those  who  help  them- 
selves ;  so  in  dealing  with  moral  disease,  where  irre- 
sistible impulses  drive  unfortunates  to  the  commis- 
sion of  crime  or  steep  them  in  health-destroying  vice, 
it  were  irreverent  to  trust  to  prayer  alone,  hoping  for 


MORAL  REGENERATION  291 

some  special  interposition  of  Providence  in  behalf 
of  the  moral  leper." 

"The  psychic  treatment  which  science  has  approv- 
ed and  which  is  just  as  much  a  means  in  God's  Prov- 
idence as  drugs  for  preventing,  curing,  or  alleviating 
physical  disease  should  be  applied,  viz:  judicious 
hypnotic  suggestion  in  the  hope  of  re-establishing 
control  by  appeal  to  the  subliminal  self."  Dr. 
Quackenbos  believes  that  the  ethical  victories  to  be 
achieved  by  the  subject  will  be  accomplished  by  sug- 
gestive treatment,  and  that  it  will  pave  the  way  for 
the  achievement  of  the  future  victories  which,  hu- 
manly speaking,  would  otherwise  be  impossible. 
And  no  one  will  deny  that  society  is  the  gainer, 
whatever  the  ethical  situation  may  be. 

The  philosophy  underlying  this  moral  regenera- 
tion, secured  by  suggestion,  is  simply  getting  the  bet- 
ter nature,  which  has  been  so  long  dominated  by  the 
auto-suggestion  in  thought,  conduct,  and  environ- 
ment, into  a  normal  condition  so  as  to  assert  itself, 
and  thus  make  it  possible  that  the  subliminal  life 
may  come  up  to  its  real  position.  So  great  is  the 
change  that  it  has  been  considered  a  conversion. 
There  are  many  cases  where  this  change  has  occur- 
red, to  the  surprise  of  the  people  who  knew  the  sub- 
jects. A  religious  atmosphere  is  the  best  for  such 
changes,  for  religious  ideas  appeal  strongly  to  any- 
one who  has  had  an  early  religious  training. 

The  possibility  of  recovering  many  young  people, 
especially  those  who  are  in  the  reform  schools  of 


292  SUGGESTION 

our  nation,  to  a  moral  and  changed  life  ought  to 
cause  the  benevolent  and  Christian  men  and  women 
to  do  all  they  can  to  have  these  young  people  treated 
suggestively.  It  has  been  proven  beyond  the  possi- 
bility of  a  question  that  this  treatment  can  do  more 
than  any  other  hitherto  tried  to  bring  about  a  moral 
change  in  such  natures.  Some  young  people  may 
not  seemingly  have  any  desire  to  do  right,  but 
after  a  few  treatments  they  do  not  desire  to  do 
wrong.  If  the  treatments  are  continued,  an  amaz- 
ing change  comes  into  their  lives,  and  they  fre- 
quently become  strong  men  in  righteousness.  We 
have  proven  the  possibility  of  such  changes. 

(d)  Suggestion  in  Exceptional  Cases. 

There  are  special  conditions  as  in  the  preparation 
of  a  subject  for  the  taking  of  an  anaesthetic  and  in 
removing  the  after-effects,  wherein  suggestion  can 
do  much  in  fortifying  the  mind  for  and  in  speedily 
establishing  a  normal  condition  after  an  operation. 
A  condition  of  anesthesia  can  be  very  effectively  es- 
tablished by  suggestion,  and  a  removal  of  serious 
conditions  of  the  surgical  shock  after  an  operation. 
This  has  been  proven  over  and  over  again. 

There  are  conditions  in  which  it  is  desirable  to 
produce  anesthesia,  as  in  pulling  teeth,  performing 
surgical  operations,  in  painful  parturition,  etc.,  etc. 
The  anaesthetic  condition  can  be  induced  by  drugs 
or  by  suggestion.  The  former  often  leave  serious 
results,  or  effects  that  continue  for  a  long  time.  But 


EXCEPTIONAL  CASES  293 

anesthesia  induced  by  suggestion  has  never  been 
known  to  produce  any  serious  after-effects,  showing 
the  superiority  of  suggestion  over  drugs.  How- 
ever, it  will  be  necessary  to  use  chloroform,  ether, 
etc.,  on  some  people,  as  they  are  not  at  first  amena- 
ble to  hypnotism  and  suggestion. 

There  are  cases  on  record  where  anesthesia  has 
been  produced  by  the  power  of  suggestion  on  the 
imagination.  A  number  of  cases  are  related  by  Dr. 
C.  Lloyd  Tuckey  in  his  work  on  "Treatment  by 
Hypnotism  and  Suggestion."  I  want  to  say  here 
that  Dr.  Tuckey's  work  is  one  of  the  very  best  that 
has  been  published  on  Suggestive  Therapeutics. 
It  is  really  one  of  the  most  complete  advanced 
works  on  that  subject  in  the  English  language. 
His  interesting  discussion  on  larvated,  drug  and 
suggestive  anesthesia  is  quite  comprehensive,  and 
I  take  pleasure  in  referring  the  reader  to  his  work 
for  a  longer  discussion  of  this  subject. 

It  might  be  profitable  for  me  to  briefly  indicate 
the  method  of  producing  anesthesia,  and  also  state 
how  one  may  hypnotize  difficult  subjects. 

It  is  necessary  to  produce  an  h)rpnotic  condition 
in  order  to  secure  the  best  anaesthetic  results.  The 
methods  which  we  have  presented  in  another  part 
of  this  work  can  be  used  to  produce  that  condition, 
after  which  the  operator  can  put  his  hand  on  any 
part  of  the  body  of  the  subject  and  produce  a  pain- 
less condition.  An  operation  can  be  performed  and 
no  pain  will  be  remembered,  and  little  if  any  will  be 


294  SUGGESTION 

felt  during  the  operation.  There  are  some  minor 
surgical  operations  that  can  be  performed  by  the 
operator  by  suggesting  that  there  will  be  no  pain. 

It  is  well  known  among  men  who  have  an  inti- 
mate acquaintance  with  hypnotic  phenomena  that 
under  the  suggestion  of  anesthesia  that  strong 
ammonia  fumes  have  no  effect  on  the  mucous  mem- 
branes of  the  nose  and  throat;  that  muscular  re- 
flexes can  be  inhibited,  that  no  pain  is  felt  or  at 
least  not  enough  of  it  to  awaken  the  subject  under 
an  operation.  Teeth  have  been  extracted,  wounds 
have  been  cleansed  and  stitched,  fractures  and 
broken  bones  have  been  set,  dislocations  have  been 
reduced,  abscesses  have  been  opened,  and  numerous 
things  done  when  the  subjects  have  been  in  an  hyp- 
notic condition  and  under  the  suggestion  of  anes- 
thesia. It  is  always  best  when  the  hypnotic  condi- 
tion is  produced  that  suggestions  be  also  given  that 
there  will  be  a  complete  insensibility  to  pain.  If 
there  is  any  fear  on  the  part  of  the  patient  that  he 
may  awaken,  it  is  helpful  to  take  a  cloth  and 
sprinkle  on  it  a  few  drops  of  chloroform  or  ether  or 
alcohol,  suggesting  in  the  last  case  that  it  will  put 
the  subject  into  a  very  deep  sleep  and  will  prevent 
the  feeHng  of  pain.  It  is  necessary  for  the  subject 
to  be  thoroughly  relaxed  and  to  breathe  deeply.  It 
is  best  to  suggest  that  the  subject  will  remain  in 
deep,  insensible  sleep  throughout  the  operation,  and 
when  it  is  all  over  that  the  sleep  will  continue  with- 
out any  sickness  at  the  stomach  and  without  feeling 


EXCEPTIONAL  CASES  295 

the  shock  to  the  nerves  after  the  operation.  Sug- 
gest that  the  recovery  will  be  normal,  the  after- 
effects will  be  natural,  and  the  healing  will  be  rapid. 
These  suggestions  ought  to  be  made  a  number  of 
times.  Suggestions  should  also  be  given  from  time 
to  time.  This  wonderful  power  of  hypnotism  and 
suggestion  should  be  used  more  widely  by  physicians 
and  nurses  to  alleviate  suffering,  and  in  helping 
the  weak  and  sensitive. 

There  are  at  times  difficult  subjects  that  the  oper- 
ator is  called  upon  to  hypnotize.  How  can  he  ac- 
complish his  task?  Have  the  subject  lie  down  on  a 
bed,  a  couch,  or  a  reclining  chair.  Ask  him  to  close 
his  eyes  and  think  about  sleep  very  definitely.  Fol- 
low this  with  the  suggestion  of  regular  breathing. 
Give  the  following  or  similar  suggestions :  "You 
will  in  a  few  moments  become  sleepy,  you  will 
breathe  with  me,  you  are  getting  drowsy,  a  quiet 
restful  feeling  is  coming  over  the  whole  body,  there 
is  a  sleepy  feeling  coming  over  the  whole  body,  your 
eyelids  feel  very  heavy,  darkness  seems  to  be  coming 
over  you  like  a  garment,  you  are  breathing  deeply 
and  heavily,  you  seem  to  feel  as  though  you  are 
sinking  down,  there  is  a  hazy  and  misty  look  before 
the  mind,  you  hear  no  sound  but  my  voice,  a  heavy 
feeling  is  coming  over  the  whole  body,  nothing  will 
disturb  you,  you  are  going  down  into  a  deep,  rest- 
ful sleep,  sleep,  sleep,  sound  asleep.  I  shall  now 
count  thirty  slowly,  and  when  I  say  thirty  you  will 


296  SUGGESTION 

be  in  a  deep  sleep."    Repeat  these  suggestions  sev- 
eral times  slowly. 

It  may  be  best  for  you  to  sit  at  the  patient's  head 
and  passing  the  hands  from  the  centre  of  the  fore- 
head towards  each  side  over  the  eyes  and  temples. 
Do  this  regularly  and  slowly  whilst  you  are  making 
the  suggestions.  Sprinkle  a  little  alcohol  or  a  few 
drops  of  chloroform  or  chloroform  liniment  on  a 
clean  handkerchief  and  let  him  inhale  it  and  suggest 
that  when  he  inhales  the  chloroform  that  he  will  be- 
come perfectly  unconscious  to  all  outer  circum- 
stances and  will  hear  nothing  but  your  voice.  Sug- 
gest that  he  will  breathe  regularly  but  heavily, 
that  he  cannot  resist  its  effects,  that  he  will  go  into 
a  very  profound  sleep,  that  it  will  have  an  excellent 
effect  on  his  system,  that  he  will  not  get  sick  at  his 
stomach,  and  that  he  will  awaken  feeling  refreshed 
and  feeling  as  though  he  had  slept  a  long  time." 
Repeat  these  or  similar  instructions  until  he  becomes 
unconscious. 

Some  of  the  inhalations  of  alcohol  or  some  other 
pungent  but  not  unpleasant  odor  can  be  given  on 
a  handkerchief  before  suggesting  sleep.  You  can 
call  the  inhalations  a  special  form  of  anaesthetic  or 
chloroform.  Suggest  that  the  patient  will  not  feel 
sick,  but  will  become  very  sleepy,  and  that  he  will 
go  into  a  profound  sleep  very  quickly.  Tell  him 
to  think  about  going  to  sleep.  Difficult  cases  can 
be  controlled  with  these  and  other  expedients, 
and  most  remarkable  results  can  be  secured  to  such 


EXCEPTIONAL  CASES  297 

cases  if  they  are  in  need  of  suggestions  for  any  ab- 
normal or  adverse  conditions. 

Suggestion  can  be  used  most  efficiently  in  ward- 
ing off  any  serious  after-effects  of  operations,  for 
averting  pain,  healing  wounds,  and  preventing  any 
injury  to  the  constitution.  If  proper  suggestions  are 
given  with  an  anaesthetic  drug  or  preparation,  the 
reaction  from  the  drug  will  be  so  much  less  than 
with  the  drug  alone.  The  power  of  suggestion  and  its 
ase  means  the  alleviation  of  much  pain  and  suffer- 
ing and  the  saving  of  many  lives  from  the  results 
of  a  surgical  shock  and  operation. 


298  SUGGESTION 


CHAPTER  XIV. 

How  To  Use  Suggestion  on  Adults. 

The  experiences  of  life  and  a  spirit  of  suspicion, 
with  a  certain  amount  of  ignorance,  make  adults  less 
amenable  to  suggestion  than  children.  Doubt  is  a 
jailer  who  often  closes  and  locks  the  mind  against 
the  incoming  of  friendly  suggestions  to  help  and 
deliver.  Honest  doubt  can  be  convinced  and  per- 
suaded, but  doubt,  the  child  of  ignorance  and  super- 
stition, keeps  the  soul  in  darkness  and  the  life  from 
receiving  abundant  blessings.  A  child  believes,  an 
adult  hesitates,  questions,  and  often  spurns  neces- 
sary help  that  is  offered.  When  one  comes  to  the 
place  in  life  where  he  really  wants  physical  and  men- 
tal assistance  and  will  follow  an  intelligent  and  a 
sympathetic  guide,  no  one  can  calculate  the  help 
that  can  be  brought  in  the  time  of  need.  Every 
good  and  helpful  impulse  that  can  be  stirred  in  the 
human  soul,  and  be  led  to  find  its  expression  in  a 
noble  thought  or  act,  will  put  fibre  into  the  charac- 
ter. He  who  yields  to  imitation,  morbid  thoughts, 
and  wrong  emotions,  will  so  affect  the  cells  and  tis- 
sues of  the  body  that  disease,  doubt,  and  wrong- 
thinking  will  result.  A  physical  change  of  these 
conditions  will  follow  a  mental  change.      If  adults 


ON  ADULTS  299 

could  all  be  taught  the  lesson  that  love  is  the  great- 
est power  in  the  world,  and  that  if  one  is  to  be 
happy  and  well  he  must  saturate  his  whole  nature 
with  it,  and  with  good  feelings  and  noble  deeds.  No 
one  who  is  well  has  ever  been  made  sick  by  thinking 
good  thoughts,  performing  noble  deeds,  and  loving 
sincerely  his  fellowmen,  and  no  one  who  is  sick  has 
ever  been  made  worse  by  yielding  to  generous  im- 
pulses and  loving. 

Love,  faith,  cheerfulness,  are  true  therapeutic 
agencies,  and  if  all  adults  were  to  manifest  these 
things  in  their  lives  this  world  would  soon  become 
a  paradise. 

It  is  a  good  thing  to  give  the  rationale  of  sugges- 
tion to  a  thoughtful  person  whom  you  desire  to  help, 
for  in  this  way  you  can  usually  show  him  the  reason- 
ableness of  what  you  desire  to  do.  Show  him  that 
the  mind  ought  to  be  dominant  over  the  body  and 
that  it  can  control  a  diseased  condition.  It  is  help- 
ful to  explain  the  law  of  faith  and  its  certain  action 
in  the  relief  of  ailments.  After  all  this  is  done,  the 
suggestions  ought  to  be  put  as  plainly  as  possible,  in 
the  clearest  and  simplest  language.  They  ought  to 
be  repeated  again  and  again,  so  that  the  memory  of 
the  suggestions  made  may  aid  in  impressing  the 
ideas  upon  the  subconscious  mind.  The  adult  ought 
to  be  shown  that  a  good  way  to  prevent  sickness 
and  disease  is  to  keep  the  subconscious  mind  under 
the  power  of  healthful  and  wholesome  thoughts  and 
suggestions. 


300  SUGGESTION 

(a)  In  Sickness. 

This  state  or  condition  produces  willingness  on  the 
part  of  the  subject  to  accept  suggestions  in  lar- 
vated,  or  in  any  form,  if  there  is  hope  of  recovery. 
Hundreds  of  people  will  take  all  kinds  of  nauseous 
drugs  and  preparations,  hoping  to  have  their  ail- 
ments removed  and  their  health  restored.  The 
methods  which  I  advocate  are  the  natural  as  com- 
pared with  the  artificial,  the  easily  and  normally  ap- 
plied as  compared  with  the  experimental  methods 
for  the  cure  of  disease.  But  we  must  not  forget 
that  larvated  suggestion  excites  hope  and  is  a  won- 
derful power  to  the  subconscious  minds  of  many  be- 
cause of  their  abnormal  conditions.  There  is  a 
threefold  effect  of  medicines  on  the  human  body, 
and  there  is  nothing  else  that  they  can  do.  They 
may  have  a  stimulating,  a  sedative,  or  a  purgative 
effect.  There  may  be  temporary  results  from  either 
or  all  of  them,  but  there  is  always  certain  conse- 
quences that  we  ought  carefully  to  consider.  In 
stimulation  and  sedation,  we  ought  to  know  that 
the  law  of  reaction  applies,  namely,  that  action  and 
reaction  are  opposite  and  equal. 

Purgation  is  produced  by  the  cells  of  the  body 
trying  to  get  rid  of  the  nasty  bitter  medicine,  and 
they  do  so  in  that  way.  There  is  always  more  or  less 
of  experimentation  in  the  use  of  drugs,  as  they  do 
not  become  a  necessary  part  of  the  body  and  do  not 
bring  to  it  continued  strength.  It  is  an  experiment 
on  the  part  of  the  doctor  whenever  he  gives  a  dose 


IN  SICKNESS  301 

of  medicine,  as  he  cannot  tell  just  what  the  definite 
result  will  be.  The  dose  on  two  different  persons 
will  not  have  the  same  effect  and  produce  the  same 
results,  or  the  same  dose  at  different  times  will  not 
have  the  same  effect  on  the  same  person.  Doctors 
know  too  well  that  this  is  true,  and  many  of  them 
are  turning  to  the  observance  of  the  laws  of  nature 
as  their  real  hope  for  their  patients,  and  they  are 
using  fewer  drugs.  Nothing  should  enter  the  human 
body  except  for  nourishment,  and  life-producing 
substances,  such  as  food,  air,  and  water.  Larvated 
suggestion  has  been  and  will  be  used  by  doctors. 
(The  subconscious  mind  acting  through  the  sympa- 
thetic nervous  system,  which  is  the  vegetative  sys- 
tem of  the  human  body,  really  effects  the  cure.)  The 
medicine  does  not  cure,  but  the  vital  forces  of  the 
body,  which  are  under  the  direct  control  of  the  sub- 
conscious mind,  cures  the  abnormal  and  diseased 
condition.  There  are  men  who  claim  to  cure  disease 
by  magnetism.  That  is  tactile  suggestion,  and  is 
often  very  effective.  There  is  doubtless  an  impar- 
tation  of  impulses,  and  possibly  something  of  vital- 
ity by  this  method,  but  the  real  cause  of  the  cure  is 
found  in  the  operation  of  the  subconscious  mind. 
Under  another  head  is  discussed  the  subject  of  men- 
tal power  in  the  operator,  in  the  form  of  will  and 
attraction.  In  magnetic  treatment,  the  sensory 
nerves  respond  to  the  touch,  and  motor  impulses 
under  the  control  of  the  subconscious  mind  causes 
the  blood  to  decrease  or  increase  as  the  case  may 


302  SUGGESTION 

require,  and  a  cure  is  effected.  Mechanical  manipu- 
lation, in  the  form  of  stimulation  or  inhibition,  may 
produce  the  same  effect  in  increasing  or  decreasing 
the  blood  supply  to  any  part  of  the  body.  This  is  a 
recognized  principle  in  the  best  physiologies. 
Hence,  when  we  say  that  the  subconscious  mind  con- 
trols the  bodily  functions,  we  mean  through  the  nerv- 
ous systems  of  the  body.  I  concede  that  certain 
medicines  may  produce  depressing  or  exciting 
effects  on  the  nerves  and  certain  results  may  follow, 
but  it  is  not  a  matter  of  certainty  as  to  the  same 
effects  in  two  or  more  consecutive  trials,  on  the 
same  or  different  persons.  So  that  the  use  of  drugs 
is  a  matter  of  experiment,  rather  than  something 
upon  which  definite  reliance  can  be  placed.  We 
must  also  remember  that  in  treating  a  human  body 
we  are  treating  a  living  organism  that  is  so  consti- 
tuted that  it  responds  to  certain  influences.  Dr.  Wm. 
Osier,  in  an  article  published  in  the  Encyclopedia 
Americana,  says :  "The  psychical  method  has  always 
played  an  important,  though  largely  unrecognized, 
part  in  therapeutics.  It  is  from  faith,  which  buoys 
up  the  spirits,  sets  the  blood  flowing  more  freely, 
and  the  nerves  playing  their  part  without  disturb- 
ance that  a  large  part  of  the  cure  arises.  Despond- 
ency or  lack  of  faith  will  often  sink  the  stoutest  con- 
stitution almost  to  death's  door.  Faith  will  enable 
a  spoonful  of  water  or  a  bread-pill  to  do  almost  mir- 
acles of  healing  when  the  best  medicines  have  been 
given  up  in  despair.    The  basis  of  the  entire  profes- 


IN  SICKNESS  303 

sion  of  medicine  is  faith  in  the  doctor,  his  drugs, 
and  his  methods." 

Anger  raises  the  temperature  of  the  body,  quickens 

the  circulation,  produces  palpitation  of  the  heart, 
and  a  general  unbalancing  of  the  system.  The  blood 
rushes  to  the  head,  the  face  becomes  very  red,  the 
blood  then  descends,  the  feet  become  hot  and 
the  face  white,  the  nervous  energy  is  expelled,  and 
the  person  becomes  exhausted.  Many  have  expired 
in  fits  of  anger.  The  lesser  forms  of  hatred  com- 
monly result  in  the  physical  nature  in  headache, 
dyspepsia,  and  other  adverse  conditions. 

Disgust  often  expresses  itself,  in  what  is  known 
to  the  materialist  as  a  cold,  especially  cold  in  the 
head.  An  habitual  attitude  of  disgust  is  often 
found  to  be  the  underlying  cause  of  chronic  nasal 
catarrh. 

Fear,  in  its  many  aspects,  is  the  producer  of  more 
sickness  than  any  other  state  of  mind.  In  fact,  it 
might  be  said  to  be  a  great  cause  of  disease  in  the 
body,  as  nearly  every  wrong  mental  state  is  a  form 
of  love  says,  "Fear  not."  Disobedience  of  that  law 
always  entails  suffering.  The  Scriptures  say,  "Fear 
hath  torment." 

Jealousy  and  condemnation,  in  various  forms  and 
degrees,  are  prolific  producers  of  "rheumatism"  and 
its  kind. 


304  SUGGESTION 

Distrust,  faithlessness,  anger,  and  worry,  are 
known  to  produce  cancer. 

Gloom  benumbs  the  will,  bows  the  head,  retards 
the  circulation,  whilst  the  forces  of  the  body,  other- 
wise helpful,  weaken  the  whole  body  and  make  it 
subject  to  degeneration  and  morbid  changes. 

(h)  In  Health. 

(if  it  is  possible  to  restore  the  health  by  sugges- 
tion, it  is  possible  to  maintain  it  in  the  same  way./ 
Some  persons  have  been  utilizing  suggestion  for 
many  purposes,  among  which  have  been  the  main- 
tenance of  a  good  physical  condition.  They  do  not 
know  why  or  how  they  have  secured  such  remarka- 
ble results,  but  they  realize  them  in  self-control 
and  health.  The  reason  may  be  found  in  the  power 
of  the  subconscious  mind  utilizing  the  suggestion 
of  the  conscious  mind.  The  conscious  mind  exer- 
cises volition,  and  thus  directs  intelligently  human 
energy.  The  subconscious  mind  is  the  storehouse 
of  this  energy  and  the  repository  of  habits  and  auto- 
matic actions.  The  possibility  of  thought  transfer- 
ence and  other  peculiar  and  marvellous  capabilities, 
which  seem  to  be  somehow  related  to  the  Infinite, 
are  also  found  in  potency  in  this  subconscious  power. 
This  mind  also  is  amenable  to  suggestion,  receives 
the  same,  and  acts  on  it  without  any  process  of  reas- 
oning. The  conscious  mind  may  even  doubt  the 
suggestion  as  being  true,  but  if  it  is  lodged  in  the 
subconscious  mind,  certain  remarkable  effects  may 
be  secured. 


IN  HEALTH  305 

For  instance,  the  Christian  scientist  says  there  is 
no  matter,  no  sickness,  no  disease.  The  conscious 
mind  has  always  believed  that  these  things  did  exist. 
But  by  repeated  suggestion  the  subconscious  mind 
receives  the  impression  of  power,  and  if  the  person 
has  been  sick,  he  will  commence  to  recover  and  be 
brought  into  a  condition  of  health.  The  cure  has 
been  wrought  through  the  subconscious  mind  ac- 
cepting the  suggestion,  and,  the  vital  functions  being 
influenced  by  it,  new  nerve  activity  results  in  a  better 
blood  circulation  and  increased  vitality.  This  pro- 
duces a  renewed  consciousness  of  a  healthful  feel- 
ing and  buoyancy.  It  was  not  a  denial  of  matter, 
sickness,  disease,  that  did  it,  but  a  suggestion  which 
looked  to  the  possibility  of  health.  Direct  sugges- 
tions for  health  would  have  accomplished  the  same 
result.  The  manipulations  of  the  magnetic  healer 
could  have  done  the  same  thing.  The  prayers  of 
the  faith-healer  and  the  hypnotic  power  of  Dowie 
and  the  manipulations  of  an  Indian  fakir,  and  num- 
erous other  things,  would  have  secured  the  same  re- 
sult in  some  people,  which  proves  that  it  is  not  the 
special  teachings  of  different  cults  of  persons,  but 
the  lodging  of  certain  suggestions  in  the  subcon- 
scious mind  which  secures  the  results.  These  sug- 
gestions are  received  and  acted  out  with  correspond- 
ing consequences. 

It  is  a  well  known  fact  by  psychologists  and  medi- 
cal experts  that  diseases  may  result  from  certain 
mental  conditions,  as  environment,  fear,  constitu- 
20 


3o6  SUGGESTION 

tional  bent,  impressions  from  other  minds,  misinter- 
pretated  sensations,  and  in  other  ways.  So  we  infer 
that  diseases  can  be  produced  by  mental  conditions, 
and  it  is  logical  also  to  infer  that  they  can  be  cured 
by  mental  conditions.^' 

(c)  In  Conquering  and  Controlling  One's  Self. 

Self-mastery  is  manhood  in  its  glory.  ''He  that 
is  slow  to  anger  is  better  than  the  mighty;  and  he 
that  ruleth  his  spirit  than  he  that  taketh  a  city." 
(Prov.  16:32.)  Many  people  are  like  fire-crackers, 
they  go  off  suddenly,  and  with  considerable  noise. 
He  who  can  stand  provocation,  and  at  times  perse- 
cution and  abuse,  and  not  say  anything,  has  great 
power.  Two  men  accidentally  locked  vehicles  on  a 
highway.  The  one  stuttered  and  swore  and  called 
the  other  man  all  kinds  of  names.  After  he  had  got- 
ten through,  the  other  man  said :  "You  have  told  me 
what  you  thought  of  me,  but  I  have  the  consolation 
of  knowing  that  you  do  not  know  what  I  think  of 
you."  The  other  man  was  so  ashamed  of  himself 
that  he  stepped  up  and  said:  "Give  me  your  hand 
and  forgive  me."  The  difference  between  them  was 
that  the  quick,  hot-headed  man  was  mastered  by  his 
temper,  whilst  the  other  man  was  master  of  him- 
self. 

The  twofold  form  of  mastery  or  control  is  that 
over  self  and  that  which  we  have  over  others.  The 
latter  seeks  the  conquering  of  all  desires  which  fet- 
ter the  soul  and  prevent  its  rightful  privileges  in 
freedom  and  happiness.     This  condition  of  mastery 


SELF-CONTROL  307 

leads  to  the  subordination  of  the  desires  and  the  in- 
ternal kingdom  of  self.  He  that  is  trained  to  obe- 
dience will  assert  himself  powerfully  when  anything 
of  great  importance  is  to  be  done,  or  any  great 
forces  are  to  be  mastered.  True  control  is  fairness, 
obedience,  and  power;  false  control  is  partiality, 
smallness,  overreaching.  Greater  is  "he  who  ruleth 
his  spirit  than  he  that  taketh  a  city." 

True  mastery  brings  illumination,  whilst  false 
control  brings  an  illusion. 

True  control  is  cooperation,  coordination  and 
equilibrium  of  life.  The  master  mind  is  a  mastered 
mind  and  a  mastering  mind.  It  is  independent,  it 
listens,  thinks,  and  acts  according  to  its  deepest  con- 
victions and  intuitions,  and  is  not  controlled  by 
other  minds.  The  ordinary  man  is  too  indolent  to 
do  his  own  thinking,  so  it  is  easier  for  him  to  follow 
another.  Such  persons  are  followers,  but  never 
leaders. 

The  control  or  mastery  of  man  is  seen  in  his  pow- 
er over  outer  circumstances  and  in  his  ability  to 
direct  them  for  his  best  interests.  He  values  the 
world  in  which  he  lives,  but  he  looks  at  it  from 
the  inner  position  of  power,  and  thus  exercises  his 
trained  ability  to  use  the  external  relations  in  order 
to  complete  his  life.  This  mastery  is  not  asceticism, 
although  that  method  may  at  times  be  utilized  in 
order  to  dominate  the  demands  of  the  fleshy  life. 

He  who  is  master  of  himself  can  use  all  things 
in  order  to  secure  unity  and  power  in  life.    On  the 


3o8  SUGGESTION 

subconscious  side  of  his  nature,  he  comes  into  union 
with  the  Infinite  and  Universal  mind,  in  which  and 
from  which  he  finds  his  deepest  inspirations  and 
he  can  do  all  things  through  that  supreme  power. 
Herein  is  found  the  secret  of  the  greatest  men,  who 
have  mastered  themselves  and  others. 

Poverty,  distress,  and  adverse  conditions  are 
largely  the  result  of  ignorance,  lack  of  self-assertion, 
and  fear.  The  large  field  of  latent  forces  in  one's  self 
have  not  been  touched  and  utilized,  and  so  that  ad- 
verse condition  prevails  and  grows.  Those  things 
have  produced  a  self-hypnotic  condition  that  pre- 
vents the  knowledge  and  the  possibilities  of  those 
latent  powers  being  developed.  To  admit  inability, 
is  to  make  a  choice  of  weakness.  To  admit  igno- 
rance, is  to  deny  one*s  self  of  knowledge.  He  who 
lives  in  dread  of  rabies  is  watching  for  a  mad  dog 
to  bite  him.  Job  utters  the  principle  that  I  am  try- 
ing to  enforce,  "That  which  I  feared  most  has  come 
upon  me."  If  men  only  knew  that  "as  a  man  think- 
eth  in  his  heart  so  he  is,"  they  would  be  better  off. 
The  heart-life,  self-life,  is  a  mighty  palace.  You 
can  get  into  the  cellar  if  you  want  to  and  stay  in 
the  darkness,  you  can  get  into  the  kitchen  and  pan- 
try with  dishes  and  cooking,  you  can  get  into  the 
parlor,  with  its  light  and  joy,  you  can  get  into  the 
art  gallery  with  its  exquisite  pictures  and  beauty, 
you  can  get  into  the  observatory,  with  its  matchless 
outlook  into  infinity  and  wonder,  or  you  can  go  into 
the  library,  with  its  knowledge  and  intelligence,  or 


SELF-CONTROL  309 

you  can  take  the  key  of  the  will  and  close  the  palace 

all  up  selfishly.  But  remember  that  the  key  may 
get  rusty  and  the  doors  may  refuse  to  open.  Then 
by  and  by,  you  will  find  that  the  lock  will  not  turn 
and  the  key  cannot  move  it,  and  darkness  will  set- 
tle down  on  the  palace  and  it  will  be  a  thing  of 
gloom  and  desertion. 

Dr.  Maurice  De  Fleury,  a  distinguished  French- 
man, has  just  written  a  short  scientific  treatise  in 
which  he  advances  the  interesting  theory  that  every 
time  we  become  angry  our  vitality  shrinks ;  and  the 
amount  of  shrinkage  is  in  proportion  to  the  violence 
of  the  outburst.  After  even  the  most  artfully  sup- 
pressed signs  of  bad  temper  he  claims  that  our  vital- 
ity becomes  smaller.  The  moral  of  this  doctor's 
treatise,  of  course,  is  that  we  should  never  allow  our- 
selves to  become  angry.  "Anger  is  a  certain  kind 
of  cerebral  excitement." 

Dr.  Fleury  says:  "The  hypersthenic  subject  is 
always  on  its  verge,  while  the  neurasthenic  becomes 
infuriated  only  by  a  sudden  bond  of  reaction  with- 
out. But  at  the  moment  when  they  are  let  loose, 
the  two  are  alike,  save  that  the  strong  man  is  a 
blinder  brute,  while  the  weak  one  is  somewhat  of 
an  actor  and  seems  to  aim  at  effect." 

Prof.  Lange,  of  the  University  of  Copenhagen, 
has  described  these  symptoms  with  precision  in  an 
important  little  book  which  has  been  the  starting 
point  and  confirmation  of  almost  all  recent  re- 
searches. 


3IO  SUGGESTION 

He  holds  that  all  the  emotions  are  due  to  disor- 
ders of  the  circulation  of  the  blood,  and  anger,  in 
particular,  to  a  very  intense  dilation  of  the  small 
arteries  of  the  brain. 

He  describes  redness  and  swelling  of  the  face  as 
a  constant  sign  of  anger,  forgetting  the  "white 
rage,"  which  is  so  frequent  and  impressive.  But 
he  has  brought  into  strong  relief  this  great  fact, 
that  anger  is  a  state  of  general  hyper-enervation. 

The  whole  organism,  the  muscles,  and  the  glands 
— for  anger  has  its  tears  and  foaming  at  the  mouth 
— manifestly  set  in  action  by  a  superabundance  of 
nervous  influx — begin  to  work  excess,  act  for  the 
sake  of  acting  in  disorder,  without  aim,  without  util- 
ity, solely  to  relieve  their  over-tension. 

"During  fits  of  anger,"  says  Dr.  Fleury,  "I  think 
it  may  be  said  that  all  the  muscles  of  the  organism 
are  in  a  state  of  extreme  contraction. 

"We  already  know  that  the  hand  of  an  impatient 
man,  in  a  state  of  mental  irritation,  presses  the  dyna- 
mometer with  unwonted  energy;  in  fact,  our  whole 
being  is  affected,  but  even  the  muscles  of  our  vege- 
tative life,  those  of  our  stomach  or  those  of  our 
arteries,  share  our  enervation  and  are  contracted. 

"The  muscular  fibres  surrounding  the  arteries,  in 
which  the  blood  circulates,  and  which  form  a  contin- 
uous sheath  for  them,  are  tightened  in  proportion 
to  our  anger.  The  calibre  of  the  arterial  tube  dimin- 
ishes, and  then  the  blood  being  under  a  very  high 
pressure,  the  water  part  is  driven  back  into  the  sur- 


SELF-CONTROL  311 

rounding  tissues  and  the  red  globules  diluted  in  a 
less  quantity  of  liquid,  appear  far  more  numerous  in 
the  field  of  the  microscope. 

"This  concentration  of  blood  and  rise  of  arterial 
pressure  I  consider  to  be  almost  always  present  in 
cases  of  anger.  I  have  found  them  whenever  I  have 
been  able  to  examine  a  patient. 

"Let  us  form  a  clear  idea  of  all  that  there  is  in  a 
fit  of  anger — ^vain  expenditure  of  effort,  aimless 
movements,  energy  spent  in  biting  the  fists,  stamp- 
ing the  ground,  kicking  against  doors  or  tearing  up 
a  book. 

"All  this  clearly  indicates  a  mental  condition  of  no 
high  order.  At  every  step  we  recognize  more  clearly 
that  the  problem  of  anger  is  a  problem  of  cerebral 
mechanics. 

"In  a  condition  of  nervous  excitement,  all  our  en- 
ergies are  at  a  high  pitch.  The  heart  sends  to  every 
part  of  the  body  concentrated  blood,  extraordinar- 
ally  rich  in  globules,  which  utilizes  itself  instantan- 
eously in  the  tissues ;  organic  combustion  takes  place 
with  almost  double  intensity,  and  our  sensibility  is 
considerably  excited.  We  are  much  alive.  Varia- 
tions of  temper  are  variations  of  energy,  of  muscu- 
lar tonics.  One  is  sad  or  timid  because  one  is  too 
weak;  angry,  because  one  is  too  strong. 

"Oscillations  of  the  mind  are  caused  by  the  ex- 
citement produced  by  the  contact  of  our  nerves  of 
sensibility.  There  is  a  short-circuit  of  our  nerves, 
in  other  words,  followed  by  a  rudely  increased  mus- 


312  SUGGESTION 

cular  energy,  the  heart's  power  of  concentration,  the 
blood  pressure  in  the  arteries,  and  the  activity  of 
nutrition. 

"The  more  we  reflect  on  it  the  more  we  are  led 
to  think  that  the  brain  of  man  is  at  all  points  to  be 
compared  to  a  delicate  and  complex  machine,  which 
is  fed  with  sensations,  and  gives  back  muscular  con- 
tractions, gestures,  and  written  or  spoken  language. 
Like  every  machine,  it  furnishes  what  is  called  in 
mechanics,  'work.' 

"Now  the  immense  work  performed  by  the  brain 
during  the  anger  crisis  is  so  much  work  lost,  worse 
than  lost,  harmful — apart  from  the  evil  it  may  do  to 
its  object,  who  may  be  killed  by  it — for  it  is  harmful 
to  the  person  who  gets  into  the  rage.  We  are  de- 
graded by  anger;  not  only  does  it  humiliate  us  in 
the  eyes  of  others,  but  it  leaves  us  dejected  and  ex- 
hausted. 

"I  acknowledge  that  this  idea  would  be  humiliat- 
ing if  it  were  not  scientifically  exact  and  practically 
very  moral.  In  fact,  it  teaches  us  that  in  order  to 
moderate  the  vain  and  lamentable  paroxysms  of 
anger,  or  to  bring  them  to  an  end,  we  must  replace 
them  by  regular,  moderate,  and  useful  work." 

We  ought  to  conquer  and  control  ourselves. 

(d)  In  Controlling  Others. 

Self-mastery  is  one  essential  element  in  control- 
ling others.  Some  persons  are  placed  in  certain 
positions,  or  they  are  trained  to  do  certain  work. 
They  are  put  into  positions  of  authority,  and  at  times 


CONTROLLING  OTHERS  313 

they  must  exert  control  over  those  under  them.  How 
to  do  this  is  sometimes  a  perplexing  question.  The 
teacher  and  scholar,  the  employer  and  the  employed, 
the  manager  and  the  men  under  him,  are  illustra- 
tions of  relationship  where  certain  control  must  be 
exercised. 

The  power  of  controlling  others  is  simply  an  en- 
larged application  of  the  power  of  controlling  one's 
self.  The  change  of  belief  from  inability,  the  trying 
of  what  one  knows,  results  in  proof  and  knowledge, 
which  become  the  basis  for  personal  mastery  and 
control  of  others.  The  willingness  to  have  others  do 
certain  things  has  an  effect  on  them.  Take  an  agent 
who  desires  to  sell  some  articles.  If  he  has  confi- 
dence in  himself  and  in  his  wares,  and  goes  with 
the  expectation  of  selling  and  wills  that  another  man 
shall  buy,  it  is  probable  that  he  will  not  be  disap- 
pointed. Such  a  condition  makes  the  merchant  want 
the  goods,  and  sometimes  under  such  conditions, 
he  may  buy  more  than  he  needs.  This  is  true  in 
other  positions  of  life.  A  knowledge  of  yourself  and 
an  application  of  that  knowledge  with  a  develop- 
ment of  the  latent  powers  in  one's  nature  will  make 
one  masterful. 

The  will  is  a  very  essential  force  in  the  human 
mind,  and  with  proper  suggestions  it  can  exert  a 
marvelous  power  over  one's  self  and  over  others. 
Bashfulness,  bad  habits,  lack  of  confidence  can  be 
cured  and  ability  to  do  what  one  wants  to  do  can  be 
developed. 


314  SUGGESTION 

The  lack  of  self-assertion  has  caused  many  intel- 
lectual men  to  fail  in  what  they  undertook,  whilst  its 
utilization  has  caused  many  men  of  mediocre  ability 
to  succeed.  This  lack  is  one  of  conscious  thought 
on  the  part  of  man,  and  the  dormant  power  has  not 
been  aroused  so  that  such  a  person  goes  through  life 
making  very  little  if  any  impression  on  men  and 
finally  dying  disappointed.  The  epitaph  ought  to 
be,  "Died  from  disappointment,  because  he  lacked 
the  power  to  carry  out  his  thought  and  knowledge." 
No  judge  is  so  severe  in  his  sentence  as  our  judg- 
ment upon  ourselves,  and  this  self-condemnation 
closes  up  the  manifestation  of  our  latent  and  best 
powers,  in  which  and  through  which  our  life  force 
could  be  utilized  in  self  and  other  control,  and  thus 
make  our  influence  felt  for  good  and  to  a  far-reach- 
ing extent. 

There  have  been  epochal  men  in  the  world,  and 
their  power  over  their  fellowmen  has  been  phenom- 
enal. How  did  they  control  their  fellows  and 
make  themselves  leaders?  Many  names  could  be 
mentioned,  but  we  shall  content  ourselves  with  a  few 
of  them.  Alexander,  Caesar,  Napoleon,  and  Grant 
among  the  generals;  Garibaldi,  Bismarck,  Bright, 
and  Gladstone  among  the  statesmen;  Victor  Hugo, 
Dickens,  Scott,  and  Thackerey  among  novelists; 
Hume,  Gibbon,  Macauley,  and  Green  among  histor- 
ians; Demosthenes,  Cicero,  Patrick  Henry,  and 
Webster  among  orators;  Savonarola,  Whitefield, 
Spurgeon,  and  Beecher  among  preachers,  and  hosts 


CONTROLLING  OTHERS  315 

of  others  from  many  walks  of  life.  What  was  their 
power?  How  did  they  exert  such  a  marvellous  in- 
fluence? How  did  they  control  other  men  so  that 
they  have  been  honored  and  at  times  almost  wor- 
shipped? Is  the  secret  not  found  in  the  fact  that 
they  made  their  suggestions  in  such  a  manner,  and 
put  their  thoughts  in  such  a  form,  as  to  catch  and 
hold  the  attention  of  the  people?  Others  have  made 
many  of  the  same  suggestions,  but  somehow  they 
did  not  grip  the  people  and  hold  them. 

This  simple  but  effective  principle  can  be  easily 
tested  by  listening  to  different  speakers.  Some  of 
them  make  their  thoughts  stick,  whilst  others,  and 
some  of  them  far  better  speakers  only  have  a  pass- 
ing influence  on  the  listeners.  The  secret  is  largely 
due  to  the  manner  in  making  the  suggestion.  There 
is  an  influence  and  power  which  go  with  sugges- 
tions, but  the  man  who  knows  how  to  make  effective 
his  suggestions  wins  the  day. 

He  who  has  good  thoughts  and  states  them,  having 
a  conviction  of  their  truth,  will  produce  an  abiding 
effect  on  the  hearers. 

We  sometimes  talk  about  the  magnetism  of  a 
speaker,  whereas  it  is  largely  the  magnetism  of  his 
suggestions  and  his  self-controlled  personality. 

There  is  an  individuality  that  weighs  with  some 
people,  and  to  a  certain  extent  with  all  persons,  but 
a  man  may  have  that  and  yet  not  be  able  to  hold  the 
people  and  compel  them  to  hear  him. 

Beecher,  in  Manchester  and  Liverpool,  mastered 


3i6  SUGGESTION 

mobs  and  made  them  glad  to  hear  what  he  had  to 
say.  The  manner,  the  substance,  and  the  method  of 
making  suggestions,  all  go  to  make  the  power  of  ah 
effective  leader  of  the  people. 

(e)  In  Counteracting  the  Influence  of  Others. 

The  present  status  of  civilization,  as  to  conditions 
and  environment,  is  such  that  pervasive  influences 
have  a  modifying  effect  on  one's  Hfe.  These  influ- 
ences are  not  very  well  understood.  One's  individ- 
uality is  the  assertion  and  manifestation  of  one's 
own  independence.  That  depends  on  one's  knowl- 
edge which  will  enable  him  to  repel  those  things  not 
wanted  and  to  attract  those  things  desired. 

The  former  condition  may  be  called  motive,  the 
latter  emotive.  To  a  certain  degree  the  former  is 
positive,  the  latter  negative.  These  qualities  have 
been  very  evident  in  the  lives  of  all  successful  men. 
The  emotive  condition  has  been  predominate  in  the 
life  of  the  man  who  has  failed,  and  who  is  sick  and 
discouraged.  He  has  been  generally  negative  and 
attracted  only  adverse  things.  The  one  great  essen- 
tial necessity  to  counteract  the  influence  of  others 
is  to  be  master  of  one's  self.  The  basis  of  this 
power  is  self-knowledge  and  a  knowledge  of 
human  nature.  There  are  certain  laws  which 
one  must  observe  if  he  would  find  out  what  he 
desires  to  know.  He  must,  for  instance,  be  at- 
tractive if  he  would  attract  others  and  open  his  na- 
ture if  he  is  desirous  to  have  others  open  theirs. 


COUNTERACTING  INFLUENCES      317 

The  ability  to  open  one's  nature  implies  also  the 
ability  to  close  it.  To  be  perfectly  passive  implies 
also  the  ability  to  concentrate  the  mind  on  one  thing, 
listening  to  one  sound,  seeing  one  object,  and  thus 
making  way  for  one's  victory  over  everything  wrong 
in  himself  or  in  others.  He  can  permit  another  to 
enter  his  life  or  he  can  close  his  life  utterly  against 
anyone  entering.  This  attitude  may  not  resist,  but 
gives  the  greatest  possibility  of  resisting  the  en- 
croachments of  man  or  thoughts  into  the  secret 
sanctum  of  one's  mind.  A  positive  condition  is 
found  in  the  exercise  of  the  will  to  accomplish  our 
purposes,  or  to  prevent  others  making  a  tool  of  us 
for  their  own  ends.  The  positive  condition  predi- 
cates self-knowledge  and  the  knowledge  of  human 
nature  and  things  in  general. 

One  can  master  adverse  conditions  providing 
there  is  knowledge,  belief,  and  will,  and  these  are 
the  threefold  conditions  of  self-mastery  and  are 
necessary  in  counteracting  the  influence  of  others. 

Many  people  are  not  aware  of  the  latent  powers 
within  them. 

There  is  a  requirement  that  is  imperative  in  one 
who  desires  to  be  master  of  himself  and  counteract 
the  influence  of  others,  and  that  is  health.  Such  a 
condition  makes  one  powerful  to  resist  adverse  sug- 
gestions and  influences,  and  has  also  an  attracting 
power  that  will  bring  happiness,  comfort,  prosperity, 
position,  and  what  one  needs.  We  speak  of  lucky 
and  fortunate  people,  but  a  large  part  of  their  seem- 


3i8  SUGGESTION 

ing  success  is  found  in  the  superabundant  vitality 
and  mental  vigor  that  come  from  health. 

The  lucky  star,  the  seventh  son  or  daughter,  are 
all  popular  sayings  indicating  prosperity  and  ability 
to  turn  seemingly  adverse  circumstances  into  favor- 
able. There  are  effects  of  prosperity  and  power  in 
the  lives  of  all  who  comply  with  the  laws  of  this 
universe.  Every  one  who  has  a  well-balanced  mind 
and  normal  physical  health  can  lay  hold  of  the  great 
forces  about  and  in  himself  and  secure  what  he 
needs.  Ignorance  as  to  how  to  use  the  latent  power, 
and  unbelief  in  one's  ability  to  get  what  is  desirable 
and  necessary,  are  the  two  negative  forces  that  hin- 
der progress  and  prosperity.  Instead  of  believing  in 
our  weakness  we  ought  to  believe  in  our  power,  and 
thus  remove  the  spirit  of  fear,  condemnation,  and 
questioning.  Every  man  and  woman  have  the  same 
faculties  and  physical  forces — some  may  be  greater 
than  others — ^but  knowing  how  to  use  them,  and 
having  abundant  vitality  to  keep  them  in  activity, 
corresponding  progress  and  prosperity  will  come  to 
them.  Not  equally  so,  for  there  are  differences  in 
the  application  of  knowledge  and  larger  results  may 
come  to  some  than  to  others,  but  all  will  have  what 
is  needed  and  desirable.  We  have  found  that  three 
or  four  things  are  necessary  for  progress  and  pros 
perity : 

1.  Knowledge. 

2.  Health. 

3.  Self-mastery. 


COUNTERACTING  INFLUENCES     319 

4.  The  intelligent  use  of  faculties  and  powers  in 
securing  what  is  necessary  for  us  to  have. 

There  is  a  fifth  thing  which  is  the  crowning  force 
in  life,  namely,  thought.  The  Proverbialist  says, 
"As  a  man  thinketh  in  his  heart  so  is  he."  What  we 
love  determines  our  character,  what  we  think  deter- 
mines our  power,  and  what  we  believe  controls  our 
actions.  Let  a  man  believe  that  he  will  be  poor  all 
his  life,  that  he  will  have  to  grind  at  the  mill  all  his 
days  and  plod  at  his  work,  that  he  will  always  have 
a  hard  time  and  that  Providence  intends  that  't 
should  be  so,  arid  he  will  be  as  he  believes,  thinks, 
and  decides  for  himself.  Let  him  believe,  think,  and 
decide  for  the  opposite  course  in  life  and  results, 
and  he  will  probably  see  a  change  in  a  short  time 
for  the  better.  He  who  always  looks  down,  like 
the  man  with  the  muck-rake  in  "Pilgrim's  Prog- 
ress," will  never  see  the  angel  with  the  crown  above 
him.  The  knowledge  of  what  we  are,  and  what  we 
can  do,  the  desire  and  will  to  be  master  of  ourselves, 
the  utilization  of  our  latent  powers,  will  give  to  us 
the  strength  to  counteract  adverse  influences  from 
others  and  make  us  kingly  in  our  own  strength  and 
influence,  progressive  in  development,  and  prosper- 
ous in  all  needed  things. 

"Knowledge  is  power,"  but  to  know  how  and 
when  to  use  the  knowledge  which  secures  power  to 
one's  self,  how  to  bring  marvellous  results  to  pass, 
and  protect  one  against  many  things  that  would  hurt 
and  not  help,  retard  and  not  advance,  is  a  science  of 


320  SUGGESTION 

great  worth.  This  is  necessary  to  an  orator,  teach- 
er, preacher,  or  agent,  or  in  dealing  with  individ- 
uals. The  agreement  between  two  means  the  ac- 
complishment of  a  purpose.  That  is  true  in  relig- 
ion, in  politics,  in  ethics,  in  business,  in  the  world. 
Christ  puts  the  law  tersely  and  truthfully  when  he 
says :  "That  if  two  of  you  shall  agree  on  earth  as 
touching  anything  that  they  shall  ask,  it  shall  be 
done  for  them  of  My  Father  which  is  in  heaven." 
Herein  is  the  reason  and  method  of  securing  certain 
results.  We  speak  of  the  mastery  of  Napoleon, 
Hannibal,  Grant,  Webster,  Clay, '  and  how  they 
brought  about  an  agreement  between  the  people  and 
themselves.  Mastery  of  a  situation,  of  self,  makes 
one  a  master  of  others.  This  was  wonderfully  true 
of  Christ.  Knowing  one's  self,  controlling  and  di- 
recting one's  self,  is  a  great  step  in  mastering  oth- 
ers. This  is»  called  magnetism,  but  it  is  the  mag- 
netism of  knowledge  and  self-control. 

The  ability  to  do  a  thing  because  we  know  what 
to  do,  and  how  to  do  it,  makes  one  a  power  and 
gives  him  power.  "To  him  that  believeth  all  things 
are  possible."  Napoleon  never  would  have  the 
name,  which  he  has  in  history,  had  he  not  believed 
in  the  possibility  of  crossing  the  Alps,  conquering 
Europe,  and  handling  men.  Columbus  never  would 
have  launched  out  on  an  unknown  and  untried  sea 
if  he  had  not  believed  that  there  were  other  conti- 
nents and  that  he  could  discover  them.  Cyrus  W. 
Field  would  never  have  urged   his   countrymen   to 


COUNTERACTING  INFLUENCES      321 

lay  the  Atlantic  Cable  if  he  had  not  believed  that  it 
was  possible  to  talk  long  distances.  The  laws  that 
were  used  were  just  as  true  when  this  world  was 
created  as  they  were  when  put  into  operation.  But 
it  took  one  to  believe  in  the  possibility  of  the  accom- 
plished fact.  So  of  Morse,  Edison,  Tesla,  and 
hundreds  of  others ;  they  had  not  only  faith,  but 
works  with  the  faith,  so  that  they  have  wrought 
wonders  in  the  world.  The  faith  to  believe  and  the 
will  to  do  are  necessary  conditions  of  success.  An 
ignorant  man  becomes  the  dupe  of  many  and  is 
eventually  left  stranded  on  the  shore  of  the  sea  of 
life. 

There  are  three  things  in  human  life  that  must  be 
cultivated  in  order  to  secure  victory  against  others 
who  would  control  and  use  us : 

1.  The  intellect  must  be  developed  and  informed. 

2.  The  affections  must  be  disciplined  and  guided. 

3.  The  will  must  be  trained  and  directed. 

Hence,  it  is  very  important  to  have  a  knowledge 
of  suggestion,  for  in  this  way  we  can  guard  our- 
selves and  prevent  undue  influence  from  others. 
This  ought  to  be  conscious  or  auto-suggestion. 
Whatever  may  be  the  occasion  in  which  we 
must  defend  ourselves  from  others — whether  in  an 
interveiw,  when  pressed  to  buy  something  not  need- 
ed or  when  asked  to  do  something  that  is  not  neces- 
sary or  questionable — we  must  not  yield  ourselves 
unconsciously  or  by  distinct  acts  of  the  will.  We 
must  watch  ourselves  and  the  one  who  solicits  or 
21 


322  SUGGESTION 

tempts.  We  must  master  and  control  ourselves. 
There  are  certain  exercises  which  have  been  pub- 
lished which  will  help  towards  self-discipline  and 
mastery.  For  instance,  keep  perfectly  quiet  for 
three  minutes.  Sit  still  for  the  same  length  of  time. 
Stand  quietly  for  two  minutes.  Look  intently  at  a 
certain  object  or  point  for  two  minutes.  These  are 
simple  exercises,  but  in  practicing  them  one  will  see 
how  Httle  power  one  has  over  one's  self  at  first.* 

Belief  leads  to  experiment,  experiment  to  proof 
of  the  truth  or  falsity  of  a  proposition,  and  thus  to 
knowledge,  which  is  power. 

Make  yourself  positive,  deny  weakness,  depend  on 
your  real  self  to  help,  and  deny  the  power  of  any 
one  over  you  and  see  the  wonderful  effect  in  your 
life.  Luck  needs  one  more  letter,  the  letter  "p"  be- 
fore it.  Fear  must  be  conquered  and  banished  in 
order  to  counteract  the  influence  of  others  and 
things.  Fear  of  hydrophobia,  ill-luck,  or  disease, 
will  prepare  the  way  for  these  things  to  come  to 
you.  A  positive,  fearless  attitude  will  ward  them 
off.  Job  says :  "That  which  I  feared  most  has  come 
upon  me."  Desire  the  noblest  and  best,  and  you 
will  get  it.  Fear,  and  you  will  get  the  dark  conse- 
quences. 

Desire  or  the  emotive  life  can  select  friends  or 
foes,  good  or  evil,  and  admit  just  what  one  wants, 
whilst  will  or  the  motive  power  can  repel  adverse 
suggestion,  and  close  up  the  mind  against  adverse 

*See  Haddock  on  "The  Will." 


COUNTERACTING  INFLUENCES     323 

associations  and  influences.  Fear,  which  belongs  to 
and  is  one  of  the  emotions,  can  open  the  door  into 
the  soul-life  and  admit  all  the  dark  associates  and 
consequences  which  follow  in  its  wake.  Desire,  can 
have  what  it  wants,  providing  it  follows  the  law  by 
which  it  is  governed.  It  is  unnatural  to  desire  evil 
and  its  consequences  for  one*s  real  and  best  life. 
The  principal  things  wished  for  are  wisdom,  power, 
freedom,  wealth,  health,  happiness,  etc. 

Take  freedom,  for  instance ;  every  one  wants  that 
and  he  does  not  want  to  be  a  slave.  That  leads  one  to 
desire  power  to  counteract  evil.  Despising  slavery, 
and  accepting  and  cultivating  the  good,  accom- 
plishes the  result.  A  magnetic  personality  does  not 
primarily  depend  on  clothes,  looks,  etc.,  but  upon  the 
use  of  an  educated  will,  backed  by  strong  vitality. 
The  will  is  the  power  that  uses  thought,  which  be- 
comes knowledge.  In  order  to  know  more,  you 
must  go  from  the  known  to  the  unknown,  and  thus 
prepare  yourself  to  counteract  what  you  know  of 
persons  and  things  that  are  hurtful. 

What  one  believes  controls  him — his  actions,  suc- 
cesses, failures,  etc.  To  believe  a  thing  is  to  accept 
it  as  true,  and  the  realization  of  its  truthfulness  is 
to  prove  it  true. 

Let  a  man  believe  that  he  was  born  to  be  unlucky 
and  he  will  act  out  that  thought  and  get  what  he  be- 
lieves. Believe  that  you  are  master  of  yourself  and 
your  surroundings,  and  see  how  easy  it  is  to  coun- 


324  SUGGESTION 

teract  the  influences  of  people  and  things  and  secure 
in  this  way  a  great  power. 

(/)  For  Physical  Results. 

It  is  a  generally  accepted  proposition  that  mind 
controls  the  body,  or  ought  to.  I  know  of  no  psy- 
chologist or  thoughtful  person  who  would  dissent 
from  this  statement.  If  this  is  true,  then  we  are 
justified  in  saying  physical  results  may  be  produced 
by  the  action  of  mind,  through  the  nervous  system, 
on  the  body.  For  instance,  nerve  activity  may  be 
increased,  the  circulation  of  the  blood  may  be  aug- 
mented or.  retarded,  the  body  may  be  compelled  to 
relax  when  on  a  tension,  etc.,  etc.  When  the  body 
is  master  and  the  mind  is  servant,  all  kinds  of  ail- 
ments, worries,  diseases,  and  adverse  conditions 
may  assert  themselves.  When  the  mind  is  master 
and  the  body  is  servant,  then  the  body  can  be  con- 
trolled, diseases  can  be  removed,  ailments  can  be 
cured,  and  marvellous  results  can  be  obtained. 

Many  methods  have  been  adopted  and  used  by 
which  people  desire  to  secure  perfection  of  health  to 
the  physical  organism.  Athletics  have  been  tried 
with  more  or  less  favorable  results ;  fasting  has  been 
tried  with  corresponding  benefits;  certain  kinds  of 
food  have  been  used  and  others  prohibited  with  ex- 
cellent physiological  consequences;  one  meal  a  day 
has  been  tested,  proven  beneficial  to  some  and  hurt- 
ful to  others;  abstinence  from  eating  breakfast  or 
lunch  or  the  evening  meal  has  found  advocates  to 
praise  that  plan,  but  these  are  all  only  temporary 


FOR  PHYSICAL  RESULTS  325 

aids,  helpful  in  some  cases,  but  not  bringing  the 
long-looked-for  results. 

An  advanced  position  taken  by  some  investigators 
is  found  in  the  fact  that  the  question  of  food  is  inci- 
dental to  physical  strength  and  health.  It  has  been 
found  that  strength  of  the  human  organism  is  not 
drawn  from  the  food  consumed,  but  that  the  work- 
power  of  the  body  is  renewed  in  sleep. 

Muscle-energy  and  thought-power  are  not 
changed  at  the  dining  table  but  in  the  bedroom ;  not 
when  eating  but  when  sleeping.  Food  is  essential 
to  a  plant  as  a  raw  material;  not  as  the  source  of 
life,  but  elements  to  be  built  into  the  body. 

1.  This  is  a  new  view,  and  is  correct  as  far  as  it 
goes. 

2.  It  overthrows  many  current  theories  of  the 
sources  of  life  and  strength  and  gives  another  fatal 
blow  to  the  materialistic  theory.  This  new  view 
proves  that  life-force  is  not  the  product  of  func- 
tional action  and  that  manual  and  brain-workers 
would  be  healthier,  stronger,  and  would  live  longer 
on  much  less  food.  Pushing  this  theory  back  a  lit- 
tle further,  we  come  to  the  conclusion  that  the  mind 
produces  the  body  and  not  the  body  the  mind ;  that 
thought  produces  the  brain  and  not  brain  the 
thought;  and  that  it  is  utterly  impossible  for  bread 
and  meat  to  become  mind  or  thought. 

There  is  another  revolutionary  conclusion  growing 
out  of  this  view  and  from  the  ultimate  conclusions 
of  this  theory.   It  is  this :  The  sick  are  more  liable  to 


326  SUGGESTION 

recover  rapidly  if  feeding  and  dosing  are  avoided 
and  nature  and  good  nursing  are  left  tc  have  the 
right  of  way.  How  can  we  explain  satisfactorily  and 
scientifically  these  facts  in  the  light  of  this  new 
view? 

The  brain  is  found  to  be  a  storage  battery  of  vital 
energy  or  power,  and  it  is  being  constantly  charged 
during  sleep  from  an  unknown  source  and  in  an  un- 
known manner.  The  stomach  and  the  vital  organs, 
like  the  heart  and  lungs,  are  run  by  the  brain-power, 
which  power  is  constantly  being  renewed  from  a 
great  unseen  fountain.  Hence  digestion,  heart- 
beats, and  lung-breathing  are  a  task  on  this  power 
and  not  a  source  of  it. 

One  man  will  eat  a  pound  of  meat,  a  quantity  of 
potatoes  and  other  foods,  and  do  a  certain  amount 
of  work ;  whilst  a  Japanese  soldier  will  eat  a  handful 
of  rice,  march  and  carry  a  heavy  load  the  whole 
day.  He  can  do  this  day  after  day  without  the  loss 
of  weight  or  strength.  Is  it  possible  that  the  vast 
amount  of  energy  he  shows  was  potentially  in  the 
handful  of  rice?  No,  it  is  not  in  the  food,  but  in 
the  power  back  of  the  food  which  makes  the 
food  auxiliary  in  keeping  tissue  elements  present  to 
renew  the  waste.  These  tissue  elements  are  needed 
for  the  body  and  should  be  built  into  it. 

The  recorded  cases  of  fasting,  where  persons  gain 
in  strength  steadily  day  by  day,  is  also  a  proof 
against  the  old  view  and  in  favor  of  the  new.  The 
old  view  is  a  circle  in  its  process  of  reasoning     It 


FOR  PHYSICAL  RESULTS  327 

has  been  said  that  the  heart,  brain,  liver,  kidneys, 
etc.,  are  operated  by  power  which  is  derived  from 
the  stomach,  and  that  the  stomach  is  operated  by  the 
power  which  is  generated  by  those  organs.  That 
is  an  easy  explanation,  but  it  is  not  true.  The  func- 
tional acts  of  the  viscera  do  not  generate  power  but 
they  absorb  and  use  it.  Power  is  stored  in  the  brain 
during  sleep,  and,  like  electricity  passing  over  trol- 
ley wires,  it  is  transmitted  through  the  nerves  to 
muscles  and  organs.  There  is  no  evidence  that  the 
energy  comes  from  our  food.  The  food  is  neces- 
sary to  keep  the  organism  in  repair,  but  the  power 
is  independent  of  the  food.  Food  is  necessary  to 
furnish  tissue-elements  but  not  for  power.  Every 
unnecessary  mouthful  of  food  will  require  energy 
to  digest  it,  and  make  more  work  for  the  power  to 
get  rid  of  it.  If  we  would  see  into  our  physical 
organism  and  note  the  waste  of  energy  in  caring 
for  or  in  an  effort  to  get  rid  of  unnecessary  food, 
we  would  be  appalled. 

Digested  and  assimilated  food  is  the  only  kind 
that  can  be  built  into  new  tissue.  Hence  when  you 
have  just  eaten  and  feel  stronger,  you  will  find  that 
the  feeling  comes  from  the  rally  of  the  vital  forces 
to  digest  the  food  and  prepare  it  for  new  tissues. 
The  brain  was  drawn  on  for  a  new  supply  of  its 
energy,  and  as  this  power  was  let  loose,  its  presence 
was  felt  throughout  the  body.  The  power  was  from 
the  brain  not  from  the  stomach. 

This  view  naturally  and  scientifically  accords  with 


328  SUGGESTION 

our  view  that  the  subconscious  mind  controls  the 
vital  and  organic  functions  and  processes  of  the 
body,  and  in  as  much  as  suggestion  is  the  supreme 
power  that  controls  that  mind  we  see  the  marvellous 
physical  results  which  we  may  secure  to  the  body 
by  suggestion. 

These  results  can  be  carried  to  any  part  of  the 
body  and  the  adverse  conditions  can  be  controlled 
and  corrected.  This  power  under  favorable  circum- 
stances can  keep  one  in  good,  healthy  condition. 

(g)  In  Extraordinary  Conditions. 

There  are  times  in  life  and  places  where  a  great 
crisis  may  be  averted  by  knowing  just  what  to  do 
and  what  suggestions  to  use  in  order  to  control 
the  conditions.  There  was  a  time  in  ex-President 
Garfield's  life  which  illustrates  exactly  what  I  mean. 
During  a  riotous  condition  w^hen  it  seemed  that  an 
awful  outbreak  of  a  mob  would  result  and  when  no 
one  could  know  the  terrible  devastation  that  would 
be  wrought,  he  arose  before  the  crowd  and  said, 
"God  reigns  and  the  government  at  Washington  still 
lives."  His  commanding  composure  secured  the 
attention  of  the  people,  and  his  suggestion  brought 
quietness  to  their  minds.  He  was  master  of  himself, 
and  under  these  extraordinary  conditions  he  was 
master  of  those  men. 

Several  years  ago.  Prof.  William  James,  of  Har- 
vard, declared,  in  a  magazine  article,  that  the  man 
who  prays  for  help  to  do  his  daily  work  will  so  com- 
pose his  own  mind  thereby  and  free  his  thought 


EXTRAORDINARY  CONDITIONS        329 

from  care  and  worry  that  he  will  actually  do  his 
work  better,  irrespective  of  any  supernatural  aid 
that  may  be  sent  in  anwser  to  his  petition.  Now 
another  scientist,  Dr,  Theodore  B.  Hyslop,  Super- 
intendent of  Bethlehem  Royal  Hospital,  in  London, 
comes  forward  with  the  declaration  that  prayer  is 
the  best  remedy  for  mental  distress  of  all  sorts. 
He  said  at  the  recent  annual  meeting  of  the  British 
Medical  Association :  "As  an  alienist  and  one  whose 
life  has  been  concerned  with  the  sufferings  of  the 
mind,  I  would  state  that  of  all  hygienic  measures  to 
counteract  disturbed  sleep,  depressed  spirits,  and  all 
the  miserable  sequels  of  a  distressed  mind,  I  would 
undoubtedly  give  the  first  place  to  the  simple  habit 
of  prayer.  Let  there  but  be  a  habit  of  nightly  com- 
munion, not  as  a  mendicant  or  repeater  of  words 
more  adapted  to  the  tongue  of  a  sage,  but  as  a  hum- 
ble individual  who  submerges  or  asserts  his  individ- 
uality as  an  integral  part  of  a  greater  whole.  Such 
a  habit  does  more  to  clean  the  spirit  and  strengthen 
the  soul  to  overcome  incidental  emotionalism  than 
any  other  therapeutic  agent  known  to  me. 

"Either  religious  intemperance  or  indifference," 
Dr.  Hyslop  thinks,  "is  hostile  to  mental  health,"  and 
he  says  that  one  should  "subscribe  as  best  he  may 
to  that  form  of  religious  belief,  so  far  as  he  can  find 
it  practically  embodied  or  effective,  which  believes 
in  the  larger  hope,  though  it  condemns  unreservedly 
the  demonstrable  superstition  and  sentimentality 
which  impede  its  progress." 


330  SUGGESTION 

The  Outlook  remarks  in  comment  on  this  new 
view  of  prayer. 

"Mediaeval  superstition  connecting  medical  art 
with  magic,  supposed  to  be  learned  from  evil  spirits, 
used  the  proverb,  'Ubi  duo  medici  tres  athei.' 
(Where  there  are  two  physicians  there  are  three 
atheists.)  In  some  quarters  this  stigma  is  not  yet 
entirely  effaced,  and  medical  men  are  perhaps  not 
fully  free  from  responsibility  for  whatever  of  it  lin- 
gers. 

"On  the  background  of  such  a  history.  Dr.  Hy- 
slop's  testimony  before  an  audience  of  specialists  is 
highly  significant  of  the  trend  of  scientific  thought 
away  from  materialistic  conceptions  of  mind  and  of 
religion. 

"Not  many  years  ago  Prof.  Tyndall's  challenge  to 
the  religious  world  to  try  a  prayer-test  on  a  selected 
number  of  hospital  patients  was  deemed  by  many, 
upon  its  being  declined,  to  have  refuted  the  claim  of 
a  healing  power  in  prayer.  As  a  physicist,  Tyndall 
was  on  this  subject  not  within  his  own  province,  as 
Hyslop,  a  psychologist,  is.  Religious  men,  to  be 
sure,  have  made  extravagant  claims,  and  scientific 
men  have  also  shot  beyond  the  mark.  But  Dr.  Hy- 
slop's  competence  to  speak  in  the  name  of  science  is 
unquestionable,  and  what  he  affirms  as  a  discovery 
of  medical  science  is  identical  with  the  immemorial 
faith  of  religion,  that  there  is  a  place  for  prayer  in 
the  very  nature  of  things.  Not  only  does  he  find 
this  place  to  be  foremost  among  restorative  agents. 


EXTRAORDINARY  CONDITIONS     331 

but  he  affirms  of  the  religious  enthusiasm,  which  the 
nature  of  prayer  is  to  feed  and  sustain,  that  it  em- 
bodies the  most  healthy  and  preservative  develop- 
ment of  our  social  forces.  Among  the  many  notable 
utterances  in  which  science  is  now  evincing  herself 
to  be  the  handmaid  of  religion  these,  the  most  re- 
cent, are  as  memorable  as  any." 

There  are  extraordinary  manifestations  of  the 
conscious  mind.  They  can  be  explained  by  the 
principle  that  the  mind  is  a  magnet  and  the  soul  of 
man  is  magnetic.  We  get  what  we  expect.  We 
see  what  we  look  for.  Every  thought  and  sensory 
impulse  and  image,  if  held  in  the  mind,  tend  to  ex- 
ternalize themselves.  This  is  the  law,  and  it  is  as 
definite  in  working  as  any  law,  unless  it  is  interfered 
with.  There  is  a  strategic  position  in  which  one  finds 
one's  self  when  a  decision  must  be  rendered  and 
action  must  be  carried  out  almost  immediately,  when 
the  conscious  mind  must  decide  on  a  definite  course 
without  any  hesitancy.  Reason  may  come  to  one's 
help,  memory  by  the  law  of  association  may  present 
something  similar  from  the  past,  but  just  what  to  do 
and  what  course  to  follow  is  not  clear.  Here  is 
where  the  subconscious  mind,  with  its  perfect  intui- 
tion and  spiritual  perception,  may  render  a  great  aid 
and  lead  one  to  act  wisely  and  without  regret. 

Maternal  Impressions  In  Utero. 

The  subject  of  maternal  impressions  and  power 
has  been  discussed  in  medical,  theological,  psycho- 


332   •  SUGGESTION 

logical,  and  general  literature.  My  purpose  in  re- 
ferring to  this  subject  is  to  suggest  the  possibility 
of  the  power  of  the  subconscious  mind  on  the  un- 
born child  and  to  give  some  suggestions  which  if 
carried  out  will  assist  parents  to  help  the  coming 
generation.  It  may  be  said  in  a  general  way  that  ma- 
ternal impressions  are  those  made  on  the  brain  and 
body  of  the  unborn  child  by  the  mental  conditions 
and  thoughts  of  the  mother.  This  statement  is  very 
wide  in  its  application  and  almost  infinite  in  its  con- 
sequences. The  mental  and  physical  well-being  of 
the  child,  and  the  great  influences  that  will  be  inaug- 
urated by  its  developing  life,  are  shaped  to  a  great 
extent  by  the  mother.  Success  or  failure  of  the 
child's  life,  the  tendencies  and  character  of  the  child, 
depend  more  largely  than  we  suspect  on  the  influ- 
ence of  the  mother's  mental  and  physical  condition. 
Parents  have  been  too  often  indifferent  as  to  the 
impressions  made  upon  the  young  unborn  life.  The 
importance  of  those  impressions  cannot  be  esti- 
mated. 

They  are  at  least  twofold,  physical  and  mental. 

Under  the  first  classificatton  would  come  birth- 
marks, physical  tendencies,  and  bodily  conditions. 
The  mental  side  embraces  such  factors  as  dullness, 
mental  tendencies,  temper,  melancholy,  etc.,  etc. 
The  physical  side  has  also  a  mental  factor,  and  the 
mental  impressions  have  a  physical  manifestation. 

The  subconscious  mind  of  the  mother  is  the  su- 
preme factor  in  imparting  certain  conditions  to  the 


MATERNAL  IMPRESSIONS  333 

life  of  the  child.  A  shock,  a  fright,  a  surprise,  an 
impression,  may  produce  a  birth-mark  through  the 
mind  upon  the  child  in  utero.  That  physical  condi- 
tion could  doubtless  be  changed  by  proper  mental 
effort,  for  it  was  produced  by  a  mental  impression. 
Sometimes  a  slight  shock  will  produce  serious  re- 
sults which  are  due  doubtless  to  the  thought  of  the 
mother  that  a  mark  or  serious  result  would  impress 
the  child.  By  worrying  and  dwelling  on  this  thought 
that  the  child  in  some  way  would  be  disfigured, 
that  result  follows.  Study  the  history  of  birth- 
marks or  disfigurements  and  our  statement  will  be 
confirmed.  Greater  shocks  and  surprises  to  the 
mother,  which  would  be  suspected  of  working 
a  condition  of  disfigurement,  have  been  overcome  by 
the  mother  hoping  and  believing  that  there  would 
be  no  serious  result  to  the  child.  In  no  person  is 
the  proof  so  apparent  of  the  influence  of  mind  on 
the  body  of  the  child  as  in  the  enciente  mother. 
Every  child  has  the  moral  right  to  be  well  and  nor- 
mally born,  and,  to  be  so,  its  physical  and  mental 
well-being  must  be  cared  for  and  guarded.  The 
utero  condition  is  just  as  important  as  the  condition 
in  this  life. 

Cases  have  been  known  where  the  child  was  dis- 
figured with  a  remembered  shock,  surprise,  or  antic- 
ipation on  the  part  of  the  mother.  This  condition 
was  probably  brought  about  by  the  mother  thinking 
about  or  dwelling  on  some  monstrosity  in  nature  or 
on  a  picture  of  such.    A  hunchbacked  child  may  be 


334  SUGGESTION 

the  result  of  reading  a  vivid,  realistic  novel  like  Vic- 
tor Hugo's  "Hunchback  of  Notre  Dame."  The 
mother  may  get  the  picture  in  her  mind,  and  it  may 
make  such  a  deep  impression  that  it  may  effect  the 
child.  A  hunchbacked  person  around  a  pregnant 
mother  may  so  impress  her  that  this  condition  may 
follow  to  the  child.  That  is  true  also  of  multitudes 
of  other  conditions.  The  prospective  mother  should 
be  sacredly  guarded  and  kept  free  from  those  things 
that  have  a  tendency  to  produce  an  abnormal  condi- 
tion in  her  own  thought.  If  anything  does  occur 
to  such  a  mother,  to  produce  in  her  mind  such  a  pos- 
sibility to  her  child,  she  should  hope,  believe,  and 
positively  suggest  to  herself,  or  have  someone  else 
suggest,  that  the  child  will  be  normal,  beautiful,  and 
natural,  etc. 

The  mother  has  the  power  to  impart  to  her  child 
the  qualities  of  mind  and  body  that  she  may  desire 
it  to  have.  She  must  be  careful  of  her  thoughts, 
her  practices,  her  pleasures,  her  associations,  her 
feelings,  for  all  these  things  leave  impressions  on  the 
child  for  weal  or  for  woe. 

Good  thoughts,  desires,  and  longings  that  the 
child  should  be  good ;  that  it  should  have  strong 
traits  of  character,  that  it  will  think  noble  thoughts, 
that  it  will  grow  up  to  be  a  strong  person  and  do 
some  great  things  in  the  world,  these  things  will 
have  a  wonderful  influence  on  the  unborn  child. 

The  mother  has  the  power  of  impressing  on  the 
mind  of  the  child  any  special  calling  or  profession 


MATERNAL  IMPRESSIONS  335 

that  she  may  want  the  child  to  follow.  Let  the 
mother  put  away  fretting,  worrying,  borrowing 
trouble,  and  let  her  cultivate  patience,  a  sweet  dis- 
position, be  noble  in  character,  and  have  an  ideal  in 
her  mind  in  which  she  will  definitely  try  to  mould  the 
child,  and  marvellous  results  will  follow.  If  mothers 
in  this  nation  understood  the  power  they  possess  and 
how  to  use  it,  how  much  crime,  failure,  waywardness 
and  deformity  would  be  spared  to  children.  These 
things  would  be  things  of  the  past  and  innumerable 
heartaches  would  be  spared  parents  and  a  vast  ex- 
pense would  be  spared  to  the  state  and  nation.  Many 
a  prospective  mother  desiring  to  be  relived  of  the  re- 
sponsibility of  maternity  or  from  some  other  reason 
feels  like  committing  murder  and  continually  dwells 
on  that  thought,  need  not  be  surprised  if  her  child 
comes  into  the  world  with  murderous  tendencies  in 
his  nature.  This  is  also  true  of  other  tendencies. 
The  good  can  be  imparted,  so  can  the  bad,  and  par- 
ents ought  to  be  warned  of  this.  A  cheerful,  healthy 
disposition  can  be  conveyed  to  the  nature  of  the 
child ;  so  can  the  contrary  disposition.  Every  public 
speaker,  every  physician,  every  clergyman,  ought  to 
present  these  things  to  the  people.  Physical  de- 
formity, marks  of  certain  and  adverse  physical  con- 
ditions can  be  imparted  by  the  mother  to  the  child. 
Certain  mental  tendencies  and  characteristics  can 
also  be  imparted.  How  important  is  motherhood, 
and  what  care  ought  to  be  exercised  at  all  times  and 
under  all  circumstances.     Maternity  is  the  highest 


336  SUGGESTION 

privilege  accorded  to  woman,  and  no  more  sacred 
trust  could  be  granted  to  her  than  the  opportunity 
of  impressing  on  the  mind  and  life  of  her  child  the 
noblest,  highest,  and  best  characteristics  of  body  and 
mind. 

(h)   The  Ordinary  Conditions. 

The  everyday  conditions  of  human  life,  as  direct- 
ed by  the  conscious  mind,  have  been  considered  and 
discussed  so  generally  in  different  books,  like  those 
on  ethics,  religion,  and  every-day  relations,  that  it  is 
not  necessary  for  me  to  consider  this  topic  at  any 
length.  Take  for  instance  such  books  as  Dr.  Wil- 
liam Matthew's  work  on  "Getting  on  in  the  World," 
a  book  that  has  inspired  thousands  to  do  their  best 
in  making  a  success  in  every-day  life.  Also  Orison 
S.  Mar  den's  books  and  many  others  have  presented 
the  ordinary  methods  of  prosperity  and  success.  In 
the  religious  life  such  books  as  F.  B.  Meyer's,  An- 
drew Murray's  and  many  others.  It  may  be  well  for 
me  to  say  that  if  one  lives  in  a  poised  and  strong 
mental  condition  of  self-mastery — having  faith  in 
one's  self  and  consciously  trusting  the  great  power 
that  lies  within  one's  own  nature — the  ordinary 
things  of  life  would  not  be  so  emphasized  and  feared. 
These  things  master  life  and  make  it  a  slave,  whereas 
life  should  master  them  and  make  them  servants. 
In  such  a  condition  little  things  leave  no  ruffled  tem- 
per, no  harrassed  feelings,  no  molested  power. 

As  the  observance  of  hygienic  laws  will  fortify 
the  physical  system  against  marauding  bacteria  or 


ORDINARY  CONDITIONS  337 

threatening  sickness,  so  the  observance  of  the  laws 
of  adaptation  to  environment  will  bring  power  and 
health  to  comfort  in  all  ordinary  conditions. 

Self-reliance  for  these  ordinary  conditions  will 
call  into  play  forces  that  are  ever  ready  to  assert 
themselves  in  a  time  of  need.  "I  will" — as  an  affir- 
mation of  strength  and  power — will  be  powerful  to 
meet  and  overcome  any  ordinary  obstacles  in  life.  "I 
will  not" — will  send  temptation  and  weakness  back 
into  oblivion  and  make  one  stronger  who  meets  them 
with  this  power. 

Do  you  say  "circumstances  against  me  are  so  ad- 
verse that  I  cannot  meet  them  and  succeed?"  Well, 
be  a  centerstance  to  control  them  and  be  master  of 
them.  There  is  not  an  ordinary  condition  of  life 
over  which  you  cannot  be  the  master  and  it  be  your 
servant.  You  say  "the  least  pain  I  get  I  must  take 
some  medicine  to  cure  it."  Yes,  you  take  medicine 
but  it  does  not  curie  you.  The  vital  forces  of  the 
body  do  that.  Why  not  get  control  of  them  con- 
sciously and  avoid  the  medicine?  Give  nature  a 
chance  to  cure  you  in  the  beginning  of  the  pain. 
Your  mind  ought  to  be  the  master  of  your  body. 
There  may  be  times  when  medicine  may  assist  your 
suggestions  and  expectations,  but  they  are  the  ex- 
ceptions, and  ought  not  to  be  the  rule. 

Why  shall  the  system  be  burdened  by  a  lot  of 
drugs,  some  of  which  are  poisons,    and   many    of 
22 


338  SUGGESTION 

which  disappoint  the  users  in  their  effects,  and  thus 
cause  one  to  commit  sin  against  the  body? 

If  you  are  sick  do  without  eating  for  a  day  or  two, 
especially  if  you  have  no  appetite;  drink  freely  of 
pure  water,  breathe  deeply  and  often,  sit  in  the 
sunshine  and  let  it  shine  on  your  body ;  have  faith  in 
the  power  that  you  possess  in  yourself  to  bring  back 
your  health,  sleep  much,  bathe  in  tepid  water,  and 
then  lie  down  and  relax  all  of  your  muscles  and 
suggest  health,  power,  and  strength.  Do  not  sur- 
render to  your  feelings.  Have  a  picture  of  health 
and  strength  in  your  mind,  and  then  by  a  strong 
desire  and  will  carry  them  into  the  body  and  impress 
them  there. 

You  say,  "my  circulation  is  not  good,  and  some 
of  my  people  have  died  of  heart  disease,  and  I 
am  afraid  that  I  shall  go  that  way."  What  right 
have  you  to  fear  this?  Why  do  you  not  get  your 
circulation  in  a  better  condition  by  correcting  your 
breathing  habits,  your  eating,  and  other  violations  of 
hygienic  laws?  Much  "heart  disease"  is  imaginary, 
and  much  of  it  is  a  reflex  from  digestive  conditions. 
These  things  can  be  easily  corrected,  and  the  "heart 
trouble"  will  leave. 

Some  people  say  they  cannot  eat  certain  things. 
Why?  Let  them  answer  that  question,  and  they 
will  discover  that  it  is  largely  a  mental  condition. 
Tell  the  subconscious  mind  several  times  that  you 
cannot  eat  apples  because  they  cause  indigestion  and 
you  will  find  that  that  condition  will  occur.     So  of 


ABNORMAL  CONDITIONS  339 

lemons  and  oranges,  or  anything  else.  Turn  the 
suggestion  and  say  you  can  and  you  will  eat  them, 
and  soon  they  will  agree  with  you  and  will  be  a 
great  help  to  you. 

Some  vegetarians  are  even  made  sick  by  the  smell 
of  meat.    The  reason  is  not  far  to  seek. 

The  meat-eaters  say,  "who  would  want  to  eat  the 
wood  and  chips  and  straw  that  the  vegetarian 
eats?"  So  it  goes  back  and  forth.  But  the  reason 
for  the  mental  attitude  and  revulsion  is  because  the 
subconscious  mind  has  received  different  sugges- 
tions and  carries  them  out  according  to  the  belief 
of  the  individual. 

Be  master  of  yourself,  use  all  the  forces  which 
can  be  marshalled  by  the  conscious  mind,  do  not 
fear  or  worry,  and  use  natural  means  and  any  law 
that  is  necessary  to  make  you  regnant  over  yourself 
and  your  conditions  and  you  will  be  supremely 
masterful  in  your  life. 

(i)  Abnormal  Conditions. 

I.  Of  Self. 

There  are  many  abnormal  conditions  in  one's  self 
and  others  that  can  be  corrected  or  modified  by  sug- 
gestion. These  conditions  seem  to  be  increasing 
rather  than  diminishing  on  account  of  the  strenuous 
living,  perverse  habits,  and  peculiar  physical  and 
mental  environments  and  tendencies. 

A  special  term  has  been  invented  to  express  briefly 
the  abnormal  and  extraordinary  conditions.      That 


340  SUGGESTION 

term  is  psychlepsy.  Under  the  topic  extraordinary 
phenomena,  will  be  found  a  classification  of  psy- 
chleptic  conditions.  It  wonld  carry  ns  too  far  afield 
to  discuss  these  conditions  in  this  work,  but  it  is  nec- 
essary for  us  to  allude  briefly  to  some  extraordinary 
and  abnormal  manifestations  and  show  how  sugges- 
tion may  be  used  to  control  them  in  one's  self  and 
others. 

If  we  had  an  individual  history  of  the  physical 
and  mental  life  of  each  person,  we  should  find  a 
large  element  of  the  abnormal.  We  use  the  word 
abnormal  in  the  sense  of  exceptional,  erratic,  erotic, 
and  peculiar  and  extraordinary  phenomena.  There 
is  such  a  variety  of  abnormal  manifestations,  that  it 
has  become  a  question  whether  the  normal  or  abnor- 
mal conditions  predominate.  A  prominent  neurolo- 
gist has  said  that  everybody  is  crazy  or  unbalanced 
in  some  one  thing  or  line  of  thought.  A  perfectly 
balanced  judgment  is  the  exception  among  men.  It 
has  not  been  our  purpose  in  parts  of  this  work  to 
discuss  the  matter  of  judgment  so  much  as  a 
physical  and  psychical  manifestation  of  abnormal 
conditions. 

2.  Of  Others. 

In  a  former  section  we  looked  at  some  of  the 
abnormal  conditions  of  one's  self  and  the  possibility 
of  controlling  or  modifying  those  tendencies  by  the 
use  of  suggestion — especially  by  auto-suggestion. 

How  to  use  hetero-suggestion  so  that  the  abnor- 
mal condition  of  others  may  be  changed  and  possibly 


ABNORMAL  CONDITIONS  341 

corrected  and  controlled  has  been  and  will  be  shown 
more  fully  in  this  work. 

The  following  amusing  incident  may  illustrate  a 
crude  and  rather  exceptional  method  of  giving  sug- 
gestion to  another.  We  give  it  for  what  it  is  worth. 
It  accomplished  the  work  and  changed  the  abnormal 
condition  for  the  time. 

Mr.  Harvey,  the  Time's  commuter,  was  enjoying 
the  autumn  glories  from  the  windows  of  the  rushing 
day-express,  giving  faint  heed  to  the  dissertation 
on  country  politics  which  Mr.  Bolting,  freight  con- 
ductor off  duty,  was  pouring  into  his  ear. 

"I  tell  you,"  heatedly  exclaimed  the  railroader, 
"if  we  don't  get  Doc.  Prouty  on  the  town-board  the 
village'U  go  to — " 

"Crash!"  went  something  across  the  car,  while 
half  the  windows  fell  in  splinters.  Everybody  sprang 
to  his  feet,  and  for  an  instant  there  was  pandemo- 
nium.   The  train  went  right  on. 

"Sidewiped  a  beer  wagon,"  said  Mr.  Bolting.  "I 
saw  her  fly.  There's  nobody  killed,  and  I,  sure, 
ain't  guilty." 

As  the  excitement  subsided,  a  portly  woman  be- 
gan to  scream.  Then  she  screamed  louder  and  kept 
on  screaming.  Others  brought  water  and  restora- 
tives, but  to  no  purpose  until  Mr.  BoUing  leaned 
over  toward  her. 

"Shut  up.  Doughface !"  he  commanded.  The  suf- 
ferer gave  two  sobs  and  a  gulp,  and  sat  staring  at 
him. 


342  SUGGESTION 

"Excuse  me,  lady,"  said  Mr.  Bolting  pleasantly, 
"I  didn't  want  to  hurt  your  feelings,  but  I'm  a  mar- 
ried man  myself,  and  my  wife  is  often  taken  just 
the  same  way  you  was."  The  woman  was  cured  of 
her  hysterics. 

Having  discussed  not  only  special  conditions  in 
which  hetero-suggestion  has  been  and  may  be  util- 
ized, as  well  as  the  principles  applying  in  such  cases, 
I  deem  it  unnecessary  to  elaborate  these  things  here. 
The  abnormal  conditions  are  so  many  and  the  neces- 
sity for  their  correction  so  great  that  I  have  in 
different  sections  presented  the  use  of  hetero-sug- 
gestion at  some  length  and  somewhat  minutely.  In 
the  second  part  of  this  work  methods  have  been 
given  for  treating  some  of  them. 


HYPNOTIC  SUGGESTION  343 


CHAPTER  XV. 

How  To  Use  Suggestion  Hypnotically. 

Suggestion  is  the  first  step  in  producing  hypnosis, 
and  then  it  is  the  medium  by  which  a  person  in  the 
hypnotic  condition  is  controlled  and  helped.  Sug- 
gestions are  of  many  kinds  and  forms,  and  they  are 
a  necessity  in  producing  a  hypnotic  condition.  There 
must  be  an  acquiescence  of  the  subject's  will  before 
he  can  be  hypnotized.  No  one  can  be  sucessfully 
put  into  this  condition  against  his  will  the  first  time. 
A  willing  subject  is  the  first  condition. 

Hypnotism  in  theory  is  closely  allied  to  natural 
sleep  and  is  similar  to  it.  We  all  pass  through  the 
hypnotic  phase  every  night  in  going  to  sleep.  One 
can  hypnotize  himself  and  get  rest  from  fatigue. 
I  have  practiced  this  and  have  had  only  good  results 
from  it  in  increased  power  for  physical  and  mental 
work.  Many  children  are  hypnotized  into  sleep  by 
the  promise  of  sweets.  What  are  adults  but 
grown-up  children,  and  if  the  conscious  mind 
is  submissive  they  will  go  to  sleep  under  the 
influence  of  suggestion.  Does  a  child  suffer  from 
such  treatment?  No,  neither  does  an  adult.  In  nat- 
ural and  in  hypnotic  sleep  a  person  is  oblivious  of 
external  conditions.    One  may  have  his  eyes  open  as 


344  SUGGESTION 

a  somnambulist  and  yet  be  asleep  or  in  a  hypnotic 
state.  The  object  of  hypnotizing  one  is  to  overcome 
dominant  suggestions,  which  are  adverse  to  one's 
best  interests.  To  be  able  to  carry  this  out  complete- 
ly, it  is  necessary  for  the  subject  to  have  faith  in  the 
hypnotist. 

Another  necessary  condition  in  order  for  one  to 
be  hypnotized  is  to  have  the  power  to  concentrate 
the  attention.  A  weak  minded  or  violently  insane 
person  cannot  be  put  into  that  condition.  The  three 
types  of  insanity  may  be  classified  as  idiocy  or  weak- 
mindedness,  mania,  and  melancholia.  This  may  be 
considered  a  simplified  classification.  There  are 
other  classes  under  these.  The  characteristic  of 
these  types  is  the  inability  to  change  and  keep  the 
attention  any  length  of  time  on  the  things  which 
would  work  a  change  in  the  life.  In  idiocy  there  is 
an  enfeebled  attention.  Mania  is  the  non-attention, 
with  a  violent  condition  without  plan  and  purpose 
in  the  normal  mind. 

Melancholia  is  an  abnormal  condition,  in  which 
a  certain  phase  of  thought  is  continued  along  one 
line  to  the  detriment  of  the  mind  and  body.  These 
types  are  all  conditioned  upon  the  uncontrolled 
attention  and  will. 

(a)  Several  questions  here  ought  to  be  considered 
and  answered. 

I.  Is  it  not  dangerous  to  one's  character  to  be 
hypnotized?  No.  Newspaper  reports  and  other 
improvised  statements  about  murder,  arson,  and  se- 


HYPNOTIC  SUGGESTION  345 

duction,  being  committed  under  the  influence  of 
hypnotism  are  false.  Unless  a  person  has  these 
desires  in  heart  and  life — which  would  show  them- 
selves in  the  covert  act  sooner  or  later — he  cannot 
be  led  to  do  those  things  either  in  the  hypnotic  state 
or  in  the  waking  state.  A  criminal  hypnotizer  in 
control  of  a  criminal  subject  might  produce  criminal 
acts.  But  criminal  acts  might  be  produced  without 
hypnotism,  because  the  persons  are  criminals. 

2.  Can  one  be  hypnotized  against  his  will?  No. 
The  reason  is  that  the  auto-suggestion  of  the  person 
nullifies  the  suggestion  of  the  hypnotist. 

3.  Can  a  hypnotized  subject  be  made  to  do  that 
which  he  abhors  or  that  which  is  contrary  to  his  nor- 
mal education  ?  No.  If  an  hypnotized  subject  abhors 
liquor  and  drunkenness,  his  auto-suggestion  will 
prevent  him  acting  the  part  of  a  drunken  man.  If 
the  suggestion  is  made  after  he  has  taken  some 
water  that  it  is  liquor,  he  will  probably  become  very 
sick  and  thus  will  become  de-hypnotized.  This  is 
true  also  of  other  things. 

4.  Are  we  to  give  credence  to  the  many  news- 
paper reports  concerning  persons  who  have  commit- 
ted crime  under  the  influence  of  hypnotism  ?  No.  A 
criminal,  let  me  say  again,  may  be  induced,  under 
the  influence  of  hypnotism  and  suggestion,  to  com- 
mit a  crime,  but  a  virtuous  person  cannot  and  will 
not  do  so.  From  this  we  infer  the  great  importance 
of  a  good  moral  education. 

5.  Can  hypnotism  be  used  to  maks  a  subject  com- 


346  SUGGESTION 

mit  a  crime?  Not  a  virtuous,  moral  subject.  The 
contrary  character  could  and  probably  would  if  not 
hypnotized.  Authorities  with  very  few  exceptions 
testify  against  the  thought  that  successful  criminal 
suggestion  can  be  or  will  be  carried  out  by  any  per- 
sons except  those  of  criminal  tendencies,  who  would 
and  could  commit  a  crime  in  ordinary  conditions. 

The  person  hypnotized  knows  he  is  accepting  sug- 
gestions of  another,  but  the  conscious  and  moral 
sense  are  in  operation,  so  that  the  suggestion  of 
crime  or  immorality  would  be  resented.  Post-hyp- 
notic suggestion  can  be  successfully  given,  to  be  car- 
ried out  at  some  future  time,  yet  the  suggested  act 
must  be  in  harmony  with  the  moral  sense  of  the  sub- 
ject at  that  time,  or  it  will  be  successfully  resisted. 

Hypnotism  should  never  under  any  circumstances 
be  admitted  as  a  defense  for  one  who  has  clearly 
committed  a  crime.  Drunkenness  is  not  so  admitted ; 
neither  should  hypnotism  be.  No  man  can  be  hyp- 
notized against  his  will.  This  is  generally  conceded. 
The  hypnotic  subject  will  never  commit  a  crime 
that  he  would  not  commit  in  his  normal  state.  A  sub- 
ject acts  only  on  his  own  volition.  Patients  may  stab 
with  paper-daggers,  but  not  with  steel.  Subjects 
have  said,  "I  knew  what  was  going  on  and  could 
have  resisted  it  if  I  had  wanted  to."  "Why  did 
you  not  ?"  "Because  there  was  no  harm  in  it,  and  I 
wanted  to  please  you."  Shall  a  natural  and  psychi- 
cal force  of  great  power  and  benefit  be  condemned 


HYPNOTIC  SUGGESTION  347 

because  it  may  be  misused  like  any  other  God-given 
endowment  of  man  ? 

These  are  a  few  questions  which  we  have 
answered  in  all  frankness  for  the  information  of 
people  who  are  honest  in  their  desire  to  be  informed 
concerning  these  things. 

How  can  a  person  be  hypnotized,  and  how  may 
that  state  be  used  for  health-restoring  purposes,  and 
for  surgical  operations  ?  It  shall  now  be  my  purpose 
to  discuss  first  the  methods  of  hypnotism,  then,  sec- 
ondly, the  use  of  that  state  in  securing  great  results. 

Many  persons,  who  are  somewhat  conversant  with 
the  possibilities  of  the  use  of  hypnotism,  concede 
that  it  is  one  of  the  greatest  discoveries  in  this  age, 
on  account  of  the  phenomenal  results  that  may  be 
secured  to  mankind  in  the  cure  of  disease  and  the 
correction  of  perverse  and  abnormal  tendencies  and 
habits.  Suggestion  and  hypnotism  are  destined  to 
play  a  large  part  in  the  rescue  of  many  from  the 
bondage  of  evil,  disease,  and  abnormality.  No  one 
can  even  surmise,  much  less  predict,  the  possibilities 
of  these  auxiliaries  of  human  life  in  restoring  har- 
mon,  health,  and  a  normal,  mental,  and  physical  con- 
dition. 

Hypnotism  is  an  advanced  expression  of  the  brain 
by-way  leading  through  sleep-dreams  to  mind  mani- 
festation. It  is  a  mental  phenomenon,  with  the  con- 
scious mind  held  in  abeyance.  It  has  been  spoken  of 
as  "artificially  induced  somnambuHsm,"  as  the  phe- 


348  SUGGESTION 

nomena  of  one  state  are  analogous  to  those  of  an- 
other, and  actions  of  the  sleep-walker  run  parallel 
with  those  we  induce,  at  will,  in  the  hypnotic  subject. 
Hypnotism  is  more  than  this — the  activity  of  the  up- 
per brain  is  inhibited.  The  cerebral  activity  is 
switched  off  from  its  voluntary  command  of  the 
body,  and  the  central  ganglia,  under  the  influence  of 
suggestion,  exercises  its  power,  whilst  the  mental  life 
is  exclusively  dealt  with  for  curative,  corrective,  and 
sanative  results. 

The  far-reaching  results  in  the  use  of  hypnotism 
with  the  insane  none  can  predict.  Hypnotic  sugges- 
tion is  peculiarly  adapted  to  the  treatment  of  delu- 
sions, melancholia,  monomania,  and  many  forms  of 
insanity. 

Some  moralists  have  contended  that  in  such  treat- 
ment the  patient  secures  no  ethical  victory.  Grant 
this  to  be  true,  no  one  who  has  had  experience  in 
this  method  of  rescue  will  deny  that  such  treatment 
prepares  the  way  to  achieve  future  ethical  victories 
which  otherwise  would  be  impossible.  The  individ- 
ual, thus  rescued  from  his  slavery  and  to  society  to 
which  he  was  a  menace,  are  both  gainers  by  his  re- 
covery, whatever  may  be  said  of  the  personal  ethical 
side. 

The  operator,  if  he  is  positively  moral  and  spirit- 
ual, will  be  able  to  accomplish  great  things  towards 
the  moral  and  spiritual  elevation  of  the  patient. 

There  is  nothing  mysterious  or  occult  about  hyp- 
notism.   It  is  just  as  scientific  as  telegraphy,  or  tele- 


HYPNOTIC  SUGGESTION  249 

phony,  except  that  the  mechanical  features  are  nulli- 
fied, if  not  entirely  absent,  the  psychical  principles 
are  utilized  almost  exclusively  in  securing  the  re- 
sults. All  that  I  shall  present  under  this  phase  of 
suggestive  therapeutics  is  to  make  plain  a  knowl- 
edge of  hypnotism  as  a  philanthropic  and  helpful 
instrumentality  in  rescuing  those  who  are  unable  to 
be  helped  otherwise  and  whose  lives  would  be  wreck- 
ed and  a  menance  to  society  without  its  aid. 

Hypnotism  is  a  God-given  principle  which  ought 
never  to  be  abused  by  loathsome,  money-making, 
hypnotic  displays  in  dime  museums,  on  the  stages  of 
theatres,  and  in  other  places  of  amusement.  Such 
abuse  and  contemptible  uses  ought  to  be  prohibited 
by  law.  There  is  danger  in  such  use,  and  only  men 
properly  qualified  by  constant  study  and  experience 
in  its  use  for  benevolent  and  scientific  purposes 
should  be  permitted  to  practice  it. 

(b)  Some  Tests. 

Before  discussing  or  presenting  the  methods  of 
hypnotism  it  might  be  well  to  present  the  tests  that 
indicate  that  a  person  is  hypnotizable  or  in  a  natural 
hypnotic  condition  and  would  receive  suggestion 
readily  and  get  the  effect  speedily.  There  are  cer- 
tain mechanical  devices  that  may  be  used  to  indicate 
whether  a  person  is  hypnotically  sensitive.  For  in- 
stance, place  a  small  electric  battery  with  its  two 
electrodes  on  a  table.  The  person  to  be  tested  sits 
in  front  of  the  table.  The  current  is  governed  by 
a  switch,  which  is  so  constructed  that  the  exact  mo- 


350  SUGGESTION 

tion  of  closing  the  circuit  can  be  simukted  without 
permitting  the  electricity  to  come  into  the  wire.  The 
person  touches  the  electrodes  with  a  finger  of  each 
hand.  The  operator  makes  a  conscious  movement 
of  the  switch.  A  gentle  current  is  felt  in  the  finger 
tips.  The  person  is  asked  to  tell  the  extent  to  which 
he  feels  the  current.  Varying  strength  of  currents 
are  now  allowed  to  play  on  the  finger-tips.  The 
movement  of  the  switch  is  now  associated  with  the 
sensation  of  the  electrode  shock,  no  matter  how  mild 
it  may  be.  The  operator  says,  "You  feel  nothing 
now."  He  then  makes  a  seemingly  strong  jerk  of 
the  switch  and  asks  what  is  felt.  The  answer  deter- 
mines the  sensitiveness  of  the  person.  No  current 
is  turned  on  by  the  jerk.  However,  the  movement 
of  the  switch  suggests  that  the  current  is  on.  If  the 
person  is  sensitive,  he  will  accept  the  suggestion. 
The  subject,  of  course,  must  not  know  the  purpose 
of  the  test. 

A  series  of  blocks  have  been  invented  and  are 
called  "Suggestion  Blocks."  A  number  of  psycho- 
logical laboratories  have  them.  They  are  disc-shaped 
pasteboard  boxes,  in  the  form  of  weights  of  various 
sizes  and  painted  black,  so  that  they  look  like  metal- 
lic surfaces.  A  core  of  metal  extends  through  the 
centre  of  each.  The  weight  of  the  metal  determines 
the  weight  of  the  block.  Thus  two  blocks  of  the 
same  size  and  alike  in  external  appearances  may 
vary  much  or  little  in  weight,  whilst  a  larger  one  may 
be  much  lighter  than  a  smaller  one.     The  experi- 


SUSCEPTIBILITY  351 

menter  selects  the  largest  and  smallest  of  the  blocks, 
which  are  purposely  of  the  same  weight,  55  grams. 
One  is  held  between  the  thumb  and  second  finger  of 
each  hand.  The  question  is  asked,  "which  is  the 
heavier?"  It  is  quite  reasonable  to  think  the  larger 
one  would  be  the  heavier.  But  in  Hfting  the  blocks 
the  larger  one  does  not  seem  to  feel  the  heavier.  If 
the  subject  is  a  hypnotic  sensitive,  an  unconscious 
counter-suggestion  will  cause  him  to  believe  the 
smaller  block  is  the  weightier.  This  unconscious 
suggestion  causes  such  an  one  to  believe  that  a 
pound  of  lead  is  heavier  than  a  pound  of  feathers. 
If  he  is  very  sensitive  he  will  perhaps  estimate  that 
the  smaller  block  is  ten  grams  heavier;  if  not  very 
sensitive,  3  grams,  if  not  at  all  sensitive  they  weigh 
the  same. 

An  hypnotic  ring  has  also  been  invented.  It  is  a 
band  of  steel  highly  magnetized  and  made  to  fit  the 
finger  of  the  subject.  It  is  broken  by  a  slit  extend- 
ing its  full  breadth.  An  armature  of  steel  fits  over 
this  space.  A  magnet  has  about  it  a  suggestion  of 
mystery,  and  it  has  been  associated  with  hypnotism 
for  a  long  while.  When  placed  upon  the  finger  of  a 
subject,  especially  one  ignorant  of  electro-magnetic 
principles,  it  frequently  induces  a  state  which  be- 
trays sensitiveness  to  hypnotic  influences.  It  may  be 
an  aid  to  hypnotism  in  cases  where  the  person  is 
first  assured  that  if  it  remains  upon  the  finger  it  will 
induce  sleep. 

Perfume  of  flowers  has  also  been  used  to  test  sim- 


352  SUGGESTION 

ilar  sensitiveness.  Prof.  Maurice  M.  Small,  Fellow 
in  Clark  University,  applied  the  test  to  500  pupils  of 
various  schools.  He  would  first  talk  about  flowers 
and  their  perfumes.  He  would  then  ask  if  they  could 
detect  the  odor  of  a  flower  if  it  were  in  the  room. 
He  would  place  on  the  teacher's  desk  labeled  bottles 
of  perfume  and  an  atomizer  filled  with  plain  water. 
A  generous  spray  was  then  thrown  in  several  places 
in  the  room.  Each  child  was  given  a  card  upon 
which  to  write  the  name  of  the  perfume  suggested 
to  him  or  her.  Seventy-three  per  cent  of  the  sub- 
jects thought  they  perceived  some  odor  in  the  water. 
Fifty-seven  per  cent  were  sure  they  detected  an 
odor.    It  was  only  pure  water. 

Here  is  a  test  that  works  well  in  many  cases. 
Place  a  bottle  on  a  table  about  two  feet  from  a  sub- 
ject, who  sits  on  a  chair.  Tell  him  the  bottle  con- 
tains a  very  subtle  fluid  and  when  uncorked  the  odor 
arising  will  put  any  one  to  sleep,  and  that  it  will  put 
him  to  sleep.  Some  like  the  odor,  others  do  not; 
he  probably  will  not  like  it.  Take  the  cork  out  and 
have  him  close  his  eyes.  Wait  a  minute  or  two  and 
say,  "by  your  countenance  I  think  you  do  not  like 
this  odor,  but  it  will  put  you  to  sleep.  If  you  feel 
sleepy,  encourage  the  sensation  and  drop  deeply 
into  sleep.  Ah !  that  is  good,  you  are  going  to  sleep. 
Your  head  is  dropping  forward  on  your  chest. 
Sleep,  sleep,  sleep!"  Suggestions  may  follow  and 
they  will  be  effective.  Suggest  that  the  odor  is 
offensive.    He  will  probably  hold  his  nose. 


SUSCEPTIBILITY  353 

Sounds  can  be  augmented  by  suggestion.  Many- 
things  can  be  brought  before  the  mind  and  per- 
ceived where  there  are  no  concrete  objects.  Cer- 
tain experiments  with  adults  and  children  have 
proven  this. 

Women  are  more  sensitive  to  suggestion  than 
men ;  girls  than  boys ;  blondes  than  brunettes.  Nerv- 
ous people  are  more  sensitive  than  normal  people 
on  account  of  their  inability  to  control  their  minds. 
Tests  with  "suggestion  blocks"  show  that  suggestion 
in  children  increases  from  six  to  eight,  after  which 
it  slowly  decreases  with  age.  Perfumes  vary  up  to 
the  eighth  grade  in  a  high  school  where  the  scholars 
were  not  sure  that  they  smelled  anything.  Ninety 
per  cent  of  the  little  ones  in  the  first  grade  were  sure 
they  detected  an  odor  from  the  spray  of  pure,  cold 
water.  This  per  cent  decreased  to  thirteen  per  cent 
in  the  seventh  grade. 

Let  us  remember  that  suggestion  is  the  all-power- 
ful factor  in  hypnotism.  The  operator  suggests  that 
you  are  going  to  sleep,  and  you  do  so.  The  sleep 
is  an  hypnotic  condition.  Suggestion  produced  it. 
The  suggestive  advertisement  or  "bargain  counter" 
is  the  power  that  produces  the  hypnotic  condition  of 
many  women.  The  words  "reduction  sale,"  "great 
bargains,"  "never  can  you  secure  such  bargains 
again"  do  the  work.  The  people  are  possessed  by  a 
controlling  idea  and  crowd  the  stores,  pushing  each 
other  away  to  get  something  which  when  closely  ex- 
amined becomes  an  eyeopener  and  then  they  often 

23 


354  SUGGESTION 

condemn  themselves  for  buying  those  things.  It 
occurs  again  and  again  in  so  many  ways.  The  suc- 
cessful salesman  is  a  hypnotist.  He  convinces  his 
customers  that  they  want  what  they  do  not  want. 
Many  revivalists  are  good  hypnotists  because  they 
can  make  most  effective  suggestions.  This  is  true 
also  of  stump  speakers,  fakirs,  and  barkers. 

Many  people  are  "easy  marks,"  or  belong  to  the 
gullible  family,  because  they  are  so  sensitive  to  sug- 
gestions positively  made. 

There  are  other  tests  which  are  very  simple  and 
effective. 

(c)  Some  Tests  for  Subjects. 

It  is  necessary  for  an  operator  to  know  whether 
a  subject  can  be  hypnotized  or  is  in  a  suggestible 
condition.  There  are  certain  tests  which  will  prove 
this,  and  remove  the  fear  which  some  subjects  some- 
times have. 

The  subject  ought  to  be  instructed  to  yield  as 
much  as  possible  to  what  is  said,  and  to  rely  upon 
the  operator's  statements  as  to  whether  or  not  he 
will  take  suggestions. 

I.  Have  the  patient  stand  erect,  with  his  shoul- 
ders thrown  back,  with  the  heels  together,  and  with 
his  eyes  turned  upward  as  if  looking  at  a  spot  in  the 
middle  of  the  forehead.  Take  your  stand  behind 
him,  grasping  him  by  the  shoulders,  move  him  back- 
ward and  forward  a  few  times ;  tell  him  not  to  bend 
at  the  waist  and  see  that  he  keeps  his  eyes  closed  all 


SOME  TESTS  355 

the  time.  The  object  of  this  instruction  is  to  de- 
stroy his  sense  of  the  perfectly  straight  position. 
When  you  stop  moving  him,  let  him  lean  a  little 
back  of  the  perpendicular  and  then  make  the  follow- 
ing suggestions :  "You  feel  like  falling  backwards ; 
do  not  resist  if  you  come  back  naturally,  but  do  not 
will  to  fall  backwards.  I  will  catch  you  if  you  come 
back,  so  do  not  fear,  for  I  will  not  allow  you  to  fall 
on  the  floor.  The  desire  to  fall  back  is  becoming 
stronger  and  stronger;  you  are  beginning  to  sway 
back  and  forth,  you  are  gradually  falling,  falling, 
fal-ling,  f-a-1-l-i-n-g,  backward,  backward,  back- 
ward." 

Repeat  these  suggestions  until  the  subject  falls 
backward,  as  he  will,  if  he  is  suggestible  or  hypno- 
tizable. 

2.  The  following  test  is  made  by  having  the  sub- 
ject stand  erect,  as  in  the  first  test.  After  rocking 
him  to  and  fro  for  a  moment,  standing  at  his  left 
side,  place  your  right  hand  against  the  back  of  his 
neck  and  press  gently  but  firmly.  Then  give  the 
suggestions  that  he  is  falling  backward  and  watch 
closely  to  see  if  he  moves.  Move  your  hand  in  the 
same  direction  that  his  body  moves,  keeping  up  a 
gentle  pressure.  The  feeling  resulting  from  the 
pressure  has  a  tendency  to  prevent  his  noticing  that 
he  is  falling,  but  to  imagine  that  he  is  standing  still. 
This  is  an  excellent  test,  and  a  very  successful  one 
in  most  cases.     If  the  subject  yields  to  both  these 


356  SUGGESTION 

tests,  then  the  following  one  should  be  tried.     Do 
not  fail  to  repeat  your  suggestions. 

3.  Let  the  subject  stand  erect  and  face  him.  Rock 
him  back  and  forth  as  before.  Now  place  your  fin- 
gers on  his  forehead  between  the  eyes,  pressing 
lightly  downward  as  though  pulling  him  forward. 
Tell  him  that  there  will  be  a  desire  to  fall  forward 
and  that  the  desire  is  becoming  stronger,  that  he  is 
tottering.  Tell  him  not  to  resist,  if  there  is  a  feel- 
ing to  come  forward.  You  may  fail  at  the  first  trial, 
but  do  not  give  up;  make  at  least  six  or  seven  at- 
tempts without  stopping. 

4.  Have  the  subject  open  his  eyes  and  clasp  his 
hands  together,  interlocking  the  fingers,  and  then 
grip  the  fingers  and  have  him  keep  his  elbows 
against  his  side.  Command  him  to  look  you  in  the 
eye,  whilst  you  look  between  his  eyes,  and  tell  him 
that  the  fingers  are  gradually  becoming  locked 
tighter  together,  that  the  muscles  are  contracting  so 
that  he  cannot  relax  them.  Give  the  following  sug- 
gestions :  "The  muscles  of  your  fingers  are  contract- 
ing, they  are  becoming  rigidly  set  so  that  you  cannot 
relax  them,  and  your  hands  are  fastened  tight  to- 
gether, as  though  a  band  of  steel  were  around  them, 
your  muscles  are  becoming  set  and  contracted,  and 
you  cannot  relax  them,  you  cannot  get  your  hands 
apart."  Repeat  these  suggestions  forcibly  and  rap- 
idly. While  doing  this,  press  the  hands  of  the  sub- 
ject tightly  together,  and  do  not  remove  your  hands 
until  the  suggesx'ion  is  made  to  the  subject  to  try  to 


SOME  TESTS  357 

relax  his  grip.  See  that  the  subject  keeps  his  elbows 
close  to  his  sides ;  do  not  have  him  pull  with  the 
whole  arm.  If  the  test  is  successful  and  the  sugges- 
tions readily  taken,  you  can  allow  him  to  relax  his 
hands.     See  that  there  are  no  rings  on  the  fingers. 

5.  Have  the  subject  place  the  palms  of  his  hands 
together,  without  clasping  the  fingers  and  tell  him 
to  keep  his  elbows  close  to  his  side ;  then  say  to  him : 
''Your  hands  are  stuck  tight  together;  they  are  be- 
coming fastened  tight ;  the  muscles  of  your  arms  are 
rigid.  You  cannot  separate  your  hands;  they  are 
tight,  very  tight;  they  are  becoming  tighter.  Your 
hands  are  fastened  tight  together ;  you  cannot  sepa- 
rate them;  you  cannot;  try,  try  hard;  you  cannot 
separate  them." 

6.  Let  the  subject  stand  or  sit.  Command  him  to 
close  his  eyes  and  you  stand  at  his  right  side,  plac- 
ing your  left  hand  at  the  back  of  his  neck.  Place 
your  right  hand  over  his  eyes,  with  the  thumb  rest- 
ing on  the  right  temple  and  the  tips  of  the  fingers 
on  the  left  temple.  Tell  him  to  imagine  that  his  eye- 
lids are  becoming  heavy.  Repeat  this  a  number  of 
times,  and  add  they  are  as  heavy  as  lead,  they  are 
closing  tight.  Say  to  him :  "You  cannot  open  your 
eyes ;  the  eyelids  are  very,  very  heavy ;  you  cannot  lift 
them  up."  Repeat  these  suggestions  a  number  of 
times  and  tell  him  to  try  hard,  and  tell  him  he  can- 
not open  his  eyes.  Just  as  the  suggestion  "you  can- 
not" is  given,  your  right  hand  should  be  placed  in 
front  of  his  eyes,  the  thumb  passing  between  the 


358  SUGGESTION 

eyes  and  along  the  bridge  of  the  nose,  and  as  the 
thumb  reaches  the  point  immediately  between  the 
eyes  press  firmly  downward,  while  the  subject  is  try- 
ing to  open  his  eyes.  Practice  will  make  one  skillful 
in  this. 

7.  Let  the  subject  sit  and  you  stand  at  his  left 
side.  Place  your  left  hand  over  his  eyes  with  your 
thumb  pressing  on  his  left  temple  and  the  finger  tips 
on  the  right;  make  half-passes  down  his  back,  say- 
ing: "Your  back  is  becoming  rigid;  the  muscles  of 
your  back  are  becoming  rigid,  as  though  they  were 
bars  of  steel."  Go  down  over  the  hips  and  limbs 
with  the  same  suggestions  and  tell  him  that  he  can- 
not bend  forward  or  get  up  from  his  chair.  Say, 
"You  cannot  get  up;  try,  try  hard,  but  you  cannot 
get  up."  Give  these  suggestions  rapidly  with  a  com- 
manding tone  of  voice.  Remove  the  influence  of 
this  test  by  making  passes  upward  and  telling  the 
person  that  he  is  all  right. 

8.  Have  the  subject  sit  and  command  him  to  close 
his  eyes.  Make  the  following  suggestion:  "I  want 
you  to  draw  before  your  mind's  eye  a  scene  of  land- 
scape or  some  building  with  which  you  are  familiar. 
Look  at  the  picture  closely  and  see  every  detail,  and 
now  make  the  picture  as  clear  in  your  mind  as  pos- 
sible. Now  the  scene  will  become  clearer  and  more 
vivid ;  it  is  growing  clearer  and  clearer  and  you  can 
see  every  detail ;  you  see  it  clearly."  Ask  the  subject 
to  open  his  eyes  and  tell  you  about  the  picture  which 
he  saw.   This  test  is  preparatory  for  inducing  illu- 


REMOVING  INFLUENCE  OF  TESTS    359 

sions,  and  will  show  how  sensitive  the  subject  is 
without  being  hypnotized. 

(d)  How  to  Remove  the  Influence  of  the  Tests. 

All  physical  tests  which  affect  the  physical  organs, 
such  as  fastening  the  hands  together,  stiffening  the 
arms,  making  the  whole  body  rigid,  or  fastening 
one  to  a  chair,  should  be  removed  before  dismissing 
the  subject  or  continuing  him  as  a  subject  for  hypno- 
tism. Make  passes  in  the  opposite  direction  of  those 
made  in  testing  him,  and  say :  "You  are  all  right,  all 
right ;  you  are  wide  awake ;  you  are  wide  awake ;  you 
are  feeling  first  rate;  you  are  wide  awake."  Make 
the  suggestions  with  a  firm  tone  and  in  a  brisk  man- 
ner. See  that  the  influence  is  thoroughly  removed 
before  the  subject  leaves  you  or  before  you  continue 
further  work.  If  the  suggestion  was  purely  mental, 
or  if  you  have  established  a  condition  of  hallucina- 
tion or  illusion,  be  sure  to  command  him  to  wake  up, 
and  see  that  he  does  so  completely.  You  can  give 
such  suggestions  as  the  following:  "You  will  now 
wake  up,  and  you  will  feel  better  than  before  you 
went  to  sleep ;  the  circulation  of  your  body  is  becom- 
ing equalized  and  you  will  feel  fine  when  you 
awake ;  you  will  feel  better  than  when  you  went  to 
sleep.  You  are  wide  awake  and  you  are  feeling  all 
right."  You  can  make  upward  passes  in  front  of  his 
face  and  suggest  to  him  that  he  is  wide  awake,  that 
he  feels  strong  and  well.  Be  sure  and  see  that  he  is 
normal  before  leaving  you. 

These  tests  will  decide  in  a  short  time  whether 


36o  SUGGESTION 

one  is  a  good  subject  or  not.  Some  subjects  who 
fail  to  take  the  tests  may  be  developed  later,  by  trial, 
into  excellent  subjects.  Let  not  the  operator  become 
discouraged  when  he  finds  that  considerable  time  is 
necessary  to  develop  those  who  have  not  taken  these 
tests  at  first.  These  tests  advance  step  by  step  from 
the  simpler  to  the  harder,  and  experience  has  proven 
that  this  is  one  of  the  best  methods  of  procedure. 

(e)  Who  Can  Be  Hypnotised. 

Theoretically  every  normal  and  intelligent  person 
can  be  hypnotized,  but,  practically,  this  is  not  the 
case.  There  are  two  conditions  necessary;  the  abil- 
ity to  make  one's  self  thoroughly  passive  and  recep- 
tive, and  the  power  to  concentrate  the  mind  on  sleep 
and  the  suggestions  given.  This  requires  a  definite 
control  of  the  mind.  This,  some  people  do  not  pos- 
sess. Belief  in  hypnotism  and  faith  in  the  operator 
are  only  incidental  and  not  necessarily  essential. 
Many  do  not  accept  the  suggestions  because  they  do 
not  desire  to,  and  some  make  a  pretense  of  trying 
to  take  them  but  have  their  minds  made  up  not  to. 
But  when  a  person  desires  to  be  helped  and  will 
yield  to  the  suggestions  and  wills  to  concentrate  his 
mind  on  them  he  will  usually  make  an  excellent  sub- 
ject. 

Varying  statements  as  to  the  per  cent  of  people 
who  can  be  hypnotized  have  been  published.  Some 
say  that  twenty-five  per  cent  will  yield  on  the  first 
trial ;  others  say  fifty  per  cent  will  do  so.  Some  claim 
that  fifty  per  cent  will  yield  after  two  or  more  trials ; 


WHO  CAN  BE  HYPNOTIZED         361 

others  claim  that  ninety  per  cent  will  thus  yield  by 
care  and  patience.  Probably  seventy-five  per  cent 
would  be  a  good  average  to  make ;  there  are  favoring 
conditions,  such  as  seasonal  and  climatic,  in  which 
the  per  cent  will  be  larger  than  that.  In  the  South- 
ern States  more  are  amenable  to  hypnotism  than  in 
the  Northern  States,  and  more  will  be  good  subjects 
in  Southern  Europe  than  in  Siberia. 

There  are  many  things  to  be  considered  in  devel- 
oping subjects.  Some  require  more  time  than  oth- 
ers, some  will  accept  the  scientific  explanation  of 
suggestion  and  others  do  not  care  anything  for  that. 
Some  will  fear  the  process  and  the  results,  others 
will  not.  Some  will  go  into  the  first,  and  some  into 
the  second,  whilst  others  will  go  into  the  third  stage 
of  hypnotism  at  one  sitting.  Others  will  require 
several  sittings  to  go  into  the  first  stage.  Some  will 
require  several  sittings  daily  for  some  time  to  get 
the  best  results ;  others  twice  or  three  times  a  week. 
The  last  probably  will  give  the  best  results  in  the 
long  run. 

Here  is  a  good  rule  to  follow :  If  the  person  is  not 

affected  at  all  in  four  or  five  sittings,  it  is  best  not  to 
try  to  hypnotize  him,  but  give  him  suggestions  after 
he  relaxes  and  has  his  eyes  closed  and  is  quietly 
resting.  You  can  suggest  to  him  that  he  will  be 
more  susceptible  at  the  next  sitting.  That  he 
will  probably  go  to  sleep  at  that  time.  That  he  can 
talk  to  himself  and  suggest  that  "I  can  be  hypnotized 
if  I  want  to."     Exercise  your  inventive  genius  in 


362  SUGGESTION 

making  suggestions  to  him,  and  do  not  be  afraid  to 
suggest  to  him  just  what  you  desire  for  his  benefit 
and  help. 

Can  one  tell  whether  a  person  is  hypnotized  or 
not?  This  is  not  always  easy;  in  fact,  there  are 
times  when  it  is  almost  impossible.  The  power  of 
simulation  in  some  persons  is  very  strong  and  the 
operator  must  be  on  his  guard.  Physical  manifesta- 
tions are  not  always  a  sure  indication  that  one  is 
hypnotized.  It  is  easier  for  an  operator  to  deter- 
mine the  condition  of  one  he  is  acquainted  with  than 
of  a  stranger.  When  one  is  hypnotized  the  eyeball 
is  usually  turned  upward  as  in  sleep.  There  are  ex- 
ceptions to  this.  Raise  the  eyelid  and  if  the  eyeball 
is  turned  upward  it  is  very  probable  that  the  person 
is  asleep.  The  heart  beats  usually  a  little  faster  in 
hypnosis  and  that  can  be  tested  by  the  pulse.  The 
eyelids  usually  remain  quiet  in  hypnosis  and  the 
breathing  becomes  very  regular.  There  are  excep- 
tions also  to  this  rule. 

After  considerable  experience  the  operator  ca.i 
ascertain  quite  readily  the  condition  of  the  subject. 

(/)  Some  Methods  of  Hypnotising. 

The  tests  which  have  been  given,  if  effective  in 
securing  the  results  desired,  will  leave  the  operator 
to  conclude  that  the  subject  is  in  a  suggestible  condi- 
tion, and  that  he  can  be  put  into  a  state  of  hypnosis 
in  a  comparatively  short  time.  It  is  not  wise  to  at- 
tempt to  induce  hypnosis  in  a  stranger,  or  in  one  who 


METHODS  OF  HYPNOTIZING        363 

has  never  been  hypnotized  before,  without  first  mak- 
ing the  test.  There  are  numerous  hypnotic  methods 
which  have  been  adopted  by  operators,  but  many  of 
them  are  simply  elaborations  or  phases  of  a  com- 
paratively few  leading  methods.  We  have  found 
the  following  methods  to  be  very  effective : 

Method  Number  One. 

I.  Command  the  patient  to  sit,  placing  his  feet 
flat  on  the  floor,  his  hands  lying  in  his  lap  or  on  each 
thigh.  Stand  at  his  right  side,  your  left  hand  at  the 
back  of  his  neck,  the  right  hand  over  his  eyes,  so  as 
to  shut  out  the  light.  Tell  him  to  relax  all  his  mus- 
cles thoroughly,  and  let  his  whole  weight  rest  on  the 
chair.  Lift  one  of  his  arms  and  allow  it  to  drop ;  if 
it  falls  as  though  it  were  lifeless,  it  shows  that  he  is 
well  relaxed.  Do  the  same  thing  with  one  of  the 
legs;  see  that  he  is  breathing  regularly,  and  that 
there  are  no  symptoms  of  excitement.  If  there  are 
such  symptoms  remove  them  by  quieting  sugges- 
tions. Now  make  your  suggestions  as  follows: 
"You  are  becoming  very  quiet ;  your  muscles  are 
thoroughly  relaxed ;  the  circulation  of  your  blood  is 
good ;  the  nervous  forces  in  your  body  are  becoming 
equalized,  and  a  sense  of  ease  and  comfort  are  com- 
ing over  you.  Do  not  try  to  think  of  any  one  thing, 
but  you  may  think  of  sleep  if  you  want  to.  You 
will  feel  a  delightful  rest  coming  over  the  whole 
body,  and  there  will  also  come  a  feeling  of  sleep, 
because  the  circulation  of  the  blood  is  quietly  reced- 
ing from  the  head.    A  sense  of  drowsiness  is  taking 


364  SUGGESTION 

possession  of  your  whole  system ;  you  are  beginning 
to  feel  sleepy.  Do  not  try  to  analyze  your  feelings, 
but  give  yourself  up  entirely  and  try  to  go  into  a 
quiet,  natural  sleep.  This  drowsy  feeling  seems  to 
be  going  over  the  whole  body  and  you  will  go  to 
sleep. 

Method  Number  Two. 

2.  Let  the  subject  be  seated  in  a  comfortable 
chair  or  recline  on  a  couch  or  bed.  Make  the  test 
to  find  out  if  the  subject  is  naturally  in  a  suggestible 
state.  If  he  cannot  open  his  eyes,  he  is  in  a  good 
condition  to  receive  suggestions.  If  he  opens  his 
eyes  easily  when  you  take  his  right  hand  in  your 
right  hand  and  place  the  fingers  on  the  crown  of  his 
head  and  your  thumb  with  gentle  pressure  over  the 
supposed  organ  of  individuality  between  the  eye- 
brows, you  may  know  that  he  is  not  naturally  in  a 
receptive  or  passive  condition.  Have  him  look  at  an 
object  held  over  his  forehead  so  that  his  eyes  will 
have  to  look  up  at  a  good  angle  and  talk  to  him  and 
have  him  relax  and  think  about  sleep.  Suggest  that 
a  feeling  of  drowsiness  is  coming  over  the  whole 
body  and  a  sleepy  feeling  is  asserting  itself."  Tell 
him  to  relax  and  be  easy,  as  the  sleepy  feeling  is  be- 
coming deeper,  and  that  it  will  be  very  restful  and 
helpful.  Tell  him  to  suggest  to  himself  that  "I  am 
so  sleepy;  so  restful  and  sleepy;  I  cannot  think  of 
anything  else  than  the  sleepy  feeling  that  is  coming 
over  the  whole  body."  Then  suggest  a  number  of 
times,  "You  are  so  sleepy  and  this  feeling  is  getting 


METHODS  OF  HYPNOTIZING        365 

deeper  and  deeper  and  is  taking  complete  posses- 
sion of  the  whole  body."  Repeat  these  suggestions 
and  determine  that  this  shall  be  the  case.  Then  re- 
peat that  "You  are  so  sleepy;  everything  is  getting 
dark,  and  you  feel  so  restful  and  the  muscles  are 
relaxing  and  you  are  getting  so  sleepy  that  it  seems 
as  though  my  voice  is  getting  farther  and  farther 
away."  Repeat  these  suggestions.  Then  say  I  will 
count  ten  slowly,  and  when  I  say  ten  you  will  be 
sound  asleep.  I  shall  now  begin  the  counting,  one- 
two-three-four-five-six-seven-eight-nine-ten.  Count 
slowly  and  distinctly,  leaving  quite  a  pause  between 
the  numbers.  Then  suggest,  "You  are  asleep;  you 
are  breathing  regularly,  deeply;  you  cannot  hear 
any  sound  except  my  voice."  Repeat  these  sugges- 
tions slowly,  definitely,  and  with  a  determination 
that  they  will  be  carried  out.  With  some  you  will 
not  succeed;  with  others  you  will.  If  you  do  not 
succeed,  try  again  the  next  day.  Keep  on  trying 
until  you  do  succeed. 

Method  Number  Three. 

3.  Let  the  subject  sit  or  recline — let  him  choose 
his  position.  Command  him  to  close  his  eyes  and 
count  mentally  as  you  count  and  keep  track  of  the 
number  of  times  you  count  five.  Count  at  moder- 
ate speed  and  do  not  hesitate  under  any  circum- 
stances. Every  number  you  count  audibly  he  counts 
mentally.  When  you  reach  five  he  mentally  notes 
that.  Begin  at  one  and  go  to  five.  He  keeps  count 
of  the  fives  you  mention.     Keep  this  up  until  he  is 


366  SUGGESTION 

hopelessly  entangled  in  his  effort  to  keep  mental 
count  and  when  his  eyelids  begin  to  quiver,  which  is 
a  sign  that  he  is  failing  to  keep  up  with  you,  give 
him  the  suggestion:  "You  are  getting  sleepy,  very 
sleepy;  you  are  going  sound  asleep,  sound  asleep; 
you  are  going  into  a  quiet,  restful  sleep,  sleep, 
sleep."    Repeat  the  suggestions. 

Method  Number  Four. 

4.  Have  the  subject  take  a  sitting  position.  Stand 
in  front  and  close  to  him.  Have  him  count  the  num- 
ber of  passes  you  make  in  front  of  his  eyes  and 
especially  keep  track  of  the  number  of  times  you 
make  three  passes.  Make  them  regularly  and 
smoothly  and  as  soon  as  an  appearance  of  confu- 
sion manifests  itself  in  his  face  command  him  to 
close  his  eyes.  Suggest  sleep  as  in  previous  meth- 
ods and  also  suggest  deep  sleep  over  and  over  again. 

Method  Number  Five. 

5.  Have  the  subject  sit  in  an  easy  chair  or  recline 
on  a  couch.  If  he  is  sitting,  stand  behind  him;  if 
lying,  sit  at  his  head.  Have  him  look  up  and  keep 
his  eyes  looking  up  into  your  eyes  or  at  some  object 
held  so  the  eyes  must  look  up.  Suggest  after  a  few 
moments  that  the  eyelids  are  getting  heavy  and  have 
a  tendency  to  close.  Say  to  him,  "The  eyes  are  fixed 
in  their  look  and  the  eyelids  are  closing,  going  shut. 
It  is  impossible  to  open  your  eyes.  You  are  breath- 
ing regularly  and  you  cannot  open  your  eyes  until 
I  tell  you  to."     Make  the  suggestions  many  times 


METHODS  OF  HYPNOTIZING        367 

and  with  a  quiet  positive  tone  of  voice.  You  can 
suggest  sleep  and  rest  and  secure  excellent  results. 

When  you  desire  to  relieve  him  you  can  suggest 
that  "the  eyes  are  resuming  the  normal  position,  and 
you  will  now  look  down  toward  the  floor;  you  are 
all  right  and  your  eyes  open  easily."  Repeat  these 
suggestions. 

Method  Number  Six. 

6.  Have  the  subject  lie  on  a  couch.  Have  him  re- 
lax all  the  muscles  of  the  body.  Tell  him  to  think  of 
nothing  especially,  but  that  he  can  have  a  scene  of  a 
landscape  before  his  mind,  if  he  desires,  and  can 
look  at  it  mentally.  Sit  at  the  head  of  the  couch. 
Lay  your  right  or  left  hand  upon  his  forehead  ac- 
cording to  the  side  you  are  on.  Close  your  eyes 
and  concentrate  your  thought  on  sleep,  and  on  the 
thought  of  bringing  relief  to  the  patient  if  he  is  sick. 
Suggest  rest  and  sleep  if  he  feels  like  going  to  sleep. 
If  not,  suggest  relaxation  and  rest.  If  he  sleeps,  or 
if  he  comes  into  a  thoroughly  relaxed  condition, 
make  suggestions  that  he  will  feel  well,  or  that  he  is 
able  to  do  what  he  desires  to  do.  This  method  is  a 
good  one  to  adopt,  especially  when  sleep  occurs,  to 
cure  habits  and  establish  principles  of  success  and 
and  helpfulness. 

Method  Number  Seven. 

7.  Let  the  subject  recline  on  a  couch,  place  a 
folded  handkerchief  over  his  eyes.  Tell  him  to  go 
into  a  natural  sleep.  Allow  him  to  be  quiet  and  un- 
disturbed for  ten  minutes,  and  if  you  think  that  he 


368  SUGGESTION 

is  not  perfectly  quiet  wait  longer.  When  you  think 
that  he  is  beginning  to  feel  sleepy,  which  you  will 
know  from  regular  and  deep  breathing,  begin  in  a 
very  low  tone  of  voice  and  say:  "You  are  relaxing 
all  the  muscles  of  the  body  and  you  are  feeling  very 
sleepy  and  comfortable.  You  have  no  desire  to 
move  as  you  feel  very  sleepy.  There  is  a  drowsy 
feeling  coming  over  the  whole  body ;  your  limbs  feel 
heavy ;  your  whole  weight  is  being  let  down  on  the 
couch;  you  are  gradually  going  into  sound  sleep, 
sound  sleep.  The  sleep  will  be  very  refreshing  and 
you  are  going  down  into  deep,  restful  sleep.  Sound 
asleep,  sound  asleep."  Repeat  these  suggestions 
This  takes  a  little  longer  to  get  persons  asleep  but  a 
larger  per  cent  will  be  more  favorably  affected  than 
by  any  of  the  previous  methods.  The  place  must  be 
very  quiet,  and  if  anyone  else  is  in  the  room  they 
must  not  talk  or  whisper. 

Method  Number  Eight. 

8.  Let  the  subject  recline  or  sit.  Hold  a  bright 
object  between  the  thumb  and  first  finger  in  front  of 
his  eyes  and  from  six  to  eight  inches  above  his  fore- 
head. Tell  him  to  look  steadfastly  at  it  and  not  to 
wink  his  eyelids  very  often  or  let  his  look  waver. 
The  position  of  the  object  will  strain  the  muscles  of 
the  eyes  and  fatigue  will  occur.  Tell  him  that  as 
soon  as  he  begins  to  feel  tired  and  his  eyes  feel  like 
closing,  to  let  them  shut.  As  soon  as  the  eyes  are 
closed,  say,  "Go  to  sleep ;  go  down  deep  into  sleep ; 
deeper,  deeper  yet;  go  down  into  sound  sleep,  deep 


METHODS  OF  HYPNOTIZING         369 

sleep."  Give  these  suggestions  over  a  number  of 
times  until  you  know  he  is  sound  asleep.  Then 
make  your  suggestions  for  recovery,  etc. 

Method  Number  Nine. 

9.  Stand  about  two  feet  from  the  subject,  who  is 
reclining  or  sitting.  The  latter  position  is  prefer- 
able. Point  your  index  finger  upward  with  the  other 
fingers  closed.  Bring  your  finger  so  that  it  points 
about  six  inches  or  a  little  more  above  the  subject's 
eyes.  Tell  him  that  as  your  finger  approaches  his 
eyes  a  feeling  of  weight  will  be  felt  in  the  lids,  and 
that  his  eyelids  will  commence  to  close  and  he  will 
go  to  sleep.  Move  your  finger  toward  him  slowly, 
and  say:  "Your  eyelids  are  becoming  heavy,  very 
heavy;  so  heavy  that  you  cannot  hold  them  open. 
You  cannot  hold  them  open ;  they  are  becoming  very 
heavy;  heavier  and  heavier;  they  are  closing;  they 
are  closed."  Repeat  these  suggestions  until  the  eyes 
close  and  then  suggest  sleep,  sound  sleep.  Move 
your  finger  very  slowly.  If  there  is  no  tendency  in 
him  to  sleep,  stop  the  movement  and  let  him  gaze 
at  your  finger,  and  then  continue  the  motion  and 
suggestions. 

Method  Number  Ten. 

ro.  Operator  and  subject  are  seated  opposite  each 
other.  Tell  the  subject  to  look  into  your  right  or 
left  eye  and  concentrate  his  gaze  on  it  so  that  he  can- 
not see  anything  but  that  eye.  Do  not  allow  his 
gaze  to  waver  or  to  look  down  or  away  from  your 
eye.  When  his  gaze  assumes  a  vacant  look  or  be- 
24 


370  SUGGESTION 

gins  to  falter,  suggest  to  him  that  he  close  his  eyes. 
Tell  him  to  "go  to  sleep,  sleep ;  go  sound  asleep ;  go 
into  a  restful,  quiet,  sound  sleep."  Repeat  these 
suggestions  until  he  is  sound  asleep,  then  make  your 
suggestions  for  his  benefit.  As  you  look  into  his 
face,  look  between  his  eyes,  or  as  if  you  were  look- 
ing through  his  eyes. 

Method  Number  Eleven. 

11.  Let  the  subject  sit.  Suggest  relaxation.  Tell 
him  to  think  of  sleep  and  close  his  eyes.  Let  him 
alone  for  five  minutes.  If  he  is  not  asleep  stand  at 
his  right  side,  placing  your  left  hand  at  the  back  of 
his  head,  the  thumb  of  the  hand  resting  behind  his 
right  ear,  the  fingers  resting  behind  the  left  ear. 
Place  the  right  hand  on  the  forehead,  thumb  on 
right  temple  and  finger  tips  on  left  temple.  Move 
the  head  easily  and  slowly,  and  gently  press  the 
head.  When  the  head  seems  to  droop  and  feel  heavy 
commence  to  suggest  sleep,  as  in  previous  methods. 
Repetition  of  suggestions  deepen  them  and  when 
the  subject  is  asleep  you  can  make  the  suggestions 
that  are  necessary  to  help  him  and  do  him  good. 

Method  Number  Twelve. 

12.  Have  the  subject  recline.  Tell  him  to  breathe 
regularly  and  relax  every  muscle.  Suggest  relaxa- 
tion of  all  the  muscles  of  arms,  legs,  back,  neck,  and 
chest.  Then  repeat  by  suggesting  each  arm,  leg, 
etc.  Breathe  loudly,  and  have  him  breathe  with  you. 
Put  your  hand  on  his  forehead  and  suggest  that  "a 
sleepy  feeling  is  coming  over  the  whole  body.    This 


DONATO'S  METHOD  371 

feeling  will  become  general  over  the  whole  body. 
A  sleepy  feeling  is  coming  over  the  whole  body.  You 
are  relaxing  every  muscle  and  you  will  now  com- 
mence to  breathe  deeply.  Breathe  with  me ;  you  will 
begin  to  feel  very  sleepy,  and  this  feeling  will  be  very 
restful.  So  sleepy,  sleepy,  sleepy.  You  are  going 
into  a  deep  sleep;  deeper,  deeper,  deeper;  you  are 
going  into  a  deep,  sound  sleep."  Repeat  the  sugges- 
tions. Then  when  he  is  asleep  follow  up  with  the 
suggestions  that  you  want  to  give  for  changing  the 
thought,  habit,  character,  and  life.  This  is  one  of 
the  best  methods  that  can  be  used.  It  is  part  of  one 
of  my  methods  in  which  I  have  the  first  failure  yet 
to  record. 

Prof.  Donato's  Method. 

Prof.  Donato  claims  that  the  surest  way  to  affect 
the  imagination  of  a  person  is  to  impose  upon  him  a 
stronger  will.  The  method  consists  in  working  rap- 
idly without  giving  time  for  the  subject  to  reflect  or 
recover  himself.  He  carries  out  in  practice  that 
which  is  expressed  in  theory  by  the  phrases :  "Mute 
with  astonishment,"  "paralyzed  with  fear,"  "dead 
with  fright,"  "petrified  with  admiration."  He  sur- 
prises his  subjects  and  thus  obtains  paralysis,  aph- 
ony, etc.,  without  trying  to  put  them  to  sleep  pre- 
viously. The  special  phases  of  his  method  consist  in 
asking  the  patient  to  press  his  hands  on  Donato's 
hands.  He  suddenly  pushes  him  backward  and 
looks  sternly  into  the  subject's  eyes.  Surprised,  the 
subject  recoils  and  immediately  the  look  of  his  eyes 


372  SUGGESTION 

indicates  his  degree  of  impressibility.  If  Donate  finds 
that  he  is  submissive,  he  makes  a  circular  movement 
with  the  head  and  body  whilst  looking  at  him  with 
a  stern  gaze  of  the  eyes.  He  claims  that  twenty  per 
cent  of  the  persons  who  submit  to  the  test  are  con- 
trolled by  visual  fascination,  charmed  by  the  look, 
and  that  they  will  follow  anywhere  without  trying 
to  detach  their  eyes  from  his. 

Prof.  Bernheim,  of  Nancy,  gives  the  following  ex- 
planation of  this  method :  "The  fascination  used  for 
the  first  time  by  Donato,  who  operates  specially  on 
young  people,  proceeds  as  follows :  'He  asks  the  sub- 
ject to  apply  the  palms  of  his  hands  on  his  own, 
which  are  stretched  horizontally,  and  to  press  down- 
ward with  all  his  strength.  The  attention  and  all 
physical  strength  of  the  subject  are  absorbed  in 
his  manoeuvers,  while  his  concentrated  enervation 
toward  muscular  effort  prevents  his  thoughts  from 
being  distracted.  Donato  looks  at  the  young  man 
quickly,  brusquely,  and  very  near ;  the  operator  then 
turns  round  the  subject  continuing  to  fix  and  pro- 
voke him  with  his  glance;  the  latter,  as  though  at- 
tracted and  fascinated,  follows  him  with  wide  open 
eyes,  which  can  no  more  be  detached  from  his  own. 
It  is  a  matter  of  suggestion  by  gesture.  The  subject 
understands  by  the  fixity  of  the  magnetizer's  eyes  on 
his  that  his  eyes  must  remain  attached  to  the  mag- 
netizer's and  follow  them  anywhere.  He  thinks 
himself  attracted  toward  him ;  it  is  a  psychical  sug- 
gestion, fascination,  and  in  no  way  physical.'  " 


DONATO'S  METHOD  373 

Donate  says  that  "the  art  of  hypnotism  consists  in 
striking  the  imagination  of  the  subject  in  such  a 
manner  as  to  convince  him  that  he  attracts  him  as 
the  magnet  attracts  the  iron."  This  is  only  partially 
true  of  the  art  of  hypnotism  and  specifically  true  of 
his  method. 

Another  part  of  Donato's  method  he  describes  as 
follows :  'T  ask  the  patients  to  kneel  before  me  and 
to  look  steadily  into  my  eyes.  Standing  before  them 
I  place  my  hand  on  their  foreheads  and  incline  their 
heads  slightly  backward.  As  soon  as  they  try  to 
straighten  their  pupils  I  direct  into  them  an  impera- 
tive glance,  which  paralyzes  them  if  they  are  sensi- 
tive to  my  influence.  From  the  moment  that  a  pa- 
tient has  given  proof  of  submission  by  following  my 
eyes  in  my  first  process,  and  in  remaining  nailed  to 
the  ground  in  my  second,  I  can  almost  always  make 
him  go  through  the  sucessive  phases  which  I  will 
mention  succinctly,  without  entering  into  details  of 
intermediate  periods  of  which  the  description  would 
be  too  long. 

I.  "With  a  word  or  look  or  significant  gesture,  I 
make  him  walk  and  move  backward  in  spite  of  him- 
self. I  arrest  his  arm  if  he  wishes  to  strike,  his  hand 
if  he  wishes  to  write,  his  legs  if  he  wishes  to  walk. 
I  render  him  numb  or  mute,  etc.  I  obtain  these  re- 
sults by  provoking  different  forms  of  paralysis.  The 
subject  is  in  no  way  asleep;  he  possesses  full  con- 
sciousness of  his  acts,  and,  brought  back  to  the  nor- 


374  SUGGESTION 

mal  state  by  a  word  or  a  breath,  he  can  relate  the 
different  experiments  he  has  submitted  to. 

2.  "By  degrees  in  the  course  of  the  experiments 
the  power  of  a  fixed  idea  takes  complete  possession 
of  a  subject;  his  psychic  individuality  is  effaced,  and 
he  ends  by  being  absorbed  in  me.  At  first,  he  saw, 
heard,  and  felt  only  me ;  now  he  feels,  thinks,  desires 
and  acts  only  in  conformity  to  my  caprice.  I  can 
force  upon  him  the  falsest  ideas,  illusory  sensa- 
tions, the  most  unnatural  desires,  the  strangest  acts. 
He  accepts  them  and  obeys  without  resistance.  He 
has  abdicated  his  will  without  regret,  under  the 
charm  of  a  seductive  fascination.  This  is  the  un- 
conscious phase ;  it  presents  none  of  the  characteris- 
tics of  either  physiological  or  pathological  sleep. 

"When     the     subjects    are    quite    docile,    the 

most  marvelous  results  are  obtained  at  once.  Thus, 
in  presence  of  the  photographic  apparatus,  I  have 
attracted  a  number  of  subjects  by  a  glance,  then  with 
a  gesture  I  have  rendered  them  as  inmobile  as  wax 
figures  in  a  museum."  Many  experiments  were  ef- 
fectively tried  and  successfully  carried  out. 

We  question  the  permanent  value  of  this  surprise 
method.  It  may  be  interesting  to  use  it  in  entertain- 
ments or  on  the  stage,  but  not  in  the  quiet  of  the 
treating  room.  We  do  not  care  for,  and,  in  fact,  we 
think  that  a  law  ought  to  be  passed  prohibiting  the 
public  performances  of  hypnotism..  We  give  the 
method  for  what  it  is  worth  to  the  readers,  but  do 


METHODS  OF  HYPNOTIZING        375 

not  advise  its  practice  in  general.  There  may  be 
times  when  it  can  be  well  and  profitably  used. 

These  methods  could  be  supplemented  by  many 
others.  Let  me  emphasize  one  thing,  and  that  is, 
there  must  be  the  spirit  of  agreement,  between  the 
operator  and  the  subject,  to  get  the  best  results. 

The  hypnotic  state  is  the  most  favorable  for  the  re- 
ception and  effectiveness  of  suggestion.  In  this  con- 
dition the  operator  and  subject  are  en  rapport. 

Mr.  F.  W.  H.  Myers,  has  presented,  in  illustrative 
form,  the  value  and  action  of  hypnotism.  "In  wak- 
ing consciousness  I  am  like  the  proprietor  of  a  fac- 
tory whose  machines  I  do  not  understand.  My  fore- 
man— myself — weaves  for  me  so  many  yards  of 
broadcloth  per  diem  (my  ordinary  vital  processes, 
as  matter  of  course).  If  I  want  any  pattern  more 
complex,  I  have  to  shout  my  orders  in  the  din  of  the 
factory  where  only  two  or  three  inferior  workmen 
hear  me,  and  shift  their  looms  in  a  small  and  scat- 
tered way.  At  certain  intervals,  indeed,  the  fore- 
man stops  most  of  the  looms,  and  uses  the  freed 
power  to  stoke  the  engine  and  to  oil  the  machinery. 
This,  in  my  metaphor,  is  sleep,  and  it  will  be  an  ef- 
fective hypnotic  trance  if  I  can  get  him  to  stop  still 
more  of  the  looms,  come  out  of  his  private  room, 
and  attend  to  my  orders — myself — suggestion — for 
their  repair  and  rearrangement.  The  question  for 
us  proper  then  is  how  we  can  best  get  at  our  potent 
but  secluded  foreman ;  in  what  way  we  can  make  to 
our   subliminal   selves   effective   suggestions.     We 


376  SUGGESTION 

must  look  for  guidance  to  actual  experience,  not  to 
hypnotism  alone,  but  to  all  forms  of  self-suggestion, 
which  are  practically  found  to  remove  and  soothe 
the  common  man." 

We  are  incHned  to  the  belief  that  suggestion,  to  be 
effective,  must  be  lodged  in  the  subconscious  mind, 
and  the  best  condition  for  accomplishing  this  is  a 
passive  condition  of  the  conscious  mind.  The  hyp- 
notic is  the  surest  method ;  however,  if  the  conscious 
mind  of  the  subject  is  not  antagonistic,  but  accepts 
and  helps  to  deepen  the  suggestion  in  the  subcon- 
scious mind,  greater,  if  not  complete,  results 
will  be  secured.  In  many  cases  a  relaxed  condition 
removes  all  antagonism  and  most  marvelous  conse- 
quences follow  the  imparting  of  suggestions. 

Some  persons  are  more  easily  affected  than  oth- 
ers. Some  people  will  go  into  an  hypnotic  sleep  by 
simply  suggesting  sleep  and  laying  the  hands  on  the 
eyes  and  closing  them.  Some  will  go  into  deep  sleep 
by  looking  at  a  bright  object  or  a  suspended  ball. 
Revolving  mirrors  have  been  effectively  used  for  the 
same  purpose.  So  has  the  phonograph.  Inhaling 
odorized  air  through  a  tube  connected  with  a  tank 
has  a  powerful  effect  on  some  minds  in  inducing 
sleep. 

Pain,  in  a  person  who  is  suggestible,  can  be  re- 
lieved almost  instantaneously  by  laying  the  hands  on 
him  and  saying  that  "it  is  gone."  Repeating  the 
suggestion  in  a  strong  tone,  then  whispering  the  sug- 


HYPNOTISM  377 

gestion  in  the  ear,  will  bring  at  times  wonderful  re- 
lief. 

We  have  found  that  deep  sleep  is  the  best  in  which 
to  get  speedy  and  permanent  results,  unless  the  com- 
plete co-operation  of  the  conscious  mind  of  the  sub- 
ject can  be  secured. 

Either  reclining  on  a  couch  or  in  a  semi-recum- 
bent posture  are  the  best  positions  for  receiving  sug- 
gestion. Deep  and  regular  breathings  are  usually 
sure  signs  of  deep  sleep. 

Experience  is  the  best  teacher,  for  methods  vary 
according  to  the  necessities,  and  the  best  plans  of 
one  may  not  be  those  for  another. 

Hypnotism  is  not  universally  effective.  There 
have  been  and  there  will  be  failures. 

Prof.  H.  H.  Goddard  has  compiled  a  table  from 
414  cases  treated  by  hypnotism;  71  were  absolute 
failures,  92  only  slightly  helped,  98  were  perma- 
nently changed,  100  were  cured,  and  53  results  un- 
known. He  shows  three  things  from  his  investiga- 
tions : 

1.  That  the  deeper  the  hypnotism  the  larger  the 
percentage  of  cures. 

2.  That  all  cases  are  not  cured. 

3.  That  some  cases  are  less  influenced  than  others 
by  hypnotism. 

Dr.  J.  M.  Bramwell  reports  76  cases  of  dipso- 
mania and  chronic  alcoholism  treated  by  himself  by 
hypnotic  suggestion.    The  results  were  28  complete- 


378  SUGGESTION 

ly  cured,  36  improved,  12  not  helped.  Only  those 
who  abstained  for  three  years  were  looked  upon  as 
cured.  For  tendencies  and  evils  in  childhood  hyp- 
notism is  one  of  the  best  agencies  in  the  world. 

Certain  psychical  and  physical  differences  require 
the  employment  of  different  methods  in  order  to 
effectually  secure  the  desired  results  in  the  mental 
or  physical  nature  of  the  person  treated. 

(g)  How  to  Awaken  a  Subject. 

There  is  usually  no  difficulty  in  awakening  a  sub- 
ject, as  most  persons  in  an  hypnotic  state  will  awaken 
in  a  comparatively  short  time  unless  commanded  not 
to  do  so.  There  are  certain  hysterical  persons  who 
may  not  be  quickly  awakened,  but  it  is  due  to  the 
fact  that  the  bodily  condition  demands  sleep.  That 
sleep  will  be  recuperative  and  health-giving,  and 
need  not  occasion  any  anxiety,  as  the  person  will 
awaken  in  due  time  when  the  body  is  rested.  How- 
ever, it  is  expedient  for  the  operator  to  suggest  the 
length  of  time  the  subject  is  to  sleep,  and  the  mode 
of  his  awakening.  This  ought  to  be  done  early  in 
the  treatments.  For  instance,  it  can  be  suggested  to 
the  subject  that  he  will  awaken  when  the  operator 
blows  his  breath  gently  on  his  eyes  or  in  his  face, 
or  that  he  will  awaken  when  the  operator  says,  "now 
you  can  awaken  and  you  will  feel  refreshed  and  be 
wide  awake."  The  eyelids  can  be  gently  lifted  and 
previous  suggestion  will  apprise  the  subject  of  the 
fact  that  when  this  is  done  that  he  will  awaken. 
There  are  many  methods  that  can  be  used  by  the 


HOW  TO  AWAKEN  A  SUBJECT       379 

operator  to  bring  back  the  subject  into  a  complete 
waking  condition. 

The  subjects  ought  to  be  studied  as  to  their  tem- 
perments  and  physical  conditions.  In  certain  cases, 
it  is  best  to  awaken  some  slowly.  For  instance,  say : 
"You  are  waking  up  and  now  you  feel  new  vigor. 
You  are  becoming  wide  awake,  and  you  feel  well." 
Many  other  suggestions  can  be  given.  Different 
persons  ought  to  be  treated  differently. 

It  is  not  good  for  the  patient  to  be  suddenly  and 
sharply  awakened.  Do  not  clap  the  hands  or  use  any 
surprise  methods,  as  you  may  shock  the  nervous 
system  and  make  the  patient  feel  bad  for  hours  af- 
ter. When  we  deal  with  the  human  mind  and  body 
we  are  dealing  with  the  greatest  things  in  this  uni- 
verse, and  an  operator  has  no  right  to  take 
undue  liberties  with  either,  in  the  waking  or  sleep- 
ing state,  and  when  bringing  one  out  of  a  sleeping 
condition  into  the  wakeful  state  those  methods  ought 
to  be  used  that  will  bring  health,  pleasure,  and  profit 
to  the  subject. 

Auto-hypnotism  is  self-induced  sleep.  The  possi- 
bility of  bringing  about  this  condition  is  dependent 
on  one's  abiltiy  to  equalize  the  circulation  of  the 
blood  by  relaxation  and  inducing  sleep  by  the  con- 
centration of  the  mind.  Many  persons  have  induced 
this  sleep  in  themselves  many  times  and  did  not 
know  what  it  was.  It  was  sleep,  but  they  did  not 
know  how  it  was  brought  about.  They  counted 
sheep  or  numbers,  looked  at  a  bright  light,  repeated 


38o  SUGGESTION 

something  over  and  over,  slower  and  slower  until 
they  dropped  off  into  sleep.  They  have  thus  hypno- 
tized themselves.  When  the  ability  to  concentrate 
the  mind  and  control  it  is  developed,  it  is  an  easy 
thing  to  produce  a  sleepy  condition  and  to  determine 
how  long  that  shall  continue.  Another  good  method 
is  to  think  of  the  suggestions  you  would  give  to  one 
that  you  desire  to  hypnotize  or  put  to  sleep.  When 
a  drowsy  condition  prevails  that  is  a  good  time  for 
the  conscious  mind  to  make  suggestions  to  the  sub- 
conscious mind  and  splendid  results  will  be  realized. 
If  you  desire  to  awaken  at  a  certain  time,  make  the 
suggestion  to  the  mind  as  you  are  going  to  sleep  or 
determine  that  you  will  awaken  at  a  certain  time 
before  you  try  to  induce  the  self-hypnotic  condition. 

One  can  do  much  for  himself  if  these  instructions 
are  followed,  and  after  a  little  practice  there  will 
come  a  mastery  of  which  the  subject  has  probably 
never  dreamed.  Men  and  women  have  not  yet  rea- 
lized the  great  power  within  their  reach — within 
themselves — for  curative,  re-creative,  and  recupera- 
tive results.  Many  are  getting  glimpses  of  this  pow- 
er, and  some  are  using  a  little  of  it  with  amazing 
results. 

There  are  many  methods  of  hypnotizing,  but  we 
have  given  the  legitimate  and  the  best.  There  is  a 
surprise  method  which  will  work  with  some  but  will 
fail  with  others.  There  is  also  a  telephone  method, 
which  is  conditioned  upon  one  being  hypnotized  by 
an  operator  and  then  when  some  distance  away  in 


DIFFERENT  METHODS  381 

conversation  over  the  phone  the  operator  can  sug- 
gest sleep,  and  if  the  person  is  very  sensitive  he  will 
probably  obey.  There  is  no  particular  necessity  for 
this,  and  we  shall  pass  it  by.  This  can  be  done  by 
telegraph  also,  under  the  same  conditions. 

A  hypnotized  person  may  be  given  a  post-hypnotic 
suggestion,  and  this  will  greatly  assist  in  the  tele- 
phone and  telegram  methods.  These  methods  may 
be,  and  to  a  certain  extent  are,  tricks.  But  there  is  no 
need  of  them. 

What  has  been  called  the  instantaneous  method  is 
dependent  upon  the  post-hypnotic  suggestion,  that  is, 
suggestions  given  in  the  hypnotic  condition  to  be 
carried  out  after  the  subject  has  come  out  of  the 
hypnotic  state. 

It  is  unnecessary  for  me  to  give  methods  for  in- 
ducing anesthesia.  This  condition  is  induced  by 
hypnotizing  a  person  and  inducing  deep  sleep  and 
passing  the  hand  over  the  part  to  be  anesthetized  and 
suggest  that  "All  feeling  is  leaving  that  part;  you 
will  feel  no  pain ;  you  will  not  feel  anything,  and  the 
sense  of  feeling  in  that  part  of  the  body  is  gone." 
If  the  subject  receives  the  suggestions,  he  will  not 
suffer  pain  under  an  operation;  such  as  drawing  a 
tooth  or  performing  a  surgical  operation,  or  doing 
anything  in  which  anesthesia  is  required.  This  is  a 
great  help  in  child-birth.  The  pain  can  be  marvel- 
ously  controlled. 


382  SUGGESTION 

(h)  To  Awaken  a  Person  Hypnotised  by  Another. 

There  have  been  cases  where  an  amateur  could 
not  awaken  his  subjects  or  when  one  has  been  hyp- 
notized and  the  person  who  did  the  hypnotizing  did 
not  know  how  to  awaken  the  subject.  If  the  opera- 
tor is  present  he  can  make  the  following  suggestions, 
"You  are  sound  asleep ;  you  are  resting  quietly ;  you 

are  in  a  deep  sleep ;  Mr. will  command  you 

to  awaken  and  as  soon  as  you  hear  his  voice  you 
will  awaken."  If  the  person  does  not  awaken  then, 
make  suggestions  to  put  him  to  sleep,  just  as  if  you 
were  hypnotizing  him.  You  can  use  any  one  of  the 
methods  referred  to  under  methods,  and  when  you 
think  the  subject  is  en  rapport  with  you,  suggest 
that  he  will  awaken  when  you  tell  him  to.  It  is  a 
good  plan  to  ask  the  subject  what  you  should  do  in 
order  to  waken  him  and  he  will  probably  tell  you. 
Do  what  he  suggests  and  he  will  then  awaken. 

(i).  Hysterical  Persons. 

Care  should  be  used  in  hypnotizing  hysterical  per- 
sons on  account  of  certain  abnormal  conditions  which 
may  assert  themselves.  Their  fears  must  be  quieted ; 
the  pulse  ought  to  be  carefully  watched,  so  that  if 
it  becomes  very  rapid  or  very  slow,  the  operator  may 
know  that  it  is  best  to  desist  for  the  time.  The  nor- 
mal pulse  is  about  y2,  and  much  above  or  much  be- 
low this  is  a  warning.  Hypnotism  is  a  sure  cure  for 
many  phases  of  hysteria  and  can  be  helpfully  used 
when  done  so  judiciously.  We  only  sound  the  warn- 
ing here  without  giving  methods  of  application. 


NUMBER  OF  TREATMENTS  383 

(/)  Number  of  Treatments. 

How  many  treatments  will  be  required  to  cure 
people  of  their  ailments,  habits,  vices,  neurasthenia, 
etc.,  etc.  No  one  knows.  It  depends  on  a  number 
of  things.  One  treatment  may  lead  to  the  recov- 
ery of  some,  four  or  five  may  cure  others,  ten  or. 
twelve  may  be  necessary  for  others,  many  more  may 
be  needed  for  others. 

Some  may  need  the  treatments  daily,  some  every 
other  day,  some  weekly,  etc.  A  good  rule  is  to  treat 
about  three  times  a  week.  At  first,  it  may  be  best  to 
treat  daily  for  three  or  four  days. 

If  the  patient  can  relax  completely  and  very 
readily  and  concentrate  the  mind  on  your  sugges- 
tions, one  treatment  will  accomplish  wonders,  but 
in  a  large  majority  of  cases  several,  and  perhaps  a 
number  of  treatments  will  be  necessary.  The  num- 
ber will  depend  also  on  the  nature  and  seriousness 
of  the  trouble  and  sickness  and  the  patient's  recep- 
tivity to  suggestion. 

There  is  a  tendency  at  times  for  patients  to  be- 
come discouraged  and  say :  "I  do  not  see  much 
change."  They  want  a  complete  revolution  in  their 
thought  and  feelings  in  two  or  three  treatments. 
They  will  have  to  be  taught  that  their  infirmity  and 
condition  did  not  come  in  a  day  or  a  week  or  a 
month  or  a  year,  but  has  been  on  hand  for  a  long 
time  and  has  rooted  itself  deeply  in  the  nature.  It 
takes  time  to  change  the  thought  and  feelings  and 
get  the  mastery  over  the  body. 


384  SUGGESTION 

An  operator  is  unwise  to  promise  a  cure  in  a  cer- 
tain number  of  treatments.  Beneficial  results  may 
be  realized  in  a  few  treatments  but  a  cure  may  take 
considerable  time. 


AUTO-SUGGESTION  385 


CHAPTER  XVI. 

I.      AUTO-SUGGESTION. 

/Self-suggestion,  if  it  is  persisted  in,  is  the  most 
effective  method  of  removing  an  abnormal  condition 
and  establishing  a  normal.  Let  one  who  desires  to 
secure  the  highest  ideals  in  his  life,  spiritual,  mental, 
and  physical,  devote  an  hour  each  day  systemati- 
cally to  calling  up  pleasant  ideas  and  memories ;  let 
him  summon  the  finer  feelings  of  love  and  unselfish- 
ness and  meditate  on  them,  and  do  this  regularly, 
and  he  will  find  at  the  end  of  the  month  a  change  in 
himself  which  will  be  surprising./  Healthful  cells 
will  be  developed  and  poisoned  cells  will  have 
shrunk  and  will  have  been  eliminated  from  the  sys- 
tem. He  will  be  renewed.  ^Many  doubt  if  quiet 
talking  to  one's  self,  when  relaxed  and  in  a  restful 
condition,  will  work  any  change  in  the  nature.  It 
has  been  proven  many  times  that  it  will.  A  real 
desire  and  wilHngness  to  try  this  method  of  helpful- 
ness is  all  that  is  required  to  prove  the  power  of 
auto-suggestion/ 

/Self-cure  is  wrought  in  all  cases,  where  a  cure  is 
made  at  all,  by  auto-suggestion  to  the  subconscious 
mind  of  the  patient.    Suggestion  can  secure  health 

25 


386  SUGGESTION 

and  neural  change  in  a  person  through  the  vital 
forces.  These  are  most  easily  reached  through  the 
subconscious  mindi 

/The  practitioner  needs  to  use  auto-suggestion  for 
his  own  development,  for  maintaining  his  own 
health,  self-control,  energy,  and  to  develop  in  himself 
the  method  of  securing  wisdom,  courage,  faith,  and 
power.  He  may  thus  personally  learn  by  experi- 
ence what  it  can  do  for  himself,  and  what  it  may 
do  for  others. '  Sensory-impressions  create  thought 
and  feeling.  Every  sense  is  a  pathway  to  the  cortex 
of  the  brain,  and  all  feelings  and  thoughts  will  ex- 
press themselves,  unless  inhibited  or  diverted. 
These  channels  of  the  conscious  mind  somehow 
carry  the  knowledge  thus  secured  into  the  subcon- 
scious mind  where  it  is  classified  and  kept  or  mani- 
fested in  some  other  way  through  that  mind.  Per- 
sons differ  in  the  receptivity  of  their  nature,  which 
may  be  owing  to  nerve  conditions,  and  thus  receive 
either  unnoticed  results  or  remarkable  consequences. 
This  difference  has  been  frequently  noticeable  in  pa- 
tients. This  is  also  true  in  practitioners,  and  is  due, 
doubtless,  to  differences  in  powers  of  concentration, 
thought,  and  ideals. 

'  The  methods  of  imparting  suggestion  are  by  voice, 

thought,  touch,  look,  and  demeanor  of  the  operator, 
and  by  auto-suggestion  by  the  three  former  methods. 
The  use  of  the  voice  may  be  in  words  spoken,  either 
loudly,  moderately  loud,  softly,  or  in  a  whisper. 
Thought  is  operative  when  silently  and  intentionally 


AUTO-SUGGESTION  387 

passed  on  or  transferred  near  or  at  a  distance.  In 
auto-suggestion  thought  may  be  expressed  or  quietly 
meditated  on  with  intention  of  lodging  it  in  the  sub- 
conscious mind.  Touch  or  tactile  suggestion  may  be 
g^ven  by  laying  on  of  hands,  either  one  or  both,  on 
different  parts  of  the  body  of  others  or  of  one's  self 
with  the  intention  of  getting  certain  effects.  Back 
of  the  voice  and  touch  must  be  faith  in  one's  self, 
and  in  the  true  outcome  of  one's  effort  and  work. 

Suppose  I  say  to  myself,  "I  am  well,"  and  repeat 
this  frequently,  and  then  talk  of  my  pains  and  aches 
and  act  out  those  feelings,  my  suggestion  will  be  nul- 
lified. Give  the  subconscious  mind  the  suggestion 
by  affirmation,  and  by  action  and  thought  deny 
aches,  etc.,  and  the  result  will  be  marvelous.  The 
subconscious  mind  is  quick  in  scenting  insincereity 
in  one's  self  or  another,  and  we  ought  to  give  it  no 
occasion  to  do  so. 

Conduct  and  conscious  feeling  impress  that  mind 
more  powerfully  than  any  affirmations  you  may 
make  to  it  in  words.  Hence,  cheerfulness  is  better 
than  any  medicine,  and  it  leads  to  physical  health. 
Joyful  emotions  ought  to  be  cultivated,  and  they  will 
send  the  blood  bounding  through  the  body  and  bring 
strength  and  power  to  every  part  of  it.  Affirm  that 
you  are  happy;  follow  that  up  with  corresponding 
conduct,  and  the  morbid  feeling  will  subside.  Smile 
and  the  soul  will  smile  with  you,  "Refuse  to  express 
a  feeling  or  passion  and  it  dies."  If  you  would  con- 
quer undesirable  emotional  tendencies  think,  affirm. 


388  SUGGESTION 

and  act  out  the  opposite,  and  your  persistence  will 
change  the  conditions. 

It  is  best  to  make  affirmations  strong  and  com- 
plete, rather  than  with  an  interrogation  after  them. 
That  means  doubt  and  weakness  as  to  result.  Affir- 
mations of  health  and  strength  will  help  one  to  real- 
ize them.  Affirmations  and  actions  must  go  together. 
Impression  and  expression  are  companions,  not  ene- 
mies. Suggestion  is  the  same,  whether  it  be  directed 
to  one's  self  or  to  another.  The  principle  of  appli- 
cation is  the  same,  the  results  ultimately  the  same, 
but  the  attending  phenomena  may  differ  according 
to  the  various  temperaments  of  the  subjects. 

There  are  various  degrees  of  receptivity  in  one's 
self  at  different  times ;  also  in  other  persons ;  so  that 
varying  results  may  be  secured,  but  these  results  ulti- 
mately, if  persisted  in,  will  amply  repay  the  time  and 
effort  expended.  One  takes  suggestion  quickly  and 
receives  immediate  benefits ;  another  does  not.  Cer- 
tain habits  of  thought  and  action  make  one  non- 
amenable  to  auto-suggestion  and  hetero-suggestion 
unless  the  person  is  hypnotized  and  the  conscious 
mind  is  held  in  abeyance.  Hetero-suggestion  may 
be  necessary  before  auto-suggestion  can  be  effective. 
Those  who  lack  self-control  cannot  very  easily  make 
helpful  and  effective  suggestions  to  themselves.  So 
of  the  weak-minded ;  they  cannot  easily  make  or  re- 
ceive helpful  suggestions.  A  quiet  hour  and  a  quiet 
place  ought  to  be  chosen  for  auto-suggestion.  Some 
find  the  early  morning  hour  the  best ;  others  the  even- 


t 


AUTO-SUGGESTION  389 

ing  hour,  just  before  retiring  or  just  before  going  to 
sleep.  There  must  be  a  distinct  purpose  in  the  mind 
as  to  what  one  wants  to  accomplish.  Many  things 
besides  disease  can  be  cured  by  suggestion  and  many 
abnormal  conditions  can  be  prevented.  The  mental 
faculties  can  be  strengthened  and  change  a  man's 
whole  nature  and  make  of  him  almost  what  he  de- 
sires and  wills.  Fears  can  be  removed,  worry  can 
be  checked,  ambition  may  be  increased,  annoyances 
can  be  dismissed,  and  evil  habits  can  be  broken  up. 

The  hour  and  place  of  quietude  being  chosen,  as- 
sume an  attitude  of  ease  and  relaxation,  but  do  not 
sleep.  The  best  posture  ordinarily  is  to  sit  in  an 
easy  chair  or  lie  on  a  couch  or  bed.  The  same  hour 
should  be  observed  each  day  and  kept  for  silence 
and  auto-suggestion.    Use  the  same  chair  or  couch. 

Relax  the  entire  body  and  take  all  tension  off  of 
the  mind.  Think  of  each  part  of  the  body  and  relax 
the  muscles  voluntarily.  Close  the  eyes ;  fix  the  mind 
on  some  special  part,  as  the  brain  or  solar  plexus. 
Make  a  picture  of  it  and  see  it  vividly.  Trace  its 
nerve  connections  if  you  can. 

The  mind  may  wander,  but  bring  it  back  to  the 
picture.  The  best  student  will  succeed  best  in  mental 
concentration,  because  his  mind  is  trained.  The 
greater  power  and  effect  will  come  from  the  concen- 
tration of  the  mind  and  by  exercise  of  the  will  in 
order  to  do  what  you  want  done.  Talk  to  the  sub- 
conscious mind  as  you  would  to  a  person,  and  some- 


390  SUGGESTION 

times  boss  it,  command  it,  compel  it  to  do  what  you 
want  it  to  do. 

The  more  energy  and  intense  earnestness  you  put 
into  suggestion  the  better.  At  times,  you  can  profit- 
ably shout  your  affirmations  and  intensely  will  that 
they  shall  be  obeyed. 

More  than  one  man  has  broken  up  severe  attacks 
of  disease  by  this  method;  even  swearing  has 
changed  mental  and  physical  conditions.  We  do  not 
advocate  this  last  suggestion,  but  only  use  it  as  an 
illustration  to  show  what  intense  feeling  can  do. 

If  you  have  pain  anywhere,  turn  on  the  thought 
and  make  it  stop!  Do  this  often  and  assert  your 
right  to  health,  and  command  the  subconscious  pow- 
ers to  bring  about  relief  immediately. 

Let  your  imagination  show  you  a  healthy  liver,  a 
strong  heart,  perfect  kidneys,  regular  bowels  in  mo- 
tion and  action,  etc.  Command  your  unruly  nerves 
to  be  quiet,  and  demand  that  the  whole  personality 
shall  be  normal  and  healthy. 

You  have  not  added  any  new  powers,  but  awak- 
ened what  you  have. 

Drugs  impart  no  power ;  they  only  arouse  it.  This 
is  the  law  of  drug  medication. 

Some  teachers  tell  us  to  assume  the  religious  atti- 
tude and  open  the  life  and  mind  to  the  Divine  mind 
and  its  inflow.  It  is  good  to  do  this  and  also  to 
know  what  you  are  in  your  real  self.  Learn  to  trust 
yourself  and  use  the  powers  you  have.  "Say,  "I  can 
and  I  will."    Do  not  say,  "I  will  try,  but  I  know  I 


AUTO-SUGGESTION  391 

will  fail."  You  will  then  certainly  fail.  Self-hyp- 
nosis makes  the  effects  of  auto-suggestion  still  more 
powerful.  It  does  not  weaken,  but  strengthens,  the 
mental  powers.  The  sense-life  is  predominant,  and 
ought  to  be  controlled.  Having  followed  the  pre- 
ceding suggestions,  give  the  suggestion  of  sleep  and 
hold  to  the  thought  steadily  and  persistently  in  order 
to  go  into  sleep. 

This  may  be  aided  by  looking  at  some  object  or 
something  that  causes  the  eyes  to  look  up  and  back, 
thus  putting  the  levator  muscles  of  the  eyes  in  a  state 
of  tension.  Look  until  drowsiness  occurs,  and  then 
the  eyes  may  be  closed  whilst  the  mind  still  thinks 
of  sleep. 

Have  strong  suggestions  in  the  conscious  mind  be- 
fore attempting  to  sleep,  and  suggest  consciously 
how  long  you  will  sleep,  and  that  you  will  feel  well 
and  strong  when  you  awaken,  and  that  you  will  be  in 
perfect  condition. 

At  first,  you  will  think  you  did  not  sleep,  but  look- 
ing at  a  clock  or  watch  you  will  find  that  you  have 
slept.  Many  other  proofs  as  a  rap,  the  sound  of  a 
bell,  etc.,  you  will  find  you  did  not  hear. 

Auto-suggestion  should  be  used  regularly  and  sys- 
tematically until  you  get  the  effects  desired. 

Use  it  fully,  strongly,  and  persistently.  You  can 
thus  counteract  many  adverse  conditions  and  feel- 
ings. 


392  SUGGESTION 

2.    Treatment  of  One  Who  is  Conscious. 

It  cannot  be  too  frequently  stated  that  it  is  not 
necessary  to  hypnotize  before  giving  effective  sug- 
gestions. If  one  who  desires  treatment  understands 
something  of  mental  principles,  and  will  co-operate 
with  you  consciously  by  deepening  your  suggestions 
by  auto-sugegstion,  the  quickest  and  best  results  will 
be  obtained.  Some  of  the  most  remarkable  cures 
have  thus  been  effected.  In  the  hypnotic  condition, 
the  operator's  suggestion  only  becomes  effective,  but 
in  a  semi-conscious  or  conscious  state  the  co-opera- 
tion of  the  patient  gives  an  added  factor  of  power. 
If  the  patient  is  in  sympathy  with  you,  en  rapport  in 
feeling  and  desire,  and  the  mind  is  receptive  to  what 
you  say,  great  and  lasting  results  will  follow.  If 
the  condition  is  established  in  which  the  patient  ac- 
cepts the  suggestion  of  sleep,  he  will  just  as  readily 
accept  health-restoring  suggestions,  or  any  others 
which  are  considered  necessary  and  helpful.  If 
there  are  phobias  or  fixed  ideas,  or  hypochondria,  or 
a  condition  that  utterly  controls  the  patient's  con- 
scious mind,  then  it  is  best  to  hypnotize  and  treat 
to  relieve  that  condition.  In  the  great  majority  of 
cases  treatment  is  best  when  the  mind  of  the  patient 
is  conscious.  The  borderland  between  complete 
waking  and  sleeping  is  probably  the  best  condition 
of  all.  The  patient  knows  what  is  being  said  and 
done  and  gives  his  sanction. 


RESULTS  393 


CHAPTER  XVII. 
The  Value  of  Suggestion — How  Measured. 

I.  By  Results. 

The  use  of  suggestion  in  a  systematic  manner  pro- 
duces great  results  in  one's  self  and  in  others.      The 
reflex  benefit  on  the  operator  is  remarkable,  because 
it  brings  him  face  to  face  with  some  of  the  greatest 
problems  in  his  own  life  and  gives  him  a  larger  out- 
look for  himself  and  others.    The  wonderful  results 
to  others  whom  he  treats,  may  be  physical,  in  new  ■ 
health;  mental,  as  to  education  and  development; 
moral,  as  to  habits,  and  the  impartation  of  new  views 
and  standards  of  living ;  and  spiritual,  as  to  the  high- 
est relationships  and  complete  change  of  nature  and 
life.      Considered   in    a   comprehensive    sense,   the 
whole  life  is  a  series  of  suggestions  utilized  or  re-    ■ 
jected  through  which  process  man  gains  discipline,    \ 
character,  and  destiny.     These  results  are  realized    j 
by  people  who  are  intelligently  using  suggestion  as    j 
a  helpful  and  modifying  influence  or  power  in  their^ 
lives. 

The  possibility  of  re-making,  in  a  great  degree,  the  I 
mental  condition  of  one  who  has  not  gotten  the  best  ' 
out  of  his  life,  correcting  abnormal  states,  laying  the  [ 
foundation  for  a  renewed  humanity,  and  making  it 


394  SUGGESTION 

possible  to  lift  mankind  to  a  higher  plane  of  life, 
shows  something  of  the  value  and  the  marvelous 
power  of  suggestion. 

The  possible  recovery  from  disease  is  only  one  of 
a  number  of  things  which  may  be  accomplished  by 
suggestion. 

The  value  of  this  great  power  has  not  been  and 
will  not  be  appreciated  until  its  wider  application 
shall  bring  to  pass  unthought-of  results  in  the  phy- 
sical, moral,  mental,  and  spiritual  realms  of  man's 
life.  It  is  no  surprise  to  me  that  all  the  world  ?s 
seeking  to  know  more  about  this  great  dynamic  in 
human  recovery,  progress,  and  development. 

2.  Measured  by  Power  Developed  and  Used. 

He  who  knows  how  to  influence  others  for  good 
and  understands  the  human  mind  and  how  it  is  con- 
trolled by  motives,  has  a  power  that  is  beyond  calcu- 
lation. He  who  uses  suggestion  for  the  purpose  of 
making  mankind  better,  gains  a  reflex  power  that  is 
simply  divine.  Take  the  great  moral  teachers  of  the 
world — Confucius,  Mahomet,  Socrates,  Plato,  and 
the  power  developed  in  themselves  by  the  utilization 
of  moral  truths  and  teachings,  and  see  the  phenom- 
enal change  which  was  wrought  in  their  own  lives. 
The  greatest  of  all — the  Christ — the  embodiment  of 
all  that  was  highest  and  best  and  noblest,  grew  in 
power  and  in  wisdom  as  he  went  about  doing  good. 
It  was  said  of  Him  in  His  boyhood,  "He  increased 
in  wisdom  and  in  stature  and  in  favor  with  God 
and  man."    Wisdom  is  the  right  use  of  knowledge. 


FAR-REACHING  CONSEQUENCES     395 

and  in  His  life  and  work  He  used  it  to  inspire  men 
to  be  good,  noble,  and  pure,  and  to  do  good.  He 
was  greater  than  any  other  man  because  He  was  bet- 
ter. His  whole  life  on  earth  was  given  to  man  for 
man.  In  this  He  found  development  of  power, 
largeness  of  wisdom,  and  His  future  perpetuity  in 
this  world. 

If  any  man  wants  to  develop  power,  wisdom,  and 
honor,  let  him  use  suggestions  that  will  bless,  cure, 
and  lift  up  man,  and  he  will  receive  more  than  he 
gives. 

Spurgeon,  Mueller,  Moody,  and  many  others 
might  be  named  as  illustrations  of  this  great  truth. 

It  is  not  what  a  man  knows,  but  what  he  gives 
out,  that  blesses  and  helps  others  and  gives  him 
power. 

The  beginnings  of  the  great  reformations,  busi- 
nesses, movements,  and  institutions  are  all  governed 
by  the  same  law.  He  who  helps  others  helps  him- 
self. 

3.  Measured  by  Far-Reaching  Consequences. 

There  are  many  things  that  have  not  been  easy  to 
explain  because  of  involved  conditions.  This  is  true 
of  the  power  of  suggestion  as  to  its  far-reaching 
consequences.  Take,  for  instance,  that  commonly 
accepted  statement  that  Adam  sinned  and  that 
through  generations  there  has  been  a  tendency  in  all 
human  beings  to  sin.  That  suggestion  will  continue 
in  one  form  or  another  to  the  end  of  time.  Heredity 
is  another  illustration. 


396  SUGGESTION 

There  is  a  modifying  influence  for  good  or  evil 
through  suggestion.  Many  a  young  man  or  woman 
has  turned  from  the  path  of  virtue  to  one  of  vice  be- 
cause of  the  fascinating  power  of  a  suggestion  in 
the  form  of  an  insinuation  or  intimation.  Herein 
is  found  the  danger  to  susceptible  minds  of  the  thea- 
ter and  questionable  company.  It  is  also  true  that 
many  people  have  been  started  on  the  path  of  virtue 
by  suggestions  made,  which  have  captivated  the  bet- 
ter self.  Suggestions  have  an  eternity  of  weal  or 
woe  in  themselves  and  therefore  are  forces  which 
determine  largely  our  destiny.  Too  much  care  can- 
not be  observed  in  giving  and  receiving  them,  as 
they  may  start  one  in  the  wrong  way  and  by  their 
influence  cause  a  life  to  be  wasted  or  wrecked  which 
otherwise  might  be  happy  and  useful. 

In  auto-suggestion,  one  may  bind  upon  himself 
disease  and  unhappiness.  It  is  a  recognized  fact 
that  an  ailment  admitted  or  a  condition  accepted  is 
consenting  to  its  abode  in  the  body  and  mind.     To 

\  deny  these  things  admission  is  to  compel  them  to 

/  leave. 

The  consequences  of  suggestion  in  their  full  frui- 
tion in  the  mind  and  body  depend  on  several  condi- 

]  tions. 

I.  Faith,  in  the  sense  of  believing  and  testing  is 
a  very  necessary  condition.  The  greatest  physical, 
mental,  and  spiritual  changes  are  wrought  through 
this  channel.  Many  of  the  healings  of  Christ  were 
accomplished  through  this  condition. 


FAR-REACHING  CONSEQUENCES      397 

2.  Obedience  is  another  very  important  condition. 
He  that  doeth  shall  know. 

3.  Living  in  correspondence  with  the  highest  and 
noblest  principles  of  life  will  bring  a  fruition  of 
thought  and  character  as  a  culmination  of  sugges- 
tion. 


PART  II. 


ITS  APPLICATION  401 


SECTION  I. 

The  Application  of  Suggestion  or  Psycho- 
Therapeutics. 

The  application  of  suggestion  is  very  wide,  practi- 
cally co-extensive  with  functional  pathological  con- 
ditions in  which  important  modifications,  if  not  a 
cure,  may  be  wrought.  We  are  inclined  to  the  view 
that  the  subconscious  mind  controls  all  the  vital 
functions  of  the  body,  and  that  suggestion  controls 
the  subconscious  mind;  hence,  suggestion  may  con- 
trol all  the  vital  functions,  and,  as  nature  tends  to 
the  normal,  if  the  abnormal  prevails,  that  condition 
may  be  changed  by  the  use  of  suggestion.  (See 
Definition  and  Classification  of  Suggestion.)  That 
the  mental  controls  the  physical,  and  that  adverse  re- 
flexes may  affect  the  mental  state,  no  one  can  doubt 
who   knows   anything   about   the   mind   and   body. 

Chronic  conditions,  like  nervous  prostration, 
rheumatism,  dyspepsia,  anemia,  melancholia,  func- 
tional disorders,  especially  in  women,  hysteria,  hal- 
lucinations, diarrhoea,  constipation,  neuralgia,  in- 
testinal disturbances,  headaches  and  multitudes  of 
other  complaints  and  conditions  can  be  relieved  and 
26 


402  SUGGESTION 

cured  by  suggestion  through  the  subconscious  mind. 

Mr.  Myers  gives  the  case  of  a  man  who  had 
pneumonia,  who  was  hypnotized,  and  slept  for  two 
hours  and  awoke  refreshed,  comfortable,  and  re- 
lieved from  delirium. 

Dr.  Beaunis  presents  in  his  book  a  case  in  which 
the  pulse  was  increased  and  decreased  by  sugges- 
tion, and  also  the  temperature  of  the  patient  was 
augmented. 

Dr.  Dumontpallier  gives  an  account  of  a  case  in 
which  he  took  an  active  part.  Dr.  Burot  used  the 
blunt  end  of  a  probe  to  write  Dr.  D.'s  name  on  both 
arms  of  a  patient.  The  right  arm  was  paralyzed. 
The  writing  was  done  when  the  patient  was  hypno- 
tized. The  following  suggestions  were  made :  "This 
afternoon  at  four  o'clock  you  will  go  to  sleep  again, 
and  blood  will  exude  from  your  arms  in  the  lines 
which  have  been  traced."  At  the  specified  time  the 
patient  went  to  sleep,  and  the  letters  appeared  on 
his  left  arm,  marked  and  raised,  and  bright  red  in 
color,  with  small  drops  of  blood  on  the  surface.  The 
paralyzed  arm  was  not  affected. 

Many  cases  are  recorded  of  minor  surgical 
operations  being  performed  when  persons  have  been 
under  the  influence  of  hypnotism. 

Dr.  Wetterstrand  succeeded  in  raising  blisters  on 
the  hand  of  a  woman  who  was  hypnotized  by  touch- 
ing her  hand  with  his  finger,  telling  her  it  was  a 
red  hot  iron;  whilst  Dr.  A.  Fouilee  applied  a  sub- 
stance that  would  blister,  telling  the  patient  that  it 


EFFECTS  403 

was  a  soothing  liniment,  the  result  being  that  no 
blister  was  formed. 

An  idle  student  who  had  failed  in  his  examina- 
tions was  taken  in  hand  by  Dr.  Hugh  Wingfield,  of 
Cambridge,  England.  He  was  hypnotized  and  in 
that  condition  was  told  that  he  would  go  to  his 
rooms  every  evening  after  dinner  and  work  dili- 
gently, denying  admittance  to  other  students  in  his 
study  hours,  and  that  he  would  pass  all  of  his  com- 
ing examinations.  The  suggestions  were  carried 
out  fully  and  in  six  weeks  he  passed  all  of  his  ex- 
aminations to  the  surprise  of  his  friends. 

I  cite  these  cases  to  show  the  definite  influence 
of  the  mind  on  the  body  and  how  adverse  and  ab- 
normal conditions  may  be  overcome.  The  cases 
are  numerous,  but  enough  have  been  presented  to 
illustrate  what  is  meant  and  to  lead  us  to  infer  that 
psycho-therapeutics  has  a  large  field  of  application. 

It  is  my  purpose  in  the  second  part  of  this  work 
to  refer  to  some  special  conditions  and  show  in  a 
simple  and  practical  way  how  to  use  suggestion. 
The  formulas  are  specimens  from  which  others  may 
be  deduced  or  may  be  accepted  as  a  working  model 
from  which  other  models  may  be  fashioned.  To 
illustrate  by  taking  numerous  diseases  and  ailments 
would  enlarge  the  work  too  much.  Many  other  for- 
mulas are  given  throughout  this  work  so  that  it  is 
also  needless  to  multiply  them  in  this  part  of  the 
book.     The  whole  realm  of  physical,  mental  and 


404  SUGGESTION 

spiritual  life  comes  within  the  province  of  the 
realization  of  suggestion. 

There  is  a  vital,  casual  nexus  between  the  mind 
and  the  body,  so  that  there  are  effects  felt  by  each 
through  the  other,  as  a  cause.  This  is  true  of 
thought,  habit,  disease,  drugs,  manipulation,  or  sug- 
gestion. 

I.  Drug  medication  has  been  to  a  certain  extent 
supplanted  by  a  mental  element  which  must  be  reck- 
oned with. 

(a)  Dr.  W.  D.  Bayley,  a  homeopathic  physician 
of  Philadelphia,  has  spoken  the  truth  in  the  follow- 
ing words : 

"People  with  all  kinds  of  ills  are  being  treated 
with  all  kinds  of  medicines.  And  many  patients  re- 
cover from  ailments,  especially  those  of  a  certain 
neurotic  class,  after  the  failure  of  ordinary  drug 
therapeutics.  In  other  words,  many  patients  of  this 
type  have  consulted  physicians  without  material  ben- 
efit, they  have  gone  out  among  the  healing  cults, 
frequently  to  be  restored  to  health. 

"Now  this  is  the  truth,  and  we  must  make  the 
best  of  it.  Cures  have  been  reported  in  many  places 
and  at  many  times  on  the  exhibition  of  certain  al- 
leged saintly  relics.  In  this  kind  of  cures  we  have 
attention,  expectancy,  and  that  profound  human 
quality,  religious  emotion,  as  a  factor  for  study  and 
consideration. 

"How  often  have  we  doctors  ascribed  to  drug  ac- 
tion a  cure  which  might  just  as  readily  be  explained 


DRUGS  SUPPLANTED  405 

by  suggestion  or  auto-suggestion  ?  How  little  do  we 
know  about  these  self-curative  processes  going  on 
in  the  body?  Obviously,  it  is  that  they  are  guided 
by  organic  intelligence,  which  from  its  very  nature 
could  not  and  does  not  rise  into  consciousness. 

"The  medical  profession  needs  a  jolt  every  now 
and  then,  and  I  think  it  is  going  to  get  a  good  one 
before  long.  With  all  our  reputed  progress  we  are 
slow  in  learning  some  very  rudimentary  things. 

"We  do  things  because  our  teachers  did  them ;  we 
believe  things  because  our  elders  taught  them;  we 
ridicule  things  because  it  is  the  established  custom  to 
ridicule  them.  The  medical  man  who  will  methodi- 
cally take  up  the  study  of  psychological  things  will 
surely  add  much  to  his  usefulness  as  a  healer  of  the 
sick." 

I.  Drugs  Supplanted. 

There  is  a  wide  protest  against  drug  medication, 
and  this  is  becoming  wider  every  year,  so  that  doc- 
tors and  druggists  are  raising  a  protest  against  the 
newer  methods,  some  of  which  are  not  worthy  of 
very  much  consideration,  because  they  are  only  par- 
tial or  restrictive  in  their  applications  and  contradic- 
tory in  their  teachings  and  practices.  We  are  quite 
in  smypathy  with  all  natural,  reasonable,  and  help- 
ful methods  and  stand  free  to  adopt  and  advocate 
them.  The  claim  that  we  set  up  is  that  the  supreme 
principle  which  is  necessary  to  be  utilized  in  the  cure 
of  disease  is  to  be  right  mentally,  to  observe  hygienic 


4o6  SUGGESTION 

laws,  and  to  make  any  adjustments  that  are  abnor- 
mal, and  to  think  sanely. 

Every  realm  of  human  life  has  its  laws,  and  over 
all  life  is  the  mind,  ready  to  help  through  those 
laws. 

The  physical  form  is  a  mass  of  material  highly 
organized,  and  it  has  a  tendency  to  disintegrate,  ex- 
cept when  it  is  animated  by  vital  power  it  can  be  re- 
newed. When  life  touches  certain  centres  there  is 
a  response  and  the  supreme  power  of  the  mind 
brings  all  into  harmony  with  itself.  When  inter- 
ferences occur  and  discords  arise,  by  accident  or 
by  administration  of  remedies,  or  changes  in 
temperature,  we  find  that  the  vital  forces  fre- 
quently rebel  and  pain  sometimes  results  and  dis- 
solution may  occur.  Take,  for  instance,  an 
overdose  of  certain  drugs,  sudden  colds  resulting 
from  exposure,  poisons,  etc.  The  interferences  are 
the  things  to  be  watched,  as  they  are  the  enemies  of 
mind  and  body.  The  conditions  resulting  from  men- 
tal causes  can  be  changed  by  mental  processes,  as 
mind  controls  the  vital  functions  of  the  body.  Ab- 
normal conditions  therein  can  be  modified  and  large- 
ly changed  by  the  mind.  The  conscious  will  and 
the  ideals  of  the  conscious  mind  are  able  to  change 
and  control  mental  and  physical  adverse  conditions. 
Where  a  limb  has  been  broken,  or  deep  lacerations 
have  been  produced,  or  in  a  case  where  a  surgical 
operation  has  been  performed,  what  is  needed  is  to 
properly  adjust  the  disturbed  normal  and  natural  re- 
lations, and  the  reparative  action  of  natural  forces 


DRUGS  SUPPLANTED  407 

will  do  their  work  and  bring  to  pass  the  curative 

result. 

It  is  becoming  more  and  more  apparent  that  dis- 
ease as  to  its  origin  is  mainly  mental.  There  are  phy- 
sicians who  believe  that  disease  may  be  traced  to  mi- 
crobes and  many  other  material  objects  and  condi- 
tions. If  microbes  are  the  cause,  why  is  not  every- 
body sick?  Comparatively  few  fall  a  prey  to  these 
body  scavengers. 

There  are  all  kinds  of  bacteria  in  the  body, 
and  when  the  thinking  is  true,  high,  pure  and  health- 
ful, they  do  not  hurt  but  help  us.  When  it  is  the 
reverse,  physical  depressions  follow,  and  they  hurt 
us  and  destroy  us.  There  are  diphtheria  germs  in 
everybody's  throat.  Why  do  they  not  develop? 
Because  the  system  is  in  a  condition  to  resist  them 
and  keep  them  under.  Yes,  that  is  true,  but  why  is 
it  true?  Because  there  is  a  difference  between  the 
occasion  and  the  cause  of  disease.  The  latter  we  be- 
lieve can  be  ultimately  traced  to  a  mental  condition, 
whilst  the  former  may  be  physical  in  its  manifesta- 
tion. 

This  is  seen  now  by  many  physicians  and  thought- 
ful people,  so  that  the  general  attack  on  disease  in 
the  future  will  be  psychical,  especially  so,  on  func- 
tional conditions.  Drugs  will  be  supplanted  more 
and  more,  and  mental  and  natural  methods  will  be 
utilized,  to  the  benefit  of  all  concerned. 

We  do  not  underrate  the  value  of  bacteriology, 
climatology,  chemistry,  and  other  sciences  in  their 


4o8  SUGGESTION 

helpfulness  in  the  study  of  etiology,  but  we  do  want 
to  emphasize  the  science  of  psychology  as  a  primary 
aid  in  understanding  the  origin  and  cure  of  disease, 
and  physical  and  mental  abnormal  conditions.  If  the 
reader  will  now  turn  to  the  discussions  of  the  sub- 
conscious mind  in  this  work,  many  statements  made 
under  this  and  other  sections  will  become  plain.  The 
subconscious  mind  is  the  true  self.  It  is  a  storehouse 
of  power,  energy,  wisdom,  knowledge,  and  help;  it 
is  the  point  of  contact  with  the  Infinite  Mind,  and 
also  the  channel  through  which  all  the  power  of  that 
Mind  may  be  brought  into  the  human  life. 

The  subconscious  life  is  often  controlled  by  the 
conscious  mind.  The  subconscious  mind's  greatest 
power,  its  highest  activity,  its  supreme  healthful  con- 
trol, is  often  thwarted  by  erroneous  beliefs,  unwise 
acts,  fears,  and  worries,  reasoned  out  and  held  as  a 
conscious  image.  Misdirected  energy,  bad  physical 
and  mental  habits  are  thus  established,  resulting  in 
disease,  suffering,  and  frequently  premature  death. 

These  two  minds  or  two  phases  of  mind  may  work 
against  each  other.  The  subconscious  is  always 
seeking  the  best,  the  highest,  whilst  the  conscious 
mind  is  full  of  notions,  is  as  changeable  at  times  as 
the  wind.  It  anticipates  sickness,  trouble,  and  all 
kinds  of  disease,  and  thus  intereferes  with  the  work- 
ing of  the  vital  forces  which  are  under  the  control 
of  the  subconscious  mind. 

The  conscious  mind  also  burdens  the  subconscious 
with  pernicious  habits,  wrong  practices,  corrupt  con- 


DRUGS  SUPPLANTED  409 

duct,  and  wrong  thought,  so  that  the  subconscious 
mind  cannot  maintain  the  equilibrium  of  mental  and 
physiological  action.  Let  the  conscious  mind  reverse 
all  these  conditions  which  are  under  its  control,  and 
suggest  to  the  subconscious  mind  what  is  needed, 
and  see  how  quickly  changes  for  the  better  will 
come;  bad  habits  will  be  broken  off,  pain  relieved, 
health  restored,  life  lengthened,  and  the  whole  na- 
ture reformed. 

All  cures  are  self -cures.  Medicines  do  not  give 
power,  they  may  a^^^keix.it.  The  curative  power  re- 
sides in  the  patient.  We  may  need  something  as  a 
spur  at  times,  but  we  should  know  what  it  is  and 
know  what  it  does,  so  that  no  injury  shall  result. 
We  may  need  the  electric  current,  vibrator,  exer- 
cises. X-ray,  change  of  scene,  diversion,  many  things 
— but  all  must  contribute  to  bodily  and  mental  bene- 
fit.   If  drugs  are  used,  let  suggestion  go  with  them. 

As  the  potency  of  mind  becomes  more  and  more 
understood,  the  use  of  drugs  will  be  diminished  or 
supplanted  by  this  greatest  power  in  man.  Drug 
medication  is  a  failure  as  regards  curative  effects. 
Drugs  may  act  as  a  whip  and  spur,  but  heal- 
ing virtues  are  wanting.  A  lowered  physical  tone 
is  back  of  all  surgical  diseases.  The  causes  of  that 
lowered  tone  have  been  presented  with  considerable 
disagreement  by  different  writers.  There  is  one  su- 
preme cause  which  may  be  conceded,  namely,  long 
continued  and  depressing  emotions.  Fear  of  disease, 
loss  of  property  or  friends,  wounded  pride,  loss  of 


410  SUGGESTION 

ambition,  and  many  other  conditions,  have  left  an 
abiding  effect  on  the  physical  system.  Disease  is  an 
evidence  of  weakness  of  the  controUing  forces  of  the 
body  and  mind.  Mind  and  nerve  centres,  whether 
the  work  is  to  perform  an  act,  to  contract  and  ex- 
pand the  heart,  secrete  the  bile,  or  to  produce  the 
tumescence  or  detumescence  of  an  organ,  all  are  in- 
volved in  the  intelligent  mental  or  cell  activity,  con- 
scious or  unconscious.  An  unobstructed  flow  of 
pure  blood,  an  unhindered  nerve  impulse,  and  a 
good  mental  power,  conditioned  on  a  normal  brain 
and  a  definite  relation  of  the  conscious  to  the  subcon- 
scious mind,  cannot  help  but  bring  perfect  health. 
The  old  practice  of  giving  iron  in  different  prepara- 
tions to  the  anaemic,  demanding  that  those  who  have 
sugar  in  kidney  secretions  should  abstain  from  the 
use  of  sugar  and  from  starch  preparations,  is  one 
way  to  meet  these  conditions,  but  a  far  wiser  and 
better  method  is  to  so  direct  in  the  foods  used  that 
there  shall  be  naturally  those  utilized  which  shall 
give  an  increase  of  iron  and  a  diminution  of  sugar. 

Memory  has  much  to  do  with  the  condition  of  the 
body.  One  writer  says  that  memory  is  a  uni- 
versal function  of  organic  matter  and  that  heredity 
is  one  phase  of  it.  If  this  is  true,  then  we  see  how 
it  is  possible  by  auto-suggestion  to  break  the  power 
of  hereditary  influences  and  to  change  vital  energy 
into  new  mental  and  physical  channels. 

The  fears  that  possess  our  minds  do  more  to  ruin 
our  health  than  we  now  understand.    They  change 


DRUGS  SUPPLANTED  411 

the  secretions  of  the  body,  slow  down  the  circulation 
by  a  depressing  effect  on  the  nerves,  produce  modi- 
fied effects  which  lay  the  foundation  for  all  kinds  of 
diseases  and  ailments,  weaken  the  tissue  structures, 
so  that  bacteria  can  multiply  and  produce  serious  re- 
sults and  poison  the  whole  system.  Take  worry 
away;  be  careful  about  the  rest  and  sleep  of  the 
body,  observe  hygienic  rules,  exercise,  breathe  deep- 
ly, and  be  cheerful,  and  see  how  quickly,  in  many 
cases,  health  will  be  restored  and  disease  will  be 
eliminated. 

Drugs  have  been  resorted  to  so  frequently  that 
this  new  practice  of  psycho-therapy  has  not  had  a 
fair  chance  to  prove  its  merits.  Where  it  has  had 
a  fair  field  to  do  its  work,  and  sympathetic  surround- 
ings, marvelous  results  have  been  secured.  On  the 
other  hand  the  use  of  heart  tonics  or  stimulants  has 
resulted  in  more  deaths  than  we  suspect. 

Strychnia  and  certain  other  drugs  are  found  to 
have  a  stimulating  effect,  but  in  larger  doses  and 
continued  they  have  an  opposite  effect.  If  the  best 
work  by  the  heart  is  desired,  it  ought  not  to  be 
whipped  or  spurred  into  abnormal  action,  or  be 
slowed  down  by  depressants. 

It  is  well  known  now  that  the  heart  can  be  stim- 
ulated by  manipulation  over  certain  nerves  and  that 
it  can  be  slowed  down  in  its  action  by  inhibition  in 
like  manner.  Drugs  are  not  necessary  in  order  to 
do  this.  These  effects  can  also  be  secured  by  sug- 
gestion.   The  combination  of  suggestion  and  ma- 


412  SUGGESTION 

nipulation  can  secure  better  and  more  permanent  re- 
sults than  can  be  reached  by  drug-medication. 

Dr.  W.  S.  Thayer,  professor  of  clinical  medicine 
at  Johns  Hopkins  Medical  School,  in  a  recent  issue 
of  the  Johns  Hopkins  Hospital  Bulletin,  expresses 
himself  strongly  as  a  believer  in  more  simple  physi- 
cal and  psychical  methods  of  treating  diseases.  He 
refers  to  the  great  advances  made  in  recent  years  in 
the  utilization  of  these  simple  methods.  He  refers  to 
the  last  century's  comparative  failure  of  drug  medi- 
cation, and  says:  "The  delivery  from  poly-phar- 
macy, the  employment  of  the  simpler  physical  means 
of  treatment,  instead  of  constant  aimless  experi- 
ments with  drugs,  with  the  action  of  which  we  were 
wholly  unfamiliar  and  which  more  often  than  not 
were  harmfu\  rather  than  beneficial,  those  methods 
were  great  blessings.  But  the  tree  of  medical  science 
had  not  yet  begun  to  bear  its  first  fruit  of  real  im- 
provements in  the  art  of  healing.  In  the  last  twenty 
years,  however,  great  changes  have  come  to  pass. 
The  introduction  of  scientific  methods  of  study  into 
certain  branches  of  medicine  have  inevitably  brought 
about  habits  of  more  exact  thinking  in  other 
branches.  Men  trained  in  exact  methods  of  thought 
and  action  could  not  fail  to  realize  the  folly  and  dan- 
ger of  an  indiscriminate  use  of  drugs. 

"An  awakening  is  gradually  coming  over  the  pro- 
fession with  regard  to  the  enormous  therapeutic  res- 
ervoir which  we  have  in  the  rational  and  carefully 
planned   application   of  the   more   simple   physical 


DR.  THAYER'S  TESTIMONY  413 

and  mental  methods  of  treatment.  Few  of  us  often 
consider  the  part  that  the  pure  physical  and  psychi- 
cal methods  of  treatment  play  in  the  case  of  the 
great  majority  of  maladies  which  come  under  our 
observation.  It  is  no  exaggeration  to  say  that  these 
methods  are  the  most  important  that  we  have.  True 
success  in  practice  is  usually  dependent  upon  the  at- 
tention of  the  physician  to  the  little  physical  and 
psychical  details  of  his  work.  But  the  world  at 
large  takes  a  very  different  view  of  the  practice  of 
physic,  and  it  is  even  amazing  to  see  how  deep  rooted 
is  the  faith  in  medical  magic.  The  rise  and  devel- 
opment of  the  trained  nurse,  however,  is  an  interest- 
ing evidence  of  the  fact  that  the  public  is  beginning 
to  realize  these  truths. 

"What  does  the  patient  mean  when  he  says,  as  he 
often  does,  that,  after  all,  a  good  nurse  is  more  im- 
portant than  a  physician  ?  He  means  that  the  meas- 
ures carried  out  by  the  nurse,  the  care  she  has  taken 
of  his  skin,  his  muscles,  the  judicious  preparation 
and  administration  of  his  diet,  the  little  attentions 
which  promote  his  general  physical  comfort,  the  con- 
fidence inspired  by  her  cheerful  and  tactful  behavior, 
have  had  more  to  do  with  his  recovery  than  any 
other  prescription  that  the  doctor  has  given  him,  and 
he  is  right. 

"Also,  the  awakening  of  interest  in  the  study  and 
application  of  psychical  methods  of  treatment  is  im- 
portant and  hopeful,  and  not  its  least  importance 
lies,  perhaps,  in  the  fact  that  many  have  forgotten  to 


414  SUGGESTION 

teach  their  students — some  have  failed  to  realize 
themselves — that  by  the  mental  control  which  we 
gain  over  our  patients  we  can  often  accomplish 
more  than  by  any  other  means.  The  so-called 
'Christian  Scientist'  has  discovered  this;  finds  for 
himself  a  satisfactory  explanation  in  his  circum- 
scribed religion,  and,  with  a  simple  ignorance  of  the 
elements  of  the  natural  sciences,  constructs  a  gro- 
tesque system  which,  while  helping  some,  leads 
many  astray. 

"Many  of  the  so-called  'homeopathic'  practitioners 
must  realize  well  that  it  is  rather  their  confident  as- 
sertions than  their  dilutions  that  tide  their  patients 
over  the  passing  malady. 

"But  the  physician  does  not  always  realize  that 
that  which  superstition  and  ignorance  and  ill-faith 
may  accomplish  he,  too,  can  do  equally  well  by  prop- 
erly directed  effort,  honestly  and  intelligently.  More 
time  and  thought  should  be  given  by  physicians  to 
the  care  of  the  mental  attitude  of  the  sick.  Drugs 
are,  of  course,  indispensable  to  the  practice  of  medi- 
cine. The  administration  of  a  drug  intelligently  at 
the  right  moment  and  in  the  right  manner  may  tide 
the  patient  over  a  crisis  which  otherwise  might  prove 
fatal. 

"But  it  is  none  the  less  true  that  had  it  not  been 
for  other  vitally  important  physical  and  mental 
measures  this  opportunity  might  never  have  been 
offered." 

Whilst  we  do  not  agree  altogether  with  what  Dr. 


THE  PHYSICIAN  415 

Thayer  says  about  other  practitioners,  yet  we  do 
fully  agree  with  him  concerning  the  statements 
which  he  makes  about  the  mental  conditions. 

He  can  secure  the  same  effects  from  a  placebo  or 
powdered  pop-corn  as  from  some  drugs  by  using 
suggestion  with  the  former.  Every  successful 
physician  has  used  this  method  at  one  time  or  an- 
other, and  sometimes  when  he  was  utterly  puzzled 
as  to  what  he  should  prescribe,  he  thus  secured  a 
marvelous  result,  and  a  cure  of  the  patient  was 
effected. 

I  have  quoted  at  length  from  Dr.  Thayer  and  in 
reference  to  things  that  could  well  be  omitted,  but 
the  climax  of  his  whole  statement  is  found  in  the 
emphasis  which  he  places  in  the  use  of  the  simpler 
and  more  natural  methods  and  the  utilization  of  psy- 
chical principles  which  the  leading  physicians  are 
adopting  and  will  adopt  more  fully  in  the  years  to 
come. 

Every  believer  in  Psycho-therapeutics  knows  that 
there  is  a  psychical  as  well  as  a  physical  effect  from 
the  use  of  drugs.  The  psychical  value  is  based  on 
the  expectation  of  their  special  action,  and  that 
which  is  in  the  physician's  mind  may  be  subtly  and 
powerfully  carried  over  into  the  patient's  mind. 
The  physician's  personality,  attitude,  and  interest  in 
the  patient  accomplishes  vastly  more  than  the  drugs 
he  prescribes  or  administers.  If  he  is  cheerful  and 
hopeful,  he  gives  potency  to  their  action;  if  he  is 
gloomy,  pessimistic,  and  hopeless  he  nullifies  their 
effects.    The  cure  of  the  patient  is  effected  through 


4i6  SUGGESTION 

the  subconscious  mind,  and  the  attitude  and  bearings 
of  the  physician,  attendants,  the  surroundings  and 
the  medicines  employed,  become  powerful  sugges- 
tions. 

When  the  physician  tells  the  probable  action  of 
the  drugs  which  he  prescribes  or  gives,  he  is  apply- 
ing suggestion  in  a  larvated  form.  If  the  drug  has 
given  general  satisfaction  in  producing  certain  re- 
sults or  effects,  he  gives  the  suggestions  more  assur- 
ingly,  and  the  patient  believes  what  he  says  and  the 
corresponding  results  follow.  If  he  is  not  certain 
as  to  results,  and  not  assuring  as  to  his  belief,  there 
may  be  little  or  no  effects. 

Some  physicians  have  made  minute  and  specific 
tests  of  this  and  have  been  surprised  at  the  results. 
A  friend  of  mine  gave  a  forcible  suggestion  with  a 
potion  which  had  no  medical  value  and  secured  good 
results. 

(b)  The  solar  plexus  has  been  called  the  abdomi- 
nal brain ;  some  refer  to  it  as  the  emotional  brain.  It 
is  a  very  important  congeries  of  nerves,  both  as  to  its 
location  and  because  of  certain  consequences  which 
come  to  the  human  life  in  its  manifestations.  The 
physical  effort  of  an  emotion  is  felt  there  first.  For 
instance,  if  we  feel  anxiety,  it  may  produce  pains  In 
the  stomach  or  other  vital  organs  which  are  very 
intimately  connected  by  the  nerves  with  the  solar 
plexus  centre.  This  is  true  also  of  grief,  hate,  or 
terror.  There  are  certain  parts  of  the  brain,  as  the 
cerebrum  in  which  are  located  the  faculties  of  the 


THE  SOLAR  PLEXUS  417 

conscious  mind,  where  certain  processes  of  intellect- 
ual ability  of  the  conscious  mind  are  carried  on.  The 
brain  represents  the  intelligent  faculties,  especially 
the  cerebrum.  The  cerebellum  and  the  medulla  ob- 
longata and  spinal  cord  have  a  certain  form  of  intel- 
ligence and  govern  the  equilibrium  and  the  muscles 
of  the  body.  The  emotions  have  their  seat  in  the 
sympathetic  system,  at  least  as  to  their  manifesta- 
tion primarily.  The  chief  centre  of  that  system  is 
the  solar  plexus.  The  feelings  seem  to  have  their 
play  particularly  in  that  system.  When  apprehen- 
sions take  possession  of  the  feelings,  a  depression 
seems  to  take  possesion  of  the  whole  body.  All  of 
the  vital  functions  of  the  body  are  under  the  sympa- 
thetic nervous  system,  and  usually  the  ailments  of 
the  body  will  manifest  themselves  first  through  that 
system.  For  a  complete  and  interesting  study  of  the 
solar  plexus  and  the  sympathetic  nervous  system, 
the  reader  will  find  Dr.  Byron  Robinson's  "Abdomi- 
nal Brain"  a  very  valuable  book. 

The  sympathetic  nervous  system  is  very  im- 
portant. It  ought  to  be  better  understood.  There 
are  at  least  two  very  essential  things  required  in 
order  to  develop  the  physical  system  and  keep  it  in 
good  order.  They  are  nutrition  and  construction  by 
creative  energy. 

(d)  The  circulation  of  the  blood  is  the  means  of 
carrying  nutrition  to  every  part  of  the  body.  Every- 
thing that  can  be  utilized  to  increase  the  circulation 
and  assimilating  power  of  the  different  parts  of  the 
27 


4i8  SUGGESTION 

physical  organism  is  to  be  encouraged.  This  means 
the  increased  activity  of  the  nervous  system.  How 
to  increase  the  circulation  and  assimilation  and  in- 
tensify the  activity  of  the  nervous  system  is  a  very 
important,  as  well  as  a  very  necessary,  thing  for  the 
body.  Herein  is  found  the  reasonableness  of  relaxa- 
tion for  the  purpose  of  equalizing  the  circulation, 
concentration  for  the  purpose  of  augmenting  the 
circulation  and  assimilation,  and  open-mindedness  to 
utilize  all  the  forces  of  the  subconscious  mind  and 
also  the  forces  around  us  to  augment  those  within 
us  for  creative  or  constructive  energy.  There  are  in 
our  mental  natures  great  and  amazing  powers  which 
we  do  not  as  yet  understand. 


PSYCHICAL  DISEASES  419 


SECTION  II. 
Psychical  Diseases. 

There  are  diseases  that  are  almost  purely  mental 
and  must  be  dealt  with  from  that  standpoint.  In  such 
cases  physicians  have  not  been  able  to  find  anything 
or  very  little,  wrong  physically,  and  they  have  come 
to  the  conclusion  that  the  mental  condition  is  such 
that  a  fixed  idea  predominates  and  controls.  There 
is  a  certain  proportion  of  people  who  believe  that 
they  are  threatened  with  a  dangerous  ailment  and 
they  insist  that  they  must  have  an  operation  for  it, 
in  order  that  their  lives  may  be  saved.  A  wise  phy- 
sician has  had  such  cases,  and  especially  surgeons, 
and  it  is  necessary  to  do  something  for  such  people. 
There  are  many  remarkable  reports  in  the  medical 
records  concerning  such  cases.  For  instance,  a 
woman  told  her  physician  that  she  was  suffering 
from  an  internal  tumor.  She  had  been  operated  on 
for  this  condition  eight  years  before,  when  a  large 
tumor  was  removed.  A  few  months  previous  to  this 
visit,  she  had  been  frightened  by  the  overturning  of 
a  lamp,  when  she  recovered  she  became  convince  1 
that  her  trouble  had  returned  and  that  in  was  neces- 
sary to  have  an  operation  in  order  to  save  her  life. 

Her  physician,  after  an  examination,  told  her  that 


420  SUGGESTION 

there  was  no  trace  of  the  trouble.  She  was  not  con- 
vinced. She  went  to  another  physician  and  he  told 
her  the  same  thing.  Then  she  presented  herself  at 
the  hospital  and  the  consulting  surgeon  made  an  ex- 
amination and  found  the  condition,  as  the  other  phy- 
sicians declared,  as  he  had  received  their  report; 
yet  to  get  rid  of  the  psychical  impression  said,  "yes 
an  operation  is  necessary  and  we  shall  prepare  for  it 
without  delay."  The  woman  was  delighted  to  know 
that  something  was  to  be  done  to  give  her  relief. 
Two  visiting  surgeons  were  called  upon  to  assist 
and  anesthetics  were  administered  and  she  was  put 
into  a  semi-conscious  state.  She  could  hear  and  feel 
vaguely,  although  she  could- see  nothing.  Hurried 
orders  were  given  the  nurses,  and,  in  fact,  the  sur- 
geon and  his  assistants  and  attendants  acted  as 
though  they  were  performing  one  of  the  greatest 
operations. 

One  of  the  assistants  brought  a  jug  of  ice  water 
and  holding  it  above  the  supposed  affected  part  let 
the  cold  fluid  fall  at  the  rate  of  one  drop  every  five 
seconds.  When  the  water  touched  her  body  the 
deluded  patient  winced  and  groaned.  After  going 
through  the  play  the  woman  was  swathed  in  band- 
ages and  taken  to  her  room.  On  awakening  she 
found  two  nurses  moving  around  quietly,  one  of 
whom  held  a  cup  of  beef  tea  to  her  lips  and  asked 
her  to  swallow  a  little  of  it.  She  made  a  great  effort 
and  did  so,  saying  that  she  felt  very  weak.  After 
ten  days,  she  was  permitted  to  sit  up,  and  have  her 


PSYCHICAL  DISEASES  421 

friends  to  come  to  see  her.  She  returned  home  in 
three  weeks  cured  of  her  imaginary  tumor  and  to 
this  day  she  is  ignorant  of  the  trick  played  upon  her. 

Another  case  in  which  hysteria  was  a  predomi- 
nating characteristic  was  that  of  a  young  girl.  She 
would  not  lie  down  in  her  bed,  but  persisted  in  sit- 
ting upright  with  her  back  against  the  foot  rail,  con- 
stantly turning  her  head  from  side  to  side.  She  was 
asked  why  she  did  this,  and  she  answered  that  there 
was  a  string  in  her  head  which  pulled  it  from  side  to 
side  and  that  she  could  not  help  herself  until  it  was 
cut. 

A  shrewd  physician  was  called  in  to  examine  her 
and  he  informed  her  that  a  string  was  there  and  that 
it  would  have  to  be  cut  before  she  could  be  relieved. 
She  was  very  happy  over  this  conclusion  and  clapped 
her  hands  with  joy.  She  said  she  had  told  other 
doctors  this,  but  they  laughed  at  her  and  would  do 
nothing  for  her.  She  asked  the  physician  if  he  would 
perform  the  operation  at  once.  He  thought  it  would 
be  best  to  wait  until  the  next  morning  so  that  he 
might  consult  with  one  or  two  intimate  physician 
friends  and  surgeons.  The  young  woman  was 
brought  to  the  hospital  and  preparations  were  made 
for  the  operation.  The  following  morning  she 
was  led  into  the  operating  room  and  placed  on 
the  table  and  anesthetics  were  administered.  The 
neck  was  specially  prepared,  and  in  order  to  show 
some  sign  for  the  imaginary  operation,  a  place  was 
lanced  until  the  blood  ran,  leaving  a  cut,  about  two 


422  SUGGESTION 

inches  in  length.  This  was  bound  but  not  strapped, 
and  the  patient  was  returned  to  her  room  where  she 
remained  forty  minutes  before  awakening  to  con- 
sciousness. 

The  doctor  had  taken  a  piece  of  violin  string  about 
four  or  five  inches  in  length,  soaked  it  in  water  until 
it  looked  like  raw  sinew.  When  the  patient  return- 
ed to  consciousness  she  was  informed  of  the  success- 
ful operation  and  was  shown  the  string  that  caused 
all  her  trouble.  She  was  satisfied,  went  into  a  nat- 
ural sleep,  and  awoke  perfectly  well.  The  hysteria 
left  her,  and  the  hallucination  ceased,  and  she  has 
since  been  perfectly  normal. 

Double  or  multiple  personalities  are  really  psychi- 
cal abnormalties  and  can  be  classified  as  one  division 
of  psychical  diseases.  It  would  probably  be  inter- 
esting to  discuss  this  phase  of  the  subject,  but  it 
would  lead  us  too  far  afield  as  to  the  real  purpose 
of  this  work. 

The  causes  of  disease  are  comparatively  few.  The 
ultimate  cause  of  many  diseases  is  thought  and  hab- 
its of  the  emotional  life.  We  are  informed  by  medi- 
cal practitioners  that  uric  acid  produces  rheumatism. 
This  is  probably  true,  but  what  are  the  causes  of  uric 
acid?  Prolonged  fits  of  anger  and  hatred  will  pro- 
duce such  a  chemical  condition  in  the  body  that  uric 
acid  will  be  one  of  the  results.  Perverse  mental  states 
produce  a  great  number  of  so-called  diseases,  and 
the  time  has  come  when  our  diagnosis  must  go  back 
farther  than  physical  symptoms.    Worry  is  respon- 


PSYCHICAL  CONDITIONS  423 

sible  for  many  physical  conditions,  and  it  must  be 
cured  before  permanent  beneficial  physical  results 
can  be  established. 

There  are  destructive  as  well  as  constructive  emo- 
tions in  man's  nature.  To  the  former  class  belong 
fear,  grief,  anger,  jealousy,  hatred.  These  emotions 
when  allowed  to  run  riot  in  the  nature  not  only  pro- 
duce disease  but  even  insanity.  Fear  will  turn  the 
hair  gray ;  grief  will  furrow  the  face ;  anger  can  pro- 
duce apoplexy;  jealousy  can  make  a  demon  of  an 
otherwise  amiable  person ;  whilst  hatred  can  produce 
indigestion,  destroy  peace  of  mind,  and  ruin  the 
character.  These  mental  conditions  produce  in  the 
body  certain  chemical  products  which  interfere  with 
the  normal  workings  of  the  physical  functions  and 
poison  the  body. 

Joy,  peace,  love,  and  corresponding  feelings  have 
a  tendency  to  help  every  physical  function ;  establish 
health,  bring  buoyant  feelings  to  the  body  and  make 
life  bright  and  worth  living.  One  can  just  as  cer- 
tainly poison  the  body  by  the  exercise  of  destructive 
emotions  as  one  can  secure  health  by  the  observance 
of  the  laws  of  health. 

It  is  time  that  the  people  should  be  taught  these 
essential  things,  which  mean  so  much  for  human  life 
and  happiness. 

The  following  testimony,  by  Prof.  Elmer  Gates, 
is  plainly  stated  and  the  reasons  given  scientific: 
"The  system  makes  an  effort  to  eliminate  the  meta- 
bolic products  of  tissue-waste,  and  it  is  therefore  not 


424  SUGGESTION 

surprising  that  during  acute  grief  tears  are  copiously 
excreted;  that  during  sudden  fear  the  bowels  and 
the  kidneys  are  caused  to  act,  that,  during  prolonged 
fear,  the  body  is  covered  with  a  cold  perspiration; 
and  that,  during  anger,  the  mouth  tastes  bitter,  due 
largely  to  the  increased  elimination  of  sulpho-cya- 
nates.  The  perspiration  during  fear  is  chemically 
different,  and  even  smells  different  from  that  which 
exudes  during  a  happy  mood." 

After  pointing  out  the  part  elimination  of  waste 
poisons  take  in  the  bodily  economy.  Prof.  Gates 
continued :  "Now  it  can  be  shown  in  many  ways 
that  the  elimination  of  waste  products  is  Retarded 
by  sad  and  painful  emotions ;  nay,  worse  than  that, 
these  depressing  emotions  directly  augment  the 
amount  of  these  poisons.  Conversely,  the  pleasura- 
ble and  happy  emotions,  during  the  time  they  are 
active,  inhibit  the  poisonous  effects  of  the  depressing 
moods,  and  cause  the  bodily  cells  to  create  and  store 
up  vital  energy  and  nutritive  tissue  products. 

"Valuable  advice  may  be  deduced  from  these  ex- 
periments; during  sadness  and  grief  an  increased 
effort  should  be  volitionally  made  to  accelerate  the 
respiration,  perspiration,  and  kidney  action,  so  as  to 
excrete  the  poison  more  rapidly.  Take  your  grief 
into  the  open  air,  and  work  till  you  perspire;  by 
bathing  wash  away  the  excreted  eliminates  of  the 
skin  several  times  daily;  and,  above  all  else,  use  all 
the  expedients  known  to  you,  such  as  the  drama, 
poetry,  and  other  fine  arts,  and  direct  volitional  diri- 


PSYCHICAL  CONDITIONS  425 

gation  to  educe  the  happy  and  pleasurable  emotions. 
Whatever  tends  to  produce,  prolong,  or  intensify  the 
sad  emotions  is  wrong,  whether  it  be  dress,  drama, 
or  what  not.  Happiness  is  a  means  rather  than  an 
end;  it  creates  energy,  promotes  growth  and  nutri- 
tion, and  prolongs  life.  The  emotions  and  other 
feelings  give  us  all  there  is  of  enjoyment  in  life,  and 
their  scientific  study  and  rational  training  constitute 
an  important  step  in  the  art  of  using  the  mind  more 
skillfully  and  efficiently.  By  proper  training  the 
depressing  emotions  can  be  practically  eliminated 
from  life  and  the  good  emotions  rendered  perma- 
nently dominant.  All  this  is  extremely  optimistic." 
He  who  wants  to  get  the  best  out  of  his  life  must 
guard  against  the  prolonged  assertion  and  manifes- 
tation of  the  adverse  emotions  and  cultivate  the  fa- 
vorable. Many  people  are  sick  to-day  because  of 
hatred,  grief,  anger,  jealousy,  and  other  adverse  and 
wrong  feelings,  and  there  is  no  hope  for  their  per- 
manent recovery  until  they  change  these  mental  con- 
ditions. 


426  SUGGESTION 


SECTION  III. 
The  Basis  of  All  Cures. 

The  physical  agencies  used  in  curing  disease  are 
auxiliaries^  but  the  leading  factor  in  the  permanent 
cure  of  disease  is  the  mind.  It  becomes  the  real  basis 
on  which  to  build  and  use  other  things,  but  ulti- 
mately we  must  come  to  the  fundamental  mental  ele- 
ment for  the  real,  constant,  and  permanent  work. 

^This  is  being  recognized  more  and  more  by  all 
classes  of  physicians  and  healers.  The  most  mate- 
rialistic physician  that  we  can  find  to-day  emphasizes 
the  mental  element  in  the  production  and  cure  of  dis- 
ease./ He  may  use  the  word  "mental"  in  a  special 
sense,  but  he  uses  it  and  emphasizes  it  as  though  he 
held  it  to  mean  just  what  the  most  orthodox  believer 
in  mental  healing  means. 

Many  physicians  are  writing  on  this  mental  phase 
of  cure,  and  some  of  them  are  almost  as  emphatic 
in  their  statements  as  the  strongest  suggestive  thera- 
peutists could  possibly  be.    This  is  hopeful. 

Dr.  Selwyn  A.  Russell,  of  Poughkeepsie,  N.  Y.,  in 
an  article  on  "The  Scientific  Basis  of  Mind  Cure"  in 
American  Medicine,  March  12,  1904,  says:  "While 
we  are  not  yet  able  to  get  on  without  medicines, 
which  seems  still  to  have  limited  use,  the  more  study 


THE  BASIS  OF  ALL  CURES  427 

we  give  to  the  origin  of  disease  the  more  potent  and 
far-reaching  seem  mental  influences.  The  mind  is 
the  first  fact  and  must  lead,  the  body  is  secondary 
and  must  follow.  But  with  a  sound  body,  perfectly 
obedient  to  the  laws  of  nature  and  subject  to  a  mind 
free  and  independent,  one  might  naturally  expect 
perfection  in  health,  which  means,  of  course,  the  ab- 
sence of  disease,  and  were  it  not  for  disease  there 
would  be  no  need  of  medicines."  Dr.  Russell  has 
been  eminently  fair  and  just  in  his  statement.  He 
sums  up  the  causes  of  diseases  as : 

1.  Lack  of  resistance ;  this  is  often  caused  by  mental 
depression  and  its  consequent  physical  condition. 

2.  Lack  of  harmony. 

3.  Certain  emotions  which  produce  in  the  system 
substances  of  an  apparently  poisonous  nature. 

4.  Functional  disorders  of  different  organs,  caused 
by  depressing  emotions,  like  grief,  fear,  fright, 
anger,  hatred,  jealousy,  envy,  etc. 

5.  The  effect  of  a  moral  or  immoral  character  is  far- 
reaching  either  in  producing  good  health  or  its 
opposite.  These  are  some  of  the  causes  of  disease, 
but  it  is  probably  far  from  being  a  complete  state- 
ment of  all  of  them.  However,  the  emphasis  that 
Dr.  Russell  places  upon  the  use  of  idealism 
and  mysticism  is  correct,  and  his  conclusion  is  that 
"Mental  Science,  in  its  best  sense,  undertakes  no 
less  a  task  than  the  regeneration  of  the  soul,  for 
this  is  the  necessary  fundamental  work."  It  aims 
to  teach  man  how  to  think,  and,  therefore,  how  to 


428  SUGGESTION 

act — in  short — ^to  know  himself.  "It  braces  the 
will  (the  man),  teaches  self-reliance  and  self-con- 
fidence; endeavors  to  unmask  adversity,  and  to 
show  that  it  is  really  but  the  prosperity  of  the 
great,  that  calamities  are  but  divine  instruments  of 
training;  that  the  ills  of  life  may  be,  and  should 
be,  our  schoolmasters ;  that  they  are  disciplinary 
and  educational ;  that  depressing  emotions,  such  as 
anger,  hatred,  envy,  etc.,  are  not  to  be  indulged  in, 
for  the  reason  that  they  are  even  more  harmful, 
both  to  mind  and  body,  to  the  one  influenced  by 
them  than  to  the  one  they  are  aimed  against.  It  is 
a  rational  and  logical  system  of  getting  at  the 
springs  of  action,  and,  therefore,  whether  in  dis- 
order of  the  mind  or  of  the  body,  it  seeks  the  cause 
— the  first  cause — and  when  the  cause  is  removed 
the  effect  ceases  of  itself — ^the  only  reasonable 
mode  of  curing  anything,  j  (it  not  only  aims  to 
put  the  man  on  his  feet;'  give  him  possession 
of  himself,  and  acquaint  him  with  his  sufficient 
resources,  but  also  to  show  him  how  he  may  be 
able  to  cope  with  the  various  requirements  of  life.- 
It  teaches  that  man  is  a  born  subject,  and  the 
service  of  God  is  perfect  liberty.  That  character 
counts,  not  wealth  nor  station ;  that  the  soul  is  su- 
preme, and,  therefore,  in  matters  of  doubt,  is  the 
sole  arbiter."  I  have  quoted  at  length  Dr.  Rus- 
sell's final  words  as  they  are  true,  and  if  doctors 
would  accept  and  act  on  them  a  great  and  helpful 
change  would  occur  in  medical  practice. 


DO  MEDICINES  CURE?  429 

Do  Medicines  Cure? 

Either  medicine  cures  disease  or  it  does  not.  If  it 
does,  then  anyone  does  an  injustice  to  the  doctors  and 
to  mankind  by  denying  to  drugs  a  curative  power 
— if  medicine  does  not  cure — then  it  is  time  that 
people  knew  this  and  acted  accordingly.  To  answer 
this  question  intelligently,  it  is  necessary  to  find  out 
if  any  material  agent,  action,  or  thing  has  in  it  the 
source  and  sustenance  of  health  and  life.  Many 
finespun  theories  have  grown  hoary  with  age,  and 
are  being  buried  one  by  one,  so  that  we  are  coming 
to  a  view  of  mind  and  life  and  body  that  is  more 
reasonable  and  it  will  in  time  supplant  the  old  theo- 
ries. The  remarkable  feature  of  the  theories  of  the 
past  is  that  there  have  been  a  multiplication  of  cults 
and  so-called  healing  systems,  whilst  the  sicknesses 
of  the  people  have  multiplied  and  the  stolid  bigotry 
and  unallayed  prejudices  of  the  representatives  of 
these  cults  have  continued  unabated.  Many  of  these 
systems,  as  to  their  teachings  and  practices,  are  con- 
tradictory and  opposed  to  each  other.  One  advo- 
cates a  certain  remedy,  another  declares  it  to  be  a 
positive  injury.  Cod  liver  oil,  croton  oil,  bread  pills, 
and  the  most  drastic  drugs,  have  been  used  and  ad- 
vocated as  necessary  for  the  recovery  of  health.  It 
is  unnecessary  to  enumerate  these  different  systems 
of  healing,  but  all  of  them  seem  to  utilize  a  common 
principle  in  the  cure  of  disease,  so  that  they  all  se- 
cure certain  remedial  effects  and  thus  get  credit  for 
cures  wrought.    It  is  well  known  that  the  prescrip- 


430  SUGGESTION 

tions  of  one  school  of  medicine  are  the  proscriptions 
of  another.  One  advocates  large  doses,  another 
small  ones.  One  proposes  low  potencies,  another 
high  potencies.  One  advocates  herbs  alone,  another 
a  combination.  One  taboos  mineral  remedies,  anoth- 
er finds  them  just  what  is  needed.  One  calls  his 
school  regular,  another  eclectic,  another  allopathic, 
another  homeopathic,  another  magnetic,  another 
Christian  Science,  another  electric,  another  hydro- 
pathic, etc.,  ad  nauseam.  The  truth  of  the  matter  is, 
that  the  cure  of  disease  is  not  to  be  found  in  a  sys- 
tem or  its  material  remedies,  but  must  be  sought 
somewhere  else.  Dr.  Magendi  and  many  other  med- 
ical practitioners  are  right  when  they  say  that  medi- 
cine does  not  cure  disease. 

It  is  understood  by  doctors  that  no  two  persons 
will  respond  in  the  same  way,  or  to  the  same  extent, 
to  a  remedy,  which  they  administer  for  the  same 
sickness,  and  the  same  person  will  not  respond  twice 
in  exactly  the  same  manner.  One  patient  turns  away 
from  the  family  doctor  to  a  quack  and  gets  well; 
another  leaves  prescription  remedies  for  patent  med- 
icines and  secures  relief;  another  gets  well  by  giv- 
ing up  drugs  and  exercising  care  in  dieting  and  eat- 
ing; another  finds  relief  in  giving  up  drugs  entirely 
and  sitting  down  quietly  in  the  presence  of  a  com- 
posed and  happy  person  and  accepting  the  instruc- 
tions given. 

Why  is  this  if  the  material  remedies  are  necessary 
and  curative? 


DO  MEDICINES  CURE?  431 

You  say  "medicines  do  cure,  for  I  was  sick  and  T 
took  some  kind  of  liquid  and  my  sickness  left  me." 
You  say  "anodynes  stop  pain."  How?  So  does 
"laying  on  of  hands."  There  are  three  things, 
so  far  as  is  known,  that  medicines  can  do.  They 
can  stimulate  the  cells  of  nerves  and  tissues  and  get 
up  a  quick  action,  but  that  is  not  of  itself  curative. 
The  law  of  action  and  reaction  are  opposite  and 
equal,  so  that  only  health  can  come  by  an  equilibrium 
of  vital  forces.  There  may  be  times  when  the  stim- 
ulant may  produce  a  certain  renewed  nerve  and  tis- 
sue effect  that  may  result  in  a  cure  through  the  vital 
forces  of  the  body.  Medicines  can  depress  the  heart- 
action  through  the  depression  of  nerves,  but  the 
same  law  of  action  and  reaction  obtains  again  and 
the  same  principle  is  applicable.  When  a  nasty  bit- 
ter drug  can  be  taken  into  the  stomach  and  every  cell 
of  the  organs  which  come  in  contact  with  it  will  rise 
in  rebellion  to  cast  it  out,  and  the  cells  of  the  intesti- 
nal tract  will  also  rebel,  and  purging  results.  So  we 
have  a  threefold  effect  of  medicines;  stimulation, 
sedation,  and  purgation.  None  of  these  effects  are 
directly  curative.  The  well  known  principle,  now 
generally  accepted  by  physicians,  the  vis  medicatrix 
natura,  does  much  to  cure,  and  the  subconscious 
mind  working  through  the  vital  forces  of  the  body 
effects  the  cure  and  not  the  medcine  administered. 

Warts  have  been  charmed  away  by  using  reme- 
dies which  have  only  a  mental  effect.     Gum  shoes. 


432  SUGGESTION 

half  a  potato,  and  other  subjects  have  some  effects. 
How? 

Dr.  Tuke  presents  cases  of  rheumatism  which  were 
cured  by  rubbing  with  certain  substances  which  were 
said  to  possess  magic  power.  Metal,  wood,  wax,  etc., 
were  used  and  the  cures  followed  the  application. 
THc  tells  of  a  very  intelligent  officer  who  suffered 
with  cramps  in  the  stomach  which  nothing  seemed 
to  control.  He  was  told  that  when  the  next  attack 
came,  he  would  be  given  a  medicine,  which  was 
rarely  used,  but  which  was  most  effective  in  such 
cases.  When  the  cramps  came  again,  a  powder 
containing  four  grains  of  ground  cracker  was  ad- 
ministered every  seven  minutes,  and  the  doctor  ex- 
pressed the  greatest  anxiety  (as  to  the  healing  of  the 
patient)  lest  too  much  should  be  given.  Half-drachm 
doses  of  bismuth  had  never  procured  the  same  relief 
in  less  than  three  hours.  Four  successive  attacks 
came,  and  four  times  they  were  met  with  the  cracker 
remedy  and  with  the  same  success,  and  that  very 
speedily. 

A  house  surgeon  in  a  French  hospital  experi- 
mented with  100  patients,  giving  them  sugared 
water.  Then  with  a  great  show  of  fear  he  pretended 
that  he  had  made  a  mistake  and  given  them  an 
emetic  instead  of  the  proper  medicine.  Dr.  Tuke 
says  that  the  result  was  that  no  fewer  than  eighty, 
four-fifths,  were  unmistakably  sick."  Many  similar 
cases  could  be  cited; 

A  young  man  who  mimicked  a  stutterer  found  that 


DO  MEDICINES  CURE?  433 

he  had  fastened  the  habit  upon  himself,  and  with  the 
habit  there  came  muscle  contractions  and  facial  con- 
tortions. These  conditions  and  the  stammering  in- 
creased instead  of  diminishing.  He  was  an  expert 
accountant  and  could  have  commanded  a  large  sal- 
ary had  he  been  free  from  these  physical  conditions. 
He  had  tried  to  get  help  from  doctors  and  special- 
ists who  advertised  to  cure  stammering.  His  quest 
was  all  in  vain.  He  put  himself  under  the  care  of 
a  man  who  treated  him  by  suggestion.  He  was  told 
that  he  would  have  better  control  over  the  vocal  or- 
gans, that  his  hesitancy  in  speech  would  leave  him, 
and  a  normal  condition  would  be  established,  the 
facial  contortions  would  cease  and  self-conscious- 
ness would  not  worry  him.  These  and  many  other 
suggestions  were  given  three  times  a  week  for  two 
months.  When  the  old  conditions  seemed  to  weaken 
then  positive  suggestion  of  easy  natural  utterance 
and  perfect  control  of  the  organs  of  speech  and  mus- 
cles of  the  face  were  given,  and  a  complete  cure  was 
produced.  It  is  best  to  continue  for  a  few  treat- 
ments after  the  patient  seems  to  have  recovered  from 
his  difficulties  in  order  to  render  more  certain  the 
permanence  of  the  cure. 

28 


434  SUGGESTION 


SECTION  IV. 

Music  as  a  Therapeutic  Agent. 

It  has  been  demonstrated  that  music  has  a  won- 
derful influence  on  persons  for  good,  and  can  be 
used  as  a  most  efficient  substitute  for  drugs  when 
apphed  for  tonic,  stimulative,  sedative,  or  narcotic 
effects. 

For  instance,  twenty-two  nurses  from  different 
hospitals,  were  invited  to  a  doctor's  home  in  Brook- 
lyn, N.  Y.,  to  be  present  at  a  musical  recital.  Nurses 
were  chosen,  because  they  were  accustomed  to  take 
a  record  of  pulses,  and,  being  usually  calm,  their 
own  pulses  would  not  be  affected.  Some  of  them 
had  musical  ability,  others  had  none.  They  were 
chosen  at  random  for  the  tests,  and  a  careful  record 
of  their  relation  to  music  and  general  physical  char- 
acteristics was  kept.  Some  of  the  nurses  were  pro- 
vided with  charts  upon  which  they  were  to  record 
the  pulse-movements  of  their  companions.  No  out- 
sider was  admitted. 

The  subjects  of  the  tests  were  seated  in  the  doctor's 
parlors,  whilst  he  presided  at  the  mechanical  piano- 
player,  through  which  the  music  was  to  be  produced. 


MUSIC  AS  A  THERAPEUTIC  AGENT    435 

This  device  was  chosen  because  it  reproduced  per- 
fectly the  tones  and  enabled  him  to  select  the  inter- 
pretation best  adapted  to  the  subject,  and  by  it  he 
could  repeat  a  selection  with  the  same  interpretation. 
The  doctor  was  himself  a  trained  musician,  which 
was  a  great  advantage  to  him  in  making  the  experi- 
ments. 

He  first  played  "Annie  Laurie"  in  order  to  get  the 
heart-beats  of  his  subjects  to  their  normal  and  bring 
about  a  good  mental  and  physical  condition.  The 
result  was  remarkable  and  accomplished  its  purpose 
to  a  great  degree.  Some  of  them  had  pulses  greater 
than  the  normal,  some  less,  before  the  music  began, 
but  after  playing  the  selection  all  seemed  to  be  about 
a  normal  condition. 

He  followed  that  selection  by  the  overture  from 
Tannhauser  in  its  orchestral  arrangement.  The 
whole  power  of  the  piano-player  was  used  at  times, 
and  between  the  swelling  notes  of  the  march  which 
characterized  the  climax  of  the  latter  half  of  the 
overture  and  the  final  diminuendos  of  the  "Pilgrim 
Chorus,"  which  are  very  marked,  he  interpreted  the 
selection  very  carefully.  The  effect  on  the  subjects 
was  remarkable ;  nearly  all  of  them  responded  to 
Wagner's  harmonies  with  a  much  more  rapid  pulse, 
the  increase  ranging  from  ten  to  twenty-five  beats 
per  minute  more  than  normal.  One  young  woman, 
whose  pulse  ran  up  into  the  nineties,  confessed  after- 
wards that  the  Tannhauser  overture  was  her  favorite 
selection. 


436  SUGGESTION 

Two  records  were  kept — that  of  the  pulse  beats 
and  that  of  the  blood  pressure.  The  latter  record 
led  to  the  conclusion  that  listening  to  a  favorite 
musical  selection  may  produce  in  one  person  the 
effect  of  relaxation,  whilst  it  may  stimulate  the  heart 
action  of  another.  Hence  it  is  necessary  to  study 
and  know  your  patient  before  prescribing  musical 
remedies. 

A  "Meditation"  was  then  played.  Its  quiet,, 
soothing  tones  produced  a  diminished  blood-pres- 
sure and  slower  pulse-beat  in  all,  except  one  young- 
woman,  whose  pulse  went  away  above  the  normal. 
Some  mental  association  produced  that  effect.  No 
one  found  out  what  it  was. 

Different  selections  were  played,  with  correspond- 
ing effects  on  the  subjects.  Lybach's  Fifth  Nocturne, 
which  is  soothing,  had  its  harmonies  written  about  a 
pretty  melody.  The  effect  was  restful  and  relaxing 
and  the  pulse-beats  went  down,  quite  below  the  nor- 
mal, in  a  majority  of  the  cases.  The  experiments 
were  not  only  interesting  but  profitable,  showing 
some  of  the  therapeutic  effects  of  music. 

The  marvelous  results  accruing  to  the  sick  and 
insane  from  certain  kinds  of  music  have  not  yet  been 
measured.  There  is  something  in  certain  musical 
selections  and  instruments  that  awaken  in  the  mind 
certain  emotions  and  produce  certain  remedial 
effects. 

Prof.  M.  Emil  Magnin,  of  the  Ecole  de  Magne- 
tisme,    has   used   a   cultured   and    sensitive   young 


MUSIC  AS  A  THERAPEUTIC  AGENT  437 

woman  in  a  state  of  hypnosis  to  interpret  music  and 
with  most  remarkable  results.  His  method  is  to  put 
the  subject,  Madame  Madeline,  in  a  profound  sleep. 
M.  Mangin  then  plays  an  air  upon  the  piano,  a  waltz, 
a  religious  and  mystical  selection,  a  wedding  or  a 
funeral  march.  Chanson  or  fantasy.  As  the  selection 
is  rendered  the  hypnotized  subject  interprets  every 
strophe  into  rythmic  motion  and  changing  attitudes, 
according  as  the  tones  awaken  various  emotions  in 
her.  The  intensity  and  spontaneity  of  these  quickly- 
changing  poses  are  remarkable,  and  leave  no  ques- 
tion as  to  the  sincerity  and  genuineness  of  the  per- 
formance. Madame  Madeline  is  not  informed  be- 
bore  being  hypnotized  what  piece  is  to  be  played ;  it 
may  be  the  "Dead  March  in  Saul,"  or  a  valse  from 
Strauss.  Having  no  previous  knowledge  of  the  se- 
lections to  be  played,  she  is  ignorant  as  to  the  emo- 
tions she  will  manifest  or  he  will  require. 

"If,  for  instance,  he  plays  the  'Marche  Funebre'  of 
Chopin,  that  magical  rhapsody  with  its  varying 
moods  of  hope,  despair,  gloom,  pitiful  anguish,  and 
withal  the  divine  wail  for  the  dead,  she  will  inter- 
pret that,  as  no  one  can  in  a  conscious  state,  and  in 
a  way  that  is  beyond  any  conscious  and  voluntary 
intentional  interpretation  of  acting.  At  first  she  hesi- 
tates with  a  feeling  of  trouble,  fear,  and  distress. 
The  musical  tones  seem  to  take  hold  of  the  deepest 
nature ;  sorrow  and  hopelessness  commence  to  assert 
themselves.  Then  follows  a  manifestation  of  some 
immeasurable    woe.      As    strophe  follows  strophe, 


438  SUGGESTION 

heart-breaking  anguish  is  shown  on  the  face,  and 
horror,  mingled  with  surprise,  reveals  itself.  There 
follows  various  stages  of  violent  grief  and  intense 
agony.  Then  follows  a  relief,  and  a  smile  comes  as 
the  hope  returns,  and  there  seems  to  be  a  pleading 
that  the  gods  might  avert  the  threatening  blow. 
Then  comes  the  awful  thought  of  the  inevitable. 
The  blow  must  fall.  Forebodings  come — dark, 
thoughts;  then  she  is  stricken  with  deep  grief,  be- 
spair,  and  awful  suifering.  The  dead  loved  one  is 
fondled  with  sickening,  hoping  frenzy — and  the 
inevitable — anything  but  this  the  soul  seems  to  say. 
Then  as  the  truth  becomes  more  real,  and  is  realized 
by  her,  despair  and  awful  anguish  gradually  fade 
into  abandonment  and  sweet  and  restful  resignation. 
So  remarkable  has  been  this  interpretation  that  M. 
Rodin,  the  great  sculptor,  expects  to  put  into  mar- 
ble some  of  the  natural  and  striking  poses,  as  being 
the  greatest  that  he  has  ever  witnessed." 

Music,  because  of  its  rhythm,  appeals  to  the  sub- 
conscious mind  and  holds  it  as  by  a  spell.  It  also 
affects  the  emotions,  and  as  they  influence  the  circu- 
lation it  affects  the  health  favorably.  DiflFerent  dis- 
eases have  been  modified  by  music.  "David's  music 
soothed  Paul's  melancholy.  Clinias,  Pythogoras' 
famous  disciple,  played  his  harp  whenever  his  tem- 
per was  ruffled.  A  lady  of  Rouen,  in  France,  who 
lived  to  be  io6,  all  her  life-time  did  never  use  the 
help  of  any  physic,  how  great  soever  her  infirmities 
were;    but    in   all   her   hurts,    disease,    child-birth, 


MUSIC  AS  A  THERAPEUTIC  AGENT    439 

and  lameness,  she  only  desired  one  who  could  skill- 
fully play  on  the  tambour  and  pipe  instead  of  a 
Physician.  There  is  a  medical  tradition  of  long 
ago  that  says  'Asclepiades,  a  noted  physician,  as  oft 
as  he  and  Phrenetick  Patients,  or  such  as  were  un- 
hinged, or  evil-affected  in  their  minds,  did  make  use 
of  nothing  so  much  for  the  cure  of  them,  and  res- 
tauration  of  their  health,  as  Symphony  and  sweet 
harmony  and  consent  of  voices.' 

"We  are  also  assured  that  Ismenias,  the  Theban, 
used  to  cure  divers  of  the  Baeotians  of  the  Sciatica, 
or  Hip-gout,  by  the  use  of  Musick ;  and  *  *  * 
it  is  reported  by  divers,  and  Memorials  are  made  of 
it,  that  when  Sciatica  pains  are  the  most  exquisite, 
they  are  allayed  and  asswaged  with  Musick." 

We  are  told  by  Philostratus  that  when  Apol- 
lonius  asked  Canus,  a  Rhodian  musician,  what  he 
could  do  with  his  instrument,  he  told  him  that  he 
could  make  a  melancholy  man  merry,  and  him  that 
was  merry  much  merrier  than  he  was  before:  a 
lover  more  enamoured,  and  a  religious  man  more 
devout,  and  more  attentive  to  the  worship  of  the 
gods. 

The  most  definitely  antidotal  action  of  music  ap- 
pears to  be  that  effected  in  cases  of  tarantula  bite. 
We  are  told  by  one  of  the  older  English  travelers 
that: 

"In  part  of  Calabria  are  a  great  store  of  Taran- 
tulas, a  serpent  peculiar  to  this  country,  and  taking 
that  name  from  the  city  of  Tarentum.     Some  hold 


440  SUGGESTION 

them  to  be  a  kind  of  spider,  others  of  Effts ;  but  they 
are  greater  than  the  one  and  less  than  the  other ;  the 
sting  is  deadly,  and  the  contrary  operations  thereof 
most  miraculous.  For  some  so  stung  are  still  op- 
pressed with  a  leaden  sleep;  others  are  vexed  with 
continued  waking.  Some  fling  up  and  down,  and 
others  are  extremely  lazy;  one  sweats;  a  second 
vomits;  a  third  runs  mad;  some  weep,  and  others 
laugh  continually,  and  that  is  the  most  usual.  The 
merry,  the  mad,  and  otherwise  actively  disposed  are 
cured  by  Musick,  at  least  it  is  the  cause,  in  that  it 
incites  them  to  dance  indefatigably,  for  by  labour 
and  sweat  the  poyson  is  expl'd.  And  Musick  also 
by  a  certain  high  excellency  hath  been  found  by  ex- 
perience to  stir  in  the  sad  and  drowsie  so  strange  an 
alacrity,  that  they  have  wearied  the  spectators  with 
continude  dancing;  in  the  meantime,  the  pain  hath 
asswaged,  the  infection  being  driven  from  the  heart, 
and  the  mind  released  of  her  sufferance;  if  the 
musick  intermit,  the  malady  renews ;  but  again  con- 
tinued it  vanisheth." 

The  utilization  of  this  wonderful  power  for  good 
means  much  for  the  recovery  of  the  sick  and  the 
amelioration  of  those  who  are  mentally  afflicted. 
The  illustrations  given,  some  from  ancient  times, 
will  make  plain  the  effect  of  music  on  the  emotions, 
and  some  one,  doubtless,  will  work  out  a  system  of 
musical  therapeutics  that  will  accomplish  much  for 
the  afflicted. 


THE  CURE  OF  HABITS  441 


SECTION  V. 

I.    The  Cure  of  Habits. 

The  power  of  habit  is  great,  and  bad  habits  seem 
to  have  peculiar  ability  to  make  the  subject  of 
them  a  slave.  The  question  of  one  who  is  such  a 
slave  is,  can  suggestive  treatment  break  this  power 
of  habit  and  lead  one  to  a  self-mastery  over  it  and 
over  the  whole  personality?  We  believe  that  this 
can  be  done.  There  are  several  things  necessary  in 
the  subject.  The  mind  ought  to  be  educated  so  that 
it  can  voluntarily  resist  the  power  of  bad  habits  and 
a  desire  and  a  resolution  looking  towards  victory 
should  be  instilled  by  suggestion.  It  is  necessary  to 
find  out  if  the  patient  wishes  to  be  helped  and 
cured.  If  he  gives  his  free  and  voluntary  consent 
he  can  be  helped.  If  not,  very  little  can  be 
done  for  him.  If  he  wishes  to  be  helped, 
and  gives  his  consent  to  co-operate  with  you,  then 
have  him  relax  on  a  couch  or  easy  chair.  When  he 
is  thoroughly  relaxed  and  conscious,  but  in  a  recep- 
tive condition,  give  him  suggestions.  Do  not  tell 
him  he  must  do  differently,  or  that  you  want  him  to 
do  differently,  but  say  to  him  you  have  a  great  desire 
to  do  differently  and  according  to  your  faith  and  de- 
sire it  shall  be  done  unto  you,  etc.,  etc.     Lead  him 


442  SUGGESTION 

along  the  road  of  desire  and  emphasize  his  wish  to 
have  complete  control  and  victory.  A  person  will 
respond  more  quickly  to  that  which  he  wishes  to  do, 
or  what  he  believes  to  be  a  voluntary  and  inten- 
tional act  on  his  part.  This  is  seen  in  so  many  rela- 
tions of  life.  Tell  a  boy  to  go  and  get  you  a  book 
and  he  will  feel  like  saying,  "I  won't  do  it."  Say 
to  him,  'Tlease,  get  me  such  a  book,"  or,  "You  want 
to  get  me  that  book,  don't  you?"  And  see  how 
quickly  he  will  bring  it. 

People  do  not  like  to  be  forced  to  do  things,  but 
if  their  desires  are  awakened  and  the  will  is  gently 
led,  they  will  not  only  want  to  do  that  which  is  best 
for  them  and  for  others  but  will  seize  opportunities 
to  do  things  that  are  profitable. 

It  is  helpful  to  one  who  is  the  slave  of  a  habit  or 
habits  to  appeal  to  his  pride  or  to  his  mental  ability 
to  get  the  mastery.  Such  suggestions  as  the  follow- 
ing may  be  used :  "You  do  not  want  the  people  who 
know  you  to  think  that  you  are  weak-minded,  that 
you  have  no  will  power,  that  you  must  give  up  to  the 
habit  (mention  it),  that  you  cannot  be  master  of 
yourself.  You  can  assert  your  will  and  prove  to  the 
world  that  you  are  a  man,  in  the  fullest,  truest  sense. 
You  have  the  power  to  overcome  every  habit  that 
is  adverse  to  your  best  interests  and  you  have  the 
ability  to  say  I  will  not  yield  again,  for  I  am  a  man 
made  in  God's  image.  You  have  a  desire  to  do  bet- 
ter, to  be  master  over  yourself,  and  you  can  and  you 
will.     In  your  relaxed  condition  the  circulation  is 


THE  CURE  OF  HABITS  443 

being  equalized  over  the  whole  body  and  the  arterial 
blood,  going  to  the  brain,  will  renew  the  brain  tissue 
and  new  power  and  strength  will  be  manifested 
therefrom  and  the  subconscious  mind  will  assert 
itself  and  all  the  power  coming  through  it  is  for  you 
and  you  will  use  it  and  the  habits  will  weaken  and 
you  will  have  no  inclination  to  be  a  slave  to  them 
any  longer,  and  their  power  will  be  gone  and  you 
will  be  a  complete  master  over  yourself."  Many 
suggestions  of  a  similar  nature  will  occur  to  the 
practitioner.  Strengthen  the  desire  in  the  subject's 
mind  to  be  helped,  and  then  lead  him  step  by  step 
until  he  begins  to  tell  you  about  his  victory  and  com- 
pliment him  on  that,  and  deepen  your  suggestions 
by  telling  him  of  other  cases  and  referring  to  the 
possibilities  before  him  and  what  a  splendid  being 
a  true,  masterful  man  is. 

It  is  best  with  children  who  are  subjects  of  bad 
habits  to  make  suggestions  to  them  when  they  are 
going  to  sleep.  Begin  by  talking  to  them  gently,  and 
then,  with  a  determination  to  succeed,  make  your 
suggestions  firmly  and  definitely  and  appeal  to  the 
child's  self-respect,  etc. 

Do  not  expect  to  break  up  a  series  of  bad  habits 
in  one  treatment.  Perseverance  and  confidence  on 
the  operator's  part  are  very  essential. 

There  are  persons  whom  you  would  like  to  help 
in  this  respect  but  you  cannot  safely  speak  about 
the  injurious  habits.  If  you  can  make  an  experi- 
ment or  two  on  them  by  their  consent,  as  to  the  pes- 


444  SUGGESTION 

sibility  of  putting  them  to  sleep,  after  which,  if  you 
succeed,  you  can  make  some  suggestions  that  may 
be  very  effective.  Do  not  say  anything  about  cur- 
ing their  habits  when  awake,  especially  if  they  do 
not  want  to  give  them  up.  If  you  sleep  with  such 
an  one  you  can  talk  to  him  quietly  in  his  natural 
sleep  and  put  him  into  an  hypnotic  sleep  and  do  the 
work  most  effectively. 

2.    The  Relief  of  Pain. 

Pain  can  be  relieved  in  a  remarkable  manner  by 
suggestion  in  oral  and  tactile  form.  Let  the  right 
hand  be  placed  over  the  seat  of  the  pain  and  the  left 
over  the  back  of  the  neck,  or  at  a  nerve  center  near 
the  pain,  and  then  suggest  relaxation  of  the  muscles 
and  the  concentration  of  the  mind  on  the  pain,  and 
see  how  quickly  it  will  be  relieved.  Tell  the  subject 
to  think  of  the  pain  steadily,  and  in  a  few  moments 
it  will  subside.  Say  to  him,  "You  feel  the  pain  leav- 
ing that  place  and  it  seems  to  be  going  away  entirely. 
It  is  going,  it  is  leaving  you.  It  has  gone.  The  pain 
is  gone  and  you  are  thoroughly  relieved.  You  feel 
better  and  you  are  all  right."  These  and  similar  sug- 
gestions can  be  made  whilst  you  move  the  hand 
downward  and  outward,  and  shaking  the  hand  as 
though  you  were  throwing  the  pain  off.  These  sug- 
gestions have  great  effect  on  the  persons  suffering 
pain. 


OBSTINATE  CASES  445 

To  Slow  Down  the  Beating  of  the  Heart. 

There  are  certain  organs  of  the  body  to  which  you 
can  personally  speak  and  secure  great  results.  The 
heart  is  one  of  them.  You  can  stop  a  hemorrhage  by 
talking  to  and  commanding  the  heart  to  s?ow  down 
its  beating.  One  in  an  hypnotized  condition  can  be 
used  effectively  in  proving  the  possibility  of  decreas- 
ing or  increasing  the  heart  action.  Pulsations  can 
be  decreased  twenty  or  thirty  beats  and  can  be  in- 
creased to  one  hundred  and  twenty  or  more  by  talk- 
ing to  the  heart.  The  worst  cases  of  palpitation  may 
be  quieted  in  a  short  time  by  relaxing  the  patient  a.'^.d 
giving  positive  suggestions  or  commands  to  the  heart 
"to  beat  slower,  slower,  slow  and  regularly,"  talking 
quietly  and  in  a  soothing  manner,  as  you  would  to 
an  excited  and  wrought-up  person. 

What  About  Obstinate  and  Doubtful  Cases? 

There  are  certain  things  that  the  operator  ought 
always  to  keep  in  mind  in  his  treating  such  cases, 
and,  in  fact,  all  cases.  He  must  have  confidence, 
perseverance,  determination,  and  enthusiasm,  in 
order  to  succeed.  This  is  true  especially  of  obsti- 
nate and  doubtful  cases.  Some  persons  will  not  re- 
lax the  muscles  nor  concentrate  the  mind,  nor  con- 
cede that  any  benefit  has  resulted  from  treatments. 
You  will  have  to  meet  such  with  a  statement  like 
this :  "A  gradual  cure  will  be  a  permanent  cure,  you 
have  not  surrendered  yet,  as  you  will ;  your  condition 


446  SUGGESTION 

has  been  serious  and  obstinate,  but  you  are  doing 
well  and  will  commence  to  see  a  marvelous  improve- 
ment, and  you  can  begin  to  help  yourself  in  a  great 
degree."  You  cannot  help  the  patient  until  he  is  in 
a  passive  state  and  will  follow  your  specific  direc- 
tions. If  he  doubts,  you  must  relieve  that  condition 
by  reasonable  statements  and  show  him  how  the  re- 
sults come.  Tell  him  of  the  two  minds  or  twofold 
form  of  one  mind.  Show  him  that  the  subconscious 
mind  controls  the  vital  functions  of  the  body,  and, 
under  excitement  or  depression,  joy  or  sorrow,  there 
may  be  stimulation  or  inhibition  of  nerve-action  and 
corresponding  effects.  Every  man  is  subject  to  sug- 
gestion if  you  can  make  the  matter  plain,  and  you 
can  get  effects  with  all  afflicted  ones  if  they  will  do 
what  you  ask  them  to  do. 

3.    Various  and  Special  Troubles,  Ailments, 
AND  Habits. 

HEADACHE. 

Headache  is  a  general  complaint  among  people, 
and  at  times  indicates  special  physical  conditions.  It 
is  well  for  the  operator  to  look  up  the  different  kinds 
of  headache  and  ascertain  something  of  their  causes. 
In  a  general  way,  the  treatment  of  ordinary  head- 
ache can  be  made  as  follows.  If  it  is  on  the  top  of 
the  head,  have  the  patient  comfortably  seated,  or 
have  him  lie  on  a  couch.  Give  him  suggestions  for 
relaxation  of  muscles  and  equalization  of  the  circu- 


HEADACHE  447 

lation.  Take  the  head  between  your  hands  and  press 
gently  but  firmly.  Put  the  right  hand  on  the  fore- 
head and  the  left  hand  on  the  back  of  the  neck  in 
the  depressions  near  the  occiput.  Continue  the  pres- 
sure for  two  or  five  minutes  and  suggest  that  the 
venous  blood  is  going  down,  which  is  the  truth  of 
the  matter.  Then  slowly  move  the  right  hand 
towards  the  top  of  the  head.  Repeat  this  several 
times,  and  say,  "Think  of  the  exact  location  of  the 
pain  and  imagine  that  it  is  passing  away.  The  pain 
is  leaving,  and  in  a  few  minutes  you  will  have  com- 
plete relief.  The  pain  is  going,  going,  going.  Now 
your  head  does  not  ache.  You  will  have  complete 
relief,  and  you  will  feel  well."  These  are  only  spec- 
imen suggestions,  and  you  can  use  others  or  modify 
these.  Do  not,  when  you  begin  treatment,  tell  the 
patients  that  they  have  no  pain,  for  that  will  be  lying 
to  them.  Be  honest,  and  admit  the  pain,  and  by  re- 
laxation, concentration,  equalization  of  the  circula- 
tion, and  positive  suggestions  take  it  away.  Tactile 
suggestion  is  very  valuable,  with  oral  suggestions, 
for  headache  and  any  kind  of  pain.  Sometimes  by 
this  treatment  the  headache  will  go  away  and  not 
return  again.  The  following  suggestions  and 
method  of  treatment  will  be  found  very  helpful. 

Have  the  patient  take  a  reclining  position  and 
close  his  eyes.  It  will  make  the  suggestion  more 
effective  if  you  place  your  fingers  lightly  on  the  eye- 
lids and  wait  a  few  moments  without  saying  any- 
thing.    The  subject  will  more  readily  become  pas- 


448  SUGGESTION 

sive  and  suggestible.  Suggest  relaxation  and  rest. 
Sleep  is  not  necesary  to  get  the  suggestions  into  the 
subconscious  mind ;  however,  it  is  well  to  suggest 
that  if  the  subject  desires  to  doze  or  sleep  to  do  so. 
Tactile  suggestion  may  be  helpful  to  some,  whilst  it 
will  not  be  to  others.  When  quiescent  or  in  a  light 
sleep  some  suggestions  like  the  following  may  be 
made :  "You  will  now  experience  a  change  in  your 
feelings.  The  circulation  is  being  equalized.  The 
venous  blood  is  going  down  from  the  brain  and  the 
whole  system  is  relaxing  so  that  the  circulation  of 
the  blood  is  being  equalized  in  every  part.  The 
solar  plexus  is  sending  out  new,  strong  impulses  to 
the  stomach,  liver,  and  heart,  and  they  are  perform- 
ing their  work  normally  and  effectively.  All  the 
organs  of  the  body  are  performing  their  work  nor- 
mally, and  you  are  resting  and  the  pain  is  leaving 
you.  You  will  probably  go  into  a  light  sleep  and 
when  you  awaken  your  headache  will  be  gone  and 
you  will  feel  all  right."  Repeat  these  suggestions 
and  vary  them,  and,  if  desirable  on  the  part  of  the 
patient,  you  can  put  your  hand  on  the  head.  Tactile 
suggestion  is  very  effective  in  some  cases.  Pressing 
firmly,  but  not  too  hard,  on  the  suboccipital  spaces 
on  the  back  of  the  neck  and  on  the  forehead  for 
three  or  four  minutes  will  sometimes  reHeve  a  severe 
attack  of  headache.  There  are  different  kinds  of 
headaches,  and  in  some  cases  strong  inhibition  over 
the  solar  plexus  will  equalize  the  blood  circulation 
and  relieve  sick  headaches.    It  is  well  for  the  opera- 


AILMENTS  449 

tor  to  acquaint  himself  with  the  causes  of  headache 
and  learn  to  know  them,  so  that  he  will  be  able  to 
give  permanent  power.  Suggestion  is  a  wonderful 
power  in  bringing  such  relief,  and  different  forms 
of  it  can  be  efficiently  used  to  control  and  cure  this 
malady. 

PsEUDo  Angina  Pectoris. 

"Last  April  there  entered  into  a  clinic  a  middle- 
aged  man  suffering  from  pseudo-angina  pectoris, 
— severe  psychic  pains  all  over  the  body,  and 
in  a  very  miserable  state  of  mind.  He  had  been 
unable  to  do  any  work  for  almost  three  years, 
had  gone  the  usual  round  of  doctors  and 
hospitals,  and  had  fallen  into  despair  of  get- 
ting better.  He  was  and  is  a  man  of  deep 
religious  feeling.  First  of  all  his  despair  was 
dissipated  by  frequent  reassurance  that  there  was 
nothing  incurable  about  his  disorder.  Then,  from 
time  to  time,  during  a  period  of  five  months,  sug- 
gestion was  applied,  and  his  religious  instincts  ap- 
pealed to,  until  at  the  end  of  that  period  he  recovered 
his  health  and  nervous  balance.  He  has  remained 
well  and  has  gone  back  to  work." 

Case  of  Uncongenial  Marriage. 
"Another  visitor  was  suffering  from  a  different 
trouble.  She  is  the  victim  of  an  uncongenial  mar- 
riage. Her  husband  is  not  a  bad  man,  in  the  ordi- 
nary sense ;  he  is  simply  an  inconsiderate  boor,  who 
by  a  long  course  of  selfishness  has  killed  any  love  his 
29 


450  SUGGESTION 

wife  may  have  entertained  for  him.  He  is  of  the 
tribe  in  whose  eyes  nerve-suffering  is  all  "imagina- 
tion" and  who  scold  their  wives  instead  of  trying 
to  understand  them.  The  patient  spent  her  time  in 
bewailing  her  fate  and  envied  other  women  happy 
in  the  love  of  their  husbands.  There  were  moments 
when  the  brain  seemed  submerged  in  a  tide  of  mis- 
ery and  worry  and  the  heart  weighted  with  incon- 
solable despair.  What  remedy  is  there  for  such  a 
bitter  lot?  No  perfect  remedy,  perhaps,  for  our  rel- 
atives can  inflict  upon  us  incurable  wounds.  Still, 
something  may  be  saved  from  the  wreck  of  a  life's 
happiness.  So  in  this  case,  the  patient  was  comfort- 
ed by  having  the  centre  of  gravity  of  her  thought 
changed,  by  stirring  her  latent  interests,  her  interest 
in  her  children,  in  her  church,  in  various  helpful 
lines  of  reading,  by  a  sort  of  re-education  of  her 
inner  life.  She  is  now,  if  not  happy,  at  least  more 
contented,  and  looks  out  on  life  with  a  braver  heart. 

The  Liquor  Habit. 

Can  this  condition  or  habit  be  cured  by  sugges- 
tion? Yes,  it  can.  There  are  many  cases  reported 
in  magazines,  books  and  other  literature  that  give 
a  very  definite  and  emphatic  answer  to  this  question. 
Here  is  an  account  that  is  very  interesting  and 
shows  the  method  adopted  by  the  operator: 

"I  returned  to  my  home  in  Kentucky  on  the  9th 
of  April,  1900,  having  sent  word  beforehand  to  a 
dear  old  friend  who  believed  in  me,  that  I  would  re- 


THE  LIQUOR  HABIT  451 

lieve  him  of  his  inordinate  desire  for  liquor  when  I 
should  see  him.  He  met  me  at  the  train  so  full  that 
he  could  hardly  stand,  and  assured  me  that  he  would 
expect  me  to  call  upon  him  the  next  day. 

''I  told  him  that  he  might  expect  me  at  2  P.  M., 
and  I  begged  him  to  refrain  from  the  use  of  whiskey 
until  that  hour.     He  promised,  but  when  I  called 
on  him  the    next    day    at    the    hour    designated, 
I  saw  that  he  had  been  drinking,    though    not    so 
heavily  as  the  day  before.    I  had  him  sit  in  an  easy 
reclining  chair,  and,  placing  my  right  hand  on  his 
forehead  and  my  left  on  the  base  of  his  head,  I  be- 
gan talking  to  him  in  a  low,  impressive  voice.     I 
told  him  to  relax  every  muscle  in  his  body,  so  far 
as  he  was  able,  and  just  to  follow  me  with  his  mind 
and  accept  as  true  all  that  I  should  say.     I  assured 
him  that  by  our  joint  efforts  I  could  relieve  him  en- 
tirely of  the  desire  for  drink.     Presently  I  affirmed 
that  the  desire  was  leaving  him;  that  it  was,  in  a 
measure  under  my  control  by  his  consent.    He  was 
in  my  hands,  and  what  I  willed  for  the  time  being 
should  come  to  pass.     I  assured  him  that  I  willed 
that  that  desire  should  leave  him  now  and  never  re- 
turn.    I  further  suggested,  as  he  had  consented  to 
let  my  will  be  supreme,  that  he  would  not  and  could 
not  have  the  desire  any  more  until  I  should  consent 
to  it.    I  said  more  of  the  same  character  and  made 
it  very  impressive,  so  much  so  that  he  told  me  after- 
wards  that   I    was    pressing  on  his  head  with  my 
hands  so  hard  that  he  felt  as  if  he  were  helpless  in 


452  SUGGESTION 

the  hands  of  a  giant.  I  told  him  that  I  would  call 
to  see  him  the  next  day  at  the  same  hour,  positively 
assuring  him  that  he  would  have  no  desire  for  liquor 
in  the  meantime.  When  I  returned  he  was  perfectly 
sober  and  informed  me  that  he  had  passed  by  and 
looked  at  the  bottle  a  number  of  times,  but  he  had 
not  felt  the  least  desire  to  partake  of  its  contents. 
He  was  then  eighty-one  years  old,  he  is  now  eighty- 
four  and  his  general  health  is  improved  greatly  and 
he  declares  that  he  has  had  no  desire  whatever  for 
whiskey  since  that  hour.  He  is  a  man  of  wealth,  in- 
telligence, and  influence.  He  drank  for  fifty  years." 
This  is  only  one  of  many  cases  that  could  be  cited. 

I  have  had  some  very  interesting  cases  and  have 
effected  cures.  Any  one  addicted  to  the  habit  of 
strong  drink  can  be  cured  if  he  wants  to  be. 

A  drinker,  when  under  the  influence  of  liquor,  if 
he  consents  to  suggestive  treatment  and  hypnotism, 
may  go  into  a  cateleptic  condition  at  once.  I  had 
such  a  case  and  a  wonderful  effect  was  produced  in 
one  treatment. 

"A  man  for  many  years  had  drunk  daily  almost 
incredible  quantities  of  strong  liquors.  Rarely  was 
he  quite  sober.  The  usual  baneful  results  followed. 
Loss  of  energy,  diminished  power  of  attention,  emo- 
tional irritability,  moral  deterioration ;  such  are  some 
of  the  psychic  disturbances  caused  by  the  alcoholic 
poisoning  of  the  highest  cerebral  centres;  and  the 
patient  experienced  them  all  in  an  intensified  form. 
His  treatment  lasted  for  several  weeks.     From  the 


THE  LIQUOR  HABIT  453 

beginning  of  it  he  became  a  total  abstainer,  and  so 
has  remained  for  about  eight  months. 

"It  is  riot  poHcy  to  attempt  to  break  a  person  of 
drinking  Hquor  who  has  not  the  desire  to  abstain 
from  the  use  of  it,  and  in  extreme  cases  hypnotic 
suggestion  may  fail  completely.  After  a  deep  sleep 
has  been  induced  suggestions  should  be  made  as 
follows :  'The  next  time  you  drink  liquor  it  will 
make  you  very  sick,  and  you  will  form  a  strong  dis- 
like for  it.'  Repeat  this  suggestion  four  or  five 
times,  and  also  repeat  the  experiment  until  the  cure 
is  effected.  A  very  good  plan  is  to  offer  a  hypno- 
tized person  a  glass  of  water,  telling  him  that  is  a 
glass  of  liquor,  and  that  it  will  make  him  very  sick. 
In  cases  where  you  succeed  in  causing  the  subject 
to  imagine  that  he  is  sick  from  drinking  pure  water 
(which  he  imagines  is  liquor),  it  is  positive  evidence 
that  he  is  susceptible  to  that  degree  necessary  to  cure 
him  of  the  liquor  habit." 

The  following  testimony  as  to  the  efficiency  of 
hypnotism  and  suggestion  in  the  cure  of  alcoholism 
is  very  strong: 

"That  alcoholism  in  Russia  is  widely  treated  with 
success  by  hypnotism  is  asserted  by  the  writer  of  a 
note  in  Cosmos.  The  method  has  been  adopted  in 
Government  institutions,  but  it  is  believed  that  the 
peculiar  adaptability  of  the  Russians  to  this  mode  of 
treatment  is  largely  responsible  for  its  good  effects. 
Says  the  writer: 

"  'The  cure  of  alcoholism  by  means  of  hypnotism 


454  SUGGESTION 

is  the  order  of  the  day.  Recently,  Dr.  Legrain  com- 
municated to  the  Society  of  Hypnology  and  Psychol- 
ogy some  very  interesting  information  regarding  the 
treatment  of  alcoholics  by  hypnotism  in  Russia.  In 
the  cities  of  St.  Petersburg,  Moscow,  Jarosla,  Kieff, 
Saratoff,  and  Astrakhan,  there  have  been  established 
for  several  years,  under  Government  auspices,  dis- 
pensaries to  which  the  sufferers  resort  by  hundreds, 
and  where  hypnotism  is  the  principal,  if  not  the  sole, 
therapeutic  agent.  It  is  required  of  the  alcoholics 
that  they  desire  sincerely  to  be  cured,  and  that  they 
abstain  from  all  spirituous  liquors  during  the  period 
of  treatment.  This  is  perhaps  to  ask  them  to  make  a 
collossal  effort,  since  their  will-power  has  generally 
been  destroyed;  but  they  are  obliged  to  accept  a 
continual  surveillance,  and  it  is  attempted  to  ameli- 
orate their  conditions  of  life  as  much  as  possible. 
These  means  succeed  very  well  in  Russia;  but,  as 
has  often  been  remarked,  the  French  drinker  is 
much  less  tractable,  and  consequently  the  cure  of 
alcoholics  in  France  is  much  more  difficult  and  much 
less  durable  than  in  Russia;  with  us,  in  fact,  the 
alcoholic  poisons  himself  with  essences  as  various 
as  they  are  injurious,  and  it  is  only  exceptionally 
that  he  submits  to  treatment  for  a  time  long  enough 
to  effect  a  lasting  cure.  It  is  none  the  less  true  that 
at  the  present  time  hypnotism  is  almost  the  sole 
means  of  cure  for  alcoholic  mania.'  " 

The  Cigarette  Habit. 

The  present  generation  is  one  with  more  cigar- 


CIGARETTE  HABIT  455 

ette  smokers  than  any  in  the  history  of  the  world. 
The  authenticity  of  the  above  statement  can  be  veri- 
fied by  the  statistics  showing  the  number  of  cigar- 
ettes which  have  been  manufactured  and  sold  to  con- 
sumers during  the  past  year.  The  deadly  results  of 
this  pernioious  habit  can  best  be  determined  by  a 
visit  to  the  insane  asylums  throughout  the  land, 
where  the  physicians  admit  that  from  one-fourth  to 
three-fourths  of  the  inmates  are  there  from  excessive 
cigarette  smoking.  Perhaps  the  most  effective  way 
to  arouse  a  desire  in  the  mind  of  a  young  man  to 
abstain  from  cigarette  smoking  is  to  make  him  famil- 
iar with  the  above  facts.  Then  employ  the  following 
method :  Induce  a  light  sleep,  request  the  subject  to 
open  his  eyes,  furnish  him  with  a  lighted  cigarette, 
and  at  he  same  time  suggest :  "Now  when  you  com- 
mence to  smoke  you  will  become  very  sick  at  the 
stomach  and  you  will  have  to  vomit.  Each  time  you 
smoke  you  will  undergo  the  same  ordeal."  Repeat 
the  suggestion  as  often  as  is  necessary. 

After  you  have  induced  sleep  with  your  subject, 
make  such  suggestions  as:  "You  will  find  that  the 
appetite  for  tobacco  will  leave  you,  and  you  will  not 
crave  it  as  you  have  heretofore.  The  next  time  yo  i 
smoke  or  chew,  it  will  make  you  very  sick."  It  may 
be  necessary  to  repeat  the  suggestions  many  times. 

Other  habits  such  as  morphine,  cocaine,  opium, 
etc.,  etc.,  may  be  successfully  treated  by  employing 
similar  methods. 


456  SUGGESTION 

Hay  Fever. 

This  condition  has  been  cured  by  suggestion,  and 
if  the  operator  or  physician  is  wise  he  will  study  the 
case  carefully  and  inquire  into  the  existing  condi- 
tions which  will  greatly  help  him  in  diagnosing  and 
treating  the  case  suggestively. 

I  desire  to  present  one  case  that  had  in  it  a  typical 
condition,  but  a  handicap  as  to  the  operator's  work : 
"Mrs.  D.  came  with  the  usual  symptoms  of  hay  fever, 
such  as  coryza,  cold,  and  also  nightly  asthmatic  par- 
oxysms. Every  July  for  five  years  they  came  on  her. 
She  had  visited  specialists  and  had  suffered  from 
some  of  the  treatments,  such  as  cauterizing  the  nasal 
passages.  The  catarrhal  symptoms  continued  una- 
bating  during  the  attacks,  with  continuous  sneezing 
for  an  hour  every  afternoon. 

"When  she  came  for  treatment  she  was  placed  in  a 
chair  in  which  she  reclined  comfortably.  Her  hus- 
band was  also  present.  In  a  previous  conversation 
with  him  he  said  that  the  only  method  he  would  op- 
pose would  be  hypnotism,  and  that  he  said  in  the 
presence  of  his  wife.  This  was  the  method  to  be 
used.  There  was  a  cabinet  battery  in  the  room  and 
one  electrode  was  placed  in  touch  with  her  throat 
and  the  other  fastened  to  the  operator's  wrist. 

"The  gentle  current  was  turned  on  and  a  monoto- 
nous hum  proved  to  be  helpful  in  this  case.  When 
the  patient  was  touched,  the  circuit  was  complete 
and  when  the  fingers  were  drawn  down  over  the 
eyes  there  was  only  a  gentle  sensation.    This  seemed 


HAY  FEVER  457 

to  be  an  electrical  treatment,  so  far  as  the  husband 
was  concerned,  and  the  wife  went  to  sleep  under  the 
quieting  influence. 

"The  following  suggestions  were  then  made : 

"  'You  will  feel  very  much  better  after  this  treat- 
ment. Now  you  will  relax  all  the  muscles  of  the 
body  and  be  very  passive.  You  will  hear  all  I  say. 
Your  mipd  will  accept  all  the  suggestions  I  give 
you.  The  circulation  is  being  equalized,  your  heart 
is  doing  its  work  normally,  and  the  lungs  are  in 
good  condition  and  all  the  mucous  linings  will  feel 
easy  and  comfortable  and  the  inflammation  is  leaving 
them  and  you  will  feel  a  wonderful  relief.  Every 
organ  in  your  body  is  doing  its  work  well,  your 
lungs  are  strong,  your  breathing  will  be  easier  and 
the  asthma  will  leave  you.  The  spells  of  sneezing 
will  diminish  and  will  entirely  cease  in  a  short  time. 
The  hay  fever  symptoms  will  decrease  and  the 
catarrhal  conditions  will  soon  be  better.  You  are 
better,  and  you  will  soon  be  well.'  With  the  words 
went  also  a  determination  that  they  would  be  accept- 
ed and  carried  out  by  the  subconscious  mind.  The 
telepathic  power  was  in  operation,  and  that  carried 
impressions  to  her  subconscious  mind  that  became 
also  helpful.  If  the  person  is  in  an  hypnotized  sleep 
he  is  en  rapport  with  the  operator,  that  is  true  also 
of  the  suggestible  condition,  but  less  so  as  the  con- 
scious mind  may  assert  itself  and  make  void  the 
suggestions,  whereas  in  the  hypnotic  condition  this 
is  not  liable." 


458  SUGGESTION 

"Further  suggestions  like  the  following  were 
given : 

"  'You  will  not  awaken  to-night,  as  you  have  on 
other  nights,  and  have  a  hard  time  to  breathe.  If 
you  do  awaken  at  all,  your  breathing  will  be  easy, 
your  circulation  will  be  good,  the  inflammation  in  the 
eyes,  throat,  and  nasal  passages  will  subside.  These 
conditions  will  be  overcome,  and  the  symptoms  of 
hay  fever  will  leave  you  and  you  will  soon  be  in  a 
perfectly  normal  condition.'  These  suggestions 
were  repeated  and  varied.  Positive  suggestions 
were  used  in  order  to  establish  the  thought  of  re- 
covery and  health.  Treatment  was  given  three  times 
a  week  until  twelve  treatments  were  given.  The 
sixth  or  seventh  treatment  finished  the  cure  practi- 
cally, but  a  few  more  treatments  were  given  to  pre- 
vent the  future  attacks  and  to  establish  a  permanent 
habit  of  health,  so  that  th^re  would  be  no  recurrence 
of  the  condition  of  hay  fever  in  any  form.  The 
patient  for  four  years  has  not  had  any  recurrence  of 
the  disease,  or  any  of  the  symptoms." 

Here  is  an  incident  that  illustrates  the  power  of 
mind  under  the  influence  of  expectation  and  faith. 
It  was  also  a  cure  for  hay  fever : 

"The  American  Practitioner  and  News  reports 
Dr.  Guestt  as  telling,  in  a  recent  discussion  before 
the  Louisville  (Ky.)  Medical  and  Surgical  Society, 
this  instance  to  illustrate  how  large  a  part  psychol- 
ogy may  play  in  disease : 

"  T  have  a  brother-in-law  who  suffers  every  sum- 


EXCRESCENCES  459 

mer  with  hay  fever.  He  has  a  relative  who  beHeves 
in  Christian  Science.  She  told  him  that  she  felt  pos- 
itive that  she  could  direct  him  to  a  woman,  a  Chris- 
tian Scientist,  who  would  cure  him.  He  at  first  ob- 
jected, because  he  hated  to  go  to  a  woman  physician. 
He  arranged,  however,  to  communicate  with  her 
daily  by  letter.  When  his  hay  fever  broke  out  he 
suffered  with  it  all  that  day  and  night,  and  the  next 
morning  wrote  her  a  note  telling  her  to  put  him  on 
treatment  immediately.  When  he  returned  that 
night  he  was  improved  and  slept  better.  He  wrote 
a  second  note  the  next  morning  and  was  much  en- 
couraged. The  third  day  he  repeated  his  letter  writ- 
ing and  stated  that  the  symptoms  had  almost  ceased. 
And  he  was  guying  me  about  being  cured  by  Chris- 
tian Science  when  regular  physicians  could  do  noth- 
ing for  him.  The  night  of  the  third  day,  when  he 
came  home  to  supper,  he  found  a  note  from  the 
Christian  Scientist,  stating  that  she  had  been  in  the 
country  and  would  put  him  under  treatment  the  next 
day.  Realizing  that  all  his  treatment  had  been  only 
in  his  imagination,  the  symptoms  reappeared  with 
the  same  intensity  as  before.'  " 

It  is  a  pity  that  his  dominant  expectation  was  re- 
moved, as  he  might  have  been  cured  for  the  time  at 
least,  if  not  permanently. 

Excrescences. 

The  following  incident  illustrates  the  effectiveness 
of  suggestion  for  these  abnormal  and  often  painful 
excrescences : 


46o  SUGGESTION 

"The  writer  was  engaged  in  overseeing  the  work 
of  others,  which  kept  him  on  his  feet  most  of  the 
working  time  from  Monday  morning  to  Friday 
night.  Saturday  and  Sunday  were  rest  days.  He 
had  a  corn  on  each  foot  between  the  fourth  and  fifth 
toes.  During  the  latter  part  of  a  certain  week  the 
corn  on  the  right  foot  began  to  pain  him,  and  on 
Friday  afternoon  was  very  painful.  Having  heard 
of  a  much-lauded  *One-night  Corn  Cure,'  he  deter- 
mined to  try  it,  as  there  would  be  three  nights'  rest 
before  the  next  week's  work  began.  After  getting 
the  cure,  the  instructions  on  the  box  informed  him 
that  while  the  corn  would  be  removed  quickly,  yet 
the  foot  would  be  sore  for  two  or  three  days.  This 
precluded  its  use.  After  getting  to  bed  that  night 
he  thought :  Why  not  try  suggestion  on  the  corns  ? 
He  did  so,  instructing  the  subconscious  mind  to  with- 
draw the  supply  of  blood  which  nourished  the  corn:, 
and  let  them  die.  The  same  treatment  was  given 
on  Saturday  and  Sunday  nights  following ;  then  the 
pain,  having  been  eased,  it  was  forgotten.  Nothing 
more  was  thought  of  the  corns  for  two  weeks,  when, 
on  examination,  two  dead  corns  were  picked  out. 
The  cure  was  perfect.  There  has  been  no  return  of 
trouble  from  corns  since." 

I  cured  an  ugly  wart  in  the  same  way.  The  only 
sign  of  its  past  existence  is  a  small  callous  mark. 

If  the  subconscious  mind  can  increase  the  flow  of 
blood  to  any  particular  part  of  the  body,  or  with- 
draw the  same,  why  cannot  this  mind  under  the  in- 


LOCOMOTOR  ATAXIA  461 

fluence  of  suggestion,  whether  hetero-  or  auto-,  pro- 
duce wonderful  effects  in  this  way?  Why  cannot 
parts  of  the  brain  be  increased  in  power,  with  corres- 
ponding mental  effectiveness,  or  parts  of  the  brain 
decreased  in  activity,  thus  changing  the  abnormal 
conditions.  We  are  only  on  the  outer  borders  of  the 
great  psychological  power  in  its  possibility  of  chang- 
ing, reforming,  and  re-creating  the  human  body. 

A  few  principles  have  been  discovered  and  util- 
ized, but  the  great  discoveries  are  yet  to  be  made, 
and  the  wide  application  of  human  discoveries  mean 
more,  than  we  now  dream,  for  humanity. 

Locomotor  Ataxia. 

This  condition  is  a  species  of  paralysis.  The  legs 
become  numb  and  cold  and  do  not  respond  to  nerve 
impulses.  The  circulation  is  interfered  with  and  a 
dragging  of  the  feet  or  inability  to  move  them  fol- 
lows. Here  is  a  method  of  treatment  followed  by 
one  healer,  and  we  give  it  for  what  it  is  worth : 

"The  healer  believed  that  it  would  be  necessary 
to  get  his  patient  into  a  deep  hypnotic  sleep  before 
undertaking  to  restore  her  circulation.  He  found 
out  his  mistake.  She  readily  went  into  the  first 
stage  of  light  sleep,  but  would  not  yield  to  the  deep- 
er stage.  He  determined  to  awake  her,  and  put  off 
suggestion  until  another  occasion.  After  awaking 
her,  he  addressed  her  in  this  strain,  having  no 
thought  of  giving  her  suggestion  then :  *Be  of  good 
courage.    I  have  been  successful  in  getting  you  into 


462  SUGGESTION 

a  light  hypnotic  sleep.  Next  time  you  will  go  more 
deeply  asleep,  when  I  can  control  your  subconscious 
mind  and  it  will  obey  my  instructions.  The  trouble 
with  you  is  that  a  muscle  has  been  contracted  over 
the  artery  that  supplies  the  legs  with  blood  and  has 
completely  obstructed  its  flow.  When  I  get  control 
of  your  subconscious  mind  it  will  relax  this  muscle 
and  permit  the  blood  to  flow."  These  suggestions 
became  effective.  The  muscle  was  immediately  re- 
laxed and  the  circulation  restored. 

We  have  known  of  some  tabetic  patients  being 
wonderfully  helped  by  manipulative  suggestion.  The 
muscle  contracture  has  been  relieved,  nerve  reflexes 
and  a  good  circulation  of  blood  established,  and  the 
relief  along  the  spine  permitted  normal  motions, 
and  the  patients  have  been  cured  or  greatly  helped. 
No  one  knows  how  effective  suggestion  may  be  for 
Dorsalis  Tabes.  The  limited  application  brings  hope 
to  the  afflicted,  and  more  and  more  manipulative 
and  oral  suggestion  will  be  used  for  this  most  ser- 
ious and  disabling  disease. 

The  Cocaine  Habit. 
A  young  man  having  the  morphine  habit  also  used 
cocaine  and  chloral.  Cocaine  seemed  to  produce  a 
condition  which  surpassed  the  desire  for  the  other 
two.  Let  me  say  that  you  cannot  believe  a  cocaine 
user.  That  drug  seems  to  increase  the  spirit  of  cun-, 
ning  and  deception  and  the  habit  of  lying.  The  first 
necessary  stepTs  to  put  the  patient  into  aluggestible 
condition.    Making  a  few  suggestions  and  watching 


THE  COCAINE  HABIT  463 

his  face  it  could  be  seen  if  there  was  immobility.  If 
so,  the  operator  can  probably  lodge  in  the  subcon- 
scious mind  some  suggestion  which  would  be  re- 
ceived and  carried  out.  However,  if  there  is  the  least 
suspicion  that  he  is  foiling  your  suggestions  by  his 
auto-suggestion,  then  put  him  into  a  deep  sleep. 
Make  your  suggestions  then  with  a  detrmination 
that  they  shall  grip  the  deeper  mind  and  produce  the 
desired  result. 

This  young  man  was  put  into  a  suggestible  condi- 
tion, after  which  the  follpwing  suggestions  were 
given : 

"Your  desire  for  cocaine  and  morphine  will  grow 
weaker,  hour  by  hour.  Those  drugs  will  become  re- 
pulsive to  you,  and  if  you  use  the  hyperdermic  nee- 
dle it  will  burn  you  like  fire  and  pain  you  severely, 
and  if  you  take  them  internally  they  will  make  you 
faint  and  deathly  sick.  Your  stomach  and  every 
organ  in  your  body  will  rebel,  and  your  physical 
system  will  not  stand  these  drugs.  The  poisons  in 
your  body  will  be  thrown  out  through  the  eliminat- 
ing organs,  and  day  by  day  your  appetite  will  crave 
good  food,  fruits,  and  water,  but  no  poisons.  You 
will  not  suffer  any  nervousness  or  feel  any  need  of 
these  drugs,  and  a  delightful  feeling  of  health  will 
come  into  your  body,  and  you  will  feel  a  new  grip 
on  life."  Some  one  has  said  that  it  might  be  well  to 
reduce  the  amount  of  the  drugs  and  increase  the 
time  interval,  so  that  no  shock  should  come  to  the 
system.    I  am  not  averse  to  this  in  some  conditions. 


464  SUGGESTION 

The  persons  addicted  to  this  habit  ought  to  be 
closely  guarded  for  one  or  two  weeks,  so  that  the 
suggestion  may  have  an  unhindered  chance  to  work. 

This  habit  was  cured  in  one  month. 

Eczema — Psoriasis. 

Here  is  a  formula  given  by  another  person : 
'This  condition  was  produced  by  several  disorders 
in  a  woman,  and  these  disorders  were  generally 
thought  to  be  the  result  of  a  nervous  shock.  The  con- 
dition of  inflammation  that  preceded  the  breaking 
out  had  existed  for  some  time.  The  worst  symptom 
seemed  to  be  indigestion.  The  method  used  in  the 
treatment  was  simply  suggestion  at  first,  as  the  pa- 
tient was  very  nervous.  The  fingers  were  placed 
over  the  eyes,  and,  holding  them  closed,  these  sug- 
gestions were  made:  *You  will  relax  now,  and  a 
great  calm  will  come  over  you,  and  you  will  be  per- 
fectly composed.  The  whole  nervous  system  will 
feel  the  quieting  influence  and  you  will  feel  better. 
The  mental  quietness  will  be  very  helpful,  and  you 
will  be  indifferent  to  your  feelings  and  surround- 
ings. You  will  now  give  mental  assent  to  the  sug- 
gestions made  and  tonight  you  will  sleep.  Your 
waking  movements  will  be  free  from  worry  and  fear 
and  your  thoughts  will  dwell  on  bright  and  cheerful 
subjects.  You  will  feel  hungry  after  this  treatment, 
and  your  appetite  for  food  will  be  quite  natural  and 
normal,  and,  when  you  eat,  your  food  will  be  rel- 
ished and  will  agree  with  you.  Eat  what  you  really 
like,  and  have  no  fear  that  you  will  not  digest  the 


ECZEMA  465 

food.  Your  stomach  will  perform  its  work  normally 
and  the  necessary  fluids  will  be  secreted  and  will  do 
the  work.  You  will  thoroughly  masticate  every 
mouthful  that  you  eat.  The  intestines  will  perform 
their  functions,  the  liver  will  secrete  the  bile,  and  the 
gall  bladder  will  pass  it  on  into  the  intestines.  All  the 
functions  of  the  liver  will  be  performed  normally. 
The  assimilation  of  the  food  will  be  normal.  The 
irritation  of  the  skin  will  subside,  the  pores  will  be 
open,  and  perspiration  will  occur,  and  all  the  elimi- 
nations of  the  body  will  be  carried  on  perfectly.  Im- 
provement will  commence  now  and  continue  until 
you  are  well.  You  will  relax  every  muscle  when 
you  lie  down  at  night  and  you  will  sleep  soundly. 
You  will  relish  your  food  and  be  ready  for  the  meals 
with  a  good  normal  appetite.  Your  sleep  will  be 
refreshing  and  your  physical  condition  will  improve 
very  rapidly.  Your  nervous  system  will  again  re- 
gain its  balance,  and  all  the  functions  of  the  body 
will  be  normally  performed;  waste  substances  will 
be  carried  away,  and  the  itching  and  inflamed  con- 
dition of  the  skin  will  disappear  and  leave  you  en- 
tirely. You  will  feel  better  every  day.  When  I 
give  you  the  next  treatment,  you  will  become  pas- 
sive and  relaxed  as  soon  as  you  come  to  the  office. 
You  will  close  your  eyes  and  they  will  remain  so 
until  you  desire  to  open  them  or  you  are  commanded 
to  do  so. 

"You  will  continue  cheerful  and  hopeful  whilst 
you  are  away  and  at  your  work.      You    will    not 
30 


466  SUGGESTION 

worry.    You  will  get  well.    You  are  all  right  now, 
and  will  feel  well  and  be  happy." 

The  next  treatment  found  her  in  a  receptive  con- 
dition and  the  inflammation  had  subsided,  indiges- 
tion gradually  left  her,  and  she  became  well. 

She  said :  "I  have  slept  soundly  and  relished  my 
food  and  the  breaking  out  is  disappearing  and  my 
digestion  is  good."  The  second  treatment  was  simi- 
lar to  the  first,  excepting  the  condition  of  relaxation 
and  the  tendency  to  sleep  was  greater.  The  treat- 
ment continued  for  one  month  and  was  given  three 
times  a  week." 

The  eczema  was  an  effect,  and  not  a  cause,  of  her 
physical  condition.  When  worry,  nervousness,  fear, 
and  the  mental  causes  were  changed  or  removed,  the 
ujdigestion  was  cured  and  the  eczema  was  healed. 
A  psychic  principle  was  used  to  change  the  mental 
and  nervous  conditions,  and  it  secured  the  relief  of 
the  physical  ailments  which  caused  her  to  seek  help. 
Previous  to  treatment  she  expected  that  every 
mouthful  of  food  would  cause  distress.  She  worried 
about  her  condition,  and  by  unhealthy  mental  action 
depressed  the  power  of  assimilation  and  elimination ; 
she  also  feared  continually  the  coming  of  some 
greater  sickness  and  thus  depressed  the  nerve 
activity.  When  these  mental  conditions  were 
changed,  corresponding  changes  occurred  in  the 
physical  condition. 

This  is  also  true  of  psoraisis,  a  condition  that  is 
considered  incurable  by  many  physicians.     Sugges- 


HICCOUGHS  467 

tion  and  physical  manipulation  and  adjustment  are 
the  finest  combination  in  the  world  for  this  and 
similar  conditions.    This  condition  can  be  cured. 

Local  washes  might  have  given  a  temporary  relief 
and  some  pepsin  or  other  preparation  may  have 
changed  for  a  little  while  the  dyspepsia,  but  neither 
of  these  things  nor  any  similar  treatment  could  have 
brought  a  permanent  cure.  That  could  only  be  se- 
cured by  removing  the  cause,  and  not  by  treating  the 
eflfect. 

I  have  had  rather  remarkable  success  with 
psoriasis.  The  method  adopted  to  effect  a  cure  has 
been  physical  and  mental.  The  disease  is  due  to 
lack  of  various  drainage  and  mental  disturbances. 
Correcting  both  conditions  a  cure  naturally  follows. 

Hiccoughs. 

The  Family  Doctor,  a  London  publication,  reports 
the  following  case.  "A  young  girl  suffered  for  four 
days  without  cessation  from  singultus,  the  attack 
being  due,  apparently,  to  some  gastric  disorder. 
When  she  put  out  her  tongue  for  a  few  seconds  it 
was  found  that  the  hiccough  ceased.  She  was  then 
ordered  to  stick  out  this  member  at  regular  intervals 
for  a  few  minutes  at  the  termination  of  which  only  a 
few  slight  spasms  followed.  She  was  then  ordered 
to  repeat  it,  when  the  singultus  ceased  altogether, 
and  did  not  again  return.  It,  therefore,  would  seem 
to  be  proper  to  try  continuous  or  rythmic  traction  of 
the  tongue  in  these  cases. 


468  SUGGESTION 

There  is  an  element  of  suggestion  in  this  cure,  and 
also  a  physical  effect  on  the  phrenic  nerve.  Tactile 
suggestion  can  also  be  used  in  curing  this  trouble 
at  times.  A  suggestion  that  a  person  will  not  hic- 
cough, if  the  suggestion  be  given  abruptly  or  as  a 
surprise  to  one,  will  often  stop  it. 

If  you  stand  in  front  of  a  patient  who  is  troubled 
with  the  hiccough,  look  at  him  steadily,  and  ask  him 
to  raise  his  right  hand  as  high  as  he  can  until  he 
strains  his  muscles  slightly,  asking  him  to  keep  that 
position  for  a  minute,  and  then  make  three  passes 
across  his  throat  in  a  downward  direction,  you  will 
find  that  the  hiccoughs  will  cease.  This  is  said 
to  be  a  sure  cure  for  the  worst  case  that  can  be 
found. 

Conclusion. 

There  are  many  diseases  which  I  might  have  con- 
sidered and  the  treatment  might  be  minutely  given. 
But  the  illustrations  or  formulas  given  in  this  work 
are  ample  to  indicate  the  methods  that  have  been 
effectively  used  by  myself  and  others,  and  inasmuch 
as  this  treatise  is  for  the  student  who  desires  to  do 
work  along  these  special  lines  we  do  not  deem  It 
wise  to  elaborate  everything  minutely,  but  leave 
something  to  the  originality  of  the  student.  The 
cases  presented  are  more  or  less  representative  and 
so  are  the  methods  of  cure.  I  have  had  but  one 
purpose  in  writing  this  work  and  that  is,  to 
assist   all   who   want   to   know   more   about   how 


CONCLUSION  469 

to  treat  mental  troubles  and  diseases  as  well  as  the 
habits  and  abnormal  psychical  and  physical  condi- 
tions in  men's  lives.  I  have  a  great  desire  to  help 
my  fellowmen  and  to  put  in  a  simple  and  plain  form 
information  which  will  bless  and  uplift  them  if  they 
will  utilize  it. 

Finis. 


470  LIST  OF  HELPFUL  BOOKS 


UST  OF  HELPFUL  BOOKS 


Baldwin,  M Handbook  of  Psychology. 

Mental  Development  in  the  Child  and 

Race. 

Bastian,  H.  C Brain  as  an  Organ  of  Mind. 

Beale,  L Matter  and  Life. 

Beneker,  F.  E Elements  of  Psychology, 

/Bernheim,  H..., Suggestion  in  Therapeutics. 

Binet,  A Animal  Magnetism. 

Alterations  of  Personality. 
Bjornstrom,  F Hypnotism :  Its  History  and  Present 

Development. 

Braid,  James Hypnotism. 

Power  of  Mind  over  Body. 
Neurypnology. 
Bramwell,  J.  M Hypnotism :    Its  History,  Theory  and 

Practice. 
Brown- Sequard,  C.  E.On  the  Duality  of  Mind. 

Butler,  S Unconscious  Memory. 

Calderwood,  H Relations  of  Mind  to  Brain. 

Carpenter,  W.  B Mental  Physiology. 

Coutts  Brain  and  Intellect. 

Creighton,  J.  E Unconscious  Memory. 

Denton,  William  Live  Questions  in  Psychology. 

Dunn,  R Psychological  Physiology. 

Dubois,  Paul The  Psychic  Treatment  of  Nervous 

Disorders. 
Dumas,  Alexander  . .  Memoirs  of  a  Physician. 

Evans,  W.  F Mental  Medicine. 

Elam,  C Psychological  Problems. 

Ferrier,  D The  Functions  of  the  Brain. 

Forster,  T.  G Biblical  Psychology. 

Glen,  J. Mind  and  Body. 

Gliddon Faith  Cures. 

Gorman,  T.  M Christian  Psychology. 

Green,  E Memory. 


LIST  OF  HELPFUL  BOOKS  471 


Halleck,  J.  R Psychology  and  Psychic  Culture. 

Halphide,  A.  C Mind  and  Body. 

Psychic  and  Psychism. 
Hamilton,  William  ..Lectures  on  Metaphysics. 

Hamilton,   Mary    Incubation,  or    the    Cure  of    Disease 

in    Pagan    Temples    and    Christian 
Churches. 
Hartmann,  E.  von . . .  Philosophy  of  the  Unconscious. 

Hall,  G.  Stanley Adolescence ;   Its   Psychology. 

Holland,  S.  H Medical  Notes  and  Reflections. 

Mental  Physiology. 

Hollander,  B Mental  Functions  of  the  Brain. 

Hudson,  T,  J The  Law  of  Psychic  Phenomena. 

The  Law  of  Mental  Medicine. 
Ireland,  W.  H Through  the  Ivory  Gate. 

The  Blot  on  the  Brain. 
James,  William  Principles  of  Psychology. 

Textbook  of  Psychology. 

Varieties  of  Religious  Experiences. 

Jastrow,  Joseph The  Subconscious. 

Judd,  C.  H Psychology. 

Kant,  Emmanuel Anthropology. 

Kraepelin,  E Lectures  on  Clinical  Psychiatry. 

Laycock,  T The  Mind  and  Brain. 

Lotze,  H Microcosmos. 

Human  Metaphysics. 

Maher,  N Psychology. 

Mason,  R.  Osgood. .  .Telepathy  and  the  Subliminal  Self. 

Maudsley,  H The  Physiology  of  Mind. 

Maxwell,  Joseph Metaphysical  Phenomena, 

Mayo,  T.  J On  Therapeutic  Forces. 

Medico-Legal     Jour- 
nal     Vols.  I,  2,  3,  etc. 

Mental  Science,  Jour- 
nal of  Vols.  I,  2,  etc, 

Mercier,  C The  Nervous  System  and  the  Mind. 

Moll,  A Hypnotism. 

Moore,  George The  Power  of  the  Soul. 

Munsterberg,  H Psycho-Therapeutics. 

Murray,  J.  C Psychology. 

Myers,  F.  W.  H Human  Personality  and  Its  Survival 

After  Death. 
Noel,  R.  R Mental  Life. 


472  LIST  OF  HELPFUL  BOOKS 

Podmore,  F Studies  in  Psychical  Research. 

Modern  Spiritualism. 

Mental  Development  of  the  Child. 

Preyer,  W The  Nature  of  Mind. 

Prince,  M The  Dissociation  of  a  Personality. 

Psychical      Research 

Society  Journal  ...Vol.  i,  etc. 
Psychological  Review.Vols.  i,  2,  etc. 

Quackenbos,  J.  D Hypnotism  in  Mental  and  Moral  Cul- 
ture. 

Hypnotic  Therapeutics. 
Ribot,  T English  Psychology. 

Psychology  of  Attention. 

Richardson,  B.  W The  Study  of  Disease. 

Romanes,  G Mental  Evolution  in  Man. 

Schofield,  A.  T Functional  Nerve  Disease. 

Unconscious  Mind. 

Force  of  Mind. 

Nerves  in  Order. 

Nerves  in  Disorder. 

Sidis,  B Psychology  of  Suggestion. 

Simpson,  H How  the  Body  Affects  the  Mind. 

Sully,  Jas Handbook  of  Psychology. 

Studies  of  Childhood. 

Illusions. 

Thomas,  J.  W Natural  and  Spiritual  Law. 

Tuke,  Hack The  Influence  of  the  Mind  upon  the 

Body. 
Tuckey,  C.  Lloyd Treatment  by   Hypnotism  and    Sug- 
gestion. 

Waldstein,  L The  Subconscious  Self. 

Wetterstrand,  O.  G.. Hypnotism    and    Its    Application    to 
Practical  Medicine. 

Whittaker,  T Psychological  Essays. 

Winbigler,  C.  F Christian  Science  and  Kindred  Sub- 
jects; Their  Facts  and  Fallacies. 
Worcester,   McComb 

&  Coriat Religion  and  Medicine. 

Wundt,  William Physiological  Psychology. 

Ziehen,  Theodore  . . .  Physiological  Psychology. 


DCTi  iDM     MARIAN  KOSHLAND  BIOSCIENCE  AND 
RETURN            NATURAL  RESOURCES  LIBRARY 
TO^^     2101  Valley  Life  Sciences  BIdg.  •  642-2531 

LOAN  PERIOD 

ONE  MONTH  LOAN 

ALL  BOOKS  MAY  BE  RECALL  AFER  7  DAYS 

DUE  AS  STAMPED  BELOW 

DUE 

APR  2  9  13S3 

SUBJECT  TO  RECAU 
!i4i4cniATPIY 

RECn  RIO!^ 

flDD  '^  1    'qq     ''\  ^^  ^ 

■V 

UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA,  BERKELEY 
FORM  NO.  DDO,  60m,  1/99                                 BERKELEY,  CA  94720-6000 

U.  C.  BERKELEY  LIBRARIES 


CDSltAEESt 


M'^-^o 


UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA  LIBRARY 


